Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
ENT
STOP
RUN
Switch disconnectors ON
I
11
OFF
0
Modular contactors 15
3
1
(7)
13
5
3
5.10 1
CN2 14
(8)
A1 6
4
2
24V A2
0Hz
50/6
ctor
conta
lar
Modu
2
R1
0, 0,
0,
16
EA 0,
0,0 t(sec
0,0
T
I
TR SE
RE
1,
1 2 O reesn
ma
2, tx
0,
0,2 In(A In0,x
oreest
au tx1 reesn
ma
ST Inx tx
TE In1x
OIN
T
C
In0,x
FU
oreest
au tx1
Inx
reesn
ma
In1x In1x
nT
S
IN L
A
C
IE tx
In0,x
oreets
au tx1
Inx
reesn
ma In1x Inx
tx
In0,x
oreest
au tx1
Inx
In1x
In0,x
Time relays 17
Protection relays 18
• Insulated • ADXC soft starters • Spring-clamp • Auto-monitor contact • Control stations and
polycarbonate IP65 ADXC soft starters have a terminal contact and elements base-mount contact
enclosures 45mm wide casing. They can LED elements These particular NC and LED elements
A new frame size allows be installed either on 35mm LOVATO Electric add contacts, used with LOVATO Electric
mounting direct-on-line DIN rail or fixed on a new spring-clamp non-illuminated latch release the new
starters and changeover mounting plate, by scews, are terminal types to the emergency stop insulated
contactor assemblies up to suitable for soft start and existing screw and pushbuttons, provide polycarbonate LPZ
38A. stop, by current limitation, of faston terminal for constant monitoring control stations
Available in two versions, with three-phase asynchronous contact and LED of exact mounting and featuring modern
a deep cover (M25) or a motors rated up to 45A. elements, all to be mounted operation of the NC contacts. design and aesthetics in line
shallow one (M24), for Alarms are available, across on the LPXAU120 adapter. Once the contacts are with
different configurations of the range, for overcurrent, This type of push-in installed on the mounting pushbuttons and selector
electromechanical or over temperature and over connecting technology is time adapter in a correct way and switches.
electronic devices which can voltage conditions. The 600V saving during wiring since it with a correct running of the The types include empty
be fixed to the standard version is also equipped with is a tool-less operation. equipment, they work as stations, with 1 to 6 holes,
supplied metal plate. two relay outputs for remote normal NC contacts. having excellent protection
signalling of alarms and Their trait is to break to degrees per IEC IP66, 67,
bypass relay closing. normally-open state and, in 69K and UL Type 4/4X. The
so doing, isolate the circuit extreme sturdiness allows
when malfunctions take use in every type of
place, for instance after the application. To ease wiring
contact detaches from the inside the new LPZ
adapter or if these two come pushbutton stations,
loose from the pushbutton dedicated contact and LED
itself, due to strong vibrations elements have been made to
or shock of some sort. directly fit onto the control
station base. This sort of
installation provides for all
wiring to be entirely within
the base. As a result, cover
opening and fixing are safe,
quick and simple operations.
• IP65 enclosed switch • Fuse holders 10x38 • Miniature and • Surge protection • Interface protection
disconnectors size residual circuit devices PMVF 51
LOVATO Electric have The range is composed of: breakers LOVATO Electric release two The PMVF 51 interface
completed the line of one-pole, one-pole with light LOVATO Electric include in its new types of surge protection protection gives all the
enclosed switch indicator, one-pole + neutral, product offering new modular devices for photovoltaic functions and controls
disconnectors by introducing two-pole, three-pole and devices dedicated to protect applications, compliant with required by the Italian
a new enclosure frame size in three-pole + neutral versions. people and installations. They the new EN 50539-11 CEI 0-21 standard (June 2012
between the two available Using the available are miniature circuit breakers standard. edition and subsequent
GAZ1 and GAZ3 types. The accessories, multi-pole types (MCBs) up to 125A and The new products, available revisions) regarding low-
new GAZ2 version is available can be assembled starting residual current circuit with removable plug-in voltage connection of micro-
empty or already complete from the single-pole device. breakers (both RCBOs and cartridges, are used in generation systems, such as
with either a three or four- In addition, there is an RCCBs). installations with voltage up solar or wind installations,
pole switch disconnector, insertable label to identify The MCBs have a high to 1200VDC. By using their between the energy
rated 63A, 80A or 100A in each single pole. UL breaking capacity of 10kA contact remote feature, generation system and the
IEC AC21A duty. The IP65 certifications, as Listed or and most are certified by UL indication of the device status national power grid. In
protection degree allows Recognized (cULus or cURus) for USA and Canada as can be remoted so as to addition to compulsory
them to be installed in severe for USA and Canada supplementary protectors per signal when replacement is voltage and frequency
ambient conditions. depending on type, have now UL 1077. needed. The new SPDs have controls, when current
This product range has been been obtained for all high Iscpv short-circuit transformers are connected
extended to include new 10x38mm fuse holders, both current rating up to 1000A. with the PMVF51 interface
changeover switches, in both AC and photovoltaic DC This current value is very protection, it can also put at
three and four-pole versions, versions. important because it disposal current and energy
rated 25A to 125A in IEC indicates the maximum measurements as well as
AC21A duty, housed in current which their thermal unbalanced power control
insulated enclosures. disconnector is capable of with the optional dedicated
isolating. expansion module installed.
• Micro PLC with • Automatic battery • Digital multimeters • DME energy meters • Data concentrator
built-in RS485 chargers BCG DMG 600 - DMG 610 Four new models complete DME CDPV1 for
LRD20R D024 P1 The new BGC battery charger (96x96mm) the existing range: photovoltaic
is a new version of series introduces switching DMG6… digital multimeters, DME D115 T1 (40A single monitoring
the Micro PLCs, technology even for the 12A for single or three-phase phase, 2-module type) DME CDPV1 is a device
featuring integrated 12VDC and 10A 24VDC systems, permit to view improves legibility of specifically for monitoring
RS485 serial ratings of lead-acid battery electrical quantities of the installation energy and power photovoltaic installations. By
interface, which applications. Two voltage installation on their backlight measurements by users, connecting at least two single
provides for simple levels can be selected, LCD screen and, by installing DME D130 (63A single or three-phase DMED energy
automated function suitable for different sorts of one of the EXP series phase) is expandable with meters to the data concentrator
integration, typical of the LRD battery and maximum communication modules EXP series modules (e.g. for in an installation, the user can
series with supervision and charging current can be (USB, RS232, RS485, load supervision); while obtain energy produced by the
control software. adjusted. The battery Ethernet), these DME D121 (63A single PV installation, energy drawn
Transducers, field and user chargers are enhanced by measurements can be phase) and DME D320 (CT by loads and ultimately, energy
commands can all be easily automatic protections and accessible to the supervision /5A three phase) have a built- exchanged (import and export)
elaborated by the Micro PLC indication LEDs for alarm software via appropriate in RS485 communication port with the energy provider.
to program its outputs. and battery operating protocol. making these two directly DME CDPV1 is already duly
conditions. The DMG 610 type is already integrable in supervision programmed to automatically
The relay output is equipped with built-in RS485 systems. calculate the percentages of
automatically activated interface. Data collection can Therefore, acquired data of produced (total and partial) and
whenever a malfunction of be done directly on the the energy meters can be consumed apparent power,
the system takes place. multimeter front as well, by centralised and then average power values and the
connecting the CX01 or CX02 developed with software operating status of the AC/DC
dongle to its optical port, elaboration. inverter (if it is equipped with
without having to open the any digital outputs).
electrical panel. It is customisable by the user
by setting up additional values
to control the installation
efficiency. In addition, with the
EXM series expansion modules,
DME CDPV1 can also be used
to supervise loads according to
• Supervision and energy management logic functions, defined by the
software user and based on the energy
The new software is based on the most modern availability. By adding an
technology that provides for the management of Ethernet communication port in
multiclient access through Web browser, thus allowing addition to the RS485 already
supervision and control of installations by any computer built in, remote control and
whatsoever. supervision can be done by the
Graphic pages, data logs and trend graphs can be software.
created and easily navigated. Moreover, alarms and .
functions can be operated to send emails with
notifications and reports.
supports all LOVATO Electric products
equipped with communication interface.
• Current transformer • Automatic power • Automatic transfer • Dual power supply • APP
DM0T factor controllers switch controllers module ATL DPS1 Configuration and
LOVATO Electric extend the DCRL (96x96mm) ATL 600 / 610 LOVATO Electric release a maintenance operations, often
series of its solid-core current The new DCRL3 and DCRL5 (144x144mm) dual power supply module for done in intolerable ambiance
transformers to include new power factor controllers have The automatic transfer switch the product offering of due to weather or noisy
DM0T 50 to 150A types. 3 and 5 steps respectively controllers ATL 600 and automatic transfer switching. conditions, are now easier to
The new transformers are built in to connect capacitor ATL 610 permit to supervise This new device is capable of do for all LOVATO Electric
tested according to a class 1 banks. When needed, two two power sources interacting checking the voltage values at products with communication
accuracy and reduce line extra steps can be added by with the user through the its inputs and identifying interface on front compatible
current to a 5A secondary installing the EXP10 06 backlight graphic LCD and which is the ideal to use and with CX02 dongle. Indeed,
value. They have screw expansion module to obtain a LED synoptic capable of connect to its output. tablets and smartphones with
terminals on the secondary maximum of 7 steps in total. viewing the installation status, ATL DPS1 is suitable to Android or iOS operating
and sealable terminal blocks The backlight icon LCD with complete text and supply motorised changeover system can connect to them
are standard supplied. viewing is made up of graphs. switches and circuit breakers. using the new application
symbols and texts which offer The ATL 610 version has the The module functionality is called directly
a clear, intuitive image of the 12 or 24VDC supply inputs in done by a microprocessor. downloadable from Google
installation status. The addition to the 110…240VAC The two single-phase voltage Play or iTunes. Therefore, it is
controllers are equipped with inputs of the ATL 600 type, inputs are independent, no longer necessary to
all the functions and alarms to and comes equipped with two isolated from each other and connect and switch on a PC
guarantee long capacitor expansion slots for EXP series each capable of supplying the using cables to change
bank life. modules to combine internal measuring circuit. configurations, set up
An optical communication additional digital inputs and Additional controls are made parameters or even clone
port is available on the outputs and communication on the output voltage to check device programming. With
controller front and provides function, such as USB, that the device operation is this APP, a file previously
for controller setup, RS232, RS485, Ethernet. In correctly carried out. In case saved can be uploaded;
programming and data this way, the ATS switchboard of malfunction, the red LED commands can be sent;
collection for diagnotics and can be remotely controlled will switch on to signal it; measured quantities can be
elaboration, in a safe way, by through supervision software. voltage flow is stopped and read from LOVATO Electric
using the CX01 or CX02 not available at output devices. The events can be
dongle, without having to terminals. The green LEDs on viewed and saved in a text file
disconnect and open the the module front permit to and later copied and sent by
electrical panel. constantly monitor the status email.
of the power sources,
availability of input lines and
presence of the module
output voltage.
• Communication devices CX
The CX communication dongles available as USB and
Wi-Fi versions allow connection between tablets,
smartphones, PCs and LOVATO Electric products with
front optical communication interface.
The story of a family,
the spirit of a company
UNITED KINGDOM
LOVATO ELECTRIC LTD
www.Lovato.co.uk
GERMANY
LOVATO ELECTRIC GmbH
www.LovatoElectric.de
SPAIN
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.L.U.
www.LovatoElectric.es
UNITED STATES
OF AMERICA
LOVATO ELECTRIC INC.
www.LovatoUsa.com
CANADA
LOVATO ELECTRIC CORP.
www.Lovato.ca
POLAND
LOVATO ELECTRIC SP. Z O.O.
www.LovatoElectric.pl
ITALY
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.p.A. CZECH REPUBLIC
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.R.O.
www.LovatoElectric.com www.LovatoElectric.cz
TURKEY .
LOVATO ELEKTRIK LTD
www.LovatoElectric.com.tr
UNITED ARAB
EMIRATES
LOVATO ELECTRIC ME FZE
www.LovatoElectric.ae
ROMANIA
LOVATO ELECTRIC SRL
www.LovatoElectric.ro
CHINA
LOVATO ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO LTD
www.LovatoElectric.cn
11
foreign
subsidiaries
90 importers
Present in over
100
countries
Successful products and
solutions
• Motor protection circuit • Motor protection circuit • Contactors • Motor protection circuit
breakers breakers • Switch disconnectors breakers
• Contactors • Contactors • Fuse holders • Contactors
• Motor protection relays • Motor protection relays • Miniature and residual • Motor protection relays
• Electromechanical starters • Electromechanical starters circuit breakers • Electromechanical starters
• Soft starters • Soft starters • Metering instruments and • Soft starters
• AC motor drives • AC motor drives CTs • AC motor drives
• Pushbuttons and selector • Pushbuttons and selector • Automatic power factor • Pushbuttons and selector
switches switches controllers switches
• Signal towers and beacons • Signal towers and beacons • Thyristor modules • Signal towers and beacons
• Limit, micro and foot • Rotary cam switches • Setup and remote control • Limit, micro and foot
switches software switches
• Switch disconnectors
• Rotary cam switches • Fuse holders • Switch disconnectors
• Switch disconnectors • Miniature and residual • Fuse holders
• Fuse holders circuit breakers • Miniature and residual
• Miniature and residual • Time relays circuit breakers
circuit breakers • Protection relays • Time relays
• Surge protection devices • Level control relays and • Protection relays
• Time relays electrodes • Micro PLCs
• Protection relays • Micro PLCs • Switching power supplies
• Micro PLCs
• Switching power supplies
• Metering instruments and
CTs
Photovoltaic Generating sets Electric power Energy
applications distribution management
• Switching power supplies • Fuse holders • Earth leakage relays • Automatic transfer switch
• Miniature and residual • Time relays controllers
• Metering instruments and
CTs circuit breakers • Protection relays • Engine and generator
• Surge protection devices controllers
• Interface protection relays • Micro PLCs
• Earth leakage relays • Software and applications
• Software and applications • Switching power supplies
• Protection relays • Automatic battery chargers
• Automatic battery chargers • Metering instruments and
• Automatic transfer switch CTs
controllers • Automatic transfer switch
• Metering instruments and controllers
CTs • Software and applications
• Engine and generator
controllers
• Software and applications
Quality and certifications
Qualified laboratory
according to standards
It covers an area of
2 EN ISO/IEC 17025
850m subdivided in
diverse specialised sectors Tests conducted according to
national and
international
standards prescriptions
Main tests:
- Making and breaking capacities
- Short-circuit with comparator system
- Temperature rise
- Thermal protection functionality
- Verification of dielectric properties
- Verification of terminals mechanical properties
- Verification of IK code degree of protection (impact withstand)
- Verification of IP code degree of protection (ingress protection
against water jets)
- Shock and vibration withstand
- Electrical and mechanical durability
- Low current-low voltage contact functionality
- Ambient simulation in climatic chamber
- Glow-wire ignitability of insulating parts
- Immunity to conducted and radiated emission fields
- Immunity to surges, fast transients / bursts and electrostatic
discharges.
International fairs
Dubai, Istanbul, Hanover, Moscow and Nuremberg are
just a few of the exhibition events
LOVATO Electric yearly take part in.
Training courses
- Basic level for entire production
- Advanced level with practical training
- Webinars.
QUALITY TOUCH!
Ø22mm series
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital measuring instruments
DMG 900
Description
[kg]
0.566
General characteristics
DMG 900... expandable digital power analyzers are available
with a flush-mount housing, 96x96mm/3.8x3.8in size. The
wide graphic touch screen display provides extremely simple
interacting between the instrument and the user.
The high performance of the power analyzers gives very
touch-screen LCD, accurate measurements and can control energy distribution
- Product information
harmonic analysis,
2014
systems, to detect and prevent energy problems which could
4 channels, auxiliary supply compromise quality and supply.
100-440VAC/110-250VDC. The main features include an extensive power supply voltage
Multilanguage: Italian, range, high measurement accuracy, expandability up to 4
English, French, Spanish plug in expansion modules.
and Portuguese There also is available the DMG 900T measurement
2015
10mm transducer which can be used with the DMG 900RD remote
DMG 900 L01 Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.566
touch-screen LCD, display. The DMG 900T, without display, is arranged for
LOW ACTUATOR PROFILE harmonic analysis, mounting inside the panel board, on 35mm DIN rail, and is an
- Overall dimensions
The external actuator bezel has a low profile DMG 900... 4 channels, auxiliary supply ideal solution for installations where the measurements of
and reduced front thickness. 100-440VAC/110-250VDC. various multimeters must be remotely viewed.
The DMG 900RD remote display connected to the DMG 900T
GENERAL DMG 900 D048
Multilanguage: English, Czech,
Polish, German and Russian
Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.580
transducer can display the measurements on the panel front
while power connections remain inside the panel.
CATALOGUE 7
HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION
CUSTOMISING CAPABILITY
To simplify stock management, the new series allows
quick replacement of the actuator cap or lens of spring
touch-screen LCD,
harmonic analysis, auxiliary
supply 12-24-48VDC
Main measurements and functions include:
– Voltage: phase, line and system values (neutral-earth too)
– Supply voltage value for the DC supply type only
– Current: phase values
- Wiring diagrams
IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL TYPE 4X return types since these are also sold as accessories. DMG 900T Measurement transducer, 1 0.570 – Neutral current calculated and true values
The actuators have been tested to ensure a degree of harmonic analysis, – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total values
protetection per IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL type 4X, 4 channels, auxiliary supply – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
100-440VAC/110-250VDC, – Cosϕ per phase and total
appropriate for use even in extreme ambient conditions. RS232/RS485 port – Frequency of measured voltage value
DMG 900T... – Voltage and current asymmetry
DMG 900T D048 Measurement transducer, 1 0.590
harmonic analysis, – Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
4 channels, auxiliary supply – Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the 63° order
12-24-48VDC, – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all measurements
- Technical characteristics.
QUICK AND EASY ACTUATOR REDUCED DIMENSIONS AND CONTACT ELEMENTS RS232/RS485 port – Maximum demand of power and current values
– Flow direction of harmonic power values
INSTALLATION INTERAXIS Remote display for DMG 900T... – Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
Click! 30 DMG 900RD Graphic 128x112 pixel touch 1 0.396 total values with programmable tariff functions
(1.18”) – Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
30 screen LCD, with 3m/9.8ft
(1.18”) long connecting cable – Pulse counter for general use: pulse counting for water,
gas, etc. consumption with expansion module only
– Energy quality analysis to EN 50160 with expansion
40 (1.57”)
module only.
Order Description
DMG 900RD code
40 (1.57”)
Operational characteristics
- Miniaturised size – Auxiliary supply voltage range:
DMG 900 and DMG 900 T EXPANSION MODULES.
- High electric conductivity - 5V 1mA 90-484VAC / 93.5-300VDC for DMG 900 and DMG 900T;
Inputs and outputs.
- Up to 9 contact elements can be 9-70VDC for DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048
- The mounting adapter and the installed, 3 rows of 3 elements EXP10 00 4 digital opto-isolated inputs
– Voltage measurement range:
actuators each have clearly visible - Screw or faston termination EXP10 01 4 static opto-isolated outputs 20-830VAC phase-to-phase
- Actuator fixing on the mounting reference indications making the - Contact operation: double breaking
Ø22.5 EXP10 02 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated 10-480VAC phase-neutral
surface, through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87in snap-on fitting between the two action, direct opening operation and
(0.88”) – Use in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
drilled hole, is obtained using its easy and intuitive. self cleaning. EXP10 03 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC
transformers
threaded ring, easily rotated by - The new series provides a minimum EXP10 04 2 analog opto-isolated inputs 0/4-20mA or – Rated input current: 5A or 1A by CT
hand or by socket spanner/wrench. 30x40mm (1.18x1.57in) pitch HIGH-LUMINOSITY LED PT100 or 0-10V or 0...±5V – Current measurement range: 0.01-10A or 0.002-1.2A
Click!
between two actuators on a INTEGRATED LAMP HOLDERS – Current measurement range with CT up to 10,000A
EXP10 05 2 analog opto-isolated outputs 0/4-20mA or
mounting surface. 0-10V or 0...±5V – Frequency measure range: 45-66Hz / 360-440Hz
- Minimum pitch between drilled holes – True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
for double and triple touch actuators Communication ports. – Accuracy:
is 30x55mm (1.18x1.97in). EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface • Voltage: ±0.2% (50-830VAC)
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface • Current: ±0.2% (0.1-1.1In)
43mm (1.69in) • Power: ±0.5% f.s.
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface • Power factor: ±0.5%
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with Web • Frequency: ±0.05%
- Electrical contacts and LED lamp - Miniaturised size server function • Active energy: Class 0.5S (IEC/EN 62053-22)
EXP 10...
holders are snapped onto the - Long electrical life: 100,000h • Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
mounting adapter. EXP10 14 Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface
- There is an anti-rotation fastener, - Over-voltage protection – Non-volatile memory for data and event (last 100) storage
duly sized to avoid actuator rotation - Withstand to vibrations EXP10 15 GPRS/GSM modem – Communication protocol Modbus®-RTU, ASCII and
on the mounting surface and to give - Protection against stray currents in EXP10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup TCP with communication expansion modules only
an orientation reference point for wiring battery for data logging – Programming and remote control by software with
users during panel installation and - Total depth, from the external - Flickering phenomenon reduction communication expansion modules only
EXP10 31 Data storage, with Energy Quality (EN 50160),
during contact fitting on the mounting surface to the end of - Steady and flashing light versions – Housing:
clock-calendar (RTC) with backup battery for
actuator. the first contact element is merely - Supply voltages:
• 18-30VAC/DC
data logging
• Flush mount 96x96mm/3.8x3.8in for DMG900... and
DMG 900RD
22
- This anti-rotation fastener collapses 43mm (1.69in).
inside the gasket to allow fitting also • 85-140VAC • 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) fixing for DMG 900T
when drilled holes are round without • 185-265VAC. – IEC protection degree: IP65 on front for DMG 900... and
reference index. DMG 900RD; IP20 at terminals for DMG 900... - DMG 900T.
- The sealing gasket for the actuator
mounting surface has a gripping EXP10 series expansion modules and accessories
action (suction effect) offering a See pages 22-28 and 29.
surface prefixing property.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: GOST and UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-Multimeter for all.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
7-2 page 22-29 page 22-28 page 22-32 page 22-35 page 22-42 22-15
Other literature
- Brochures and pamphlets
- Technical instructions.
LovatoElectric.com
- New products - Download:
- Videos • General catalogue
- Online news • Leaflets and technical
- Fairs instructions
- Events and training sessions • Software upgrade
- Contacts • Drivers and utilities
• 2D / 3D CAD drawings.
SM1A SM1B
• Thermal trip adjustment ranges 9-32A • Thermal trip adjustment ranges 0.1-32A
(5 choices) (15 choices)
• IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V:
– 50kA – 100kA (ranges 0.1-10A)
• Suitable for mounting in consumer – 25kA (ranges 9-32A)
switchboards, minimum 58mm/2.3in deep. • Suitable for mounting in consumer
switchboards, minimum 58mm/2.3in deep.
SM1C SM2A
• Same characteristics per SM1B breaker • Thermal trip adjustment ranges 28-50A
• Suitable for mounting in consumer (3 choices)
switchboards, minimum 45mm/1.8in deep. • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V:
– 50kA.
SM3A LMS25
• Thermal trip adjustment ranges 45-100A • Thermal trip adjustment ranges 0.1-25A
(4 choices) (13 choices)
• IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V:
– 50kA. – 100kA (ranges 0.1-6.3A)
– 6kA (ranges 6.3-10A)
– 4kA (ranges 10-25A)
• Suitable for mounting in consumer
switchboards, minimum 45mm/1.8in deep.
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1
SEC. - PAGE
Motor protection circuit breakers
Breakers SM1A, SM1B and SM1C ...................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2
Breakers SM2A and SM3A ................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 3
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1A, SM1B and SM1C ............................................................................................... 1 - 4
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A .......................................................................................................... 1 - 8
Starters LMS25 ................................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 10
Add-on blocks and accessories for LMS25 ......................................................................................................................... 1 - 11
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 1 - 12
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 1 - 15
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 1 - 16
P ROTECTION
ov
ato
T
11 SM1C 44 13-18 25 12.5 5 0.352 1Nm/9lbin
L Lo
va
to
TES max
11 SM1C 48 17-23 25 12.5 5 0.352
11 SM1C 52 20-25 25 12.5 5 0.352
NOTE: When more than one breaker are mounted, side by side, without
11 SM1C 56 24-32 25 12.5 5 0.352 leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the
breaker sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip
The SM1C version permits mounting in enclosures and modular adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated motor
consumer switchboards with minimum depth of at least 45mm between
the DIN rail and the opening. See page 1-12 for exact breaker dimensions. current.
No front-mount auxiliary contacts 11 SMX11... can be used.
The appropriate thermal trip range of the controller should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current since the horsepower ratings
given are for indication and reference purposes only.
Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on wiring the three poles in series; see wiring scheme on page 1-15.
11 SMX17 45
Combinations
1 Front-mount contacts Side-mount contacts Side-mount contacts
Undervoltage trip release Undervoltage trip release with auxiliary
Shunt trip release contacts
TEST
SMX14... SMX15
SMX16...
SMX11...
SMX90 31
SMX90 34
ST
TE
SMX90 33 TE
ST
SMX90 32
T
®
®
45mm/1.77” spacing (breakers
TES
T
without add-on blocks)
®
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
SMX90 45
SMX90 30 SMX90 31
SMX90 44
ST
TE
ST
TE
SMX90 43
®
ST
TE
SMX90 42 ®
TE
ST Three-phase connection
®
busbar, 54mm/2.13”
spacing (breakers with
ST
TE
ST
add-on blocks)
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
Combinations
Rigid breaker-contactor connection and protection cover 1
TE
ST TE
ST TE
ST
SM1...
SM1...
®
SM1...
SMX31 41 SMX32 41
SMX31 42
SMX90 03
BG...
BF09-BF25
BF26A-BF38A
SMX18 14
SMX18 15
SMX18 10 SMX18 12
SMX12...
®
TEST
®
SMX13 11
SMX17 40
SMX15... SMX11...
SMX16...
SMX14...
11 SMX24...
11 SMX25...
11 SMX26...
Combinations
SMX24...
1
SMX25...
SMX26...
ato
ov
LL
SMX23 11
SMX22...
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
max.
ø 8Ømm
max 8mm
Manual motor starter Order code Thermal Short circuit Qty Wt General characteristics
1 LMS25 up to 25A trip breaking per The LMS25 manual motor starter is particularly suitable for
adjustment capacity (IEC) pkg controlling small operating machines.
range at 400V Releases and auxiliary contacts make it also suitable for
Icu Ics more complex uses.
[A] [kA] [kA] n° [kg] The LMS25 manual motor starter is suitable for isolation
according to IEC/EN 60947 standards.
IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: 100kA (0.1-6.3A) / Wall and flush-mount enclosures allow to install the LMS25
6kA (6.3-10A) / 4kA (10-25A). starter in the most disparate environmental conditions (dust,
11 LMS25 016T 0.1 - 0.16 100 100 5 0.193 humidity, aggressive environmental agents, etc.).
11 LMS25 025T 0.16 - 0.25 100 100 5 0.193
Operational characteristics
11 LMS25 04T 0.25 - 0.4 100 100 5 0.193 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
11 LMS25 063T 0.4 - 0.63 100 100 5 0.193 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV
11 LMS25 1T 0.63 - 1 100 100 5 0.193 – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz
– Maximum rated current: 25A
11 LMS25 1V6T 1 - 1.6 100 100 5 0.193 – 13 adjustment ranges 0.1 to 25A
11 LMS25 2V5T 1.6 - 2.5 100 100 5 0.266 – IEC breaking capacity: see table on page 1-17
11 LMS25 4T 2.5 - 4 100 100 5 0.266 – Power dissipation: 2-15W
– Magnetic tripping: 12In max
11 LMS25 6V3T 4 - 6.3 100 100 5 0.266 – IEC thermal tripping class: 10
11 LMS 25...
11 LMS25 10T 6.3 - 10 6 3 5 0.266 – Phase failure / Single phase sensitive
11 LMS25 16T 10 - 16 4 2 5 0.266 – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
– Electrical life 25A (IEC AC3): 100,000 cycles
11 LMS25 20T 16 - 20 4 2 5 0.266 – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or screw
11 LMS25 25T 20 - 25 4 2 5 0.266 fixing
– Mounting position: Any
– IEC utilisation category: A
– IEC degree of protection: IP20.
NOTE: When more than one breaker are mounted, side by side, without
leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the
breaker sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip
adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% greater than the rated
motor current.
The appropriate thermal trip range of the controller should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current since the horsepower ratings
given are for indication and reference purposes only.
Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on wiring the three poles in series; see wiring scheme on page 1-15.
23 NEON...V
(1.39”)
(1.75”)
(1.75”)
(1.39”)
(3.58”)
(3.46”)
(3.58”)
(1.90”)
35.3
44.5
44.5
35.3
48.3
88
(2.18”)
91
88
91
55.5
44.5 44.5 23.5 SMX11 11
4.8 44.4 4.8 (0.92”)
(1.75”) (0.19”) 14.3 (1.75”) 44.4 SMX11 20
SMX14... (1.75”) SMX14... (0.19”) (1.75”)
(0.56”)
SMX15... SMX13 11 SMX13 11 72.2
72.2 SMX15...
SMX16... (2.84”) SMX16... SMX11... (2.84”)
82.5 82.5
(3.25”) (3.25”)
SM1C
with side-mount auxiliary contacts only
80.5
(3.17”)
18 9 SMX12...
(0.71”) (0.35”)
(3.46”)
(1.75”)
(1.39”)
(3.58”)
44.5
35.3
88
91
Breakers SM1 with SMX90 03 connector SM1 with SMX31 41 connector SM1 with SMX31 42 connector
and BG contactors and BF09A-BF25A contactors and BF09D/L-BF25D/L contactors
44.5 44.5 85 44.5 102.8
(1.75”) (1.75”) (3.35”) (1.75”) (4.05”)
(6.30”)
160
SMX90 03
(7.25”)
(7.25”)
184.2
184.2
SMX31 41 SMX31 42
SM1 with SMX32 41 connector SM1... with SMX18 14 or SMX18 15 door coupling handle
and BF26A-BF38A contactors
44.5 94 min. 140 / max. 395
82.9 (min 5.51” / max 15.55”)
(1.75”) (3.70”) (3.26”)
45.1 104.5 36 (1.42”)
22.5 22 1...4
(1.77”) (0.88”) (4.11”) 28...32
(0.87”) (0.04”...0.16”)
23 (1.10”...1.26”)
22
(0.87”) (0.90”)
(1.10”...1.26”)
61.8 (2.43”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
36 (1.42”)
(4.33”)
(2.56”)
28...32
(3.54”)
110
65
90
(7.61”)
193.2
SMX32 41
Ø3 (0.12”)
Ø2
.6
(0.1
0” SMX18 14
) SMX18 15
SMX18 14
SMX18 15
1-12
Motor protection circuit breakers
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Connection busbars 45mm/1.77” spacing Terminal block for Safety cover These elements mounted with SM1...
SMX90 32 - SMX90 33 - SMX90 34 busbar supply
SMX90 30
SMX90 31 breakers with no auxiliary contacts
1
SMX90 30
29 (1.14”)
29 (1.14”)
SMX90 3...
13.5 13.5
45 (1.77”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
SMX90 31
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
Connection busbars 54mm/2.13” spacing Terminal block for Safety cover These elements mounted with SM1...
SMX90 42 - SMX90 43 - SMX90 44 busbar supply SMX90 31 breakers with auxiliary contacts SMX12... or SMX13 11
SMX90 30
SMX90 30
29 (1.14”)
29 (1.14”)
SMX90 4...
13.5 13.5
54 (2.13”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
SMX90 31
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
Enclosures SMX17 10 with SMX17 30 or SMX17 35 handle SMX17 11 with SMX17 40 button
100 (3.94”) 134.4 (5.29”) 85.4 (3.36”) 173 (6.81”)
.5 ) .5 )
Ø4 .18” 109 (4.29”) Ø4 .18” 109 (4.29”)
(0 (0
181.2 (7.13”)
181.2 (7.13”)
170 (6.69”)
164 (6.46”)
170 (6.69”)
SMX17 40
42 (1.65”) 44.1 (1.74”)
PG16
(0.75”)
Ø22.5
19.2
(0.91”)
SMX17 3...
23.1
(0.88”)
SMX17 3...
14
(0.55”) 103 (4.05”)
1-13
Motor protection circuit breakers
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Breakers SM2A with SMX2... contacts Breakers SM3A with SMX2... contacts
1 10 (0.39”)
SMX20 11
17 (0.67”) SMX24...
SMX25...
121 (4.76”)
102 (4.01”)
SMX24...
SMX20 11
SMX21 11 12 SMX24...
146 (5.75”)
138 (5.43”)
127 (5”)
SMX20 11
20 SMX25... SMX22... (0.47”) SMX21 11
SMX21 11 (0.79”) SMX26... 52 (2.05”) 23 (0.90”) SMX25... 77 (3.03”)
SMX22... SMX26... SMX26...
SMX24...
SMX25...
SMX26...
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
140 (5.51”)
130 (5.12”)
125 (4.92”)
45 (1.77”)
85 (3.35”)
89 (3.50”)
116 (4.57”)
155 (6.10”)
150 (5.90”)
165 (6.50”)
45 (1.77”)
89 (3.50”)
5
(1.97”)
5
SMX22... (1.97”)
SMX23 11 SMX22...
9
(0.35”) 30 18 8 (0.31”) SMX23 11
(1.18”) (0.71”) 109 (4.29”)
18 (0.71”) 55 (2.16”) 127 (5”)
SMX23 11 132 (5.20”) 9 30 18 8 (0.31”)
144 (5.67”) (0.35”) (1.18”) (0.71”) 138 (5.43”)
18 (0.71”) 70 (2.75”) 153 (6.02”)
SMX23 11 169 (6.65”)
3.2 (0.12”)
25
(0.98) 1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
(0.96”)
5
2.
24.3
)
Ø2 .88”
0
(
5
(1.97”)
min. 75
min. 55 / max. 130 33 17 (2.95”)
(min 2.16” / max 5.12”) (1.30”) (0.67”)
132 (5.20”)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
25 3.2 (0.12”)
(0.98) 1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
140 (5.51”)
(0.96”)
5
2.
24.3
)
Ø2 .88”
(0
5
(1.97”)
min. 75
min. 131 / max. 327 33 17 (2.95”)
(min 5.16” / max 12.87”) (1.30”) (0.67”)
16 55 132 (5.20”)
(0.63”) (2.16”)
3.2 (0.12”)
25
(0.98) 1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
(0.96”)
5
2.
24.3
)
Ø2 .88”
(0
5
(1.97”)
min. 75
min. 55 / max. 104 33 17 (2.95”)
(min 2.16” / max 4.09”) (1.30”) (0.67”)
158 (6.22”)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
25 3.2 (0.12”)
(0.98) 1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
165 (6.50”)
(0.96”)
5
2.
24.3
)
Ø2 .88”
(0
5
(1.97”)
min. 75
min. 105 / max. 327 33 17 (2.95”)
(min 4.13” / max 12.87”) (1.30”) (0.67”)
16 70 158 (6.22”)
(0.63”) (2.75”)
1-14
Motor protection circuit breakers
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(1.37”)
(1.77”)
(3.15”)
55
75
35
45
80
55 (2.16”)
(2.16”)
(4.13”)
(5.08”)
105
(5.31”)
129
135
4 38
(0.16”) (1.50”)
LMZ106
73.5 LMZ106
LMH... (2.89”)
83
(3.27”)
Cutout
39
(1.53”)
Drilling for 69.5
surface fixing
(0.73”)
(2.74”)
18.5
M25
60
(4.53”)
(2.36”)
115
126 (4.96”)
105 (4.13”)
55
(2.16”)
M4
M4 70
(2.75”)
M4
Connection busbars 45mm/1.77” spacing Terminal block for Safety cover These elements mounted with LMS25...
SMX90 32 - SMX90 33 - SMX90 34 busbar supply SMX90 31 breakers with no auxiliary contacts
SMX90 30
SMX90 30
29 (1.14”)
29 (1.14”)
SMX90 3...
13.5 13.5
45 (1.77”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
SMX90 31
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
Connection busbars 54mm/2.13” spacing Terminal block for Safety cover These elements mounted with LMS25...
SMX90 42 - SMX90 43 - SMX90 44 busbar supply SMX90 31 breakers with LMH... auxiliary contacts
SMX90 30
SMX90 30
29 (1.14”)
29 (1.14”)
SMX90 4...
13.5 13.5
54 (2.13”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
SMX90 31
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
Wiring diagrams
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2
LOAD LOAD
1-15
Motor protection circuit breakers
Wiring diagrams
ADD-ON BLOCKS
1 For SM1… types
Front mount auxiliary contacts Side mount auxiliary contacts Side mount undervoltage trip releases Side mount shunt trip release
SMX11 20 SMX11 11 SMX12 11 SMX12 20 SMX12 02 SMX13 11 SMX14... SMX15... SMX16...
13 23 13 21 33 41 33 43 31 41 57 65 D1 D1 O7 C1
U<
U<
14 24 14 22 34 42 34 44 32 42 58 66 D2 D2 O8 C2
U<
U<
11 14 22 34 42 34 44 32 42 58 66 78 86 D2 D2 O8 C2
➊ ➋
Change in event of magnetic and/or thermal tripping.
Change in event of magnetic tripping.
NOTE: During breaker testing, only contacts 57-58 and 65-66 switch.
For LMS25 types Side-mount auxiliary contacts Inside-fitted undervoltage trip and shunt trip releases
LMH 01 LMH 10 LMH 11 LMH 20 LMU... LMA...
The termination of the LMH... 32 34 44 32 44 34
auxiliary contacts has more than D1 C1
one numbering due to the fact that 11 13 13 21 13 23
the block can assume various
mounting positions. U<
The numbering in boldface
indicates when it is mounted on the
left side of the breaker. D2 C2
12 14 14 22 14 24
31 33 43 31 43 33
Technical characteristics
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100 100
1min 1min
COLD COLD
10 10
HOT HOT
1 1
0.1 0.1
0.01 0.01
Tripping times can have a ±20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve values above.
1-16
Motor protection circuit breakers
Technical characteristics
1-17
Page 2-4 Page 2-8
SEC. - PAGE
Contactors
Three-pole ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 4
Four-pole .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 8
Four-pole with 2NO and 2NC poles or 4NC poles ................................................................................................................ 2 - 13
Four-pole with 4NO poles for photovoltaic applications ............................................................................................................ 2 - 13
For power factor correction ............................................................................................................................................... 2 - 14
Control relays .................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 15
Add-on blocks and accessories
For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................ 2 - 16
For BF series contactors .................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 18
For B series contactors ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 26
Spare parts
AC coils for BF series contactors ........................................................................................................................................ 2 - 28
DC coils for BF series contactors ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 29
AC/DC coils for B series contactors .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 30
Main contacts for BF series contactors ............................................................................................................................... 2 - 31
Main contacts and arc chutes for B series contactors ......................................................................................................... 2 - 31
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 2 - 32
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 2 - 44
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 2 - 48 P ROTECTION
Positive (force) guided contacts ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 57
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Contactors
2-2
Contactors
Contactors BF00, BF09A ... BF38A
SIDE ADD-ON FOURTH STARTER ASSEMBLY TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY FRONT PROTECTION COVER FOR
POLE Terminals are suitable for every type BREAKER - CONTACTOR
For the 45A and 56A AC1 of cable: flexible, rigid, according to CONNECTIONS
ratings, a side-mount AWG standards and interlocked with
fourth power pole can be any type of cable terminal.
snapped on the three-pole Power pole, auxiliary and coil
contactor. screws can be tightened using one
This solution permits to optimise single type of screwdriver.
inventory.
2-3
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by 60 (if 60Hz). Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC. Available voltages are:
Standard voltages are as follows: – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: 11 B145L 00 110 220 for contactor B145 without auxiliary contacts, with
Example: 11 BG06 10 A230 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VAC.
230VAC 50/60Hz coil. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
11 BG06 10 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG06 with one NO contact and 460VAC 60Hz Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 110 or
coil. 220-240VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 220.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the Example: 11 B1250 24 110 for contactor B1250, three poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and 110-
digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are: 125VAC 50/60Hz coil.
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) / Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for
440-480V (indicate 440). information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
For voltages 024 / 230 / 400VAC 50-60Hz: 10 pieces/package.
110-125VAC/DC coil. For all other voltages: 1 piece/package.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. Highly conductive auxiliary contact.
Other voltages available on request. For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…SL.00 11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…L.00 . 12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
details on inside front cover.
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
2-4 pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 pages 2-48 to 71 2-5
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit
BG06 D-BG12 D BF09 D-BF25 D BF26 D-BF38 D BF50 C-BF110 C B115-B180 B250-B400
BG09 L BF09 L-BF25 L BF26 L-BF38 L
Three-phase motor control UL/CSA details
Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 55°C (AC3)Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings
DC coil DC coil Ith (AC1) Ie (AC3) Single phase Three phase
440V
Low consumption 40°C 55°C 70°C at 55°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V
[A] [A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
11 BG06 01 D –– 16 14 12 6 1.5 2.2 2.4 2.5 3 3 –– 1
/3 1 11/2 2 3 3
11 BG06 10 D –– (60°C)
11 BG09 01 D 11 BG09 01 L 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BG09 10 D 11 BG09 10 L (60°C)
11 BGF09 01 D 11 BGF09 01 L 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BGF09 10 D 11 BGF09 10 L (60°C)
11 BGP09 01 D –– 20 18 15 9 2.2 4
4.3
4.5
5
–– –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5
––
11 BGP09 10 D –– (60°C)
11 BG12 01 D 12 –– 20 18 15 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 3 3 71/2 10
11 BG12 10 D 12 –– (60°C)
BF09 01 D 12 BF09 01 L 12 25 20 18 9 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.5 –– 3
/4 2 3 3 5 71/2
BF09 10 D 12 BF09 10 L 12
BF12 01 D 12 BF12 01 L 12 28 23 20 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10 –– 1 2 5 5 71/2 10
BF12 10 D 12 BF12 10 L 12
BF18 01 D 12 BF18 01 L 12 32 26 23 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 –– 1 3 5 5 10 15
BF18 10 D 12 BF18 10 L 12
BF25 01 D BF25 01 L 32 26 23 25 7 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 11 –– 2 3 71/2 71/2 15 15
BF25 10 D BF25 10 L
BF26 00 D 12 BF26 00 L 12 45 36 32 26 7.3 13 14 14 15.6 18.5 –– 2 5 71/2 71/2 15 20
BF32 00 D 12 BF32 00 L 12 56 45 40 32 8.8 16 17 17 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 10 20 25
BF38 00 D BF38 00 L 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 38 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 15 30 30
11 BF50 C 00 12 –– 90 80 65 50 14.3 25 27.2 27.2 33.2 43.5 25 5 10 10 15 30 40
11 BF65 C 00 12 –– 110 90 70 65 18.5 33 36 36 45.3 59.7 30 –– –– 20 25 50 60
11 BF80 C 00 –– 125 100 80 80 23 41 46 46 56 74 37 –– –– 25 30 60 75
11 BF95 C 00 –– 125 100 80 95 27.6 50 55 55 56 74 45 –– –– 30 30 60 75
11 BF110 C 00 –– 125 100 80 110 33 61 66 70 59 80 45 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B115 00 –– 160 150 110 110 33 61 66 70 80 100 63 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B145 00 –– 250 235 190 150 46 80 88 93 100 120 75 –– –– 50 50 100 125
11 B180 00 –– 275 250 200 185 57 100 108 115 123 144 103 –– –– 60 75 150 150
11 B250 00 –– 350 300 250 265 83 140 155 164 176 212 156 –– –– 75 100 200 250
11 B310 00 –– 450 370 300 320 100 170 188 200 213 256 180 –– –– 100 125 250 300
11 B400 00 –– 550 430 360 420 130 225 247 263 271 352 208 –– –– 125 150 350 400
11 B500 00 –– 700 550 500 520 156 290 306 328 367 416 312 –– –– 150 11 200 11 400 11 450 11
11 B630 00 –– 800 640 540 630 198 335 368 368 368 440 368 –– –– 200 11 250 11 500 11 500 11
11 B630 1000 00 –– 1000 850 700 –– For AC1/Resisteve duty only, see page 2-8. –– –– –– –– –– ––
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
For BG09…D 24VDC version complete with built-in surge suppressor, add suffix V120 to the standard 110-125VAC/DC coil.
order code. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Other voltages available on request.
Standard voltages are as follows: If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…SL.00 .
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V. If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…L.00 .
Example: 11 BG06 10 D012 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 12VDC coil. Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
11 BG09 10 D024 V120 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NO contact and 24VDC Standard voltages are:
coil, complete with built-in TVS (diode) suppressor. – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V
Low-consumption version. indicate 380
No add-on auxiliary contacts or mechanical interlock can be mounted on BG... type contactors. – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. Example: 11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC.
Standard voltages are as follows: G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
– DC 024 / 048V.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for
Example: 11 BG09 01 L024 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NC contact and 24VDC information; see contact details on inside front cover.
low-consumption coil. Highly conductive auxiliary contact.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 3-19. For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the 11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
digit of the coil voltage. 12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
Standard voltages are: details on inside front cover.
– AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) /
440-480V (indicate 440).
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
2-6 pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 pages 2-48 to 71 2-7
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit
BG09 T4 A BF09 A T4A-BF18 T4 A BF26 T4 A-BF38 T4 A BF65 40 - BF80 40 B115 4-B180 4 B250 4-B400 4
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
2-8 pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 71 2-9
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit
BG09 T4 D BF09 T4 D-BF18 T4 D BF26 T4 D-BF38 T4 D BF50C 40-BF80C 40 B115 4-B180 4 B250 4-B400 4
BF09 T4 L-BF18 T4 L BF26 T4 L-BF38 T4 L
Resistive load control UL/CSA details
Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 40°C (AC1) UL/CSA
DC coil DC coil Ith (AC1) General
Low consumption 40°C 55°C 70°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V (purpose) use
[A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [A]
11 BG09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGF09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGP09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14
14
15
16
–– –– 20
BF09 T4 D BF09 T4 L 25 20 18 9.5 16 17 18 21 27 –– 25
BF18 T4 D BF18 T4 L 32 26 23 12 21 22 23 26 36 –– 32
BF26 T4 D BF26 T4 L 45 36 32 17 30 31 33 37 51 –– 45
BF38 T4 D BF38 T4 L 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 21 26 38 40 45 62 –– 55
11 BF65C 40 –– 110 90 70 41 72 78 80 95 112 –– 110
11 BF80C 40 –– 125 100 80 47 82 90 90 108 128 –– 125
11 B115 4 00 –– 160 150 110 57 98 107 115 129 173 250 160
11 B145 4 00 –– 250 235 190 91 150 162 180 196 270 390 250
11 B180 4 00 –– 275 250 200 95 160 177 200 213 298 430 275
11 B250 4 00 –– 350 300 250 124 214 234 255 282 380 560 350
11 B310 4 00 –– 450 370 300 158 270 293 325 350 488 700 450
11 B400 4 00 –– 550 430 360 200 345 377 400 452 598 870 550
11 B500 4 00 –– 700 550 500 252 438 478 500 575 755 1100 700
11 B630 4 00 –– 800 640 540 288 500 545 580 655 860 1250 800
11 B630 1000 4 00 –– 1000 850 700 350 600 630 725 750 1000 1600 1000
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4SL 00 .
The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4L.00 .
Standard voltages are as follows: Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220VDC. Standard voltages are:
Example: 11 BG09 T4 D012 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 12VDC coil. – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
Low consumption version. Complete the order code with coil voltage digit. – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Example: 11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
Standard voltages are as follows: 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC.
– DC 024 / 048V G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
Example: BF09 T4 L024 for contactor BF09, four poles, with 24VDC low-consumption coil.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V consult Customer Service for
Maximum combinations add-on blocks are page 2-19. information; see contact details on inside front cover.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
digit of the coil voltage.
Standard voltages are:
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415 indicate 380 /
440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
110-125VAC/DC coil.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
Other voltages available on request.
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
2-10 pages 2-16 to 28 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 71 2-11
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with control circuit: AC and DC
Complete with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit followed
by 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 /110 / 230 / 400V
– AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: 11 BG09 T2 A230 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and
2 poles NC, with 230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
11 BG09 T2 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO
and 2 poles NC, with 460VAC 60Hz coil.
Complete with coil voltage digit.
The BF18-BF26-BF38 T2D types already have a standard supplied built-in
TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
Standard voltages are:
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: 11 BG09 T2 D012 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and
2 poles NC, with 12VDC coil.
Low-consumption version.
Complete the order code with coil voltage digit.
The BF18-BF26-BF38 T2L types already have a standard supplied built-in
TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
Standard voltages are as follows:
– DC 024 / 048V.
Example: BF18 T2 L024 for contactor BF18 T2, 2 poles NO and 2 poles
NC, with 24VDC low-consumption coil.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 2-19.
For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork
terminal, must be used.
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
2-12 pages 2-16 to 25 pages 2-28 to 31 page 2-32 and 33 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 65
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with control circuit: AC and DC
Wiring scheme
4 poles
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
pages 2-18 to 25 pages 2-28 to 31 page 2-32 and 33 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 67 2-13
Contactors
Contactors for power factor correction with AC control circuit
BFK contactors (including Order code Maximum IEC operational Qty Wt Operational characteristics
limiting resistors) power at 50°C (AC-6b) per Type IEC rated IEC - UL/CSA
440V operational protection fuse
240V 400V 480V 690V pkg current 440V gG-SC
2 [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] NO n° [kg] [A] [A]
AC COIL.
BFK09 10A 4.5 7.5 9 10 1 10 0.413 BFK09 12 16
BFK12 10A 7 12.5 14 16 1 10 0.413 BFK12 18 25
BFK18 10A 9 15 17 20 1 10 0.413 BFK18 23 40
BFK26 00A 11 20 22 25 – 10 0.472 BFK26 30 40
BFK32 00A 14 25 27.5 30 – 10 0.472 BFK32 36 63
BFK38 00A 17 30 33 36 – 10 0.472 BFK38 43 63
11 BF50K 00 22 38 41 46 – 5 1.440 BF50K 58 80
11 BF65K 00 26 45 50 56 – 5 1.470 BF65K 70 100
11 BF70K 00 30 50 56 65 – 5 1.470 BF70K 75 125
11 BF80K 00 34 60 65 70 – 5 1.470 BF80K 90 125
Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) for the Ambient operating temperature: 50°C. For ambient
BFK... use of contactors to switch with delta/wye connection. temperatures higher than 50°C and up to 70°C, the
One NO auxiliary contact (SPST) incorporated. maximum operating power values indicated in the table
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by must be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference
60 if 60Hz.
Standard voltages are: between the operating ambient temperature and 50°C.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400VAC E.g.: Using a BFK26 00 contactor at the ambient temperature
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / of 60°C, the maximum operating power (at 400V) of the
575 60 (V). contactor will be equal to 20kvar – 10% = 18kvar.
Example: BFK09 10 A230 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact and Operating cycle: 120 cycles/h
230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
BFK09 10 A460 60 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact Electrical life: 200,000 cycles.
and 460VAC 60Hz coil.
Add-on auxiliary contacts
The following contact blocks, can be fitted on the BFK
contactors: BFX12..., G418..., G481..., G482... and G218.
Type UL/CSA rated Maximum UL/CSA
current operational power at voltage: Certifications and compliance
240-600VAC 240V 480V 600V Certification obtained: CCC, EAC; UL Listed for USA and
[A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers -
Magnetic Capacitive Switches.
BFK 09 12 4.5 9 10 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
BFK 12 18 7 14 16 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
BFK 18 23 9 17 20 Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335;
for BFK versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard
BFK 26 30 11 22 27.5 product order code.
BFK 32 36 14 27.5 32 Example: BF18K 10 A230 V260 for BF18K contactor having
BFK 38 43 17 33 36 1 NO auxiliary contact and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil with
compliant plastic materials.
BF50 K 58 22 41 46
BF65 K 68 26 50 56
BF70 K 72 30 60 65
BF80 K 78 34 65 70
Kits to assemble BFK Order code For contactor Qty Wt General characteristics
contactors per To optimise contactor stock management, a kit is available
pkg to transform normal three-pole contactors into BFK
n° [kg] types for power factor correction. The table to the left
indicates which kits to purchase depending on the standard
11 G460 BF09 10A - BF12 10A - 10 0.072 contactor in stock.
BF18 10A - BF26 00A -
BF32 00A - BF38 00A
11 G464 BF50 00 - BF65 00 - 10 0.080
BF80 00
11 G46...
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
2-14 pages 2-18 and 25 pages 2-28 page 2-39 page 2-44 pages 2-59 and 65 to 67
Contactors
Control relays with control circuit: AC and DC
Add-on blocks and Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics for add-on auxiliary contacts
accessories qty per per
contactor pkg Type BGX10... BGXF10...
BGX11...
n° n° [kg]
2 Auxiliary contacts. Screw terminals.
IEC rated conventional free air A 10 10
thermal current Ith
11 BGX10 02 2NC 1 10 0.021 IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690
11 BGX10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021 voltage Ui
11 BGX10 20 2NO 1 10 0.021 Terminals Type M3 Faston
11 BGX10... (20-11-02) 11 BGX10 04 4NC 1 10 0.028 screw 1x6.3mm
11 BGX11 11 2x2.8mm
11 BGX10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 10 0.028
Width mm 6.9 6.9
11 BGX10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028
Tightening torque Nm 0.8-1 ––
11 BGX10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 10 0.028
lbin 7-9 ––
11 BGX10 40 4NO 1 10 0.028
Conductor section
Auxiliary contacts for reversing and changeover assemblies. maximum with 1 or 2 cables
Screw terminals. flexible without lug mm2 2.5 2.5
11 BGX11 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021 flexible with lug mm2 2.5 2.5
11 BGX10... (40-31-22-13-04) 11 BGX11 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028 AWG n° 14 14
11 BGX11 22 Auxiliary contacts. Faston terminals. UL/CSA and AC A600 A600
11 BGXF10 02 2NC 1 10 0.021 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation DC Q600 Q600
11 BGXF10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021 Mechanical life cycles 20 20
11 BGXF10 20 2NO 1 10 0.021 (million)
11 BGXF10 04 4NC 1 10 0.028 SM1 breaker - mini-contactor connecting kits
11 BGXF10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 10 0.028 See page 1-5.
11 BGXF10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028
Positive (force) guided contacts
11 BGXF... 11 BGXF10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 10 0.028 See page 2-57.
11 BGXF10 40 4NO 1 10 0.028
Mechanical interlock. Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained:
11 BGX50 00 For all BG...A 1 10 0.008
and BG...D Type cULus EAC CCC
Quick connect surge suppressors. BGX10... ––
11 BGX77 048 48VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 BGX11... ––
11 BGX77 125 48-125VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 BGXF10... –– ––
11 BGX77... - 11 BGX77 240 125-240VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 BGX50 00 –– ––
11 BGX78 225 - 11 BGX78 225 225VDC (Diode) 10 0.007 BGX7... –– ––
11 BGX79... BGX80 00 –– –– ––
11 BGX79 048 48VAC 10 0.007
(Resistor-Capacitor) G32... –– –– ––
11 BGX79 125 48-125VAC 10 0.007 SMX90... –– –– ––
(Resistor-Capacitor) Certified products;
11 BGX79 240 125-240VAC 10 0.007
(Resistor-Capacitor) - UL Recognized for USA only (File E197069) as Panel and
Switchboard Accessories - Component.
11 BGX79 415 240-415VAC 10 0.007 Products having this type of marking are intended
11 BGX50 00 (Resistor-Capacitor) for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
Modular shroud. cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as
11 BGX80 00 Raises protection to IEC 20 0.006 Auxiliary Devices - Component.
IP40 w/consumer boards
Compliant with standards: UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14,
Paralleling links. Clamp-screw terminals.
IEC/EN 60947-1; IEC/EN 60947-5-1 for auxiliary contacts.
11 G323 For 2 poles 10 0.009
11 G324 10 0.009
11 G325 For 4 poles 10 0.014
11 G326 10 0.014
11 SMX90 21 Rigid connecting kits.
11 SMX90 22 11 SMX90 21 For star-delta starter 10 0.040
composed by 3-contactor
combination of BG types
(line-star-delta)
11 SMX90 22 For reversing contactor 1 0.026
assembly composed by
mini-contactors BG
Cannot be used with BG...L types.
Cannot be used with BG...D and BG...L types.
Suitable for left-hand mini-contactor only of BGT and BGTP reversing
and BGC changeover assemblies.
The shroud can be used with BG... types with screw termination only and
with no auxiliary contacts, surge suppressor or mechanical interlock
mounted.
It raises the front degree of protection of the mini-contactor when these
are used in consumer switchboards.
Cannot be used with BGX80 00 shroud.
Contactors with one NC auxiliary contact, 01 type, are usually used for
reversing assemblies.
The relay cannot be directly mounted on the contator. Use the RF38 type and
the RFX38 04 independent mounting base.
The SM1 breaker can be directly fitted using the SMX90 03 rigid connector.
All contacts are each SPST.
Combinations: Mounting position on BG...A and BG...D mini-contactors Combinations: Mounting position on BG...L mini-contactors
G326 G326
G325 G325
2
G324 G324
G323 G323
BGX77... BGX77...
BGX78 225 BGX78 225
BGX79... BGX79...
BGX80 00 BGX80 00
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BG...A BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22 BG...L
BG...D
BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
BGX10 20 - BGXF10 20
BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
Suitable for screw-termination contactors without BGX10... auxiliaries, BGX50 00 interlock or BGX7...
surge suppressor.
Not suitable for BG...D types.
Combinations for reversing and changeover contactors assembled with BG...A and BG...D types
BGX77...
BGX78 225
BGX79...
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BG...A BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BG...D BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22
BGX50 00 BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
SMX90 21
SMX90 22
BGX50 00
BG...
BG...A
BG...D SMX90 21
SMX90 22
Add-on blocks Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics for add-on auxiliary contacts
qty per per Type G418 G484 G218 G482
contactor pkg G428 BFX10 G481
G485 BFX12
2 n°
Auxiliary contacts with front centre mounting.
n° [kg]
G486
Screw terminals. G487
BFX10 02 2NC 1 5 0.030 IEC conventional free A 10 10 10 0.1
air thermal current Ith
BFX10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 5 0.030
IEC rated insulation V 690 690 690 690
BFX10 20 2NO 1 5 0.030 voltage Ui
BFX10... 11 G484 03 3NC 1 5 0.039 Terminals: Screw M3.5 M3 –– ––
11 G484 12 1NO + 2NC 1 5 0.039 Width mm 7 7 –– ––
11 G484 21 2NO + 1NC 1 5 0.039 Faston mm –– –– 1x6.35 1x6.35
11 G484 30 3NO 1 5 0.039 2x2.8 2x2.8
BFX10 04 4NC 1 5 0.048 Tightening torque Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1 –– ––
BFX10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 5 0.048 lbin 7-9 7-9 –– ––
BFX10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 5 0.048 Conductor section
BFX10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 5 0.048 maximum with
1 or 2 cables
BFX10 40 4NO 1 5 0.048 flexible w/o lug mm2 2.5 2.5 –– ––
11 G484...
BFX10 11 11 1NO+1NC and 1 5 0,048 flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
1EM+1LB (1 early
make+1 late break) AWG n° 14 14 14 14
Auxiliary contacts for front lateral mounting. Screw terminals. Terminal protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
per IEC/EN 60529
11 G418 01 1NC 2 10 0.014
UL/CSA and AC A600 A600 A600 A600
11 G418 01D 1LB (late break) 2 10 0.014 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 DC P600 Q600 P600 P600
11 G418 10 1NO 2 10 0.014 designation
11 G418 10A 1EM (early make) 2 10 0.014 Mechanical life cycles 10 10 10 10
Auxiliary contacts for front lateral mounting. Faston terminals. (million)
BFX10... 11 G218 1NO or 1NC reversible 2 10 0.011
SM1 breaker - contactor connecting kits
11 G481 02 2NC 2 10 0.013 See page 1-5.
11 G481 11 1NO + 1NC 2 10 0.013
11 G481 20 2NO 2 10 0.013 Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks
See pages 2-22 to 2-25.
11 G482 Changeover contact 2 10 0.013 Positive (force) guided contacts see page 2-57.
Adapter for auxiliary contact side mounting.
11 G280 for G218 2 10 0.008 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained:
11 G419 for G418 2 10 0.010 Type cULus CSA EAC CCC
11 G483 for G481 and G482 2 10 0.010 BFX10... –– ––
Auxiliary contacts for side mounting. BFX12... –– –– ––
11 G418... 11 G218
Screw terminals. G218 ––
BFX12 02 2NC for BF00, 2 5 0.044 G418..., G428... ––
BF09-BF38 G481... ––
BFX12 11 1NO+1NC for BF00, 2 5 0.044 G482 ––
BF09-BF38 G484... ––
BFX12 20 2NO for BF00, 2 5 0.044 G485... ––
BF09-BF38 G486... ––
11 G428 01 1NC 2 10 0.024 G487... ––
11 G481... 11 G428 01D 1LB (late break) 2 10 0.024 Certified products; pending for BFX10 1111
11 G482 - UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices
11 G428 10 1NO 2 10 0.024
- Component.
11 G428 10A 1EM (early make) 2 10 0.024 Products having this type of marking are intended
for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation) equipment.
on energisation for front centre mounting . cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as
Screw terminals. Auxiliary Devices.
CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
11 G485 3 3s 1 1 0.040 motor controllers.
11 G485 6 6s 1 1 0.040
11 G485 15 15 s 1 5 0.040 Add-on auxiliary contacts are compliant with the following
11 G428... BFX12... standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
11 G485 30 30 s 1 5 0.040 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
11 G485 60 60 s 1 5 0.040
11 G485 120 120 s 1 1 0.040 The contacts can also be fitted on B type contactors using the adapter
G358. See pages 2-26 and 2-27.
Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation) Highly conductive contacts.
on de-energisation for front centre mounting . Gold-plated contacts inside tight casing for use in pollutant environments.
Screw terminals. The Ith value refers to 125VAC and 30VDC.
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with insulated Faston
11 G486 3 3s 1 1 0.040 terminals.
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with minimum
11 G486 6 6s 1 1 0.040 0.75mm² conductor section.
Designation in DC is Q600 for these types.
11 G486 15 15 s 1 5 0.040 IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with insulated
11 G485... 11 G486 30 30 s 1 5 0.040 Faston terminals.
11 G486... For particularly severe ambient conditions, consult Customer Service for
11 G487 11 G486 60 60 s 1 5 0.040 information; see contact details on inside front cover.
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with minimum
11 G486 120 120 s 1 1 0.040 1mm² conductor section. Mechanical life is 3 million cycles.
11 G487 70 ms 1 1 0.040 All contacts are each SPST except G482 which is SPDT.
BF00 A, Maximum assembly combination for alternating-current contactors BF00 A, BF09 A-BF110
Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF50 C-BF110 C
BF09 A-BF110, Front centre mount Front lateral mount Side mount
BF50C-BF110C
2
1 1 or 2
OR
OR
OR
OR
BF50-BF110 1 1 1 + –– 1 2 ––
BF50 C-BF110 C 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 ––
Four poles BF09 A-BF25 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
BF26 A-BF38 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 1
BF50-BF80 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 ––
BF65 C-BF80 C 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 ––
Mounting of BFX50 03 interlock is not possible when BFX10... block with 4 contacts and/or G222 latch are mounted.
To fit the mechanical interlock, the add-on fourth pole needs to be mounted on the left side of the one of the contactors.
One only side-mount block can be fitted on each contactor whenever the BFX50 0... interlock is mounted.
One BFX10... or delayed G48... contact block can be mounted on the G222 or G272 mechanical latch.
G222 mechanical latch.
G272 mechanical latch.
BF00 D, Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF00 D, BF09 D-BF38 D
Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L
BF09 D-BF38 D,
Front centre mount Front lateral Side mount
BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L mount
BF09 L-BF25 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
OR
BF26 L-BF38 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
Four poles BF09 D-BF25 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BF26 D-BF38 D –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1 1
BF09 L-BF25 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
BF26 L-BF38 L –– 1 –– –– –– –– –– 1 1 –– ––
Mounting of BFX50 03 interlock is not possible when BFX10... block with 4 contacts and/or G222 latch are mounted.
One only side-mount block can be fitted on each contactor whenever the BFX50 0... interlock is mounted.
One BFX10... or delayed G48... contact block can be mounted on the G222 or G272 mechanical latch.
To fit the mechanical interlock, the add-on fourth pole needs to be mounted on the left side of the one of the contactors.
For other assembly combination, consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Accessories Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics of enlarged and auxiliary
per terminals
pkg
n° [kg] Type G231 G232 G285 G271
Rigid connecting kits for three-pole reversing contactor G288 2
assembly. Tightening Nm 1.5-1.8 2.5-3 0.8-1 5
BFX31 01 For contactors 1 0.052 torque lbin 13.2-18 7-9 7.9 44.3
BF09 - BF25 side by side Tool Type PH1 PH2 PH1 Metric
with BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 Allen 4
BFX31... interlock
BFX32... BFX31 02 For contactors 1 0.054
BF09 - BF25 side by side Certifications and compliance
with BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 Certifications obtained: GOST for all; UL Listed, for USA
interlock and Canada (cULus - File E93602), under Magnetic Motor
BFX32 01 For contactors 1 0.060 Controllers for BFX31 01, BFX31 02, BFX32 01,
BF26 - BF38 side by side BFX31 31, BFX32 31 and BFX32 32 as rigid kits, G271
with BFX50... interlock and G288 as enlarged terminal kits.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508,
Rigid connecting kits for star-delta starters. CSA C22.2 n° 14.
BFX31 31 For contactors BF09-BF25 1 0.058
BFX 80 (line-star-delta)
BFX32 31 For contactors BF26-BF38 1 0.064
(line-star-delta)
BFX32 32 For contactors BF26-BF38 1 0.064
(line-delta) and
BF09-BF25 (star)
Sealing cover.
BFX80 For contactors 10 0.001
BF00, BF09-BF38
Screw fixing adapters for contactors.
BFX89 01 Universal base to screw fix 5 0.016
BF09-BF38 contactors
BFX89 01 BFX89 02
BFX89 02 Screw fixing brackets for 10 0.002
BF09-BF38 contactors
Power terminal shroud.
11 G265 IP20 protection for 3-pole 10 0.015
BF50 to BF110 types
Paralleling links.
11 BA135 2 poles for BF09-BF25 types 10 0.001
11 G265 11 BA235 2 poles for BF26-BF38 types 10 0.003
11 BA435 3 poles for BF50-BF110 types 10 0.030
One-pole enlarged terminals.
11 G231 1-6 mm2 for BF09-BF25 types 12 0.009
11 G232 1-16 mm2 for BF26-BF38 types 12 0.014
Three-pole enlarged terminals.
11 G271 1-50 mm2 for BF50-BF110 10 0.142
11 BA135 11 BA435 types
11 BA235
Four-pole enlarged terminals.
11 G288 1x50mm2 for contactors 10 0.194
BF50-BF110 types
Auxiliary terminal.
11 G285 For BF50-BF110 types 8 0.009
Marking element for BF00, BF09-BF110 contactors.
11 G231 11 G285 BFX30 Blank label for writing 50 0.001
11 G232
For 3-pole contactors, BF50-BF110 types only.
N.B. Two pieces are required per contactor.
An additional 1-50mm2 conductor can be fitted in the contactor terminal.
11 G271
11 G288
BFX10...❷
G484...
BFX10...
G418...
BF00 A
BFX50 00 BF09 A-BF110
BFX50 01 BFX77...
BFX79... G218
G481...
G482
❶
BFX12... G419❶
G280❶ BFX50 02
(for contactors BF00A, BF09 A-BF38 A)
G483❶
BFX50 03
(for contactors BF00 A, BF09 A-BF38 A)
G418...❶ G428...❶
G218❶
G269 2
(for contactors BF50-BF110)
G481...❶
G482❶
Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts or mechanical interlock BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 are mounted.
If the G222 latch is mounted, no front lateral contacts can be fitted on contactors BF00A and BF09A to BF38A.
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the manual closing mechanism G454 or G455 is fitted.
Combinations: Mounting position on BF00 A and BF09 A-BF38 A Combinations: Mounting position on BF50-BF110 G485...
G486...
contactors with mechanical latch G222 fitted contactors with mechanical latch G272 fitted G487
Table with combinations: See page 2-19. Table with combinations: See page 2-19.
G485... BFX10...
G486...
G487
G484...
BFX10...
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
BF50-BF110
G418...
BF00 A
BF09 A-BF38 A
G218
2
27
BFX77...
G
BFX79...
G481...
G482
22
G2
G318...
G319...
G322...
G418... G269 2
BFX50 00 G218
BFX12...
BFX50 01
BFX10...
G222...❷ G454❸
BF00 D
BF09 D-BF38 D
BF00 L
BF09 L-BF38 L❷
BFX50 02
BFX50 00 BFX12...
BFX50 01
BFX50 03❶
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
G418...
BF50 C-BF110 C
G218
2
27
G
G481...
G482
G318...
G319...
G322...
G418... G269 2
G218
G481...
G482
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the G455 manual closing mechanism is fitted.
Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts are fitted.
Accessories for
AC, DC and DC low consumption contactors
2 Combinations
G271
BA435
G265
G285
BA235
G232
G231
BA135
BF50-BF110
BF26-BF38
BFX80
BF00
BF09-BF25
Cable Plate
6-50mm2 2.5x9mm (max)
BF50-BF110
Accessories for
AC, DC and DC low consumption contactors
Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors with Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors with 2
BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 mechanical interlock BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 mechanical interlock
BFX31 01 BFX31 02
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX50 00
BFX31 01 BFX50 01
BFX31 02
RF38
RF38
Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 contactors Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors
with BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 mechanical interlock
BFX32 01
BFX50 02 BFX31 31
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX31 31
BFX32 01
BFX50 00
BFX50 01 RF38
RF38
Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 contactors Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 (line-delta) and
BF09-BF25 (star) contactors
BFX32 31
BFX32 32
BFX32 32
BFX32 31
RF38
RF38
Add-on blocks Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts
qty per per Type G350-G354
contactor pkg
IEC conventional free-air thermal A 16
n° n° [kg]
2 Faston terminals.
current Ith
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Auxiliary contacts for side mounting.
Terminals Faston mm 1-6.35
11 G350 2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC 4 1 0.082 2-2.8
reversible (SPST ea)
Conductor section maximum
11 G354 1NO+1NC (SPST ea) 4 1 0.078 with 1 or 2 cables flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5
Contact block adapter. AWG n° 14
11 G350 - 11 G354 11 G358 To fit auxiliary contacts 4 5 0.050 UL/CSA and AC A600
BFX10, G484, G485, IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation
G486 and G487 types, DC P600
on B115-B630 1000 Mechanical life (million) cycles 5
contactors; see page
2-18. Operational characteristics of mechanical latch
Mechanical interlock. Type G495
11 G355 Side by side 1 1 0.026 Rated control AC (50/60Hz) V 48-480
11 G356 1 One on top of other 1 1 0.120 circuit voltage DC V 48-480
11 G356 2 One on top of other 1 1 0.126 Power consumption AC VA 1500
11 G356 3 One on top of other 1 1 0.132 DC W 1100
11 G358
11 G356 4 One on top of other 1 1 0.140 Minimum energising drop-out ms 40
11 G356 5 One on top of other 1 1 0.146 pick-up ms 300
11 G356 6 One on top of other 1 1 0.150 Terminals Faston mm 1-6.3x0.8
Mechanical latch. 2-2.8x0.8
11 G495
For B115-B630 1 1 0.795 Operational characteristics of terminal adapters
Type G370-G371
Tightening torque Nm 1
Accessories Order code Characteristics Qty Wt
per lbin 8.9
pkg Tool Type Phillips 2
n° [kg] Conductor section mm² 4
Power terminal protection. 1 or 2 cables AWG 10
11 G360 For contactor B115 6 0.026
Certifications and compliance
11 G361 For contactors B145-B180 6 0.026 Certifications obtained:
11 G363 For contactors 6 0.046 Type CSA GOST CCC
B250-B310-B400
11 G360 - 11 G361 - 11 G363 G350
11 G527 For contactor B500 1 0.238
G354 ––
11 G528 For contactor B500 4 1 0.265
G355 –– ––
11 G529 For contactor B630 1 0.238
G356 ... –– ––
11 G530 For contactor B630 4 1 0.266
G360 –– ––
3 pole star connecting bars.
G361 –– ––
11 BA1595 For B115-B145-B180 1 0.065
G362 –– ––
11 BA1721 For B250-B310-B400 1 0.140
G363 –– ––
11 BA1846 For B500-B630 1 0.341
11 G527 - 11 G528 - 11 G529 G370 –– ––
2 pole bars for parallel arrangement.
11 G530 Certified products.
11 BA1594 For B115-B145-B180 1 0.095 - UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices -
11 BA1720 For B250-B310-B400 1 0.149 Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended
11 BA1845 For B500-B630 1 0.322 for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
Terminal adapter. equipment.
CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
11 G370 To transform Faston terminals 10 0.003 motor controllers.
of auxiliary contacts and coils Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
11 G370
into screw terminals IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; add-on
11 G371 To transform both coil Faston 5 0.022 auxiliary contacts also comply with IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
terminals into screw terminals
Marking elements.
Only one piece can be mounted on B1250 or B1600 type.
11 BA126 1 Label for alphanumeric symbols 50 0.001 Not suitable for B630 1000, B1250, B1600.
11 BA126 2 Label for writing 50 0.001 For use with three-pole B630 1000, consult Customer Service;
11 G371 see contact details on inside front cover.
3958 Set of 100 alphanumeric 1 0.010 Allowed distances see page 2-70.
symbols To interlock two contactors B1250 or B1600, it is imperative to use two
pieces of type G356 6, one fixed on the left side and the other on the
right.
Replace with the digit of the voltages if 50 or 60 Hz or with the letter C
followed by voltage if DC. The standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 48 - 110/125 indicate 110 - 220/240 indicate 220 -
11 BA126 1 11 BA126 2 380/415 indicate 380
– DC 48 - 110/125 indicate 110 - 220/240 indicate 220
It can be mounted only in contactors if predisposed for it.
Except for B310 and B310 4.
3958... Provided for one pole terminal only. Example: For three-pole contactors,
purchase 3 pieces for the upper terminals only or 6 pieces for all upper
and lower terminals.
Replace with the required alphanumeric symbol; each package contains
100 pieces of the same symbol.
G356...
G370
G371
G363
G355
G350 M
8
G354
6
M
BA1846
BA1845
B500
B630
BA1720
B250 BA1721
B310
B400
BA126 2
BA126 1
BA1595 BA1594
B115 3958
B145
B180
The add-on auxiliary contact blocks G350 and G354 can be applied to contactors Contact blocks, BFX10 with 2 contacts, G484, G485, G486 and G487 types, can
B115-B630 1000 only up to a maximum of four pieces for each contactor, for a total of be mounted using the G358 adapter, refer to page 2-18 for exact types and
12 contacts. order codes of the blocks.
The contact block G350 provides a 2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC combination depending on A maximum of four adapters can be possibly used per contactor and each
its mounting position; see the drawing delow. The G354 block consists of 1NO+1NC. adapter can hold one BFX10, G484, G485, G486 and G487.
BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 02
53 63
93 01 51 61
BFX10...
54 64
94 02 52 62
01 13
A
F
G
13
54 64 74 54 62 74 54 62 72 52 62 72
42 74
02 14 74
14
53
113 53
113 81
21
or
or
81
54 21
54 82
G485 ... G486 ... - G487
114
114 22
82
22
G371 G358
61 61 93
121 121 33 57 65 67 55
62
122 62
122 94
34
34
94 122 122
62
62
33
93 121
61 121
61 58 66 68 56 G358
22
82
22 114
82 54 114
21 54
or
or
G358
81
21 113
81 53 113
53
14
74 14 02
74 42
13
73 13 01
73 41
AC coils Order code Rated frequency Qty Wt Operational characteristics for BFX91 A or BFX92 A coils
and voltage per AC control
pkg Rated voltage at 50/60, 60Hz V 12-600
[Hz] [V] n° [kg]
2 For contactors BF00 A-BF09 A-BF12 A-BF18 A-BF25 A
Operating voltage limits
50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 80-110
BFX91A 024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.085 powered at drop-out % Us 20-55
BFX91A 048 48VAC 1 0.085 60Hz pick-up % Us 85-110
BFX91A 110 110VAC 1 0.085 drop-out % Us 20-55
BFX91A 230 230VAC 1 0.085 60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 80-110
BFX91A 400 400VAC 1 0.085 powered at drop-out % Us 20-55
BFX91A 024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.085 Average coil consumption at 20°C
BFX91A 048 60 48VAC 1 0.085 50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 75
BFX91A 120 60 120VAC 1 0.085 powered at holding VA 9
BFX91A... BFX91A 220 60 220VAC 1 0.085 60Hz in-rush VA 70
BFX91A 230 60 230VAC 1 0.085 holding VA 6.5
BFX91A 460 60 460VAC 1 0.085 60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 75
BFX91A 575 60 575VAC 1 0.085 powered at holding VA 9
For contactors BF26 A-BF32 A-BF38 A. Dissipation at 50Hz W 2.5
BFX92A 024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.088
BFX92A 048 48VAC 1 0.088
BFX92A 110 110VAC 1 0.088 Operational characteristics for BA705 coil
BFX92A 230 230VAC 1 0.088 AC control
BFX92A 400 400VAC 1 0.088 Rated voltage at 50/60, 60Hz V 12-600
BFX92A 024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.088 Operating voltage limits
BFX92A 048 60 48VAC 1 0.088 50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 80-110
BFX92A 120 60 120VAC 1 0.088 powered at drop-out % Us 20-55
BFX92A 220 60 220VAC 1 0.088 60Hz pick-up % Us 85-110
BFX92A 230 60 230VAC 1 0.088 drop-out % Us 40-55
BFX92A 460 60 460VAC 1 0.088 60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 80-110
BFX92A... powered at
BFX92A 575 60 575VAC 1 0.088 drop-out % Us 20-55
For BF50-BF65-BF80-BF95-BF110 contactors. Average coil consumption at 20°C
11 BA705 024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.145 50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 220
11 BA705 048 48VAC 1 0.145 powered at holding VA 18
11 BA705 110 110VAC 1 0.145 60Hz in-rush VA 200
11 BA705 230 230VAC 1 0.145 holding VA 15
11 BA705 400 400VAC 1 0.145 60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 220
11 BA705 024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.145 powered at holding VA 18
11 BA705 048 60 48VAC 1 0.145 Dissipation at 50Hz W 6
11 BA705 120 60 120VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 220 60 220VAC 1 0.145 Materials
11 BA705... Class F enamelled copper wire.
11 BA705 230 60 230VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 460 60 460VAC 1 0.145 Special versions
11 BA705 575 60 575VAC 1 0.145 For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
Service for information; see contact details on inside front
Four-terminal coil. cover.
2-28
Contactors
Spare parts for BF series contactors
DC coils Order code Rated Qty Wt Operational characteristics for BA911 coil
voltage per DC control
pkg Rated voltage V 12-600
[V] n° [kg]
For BF50 C-BF110 C contactors.
Operating limits pick-up % Us 80-110 2
drop-out % Us 10-25
11 BA911 12 12VDC 1 0.380 Average dissipation 20°C W 15
11 BA911 24 24VDC 1 0.380 in-rush/holding
11 BA911 48 48VDC 1 0.380
Materials
11 BA911 60 60VDC 1 0.380 Class F enamelled copper wire.
11 BA911 110 110VDC 1 0.380
11 BA911 125 125VDC 1 0.380 Special versions
For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
11 BA911 220 220VDC 1 0.380 Service for information; see contact details on inside front
11 BA911... NOTE: No coil replacement for contactors BF00 D, cover.
BF09 D-BF38 D, BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L, is possible.
2-29
Contactors
Spare parts for B series contactors
Coil protection Order code For contactor Qty Wt For contactor type B1250 - B1600
per
pkg Supply voltage in AC only
n° [kg] Rated control voltage V 110-240
Bridge rectifier (Faston terminals). Operating limits pick-up % Us 80-110
11 BA1575 1 B115-B145-B180 1 0.170 drop-out % Us 20-60
11 BA1700 1 B250-B310-B400 1 0.230 Consumption in-rush VA/W 800
11 BA1799 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 0.520 holding VA/W 45
B1250-B1600 Dissipation W 40
Coil protection
Materials
11 BA1553 B115-B145-B180 1 0.042 Class F enamelled copper wire.
Coil assembly
11 BA1678 B250-B310-B400 1 0.079
11 BA1803 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 0.164 Coil assembly
B1250-B1600 Comprises the coil, bridge rectifier, fixed core, coil
protection, cross piece and fixing screws.
Coil assembly (Coil, rectifier and coil protection).
11 BA1546 B115-B145-B180 1 1.220 Special versions
11 BA1671 B250-B310-B400 1 2.290 For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
Service for information; see contact details on inside front
11 BA1796 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 4.650 cover.
B1250-B1600
Available for AC supply only.
Add the coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are:
– AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 /
380-415 indicate 380 / 440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 BA1546 110 for B115-B180 contactor coil assembly
suitable for 110-125VAC/DC supply.
Add the coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are:
– AC/DC 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 /
380-415 indicate 380 / 440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 BA1796 110 for B500-B1600 contactor coil assembly
suitable for 110-125VAC/DC supply.
For B1250 and B1600, add only 110 for 110-125VAC or 220 for
220-240VAC since these are the only standard voltages available.
During coil replacement operations, always reinsert dampers (1 pair for
B115-B180; 2 pairs for B250-B1600) and fixed magnetic core which one
finds in the original coil assembly.
2-30
Contactors
Spare parts for B series contactors
2-31
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
”)
44
(0 4
.16
”)
(1.73”) (0.17”) (0 4 57
.16
(1.73”)
2 4.4
(0.17”)
57
(2.24”)
(2.24”)
(1.97”)
(2.28”)
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
50
58
58
50
(3.71”)
94.2
8.5 34.9 3.2
9.7 34.9 (1.37”)
(0.33”) (0.38”) (1.37”) (0.12”) RF...9
8.5
(0.33”) 7.6
8.5 44 89.2 (0.30”)
(0.33”) (1.73”) (3.51”)
BGP... BGF...
with rear PCB solder pins with Faston terminals
44 4.4 4.4 44
”)
(0 Ø4
(1.73”) (0.17”) (0.17”) (1.73”)
.16
4.4 4.4
(0.17”) (0.17”)
Ø1.4 (0.06”)
58 (2.28”)
(2.09”)
(1.97”)
(1.97”)
(2.28”)
53
50
50
58
8.5 9.7 57
(0.33”) (0.38”) (2.24”) 8.5 9.7 34.9 57
8.5 5.6 (0.33”) (0.38”) (1.37”) (2.24”)
(0.33”) (0.22”) 8.5
(0.33”)
8.5
(0.33”) 8.5
Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm.
(0.33”)
(0 4.2
”)
”)
(0.24”) (3.18”) (0.24”)
.17
.17
(0.43”) (0.43”) (3.18”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
71
81
(4.96”)
126
35 35
(1.38”) (1.38”)
RF...38
7.9 81.2
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.20”)
(0.57”)
BF26A - BF32A - BF38A three poles BF26 T...A - BF38 T...A four poles
with RF...38 thermal relay
45 61
(1.77”) (2.40”)
7.9 14.6 90 14.6 90
(0 4.2
(0 4.2
”)
”)
(0.57”)
(0.31”)
(3.54”)
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
(3.15”)
90
80
90
80
(5.31”)
134.8
35 35
(1.38”) 15.9 (1.38”)
RF...38 (0.62”)
7.9 81.5
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.21”)
(0.57”)
BF50 00 - BF65 00 - BF80 00 - BF95 00 - BF110 00 three poles BF50 40 - BF65 40 - BF80 40 - BDF80 40 four poles
with RF...95 3 thermal relay
75
(2.95”) 98
(3.86”)
14 23.5 23.5
113.5 107
”)
(0.55”) 14 (0.92”)
”)
(0.92”)
(0 6
(0 6
.24
(4.47”) (4.21”)
.24
(0.55”)
(4.33”)
(4.88”)
(4.88”)
(4.41”)
110
124
124
112
(7.16”)
182
55 78
(2.16”) (3.07”)
RF...95 3
2-32
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
45
(1.77”) 45
2
6.2 10.9 98.5 (1.77”)
(0 4.2
”)
(0.24”)
.17
(0.43”) (3.88”) 10.9 98.5
(0 Ø4.2
(0.43”)
”)
6.2 (3.88”)
.17
(0.24”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
(4.96”)
126
35
(1.38”) 35
RF...38 (1.38”)
7.9 81.2
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.20”)
(0.57”)
BF26... - BF32... - BF38... D and L three poles BF26 T... - BF38 T... D and L four poles
with RF...38 thermal relay 61
45 (2.40”)
(1.77”) 14.6 107.5
(0 4.2
”)
7.9 (4.23”)
.17
7.9 14.6 107.5 (0.57”)
(0 4.2
”)
(0.57”)
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
80
90
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
80
90
(5.31”)
134.8
35
35 15.9 (1.38”)
(1.38”) (0.62”)
RF...38
7.9 81.2
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.20”)
(0.57”)
(0.92”) (5.92”)
(0 6
.24
(4.41”)
(4.88”)
112
124
(7.16”)
182
55
(2.16”)
RF...95 3
98
(3.86”)
14 23.5
(0.55”) 144
(0.92”)
”)
(0 6
(5.67”)
.24
(4.88”)
(4.33”)
124
110
78
(3.07”)
2-33
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
2 40
120
(4.72”)
40
184
(7.24”)
4
(1.57”) (1.57”) 114
(0.16”)
B (4.49”)
A
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(4.72”)
170
150
170
150
120
(0 Ø7.5
”)
(12.68”)
.29
322
90
M6 (3.54”)
M8 56.5
20
(0.79”) (2.22”)
166.1
40 40 (6.54”)
(1.57”) (1.57”)
127.5
(5.02”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B
B115 M6 15 (0.59”)
B145 M8 20 (0.79”)
B180 M8 20 (0.79”)
160
(6.30”) 184
40 40 40 (7.24”)
(1.57”) 4
(1.57”) (1.57”) 114
(0.16”)
B (4.49”)
A
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(4.72”)
170
150
170
150
120
(0 Ø7.5
”)
.29
130
M6 (5.12”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B
B115 M6 15 (0.59”)
B145 M8 20 (0.79”)
B180 M8 20 (0.79”)
2-34
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(7.09”)
(8.03”)
(7.05”)
(8.03”)
(5.51”)
180
204
179
204
140
)
9”
0.3
0(
(14.57”)
Ø1
370
M8 110
(4.33”)
25 56.8
M1 (2.24”)
(0.98”) 0
166.1
47.5 47.5 (6.54”)
(1.87”) (1.87”)
145
(5.71”)
192.5
(7.58”)
47.5 47.5 47.5
(1.87”) (1.87”) (1.87”) 225
25 (8.86”) 5
M10X35 144
(0.98”) (0.20”)
(5.67”)
(7.05”)
(8.03”)
(8.03”)
(7.09”)
(5.51”)
179
204
204
180
140
”)
.39
0 (0
Ø1
M8 157.5
(6.20”)
2-35
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
194
(7.64”)
263
65 65
2 A
(2.56”)
B
(2.56”) 177.5
(6.99”)
(10.35”)
6
(0.24”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
(9.05”)
230
170
270
230
C
)
7”
0.4
2(
Ø1
150
M10 (5.90”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B C
B500 M10 35 (1.38”) 265 (10.43”)
B630 M12 40 (1.57”) 270 (10.63”)
259
(10.20”)
65 65 65 263
(2.56”) (2.56”) (2.56”) (10.35”)
6
177.5
A B (0.24”)
(6.99”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
230
230
170
270
C
”)
.47
(0
2
Ø1
215
M10 (8.46”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B C
B500 M10 35 (1.38”) 265 (10.43”)
B630 M12 40 (1.57”) 270 (10.63”)
2-36
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
194
(7.64”)
263
60
(2.36”)
65
(2.56”)
65
(2.56”)
M12 207.6
(8.17”)
(10.35”)
6
(0.24”) 2
147.2
(5.79”)
(18.74”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
230
476
270
230
170
)
7”
0.4
2(
Ø1
150
M10 (5.90”)
259
(10.20”) 263
65 65 65 (10.35”)
60 (2.56”) (2.56”) (2.56”) 6
(2.36”) M12 207.6 (0.24”)
(8.17”)
147.2
(5.79”)
(18.74”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
(9.05”)
476
230
270
170
230
)
7”
0.4
2(
Ø1
215
M10 (8.46”)
2-37
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
2 80
(3.15”)
(19.68”)
130
288
40 (11.34”) 10
(1.57”) (5.12”) M12
(0.39”)
(14.17”)
(12.60”)
360
320
(12.60”)
360
320
B115 - B145 - B180 - B250 - B310 - B400 - B500 - B630 - B630 1000 - B1250 - B1600
10
(0.39”)
2-38
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(0 Ø4.2
(0 Ø4.2
”)
”)
.17
.17
(4.45”~)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
(4.84”~)
113~
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
123~
71
81
80
90
35
(1.38”) 35
45 (1.38”)
(1.77”) 45
(1.77”)
(6.30”~)
160~
(4.41”)
(4.88”)
112
124
55
(2.16”)
75
(2.95”)
(0.94”)
(2.28”)
(1.18”)
(2.28”)
(2.28”)
23.8
30
58
30
58
58
10 12
(0.47”)
(0.92”)
44 G323 G324
59 37 37 9 12
(1.73”) 10 (0.35”) (0.47”)
(2.32”) (1.46”) (0.39”) 12 (1.46”)
(0.47”)
15 16
(0.63”)
(2.28”)
(1.91”)
(0.59”)
48.5
58
BGX80 00
2-39
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
2 21.4
(0.84”)
29
42.8
(1.68”)
10
(0.39”)
36.5
(1.14”) (1.44”)
(1.63”)
(1.63”)
41.4
41.4
4.3
(0.17”)
(1.85”)
(1.81”)
46.9
46
(1.60”)
40.6
G481..., G482 G280 adapter with G218 contact G419 adapter c/w G418 contacts, G428 contacts
G483 adapter c/w G481 or G482 contacts
8 9.5
(0.31”) 9.5 57
(0.37”) 52.5 (0.37”)
(2.07”) (2.24”)
36 10.3 12.3
(1.42”) (0.40”) (0.48”
(1.69”)
(2.01”)
(1.74”)
43
44.2
51
G485..., G486..., G487 Fourth pole
delayed contacts BFX42 BFXD42
16 16
28 (0.63”) 84.8 (0.63”) 104
(1.10”) (3.34”) (4.09”)
45.7
(1.80”)
(1.76”)
44.7
(3.54”)
(3.54”)
90
90
15.9 15.9
(0.62”)
Interlocks
BFX50 00, BFX50 01 BFX50 02 BFX50 03
10 90 (3.54”) 15
(0.39”) (0.59”)
31.9
(1.15”)
(1.61”)
41
BFX50 02 BFX50 02
2-40
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
2
31.9 23
(1.15”) (0.90”)
(1.61”)
(1.61”)
41
41
G222, G272 latch G454, G455 manual closing BFX80 sealing cover
35
(1.38”)
45 20 45
(1.77”) (0.79”) (1.77”) 4.5
32.1 (0.18”)
29.1 (1.26”)
(1.14”)
(1.52”)
38.7
(1.57”)
(1.54”)
39.2
40
(0 4.2
(0 4.2
”)
”)
90 90 100 90
.16
.16
Ø
Ø
80 (3.15”)
92 (3.62”)
83 (3.27”)
71 (2.79”)
35 35
BFX31 01 (1.38”) BFX32 01
(1.38”)
(0.98”)
(0.47”)
(1.14”)
24.8
(0.39”)
28.9
(0.67”)
(0.63”)
13.6 (0.53”)
17
16
16.5 (0.65”)
11.3
(0.44”)
25 10 9.7
11.5 (0.98”) 45 Ø4.3 (0.39”) (0.38”)
(0.83”)
(0.57”)
Ø4.3
(0.83”)
16 (0.63”)
(0.17”)
21
31.8
(2.95”)
(1.77”)
(3.38”)
(1.25”)
75
45
86
11.6
(0.46”)
Ø4.3
(0.17”)
35
(1.38”) Ø3.5
(0.14”)
2-41
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(2.38”)
60.6
30
(1.18”)
❶
31.9 102 50
(1.25”) (4.01”) (1.97”)
(2.68”)
68
Terminal protection
G363 G527, G529
35.2 127.5 56.5 185
(1.38”) (5.02”) (2.22”) (7.28”) 167 83
(4.61”)
(3.81”)
117
96.7
2-42
Contactors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
2
(4.61”)
117
E1 E2
85
PARALLEL POLE BAR A B C (3.35”)
BA1594 45 (1.77”) 32 (1.26”) Ø14 (0.55”) CONTACTOR TYPE A
BA1720 53 (2.09”) 50 (1.97”) Ø18 (0.71”) B115 - B145 - B180 221 (8.70”)
B250 - B400 255 (8.86”)
B500 - B630 300 (11.81”)
2-43
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC
BG06 A - BG09 A - BGF09 A - BGP09 A - BG12 A BF26 A - BF32 A - BF38 A B1250 24 - B1600 24...
BF09 A - BF12 A - BF18 A - BF25 A BF50 - BF110
...10 ...01 B115 - B630 1000
The input electronic circuit
2 A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5 13 A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5 21
L1 L2 L3 of the contactor coil is
L1 L2 L3 designed and tested
A1 1 3 5 A1 according to IEEEC 62.41
standards and can
withstand a 10kV impulse
voltage (1.2/50μs) with 50
Joule energy.
The use of an auxiliary
A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22 reduced voltage
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 A2 2 4 6 A2 transformer is
T1 T2 T3 recommended for higher
T1 T2 T3 values.
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC
BG06 D - BG09 D - BGF09 D - BGP09 D - BG12 D BF09 D - BF12 D - BF18 D - BF25 D
BG06 L - BG09 L - BGF09 L - BGP09 L - BG12 L BF09 L - BF12 L - BF18 L - BF25 L
...10 ...01 ...10 ...01
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 21
A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
A1 13
14
A2
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
2-44
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC
BG09 T4 A - BGF09 T4 A - BGP09 T4 A B1250 4 - B1600 4
BF09 T4 A - BF38 T4 A
BF50 40 - BF65 40 - BF80 40 - BFD80 40
B115 4 - B630 1000 4 L1 L2 L3 L4 2
L1 L2 L3 L4
A1 1 3 5 7 A1
A2 2 4 6 8 A2
T1 T2 T3 T4
T1 T2 T3 T4
The input electronic circuit of the contactor coil is designed and tested according to
IEEEC 62.41 standards and can withstand a 10kV impulse voltage (1.2/50μs) with
50 Joule energy.
The use of an auxiliary reduced voltage transformer is recommended for higher values.
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC
BG09 T4 D - BGF09 T4 D - BGP09 T4 D BF09 T4 D - BF38 T4 D BF65C 40 - BF80C 40 - BFD80C 40
BF09 T4 L - BF38 T4 L
L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4
A1 1 3 5 7 A1 1 3 5 7 A1 1 3 5 7
A2 2 4 6 8 A2 2 4 6 8 A2 2 4 6 8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POLES WITH 4NC MAIN POLES
BG09 T2 A BF09 T2 A - BF18 T2 A - BF26 T2 A - BF38 T2 A BF18 T0 A - BF26 T0 A
1 R1 R3 3 R1 1 3 R3 R1 R3 R5 R7
A1 NO NC NC NO A1 NC NO NO NC A1 NC NC NC NC
A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 R2 2 4 R4 A2 R2 R4 R6 R8
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POLES WITH 4NC MAIN POLES
BG09 T2 D BF18 T2 D - BF26 T2 D - BF38 T2 D BF18 T0 D - BF26 T0 D
BF18 T2 L - BF26 T2 L - BF38 T2 L BF18 T0 L
1 R1 R3 3 R1 1 3 R3 R1 R3 R5 R7
A1 NO NC NC NO A1 NC NO NO NC A1 NC NC NC NC
A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 R2 2 4 R4 A2 R2 R4 R6 R8
CONTROL RELAYS IN AC
BG00 40 A - BGF00 40 A BG00 31 A - BGF00 31 A BG00 22 A - BGF00 22 A BF00 04 A
BF00 40 A BF00 31 A BF00 22 A
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1 11 21 31 41
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2 12 22 32 42
CONTROL RELAYS IN DC
BG00 40 D - BGF00 40 D BG00 31 D - BGF00 31 D BG00 22 D - BGF00 22 D
BG00 40 L - BGF00 40 L BG00 31 L - BGF00 31 L BG00 22 L - BGF00 22 L
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2 12 22 32 42
2-45
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
52 62 54 62 54 64 52 62 72 82 54 62 72 82 54 64 72 82 54 64 74 82 54 64 74 84
52 64 52 62 74 84
~ -- ~
Rigid connections
SMX90 21 SMX90 22
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 11 A1 1 3 5 11
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 A2 2 4 6 12 A2 2 4 6 12
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
51 61 53 61 53 63 53 63 73 53 61 73 53 61 71 51 61 71
52 62 54 62 54 64 54 64 74 54 62 74 54 62 72 52 62 72
52 62 72 82 54 62 72 82 54 62 72 84 54 62 74 84 54 64 74 84
Auxiliary contact
G218
02 04 04 02
03
94 01
92 01
92 03
94
91 93 93 91
93 91 91 93
92
01 94
03 94
03 92
01
04 02 02 04
The termination of the G218 auxiliary contact has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting positions.
See the numbering in boldface for a correct interpretation.
2-46
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
Auxiliary contacts
BFX12 02 BFX12 11 BFX12 20 G418 10 G418 10A G418 01 G418 01D
G428 10 G428 10A G428 01 G428 01D
252 262 154 162 154 164 04 08 02 02
Mechanical latch
G481 20 G481 11 G481 02 G482 G222... - G272...
NO NO NO NC NC NC
114 124 114 122 112 122 114 111
A1
93 03 93 01 91 01 94 91
A2
94 04 94 02 92 02 92 E1 E2
113 123 113 121 111 121 112
NO NO NO NC NC NC
The termination of the BFX12... / G418... / G481... / G482 auxiliary contacts has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting
positions. See the numbering in boldface when the block is mounted on the left side of the contactor.
~ -- ~
8 132 132 58 66 68 56
T4
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
A1
41
01 73
13 73
13
42
02 74
14 74
14
53
113 53
113 81
21
81
54
or
21
114 54 82
or
114 22
82
22
61 61 93 A2
E1 E2
121 121 33
62
122 62
122 94
34
03 04
34
94 122
62 122
62
33
93 121
61 121
61 91 92
22
82
22 114
82 54 114
21
81
54
21 113
or
81 113
or
53 53
14
74 14 02
74 42
13
73 13 01
73 41
2-47
Contactors
Technical characteristics
±30°
0°
±3
A1
A2
Pos. A
2-48
Contactors
Technical characteristics
B180
B115
B145
B250
B310
B400
B630
BF09
B500
BF18
BF25
BF26
BF50
BF65
BF12
BF38
BF32
BF80
BF95
10
3
MILLION CYCLES
BG 09
2
BG 6
12
BG
0
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
3
10
30
2
25
20
50
300
200
5
1000
95 100
400
520 600
420 500
[A]
6
12
18
50
80
630
26
32
65
38
310
250
110
150
185
2-49
Contactors
Technical characteristics
2-50
Contactors
Technical characteristics
POLE CHARACTERISTICS
IEC Voltage
Ue
Contactor IEC Maximum current Ie [A] in categories:
DC1 with L/R 1ms DC3 - DC5 with L/R 15ms
2
and poles in series and poles in series
Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
110V BG06 3 6 8 -- 1 3 4 --
BG09 3 8 10 10 1 4 5 5
BG12 3 8 10 -- 1 4 5 --
BF09 6 12 15 16 2 7 11 12
BF12 6 13 16 16 2 8 12 16
BF18 6 13 16 18 2 8 12 13
BF25 6 16 18 -- 2 10 15 --
BF26 6 22 24 24 2 13 18 20
BF32 8 25 27 -- 2.5 15 20 --
BF38 8 32 34 34 2.5 18 23 23
BF50 8 50 55 60 3 25 30 45
BF65 8 60 60 70 3 30 35 50
BF80 8 80 85 100 3 40 60 75
BF95 8 80 85 -- 3 40 60 --
BF110 8 80 85 -- 3 40 60 --
160V BG06 -- 4 6 -- -- 2 3 --
BG09 -- 4 8 8 -- 3 4 4
BG12 -- 4 8 -- -- 3 4 --
220V BG06 - - 1 - - - 0.5 -
BG09 - - 2 2 - - 0.8 0.8
BG12 - - 2 - - - 0.8 -
BF09 4 8 10 12 0.75 1.5 5 7
BF12 4 8 11 12 0.75 1.5 6 7
BF18 4 8 11 13 0.75 1.5 6 8
BF25 4 8 12 -- 0.75 1.5 8 --
BF26 5 12 14 14 0.75 1.5 10 15
BF32 5 14 16 -- 1 3 12 --
BF38 5 20 26 26 1 4 15 15
BF50 6 36 45 50 1 5 20 25
BF65 6 36 50 60 1 5 25 30
BF80 6 40 55 70 1 7 35 40
BF95 6 40 55 -- 1 7 35 --
BF110 6 40 55 -- 1 7 35 --
300V BF09 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 5
BF18 -- -- -- 11 -- -- -- 5
BF26 -- -- -- 16 -- -- -- 10
BF38 -- -- -- 25 -- -- -- 12
BF65 -- -- -- 60 -- -- -- 25
BF80 -- -- -- 70 -- -- -- 35
2-51
Contactors
Technical characteristics
2-52
Contactors
Technical characteristics
POLES IN PARALLEL
It is possible to increase the electrical life by placing poles in series when using The value can be obtained by multiplying the rated current of one pole by the K
voltages which require 1 or 2 poles in parallel. factor given below; e.g.: if one pole carries 10A, three poles in parallel can carry
Poles in parallel do not increase the maximum operational current given in the 10 x 2.2 = 22A.
previous pages; that is, if one pole has a maximum operational current in DC5 of 8A, Therefore, the operating current is the one indicated in the tables, multiplied by the
two poles in parallel, it will always be 8A. K factor given below which takes into consideration the unequal current division on
With poles in parallel, it is possible to increase the rated contact capacity (Ith) only if the various poles.
the contactor opens and closes in no-load conditions or when used as resistance 2 POLES in parallel K = 1.6
shunts. 3 POLES in parallel K = 2.2
In this case, the contact capacity can be increased. 4 POLES in parallel K = 2.8
2-53
Contactors
Technical characteristics
Lamp Lamp Rated Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps for each contactor pole
features power current capacity
BG06 BF09 BF80
BG09 BF12 BF26 BF95
[W] [A] [μF] BG12 BF18 BF25 BF32 BF38 BF50 BF65 BF110 B115 B145 B180
INCANDESCENT 60 0.27 - 30 48 92 118 129 203 240 296 370 425 462
220/240V 50/60Hz 100 0.45 - 18 28 55 71 77 122 144 177 222 255 277
200 0.91 - 8 14 27 35 38 60 71 87 109 126 137
300 1.4 - 5 9 17 22 25 39 46 57 71 82 89
500 2.3 - 3 5 10 13 15 23 28 34 43 50 54
1000 4.6 - 1 2 5 6 7 11 14 17 21 25 27
MIXED LIGHT 100 0.45 - 20 33 57 77 88 122 144 177 244 311 377
220/240V 50/60Hz 160 0.72 - 12 20 36 48 55 76 90 111 152 194 236
250 1.13 - 8 13 23 30 35 48 57 70 97 123 150
500 2.3 - 4 6 11 15 17 23 28 34 47 60 73
1000 4.6 - 1 3 5 7 8 11 14 17 23 30 36
ELECTRONIC BALLAST FLUORESCENT Single mounting 16 / 18 0.1 (6.8) 48 80 160 220 220 400 450 500 750 1050 1200
220/240V 50/60Hz 32 / 36 0.18 (6.8) 27 44 88 122 122 222 250 277 416 583 666
50 / 58 0.27 (10) 17 29 59 82 82 148 166 185 277 388 444
Dual mounting 2x16 / 18 0.18 (10) 26 44 88 122 122 222 250 277 416 583 666
2x32 / 36 0.35 (10) 13 22 45 62 62 114 128 142 214 300 342
2x50 / 58 0.52 (22) 9 15 30 42 42 76 86 96 144 201 230
STANDARD FLUORESCENT Not corrected 15 0.35 - 25 42 74 100 114 157 185 228 314 400 485
220/240V 50/60Hz Single 20 0.37 - 24 40 70 94 108 148 175 216 297 378 459
mounting
40 0.44 - 20 34 59 79 90 125 147 181 250 318 386
65 0.7 - 12 21 37 50 57 78 92 114 157 200 242
115 1.5 - 6 10 17 23 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
140 1.5 - 6 10 17 23 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
Corrected 15 0.11 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 533 533 533
Single 20 0.16 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 533 533 533
mounting
40 0.24 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 458 500 520
65 0.4 7 15 25 40 50 57 125 128 128 275 300 312
115 0.7 18 6 10 15 23 23 50 50 50 133 133 133
140 0.7 18 6 10 15 23 23 50 50 50 133 133 133
DUO circuit 2 x 20 0.26 - 54 57 100 153 153 211 250 307 423 538 653
(lead-lag) 2 x 40 0.46 - 19 32 56 86 86 119 141 173 239 304 369
2 x 65 0.7 - 12 21 37 57 57 78 92 114 157 200 242
2 x 115 1.3 - 6 11 20 30 30 42 50 61 84 107 130
2 x 140 1.5 - 6 10 17 26 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
In = Rated lamp current.
For 220/240V circuits, either single-phase (between phase and neutral) or 2-wire (between phase and phase), the maximum number of lamps is as per the table.
For three-phase circuits with neutral 380/415V or 220/240V, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
For three-phase 380/415V circuits without neutral, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
Electrical life is 100,000 cycles up to 55°C.
Incorporated capacitor.
Total.
3-54
Contactors
Technical characteristics
Lamp Lamp Rated Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps for each contactor pole
features power current capacity
BG06 BF09 BF80
BG09 BF12 BF26 BF95
[W] [A] [μF] BG12 BF18 BF25 BF32 BF38 BF50 BF65 BF110 B115 B145 B180 2
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR Not corrected 50 0.61 - 10 16 26 36 44 65 73 82 122 172 196
220/240V 50/60Hz 80 0.8 - 7 12 20 27 33 50 56 62 93 131 150
125 1.2 - 5 8 13 18 22 33 37 41 62 87 100
250 2.2 - 3 4 7 10 12 18 20 22 34 47 54
400 3.4 - 2 3 5 6 7 11 13 14 22 30 35
700 5.5 - 1 3 4 4 7 8 9 13 19 21
1000 8 - 1 2 2 3 5 5 6 9 13 15
Corrected 50 0.29 7 15 25 40 60 60 128 128 128 258 342 342
80 0.42 8 13 22 35 52 53 95 107 112 178 250 285
125 0.7 10 8 14 22 31 35 57 64 71 107 150 171
250 1.3 18 4 7 12 16 19 30 34 38 57 80 92
400 2.1 25 2 4 7 10 11 19 21 23 35 50 57
700 3.6 40 - 2 4 6 6 11 12 13 20 29 33
1000 5.3 60 - 1 3 4 4 7 8 9 14 19 22
380/415V 50/60Hz Not corrected 2000 8 - - 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 8 9
Corrected 2000 5.5 35 - 1 2 2 4 5 5 8 11 13
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR Not corrected 150 1.8 - 3 5 8 12 15 22 25 27 41 58 66
220/240V 50/60Hz 250 3 - 2 3 5 7 9 13 15 16 25 35 40
400 4.7 - 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 15 22 25
600 7.1 - - 1 2 3 3 5 6 6 10 15 16
1000 10.4 - - 1 2 2 3 4 4 7 10 11
Corrected 150 0.83 20 - 9 14 19 21 45 45 45 90 120 120
250 1.5 36 - 5 7 10 11 25 25 25 50 66 66
400 2.4 48 - 3 5 6 7 16 18 18 31 43 50
600 3.5 68 - 2 3 4 4 10 12 12 20 28 34
1000 6.3 120 - 1 1 2 2 6 7 7 11 16 19
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR Not corrected 35 1.5 - 4 6 10 14 18 26 30 33 50 70 80
220/240V 50/60Hz 55 1.5 - 4 6 10 14 18 26 30 33 50 70 80
90 2.4 - 3 4 6 9 11 16 18 20 31 43 50
135 3.1 - 2 3 5 7 8 12 14 16 24 33 38
150 3.2 - 2 3 5 6 8 12 14 15 23 32 37
180 3.3 - 2 3 4 6 8 12 13 15 22 31 36
Corrected 35 0.31 20 - 6 10 14 18 45 45 45 120 120 120
55 0.42 20 - 6 10 14 18 45 45 45 120 120 120
90 0.63 30 - 4 6 9 11 30 30 30 80 80 80
135 0.94 40 - 3 5 7 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
150 1 40 - 3 5 6 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
180 1.2 40 - 3 4 6 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
METAL HALIDE Not corrected 35 0.3 - - 28 50 66 80 100 150 167 250 330 400
220/240V 50/60Hz 70 0.5 - - 16 28 40 50 60 90 100 150 200 240
150 1 - - 8 14 20 25 30 45 50 75 100 120
250 3 - - 3 5 7 9 13 15 16 25 35 40
400 3.5 - - 2 4 6 7 11 12 14 21 30 34
1000 10 - - 1 1 2 2 4 4 5 7 10 12
2000 17 - - - 1 1 2 2 2 4 6 7
Corrected 35 0.17 6 - 33 60 65 65 200 240 260 400 420 440
70 0.28 12 - 20 36 40 40 120 145 155 240 255 265
150 0.6 20 - 9 17 18 18 56 68 74 112 118 120
250 1.5 32 - 5 7 8 10 26 28 28 46 50 53
400 2 35 - 4 5 6 7 20 22 25 35 37 40
1000 5.8 95 - 1 1 2 2 6 7 8 12 12 13
2000 11.5 148 - - - 1 1 3 3 4 6 6 6
380/415V 50/60Hz Not corrected 2000 10.3 - - - - 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 7
3500 18 - - - - - - 1 1 1 2 3 4
Corrected 2000 6.6 60 - - 1 1 1 3 3 4 6 7 7
3500 11.6 100 - - - - - 2 2 2 3 3 4
For 220/240V circuits, either single-phase (between phase and neutral) or 2-wire (between phase and phase), the maximum number of lamps is as per the table.
For three-phase circuits with neutral 380/415V or 220/240V, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
For three-phase 380/415V circuits without neutral, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
Electrical life is 100,000 cycles up to 55°C.
3-55
Contactors
Technical characteristics
2-56
Contactors
Technical characteristics
G481…(3 types)+G483
G481…(3 types)+G483
BGX10 02 - BGX1011
BGX10 02 - BGX1011
BFX1002 - BFX1011 -
BFX1004 - BFX1013 -
BFX1002 - BFX1011 -
BFX1004 - BFX1013 -
BFX10222 BFX1031
BFX10222 BFX1031
BFX1201 - BFX1211
BFX1201 - BFX1211
G484 03 - G48412 -
G484 03 - G48412 -
G48102 - G48111 -
G48102 - G48111 -
Type of contactor Type of contactor
G218 + G280
G218 + G280
G350 - G354
G350 - G354
BFX50 01
BFX50 01
BGX1004
BGX1004
G48421
G48421
Built-in
Built-in
G218
G481
G218
G481
BG0601 A/D/F – – – – – – – – – BF26T4 A/D/L – – – –
BG0610 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – – BF3200 A/D/L – – – –
BG0901 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – BF3800 A/D/L – – – –
BG0910 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – – BF38T4 A/D/L – – – –
BG09 T4 A/D – – – – – – – – – – BF5000 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BG1201 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – BF5040 AC – – – – – – – – –
BG1210 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – – BF6500 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF0901 A/D/L – – BF6540 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF0910 A/D/L – – – BF8000 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF09 T4 A/D/L – – – BF8040 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF1201 A/D/L – – BF9500 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF1210 A/D/L – – – BF11000 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF12 T4 A – – – B11500 - B18000 – – – – – – – – – –
BF1801 A/D/L – – B115400 - B180400 – – – – – – – – – –
BF1810 A/D/L – – – B25000 - B40000 – – – – – – – – – –
BF18T4 A/D/L – – – B250400 - B400400 – – – – – – – – – –
BF2501 A/D/L – – B50000 - B630 1000 – – – – – – – – – –
BF2510 A/D/L – – – – B500400 - B6301000 4 – – – – – – – – – –
BF2600 A/D/L – – – –
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
2-57
Contactors
Technical characteristics
SELECTION GUIDE
Contactor IEC Maximum IEC Fuse IEC maximum operational power
rated permissible maximum at voltages:
current peak operational 220V
current voltage 230V 380V 415V 500V
gG 240V 400V 440V 660/690V
Type [A] [A] [V] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar]
BF09 A 12 500 690 16 4.5 7.5 9 10
BF12 A 16 550 690 25 6 11 12 14
BF18 A 22 1000 690 32 9 15 16 18
BF25 A 22 1000 690 32 9 15 16 18
BF26 A 30 1400 690 40 11 20 22 22
BF32 A 38 1700 690 50 14 25 27 30
BF38 A 42 1900 690 63 16 28 30 34
BF50 60 2500 1000 80 23 40 44 50
BF65 70 2700 1000 100 26 45 50 56
BF80 90 3000 1000 125 34 60 65 70
BF95 90 3000 1000 125 34 60 65 70
BF110 90 3000 1000 125 34 60 65 70
B115 130 3200 1000 200 50 87 93 115
B145 150 3400 1000 200 57 100 108 130
B180 170 3600 1000 250 65 112 122 150
B250 240 5100 1000 315 91 158 172 210
B310 265 5900 1000 315 105 184 200 245
B400 320 7500 1000 400 122 211 230 280
B500 500 9000 1000 630 190 330 360 430
B630 610 11000 1000 800 230 400 432 520
The use of contactors with the above operational powers is allowable only when the LIMITING INDUCTANCES
peak current, in the installation point of the power factor correction board, is lower The use of limiting inductances is imperative when the system inductances (line
than the values stated in the table. transformer and cables), upstream of the power factor correction panel, are not
If this condition is not verified, it is necessary to use limiting inductances or specific able to maintain the maximum connecting current within the limit value of the
contactors stated on page 2-14. Consult Customer Service (see contact details on contactor used.
inside front cover) to obtain detailed information on the correct use of contactors
without limiting inductances. FAST DISCHARGE RESISTANCES OF CAPACITORS
The use of the contactor, according to the wiring diagram given, allows the fast
discharge of the capacitors as well as the instantaneous disconnection of the
capacitors from the mains when the coil is de-energised.
The resistances, indicated in the following table, guarantee the discharge within a
maximum time of 2 seconds.
L1 L2 L3
FU1
R
0
1
1 3 5 .1 .1
KM1
2 4 6 .2 .2
U V W
2-58
Contactors
Technical characteristics
A1 13
14
A2
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
2-59
Contactors
Technical characteristics
A Phillips 2 2
Quick-connect Faston 1x6.35mm - 2x2.8mm ––
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 1.5...1.8
for contact terminals min-max lbft 0.59-0...74 1.03...1.33
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74
Phillips 2
Conductor section connectable with 1 or 2
wires min...max AWG stranded n° 18...12 16...10
Flexible w/o lug mm2 0.75...2.5 1...6
Flexible c/w boot-lace mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 1...4
ferrule
Flexible c/w spade lug mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 1...4
Terminal protection according to IEC/EN 60529 IP20
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40...+60 -50...+70
Storage temperature °C -55...+70 -60...+80
Maximum altitude m 3000
Operation position Normal On vertical plane
Allowable ±30°
Fixing Screw or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 0.75mm2 conductor section for BG00 or 1mm2 for BF00.
NO and NC auxiliary contacts are highly conductive; all SPST.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS BASED ON IEC/EN 60947-5-1 UTILIZATION CATEGORIES AND UL508/CSA C22.2 n°14
IEC/EN IEC/EN Conventional Rated operational current Ie [A] VA rating
designation utilization enclosed thermal at rated operational voltage Ue
category current Ithe
UL designation –– Thermal Maximum Amperes (AC) 60Hz Maximum
continuous VA
test current 120VAC 240VAC 380VAC 480VAC 600VAC
Alternating current [A] Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Direct current Maximum Amperes (DC) Make or Break
125VDC 250VDC 301VDC 400VDC 500VDC 600VDC 300V or less
P600 DC-13 5 1.1 0.55 0.2 0.31 0.27 0.2 138 138
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN.
Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-60
Contactors
Technical characteristics
2-61
Contactors
Technical characteristics
screw M3 M3 M3
A
Phillips 2 2 2
Quick-connect Faston –– 1x6.35mm or 2x2.8mm ––
Solder –– PCB solder pin ––
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 0.8...1 0.8...1
for pole and coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74
Phillips 2 2 2
Conductor section connectable
with 1 or 2 wires min...max
AWG stranded n° 18...12
Flexible w/o lug mm2 0.75...2.5
Flexible c/w boot-lace mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5
ferrule
Flexible c/w spade lug mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5
Terminal protection to IEC/EN 60529 IP20
AUXILIARY CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
Type of contact n° 1-NO or NC based on configuration (SPST)
Thermal current Ith A 10
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation AC A600
DC Q600
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40...+60
Storage temperature °C -55...+70
Maximum altitude m 3000
Operating Normal On vertical plane
position Allowable ± 30°
Fixing Screw or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Rated voltage Ui for BGP... types is 500V and 300V only for UL ratings.
Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 50,000 cycles.
Dimensions and drilling distances are given on page 2-32.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 0.75mm2 conductor section.
NO or NC auxiliary is highly conductive.
Other characteristics are the same as the mechanical characteristics of the poles.
2-62
Contactors
Technical characteristics
ELECTRICAL RATINGS BASED ON IEC/EN 60947-5-1 UTILIZATION CATEGORIES AND UL508/CSA C22.2 n°14
IEC/EN IEC/EN Conventional Rated operational current Ie [A] VA rating
designation utilization enclosed thermal at rated operational voltage Ue
category current Ithe
UL designation –– Thermal Maximum Amperes (AC) 60Hz Maximum
continuous VA
test current 120VAC 240VAC 380VAC 480VAC 600VAC
Alternating current [A] Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Direct current Maximum Amperes (DC) Make or Break
125VDC 250VDC 301VDC 400VDC 500VDC 600VDC 300V or less
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN.
Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-63
Contactors
Technical characteristics
A
Screw M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M4
Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Tightening torque Nm 1.5...1.8 1.5...1.8 1.5...1.8 1.5...1.8 2.5...3 2.5...3 2.5...3
for pole terminal min-max Ibft 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.8...2.2 1.8...2.2 1.8...2.2
Tightening torque Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74
Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Conductor section connectable
with 1 or 2 wires min...max
AWG stranded n° 16...10 16...10 16...10 16...10 14...6 14...6 14...6
Flexible w/o lug mm2 1...6 1...6 1...6 1...6 2.5...16 2.5...16 2.5...16
Flexible c/w insulated
boot-lace ferrule mm2 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-10 1-10 1-10
Flexible c/w insulated
spade lug mm2 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-10 1-10 1-10
Power terminal protection
according to IEC/EN 60529 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
AUXILIARY CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
Type of contact n° 1-NO or NC based on configuration (SPST) ––
Thermal current Ith A 10 ––
UL/CSA and AC A600 ––
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation DC Q600 ––
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -50...+70
Storage temperature °C -60...+80
Maximum altitude m 3000
Operating Normal On vertical plane
position Allowable ± 30°
Fixing Screw or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside IP20 protection on front.
front cover. For this other current value, use 16mm2 wire with spade cable terminal.
Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 200,000 cycles. NO or NC auxiliary is highly conductive. Other characteristics are the same as the mechanical
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 1mm2 conductor section. characteristics of the poles.
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT - Magnetic Motor Controllers per CSA certification File 54332 - Class 2411-03, to requirements of B44.1-04/SME A17.5-2004.
Contactors, three or four poles, open type, operating coil 600VAC or less, 380VDC or less.
Maximum horsepower ratings CSA
Type Single phase Three phase General
120V 240V 200-208V 240V 480V 600V use
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A]
BF12 1
/2 11/2 3 3 71/2 71/2 28
BF25 11/2 3 5 71/2 15 15 32
BF38 3 5 10 10 20 20 55
2-64
Contactors
Technical characteristics
ELECTRICAL RATINGS BASED ON IEC/EN 60947-5-1 UTILIZATION CATEGORIES AND UL508/CSA C22.2 n°14
IEC/EN IEC/EN Conventional Rated operational current Ie [A] VA rating
designation utilization enclosed thermal at rated operational voltage Ue
category current Ithe
UL designation –– Thermal Maximum Amperes (AC) 60Hz Maximum
continuous VA
test current 120VAC 240VAC 380VAC 480VAC 600VAC
Alternating current [A] Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Direct current Maximum Amperes (DC) Make or Break
125VDC 250VDC 301VDC 400VDC 500VDC 600VDC 300V or less
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN. Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-65
Contactors
Technical characteristics
Screw M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
A Metric
Allen 4 4 4 4 4
Tightening torque Nm 4...5
for pole terminal min-max Ibft 2.95...3.69
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74
Phillips 1
Conductor section connectable
with 1 or 2 wires min...max
AWG N° 14...2/0
Flexible w/o lug mm2 4...50 4...50 6...50 6...50 6...50
Flexible c/w lug mm2 4...50 4...50 6...50 6...50 6...50
Power terminal protection
according to IEC/EN 60529 IP20
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -50...+70
Storage temperature °C -60...+80
Maximum altitude m 3000
Operating Normal On vertical plane
position Allowable ± 30°
Fixing Screw or DIN rail 35mm and 75mm (IEC/EN 60715)
Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 200,000 cycles.
IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.
In addition to the main terminal which has dimensions as mentioned above, there is a second terminal entry 12.3x3.8mm (0.5x0.15in) for flexible busbars.
IP20 protection warranted to three-pole contactors only by mounting the G265 protection.
Only three-pole versions can be mounted on 35mm DIN rail.
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT - Magnetic Motor Controllers per CSA certification File 54332 - Class 2411-03, to requirements of B44.1-04/SME A17.5-2004.
Contactors, three or four poles, open type, operating coil 600VAC or less, 380VDC or less.
Maximum horsepower ratings CSA
Type Single phase Three phase General
120V 240V 200-208V 240V 480V 600V use
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A]
BF65 3 10 15 15 40 50 110
2-66
Contactors
Technical characteristics
2-67
Contactors
Technical characteristics
(0.6”) (0.8”) (0.8”) (1”) (1”) (1”) (1.4”) (1.6”) (2.4”) (3.1”) (3.1”)
B mm 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 10 10
A (0.16”) (0.16”) (0.16”) (0.2”) (0.2”) (0.2”) (0.23”) (0.23”) (0.23”) (0.39”) (0.39”)
Screw
+ hex
nut M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10 M12 2-M12 2-M12 2-M12
10 13 13 17 17 17 17 19 19 19 19
mm (0.39”) (0.51”) (0.51”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.75”) (0.75”) (0.75”) (0.75”)
Quick-connect (coil) Faston 1x6.35mm (0.25”) or 2x2.8mm (0.11”)
Coil with G371 Phillips 2 (Ø7mm/0.3in)
Pole tightening torque Nm 10 18 18 35 35 35 35 55 55 55 55
lbft 7.4 13.3 13.3 25.8 25.8 25.8 25.8 40.6 40.6 40.6 40.6
Coil tightening torque with G371 fitted Nm 1
lbft 0.74
Maximum conductor section mm 20x3 25x3 25x3 30x4 30x5 30x5 50x5 60x5 60x5 100x5 100x5
1 or 2 bars (0.2x0.12”) (1x0.12”) (1x0.12”) (1.2x0.16”) (1.2x0.2”) (1.2x0.2”) (2x0.2”) (2.4x0.2”) (2.4x0.2”) (4x0.2”) (4x0.2”)
N° 1 wire
with lug mm2 70 120 150 240 -- -- -- -- – – –
N° 2 wire
with lug mm2 -- -- -- -- 150 150 240 240 – – –
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -50...+70
Storage temperature °C -60...+80
Maximum altitude m 3000
Operating Normal On vertical plane
position Allowable ± 30°
Fixing Screw
Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 200,000 cycles.
Spanner/wrench size.
G371: Adapter to transform coil faston terminals into screw type.
2-68
Contactors
Technical characteristics
TYPE B630
B115 B145 B180 B250 B310 B400 B500 B630 B1250 B1600
1000
AC CONTROL 2
Supply voltage The electromagnet can operate either in AC or DC AC only
Rated control voltage V 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 48-480 48--480 48-480 110-240 110-240
Operating pick-up % Us 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110
voltage limits drop-out % Us 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60
Consumption in-rush VA/W 300 300 300 300 300 300 400 400 400 800 800
at 20°C holding VA/W 10 10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 45 45
Dissipation at 20°C W 10 10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 40 40
OPERATING TIMES
Making ms 60-100 60-100 60-100 80-120 80-120 80-120 110-180 110-180 110-180 120-210 300-450
Breaking ms 25-60 25-60 25-60 30-75 30-75 30-75 60-100 60-100 60-110 70-130 70-130
Life
Mechanical (million) AC/DC cycles 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5
Electrical (million) (Ie at 400V in AC3) cycles 1.1 1.1 1 1 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 – – –
MAXIMUM OPERATING RATE
Mechanical operations cy/h 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
PARTICULAR CHARACTERISTICS
Indicator For contactor open or closed status
Safety feature Closing operations are prevented without arc chutes
2-69
Contactors
Technical characteristics
To interlock two contactors B630 1000, use type G356 6 only. Interaxis B is 470-500mm (18.5-19.7”) for B630 1000, B1250 or B1600.
To interlock two contactors B1250 or B1600, it is imperative to use two pieces of The B1250 or B1600 cannot be interlocked with the other types of the B series.
type G356 6, one fixed on the left side and the other on the right; refer to Fig. 4.
KM1
KM1
B
G356 6 G356 6
B
G356...
A
G356...
B
KM2
KM2
2-70
Contactors
Technical characteristics
B115-B630
B115-B180
B250-B400
B500-B630 1000
Fig. 2
B115-B630
B115-B180
B250-B400
B500-B630 1000
2-71
Page 3-2 Page 3-4 Page 3-6
Page 3-9
SEC. - PAGE
Thermal overload relays
For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................ 3 - 2
For BF series contactors .................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
For B series contactors ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 6
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 8
Electronic relay
Thermistor protection relay ............................................................................................................................................... 3 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 3 - 10
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 3 - 11
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 3 - 12
P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Motor protection relays
Thermal overload relays
for BG series mini-contactors
Phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
Three poles (three phase) [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BG06, BG09, BG12 mini-contactors.
11 RF9 015 0.09 - 0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.116
3 11 RF9 023 0.14 - 0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.116
11 RF9 033 0.2 - 0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.116
11 RF9 05 0.3 - 0.5 1 2 3 1 0.116
11 RF9 075 0.45 - 0.75 1 2 3 1 0.116 0.37
11 RF9...
11 RF9 1 0.6 - 1 2 4 3 5 0.116 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RF9 1V5 0.9 - 1.5 2 4 6 5 0.116 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RF9 2V3 1.4 - 2.3 4 6 10 5 0.116 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RF9 33 2 - 3.3 4 10 10 5 0.116 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RF9 5 3-5 6 16 15 5 0.116 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RF9 75 4.5 - 7.5 8 20 25 5 0.116 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RF9 10 6 - 10 10 32 30 5 0.116 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RF9 15 9 - 15 16 40 45 5 0.116 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BG06, BG09, BG12 mini-contactors.
11 RFA9 015 0.09 - 0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.116
11 RFA9 023 0.14 - 0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.116
11 RFA9 033 0.2 - 0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.116
11 RFA9 05 0.3 - 0.5 1 2 3 1 0.116
11 RFA9 075 0.45 - 0.75 1 2 3 1 0.116 0.37
11 RFA9... 11 RFA9 1 0.6 - 1 2 4 3 1 0.116 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFA9 1V5 0.9 - 1.5 2 4 6 1 0.116 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFA9 2V3 1.4 - 2.3 4 6 10 1 0.116 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFA9 33 2 - 3.3 4 10 10 1 0.116 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFA9 5 3-5 6 16 15 1 0.116 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFA9 75 4.5 - 7.5 8 20 25 1 0.116 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFA9 10 6 - 10 10 32 30 1 0.116 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFA9 15 9 - 15 16 40 45 1 0.116 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
NOTE: Two-pole (single phase) versions are available on request. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
Add the letter “S” in the order code e.g. 11RF9015 is three pole; check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
11RFS9015 two pole. range.
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line consumption.
starting is considered.
NOTE: To facilitate connection between the auxiliary NC
contact of the RF...9 thermal relay and terminal A2 of the
contactor, insert the conductor into the appropriate conduit
as shown.
RF9...
RFA9...
Non phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
non single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
Three poles (three phase) [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BG06, BG09, BG12 mini-contactors.
11 RFN9 015 0.09 - 0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.123
11 RFN9 023 0.14 - 0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.123
3
11 RFN9 033 0.2 - 0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.123
11 RFN9 05 0.3 - 0.5 1 2 3 1 0.123
11 RFN9 075 0.45 - 0.75 1 2 3 1 0.123 0.37
11 RFN9...
11 RFN9 1 0.6 - 1 2 4 3 1 0.123 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFN9 1V5 0.9 - 1.5 2 4 6 1 0.123 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFN9 2V3 1.4 - 2.3 4 6 10 1 0.123 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFN9 33 2 - 3.3 4 10 10 1 0.123 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFN9 5 3-5 6 16 15 1 0.123 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFN9 75 4.5 - 7.5 8 20 25 1 0.123 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFN9 10 6 - 10 10 32 30 1 0.123 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFN9 15 9 - 15 16 40 45 1 0.123 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BG06, BG09, BG12 mini-contactors.
11 RFNA9 015 0.09 - 0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 023 0.14 - 0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 033 0.2 - 0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 05 0.3 - 0.5 1 2 3 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 075 0.45 - 0.75 1 2 3 1 0.123 0.37
11 RFNA9... 11 RFNA9 1 0.6 - 1 2 4 3 1 0.123 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFNA9 1V5 0.9 - 1.5 2 4 6 1 0.123 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFNA9 2V3 1.4 - 2.3 4 6 10 1 0.123 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFNA9 33 2 - 3.3 4 10 10 1 0.123 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFNA9 5 3-5 6 16 15 1 0.123 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFNA9 75 4.5 - 7.5 8 20 25 1 0.123 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFNA9 10 6 - 10 10 32 30 1 0.123 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFNA9 15 9 - 15 16 40 45 1 0.123 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
across the line starting is considered. range.
No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
consumption.
RFN9...
RFNA9...
Phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
Three poles (three phase) [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF09 - BF38 contactors.
Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base.
3 RF38 0016 0.1-0.16 0.25 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06
RF38 0025 0.16-0.25 0.5 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06 0.06 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.09-0.12
RF38 0040 0.25-0.4 0.5 1 3 1 0.160 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18
RF38 0063 0.4-0.63 1 2 3 1 0.160 0.09 0.12-0.18 0.12-0.18 0.18 0.18 0.25
RF38 0100 0.63-1 2 4 3 5 0.160 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.25-0.37 0.37-0.55
RF38 0160 1-1.6 2 4 6 5 0.160 0.18-0.25 0.37-0.55 0.37-0.55 0.55 0.55-0.75 0.75
RF38... RF38 0250 1.6-2.5 4 6 10 5 0.160 0.37 0.75 0.75 0.75-1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5
RF38 0400 2.5-4 4 6 15 5 0.160 0.55-0.75 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.1 1.5-2.2 2.2-3
RF38 0650 4-6.5 8 16 25 5 0.160 1.1-1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2-3 3 4
RF38 1000 6.3-10 10 20 40 5 0.160 1.5-2.2 3-4 4 4 4-5.5 5.5-7.5
RF38 1400 9-14 16 32 50 5 0.160 3 5.5 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5-7.5 11
RF38 1800 13-18 25 40 70 5 0.160 4 7.5 7.5-9 9 11 15
RF38 2300 17-23 25 50 90 5 0.160 5.5 11 9-11 11 11 18.5
RF38 2500 20-25 32 50 100 5 0.160 5.5 11 11 11 15 22
RF38 3200 24-32 40 63 120 1 0.160 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 30
RF38 3800 32-38 40 63 150 1 0.160 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 30
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 contactors.
Complete with G261 links.
Independent mounting with G270 base.
11 RF95 3 33 20 - 33 40 63 110 1 0.365 7.5 11-15 11-15 15-18.5 15-18.5 22-25
11 RF95 3 42 28 - 42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
11 RF95 3 50 35 - 50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
11 RF95 3 65 46 - 65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
11 RF95 3 82 60 - 82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RF95 3 95 70 - 95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RF95 3 110 90 - 110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
11 RF95 3...
AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 contactors.
Complete with G261 links.
Independent mounting with G270 base.
11 RFA95 3 33 20 - 33 40 63 110 1 0.365 7.5 11-15 11-15 15-18.5 15-18.5 22-25
11 RFA95 3 42 28 - 42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
11 RFA95 3 50 35 - 50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
11 RFA95 3 65 46 - 65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
11 RFA95 3 82 60 - 82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFA95 3 95 70 - 95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFA95 3 110 90 - 110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
11 RFA95 3...
UL RK5 fuse class for RF38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types. No standard powers ratings exist; select relay according to current
consumption.
NOTE: Two pole (single phase) versions are available on request. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
Add the letter “S” in the order code e.g. RF381000 is three pole; RFS381000 two check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
pole. range.
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line Certifications and compliance
starting is considered.
Certifications obtained:
Register of
c shipping
U L
L C E C R
u S A C O
Tipo s A C C S
RF38 –– ––
RF95
RFA95 ––
Certified products.
cULus – UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601)
as Auxiliary Devices – Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open
type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical
short circuit rating up to 82A FLA range and 10000 Amps RMS
for 95A and 110A FLA range; the trip current is 120% FLA.
CSA – CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary
Devices for use with magnetic contactors.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Non phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
non single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
Three poles (three phase) [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF09 - BF38 contactors.
Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base.
RFN38 0016 0.1-0.16 0.25 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06 3
RFN38 0025 0.16-0.25 0.5 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06 0.06 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.09-0.12
RFN38 0040 0.25-0.4 0.5 1 3 1 0.160 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18
RFN38 0063 0.4-0.63 1 2 3 1 0.160 0.09 0.12-0.18 0.12-0.18 0.18 0.18 0.25
RFN38 0100 0.63-1 2 4 3 1 0.160 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.25-0.37 0.37-0.55
RFN38 0160 1-1.6 2 4 6 1 0.160 0.18-0.25 0.37-0.55 0.37-0.55 0.55 0.55-0.75 0.75
RFN38...
RFN38 0250 1.6-2.5 4 6 10 1 0.160 0.37 0.75 0.75 0.75-1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5
RFN38 0400 2.5-4 4 6 15 1 0.160 0.55-0.75 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.1 1.5-2.2 2.2-3
RFN38 0650 4-6.5 8 16 25 1 0.160 1.1-1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2-3 3 4
RFN38 1000 6.3-10 10 20 40 1 0.160 1.5-2.2 3-4 4 4 4-5.5 5.5-7.5
RFN38 1400 9-14 16 32 50 1 0.160 3 5.5 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5-7.5 11
RFN38 1800 13-18 25 40 70 1 0.160 4 7.5 7.5-9 9 11 15
RFN38 2300 17-23 25 50 90 1 0.160 5.5 11 9-11 11 11 18.5
RFN38 2500 20-25 32 50 100 1 0.160 5.5 11 11 11 15 22
RFN38 3200 24-32 40 63 125 1 0.160 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 30
RFN38 3800 32-38 40 63 150 1 0.160 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 30
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 contactors.
Complete with G261 links.
Independent mounting with G270 base.
11 RFN95 3 42 28 - 42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
11 RFN95 3 50 35 - 50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
11 RFN95 3 65 46 - 65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
11 RFN95 3 82 60 - 82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFN95 3 95 70 - 95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFN95 3 110 90 - 110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
11 RFN95 3... Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 contactors.
Complete with G261 links.
Independent mounting with G270 base.
11 RFNA95 3 42 28 - 42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
11 RFNA95 3 50 35 - 50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
11 RFNA95 3 65 46 - 65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
11 RFNA95 3 82 60 - 82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFNA95 3 95 70 - 95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFNA95 3 110 90 - 110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
UL RK5 fuse class for RFN38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types. No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
11 RFNA95 3... consumption.
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
across the line starting is considered. range.
Phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
Three poles (three phase) [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Independent screw fixing or direct mounting on contactors:
B115-B145-B180 using G372 links
3 B250-B310-B400 using G373 links
RF200 100 60-100 100 160 500 1 2.150 18.5-25 33-51 37-55 37-59 45-63 59-92
RF200 125 75-125 125 200 500 1 2.150 22-37 40-63 45-63 51-75 55-80 75-110
RF200 150 90-150 160 250 500 1 2.150 25-45 51-80 55-80 55-92 63-100 92-140
RF200 200 120-200 200 315 500 1 2.150 37-59 75-100 75-100 75-110 92-140 129-184
Independent screw fixing or direct mounting on contactors:
B145-B180 using G375 links
B250-B310-B400 using G376 links
RF420 250 150-250 250 400 800 1 2.460 45-75 92-132 92-147 100-150 110-162 140-220
RF420 300 180-300 315 500 800 1 2.460 55-92 100-162 110-162 129-184 129-198 180-280
RF420 420 250-420 500 630 800 1 2.460 75-110 129-198 147-220 150-220 180-280 250-368
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be NOTE: For 1000V powers, consult Customer Service for information;
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, see contact details on inside front cover.
RF200... - RF420... across the line starting is considered. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
range.
RF200
RF420
Non phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
non single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
Three poles (three phase) [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Independent screw fixing or direct mounting on contactors:
B115-B145-B180 using G372 links
B250-B310-B400 using G373 links 3
RFN200 100 60-100 100 160 500 1 2.150 18.5-25 33-51 37-55 37-59 45-63 59-92
RFN200 125 75-125 125 200 500 1 2.150 22-37 40-63 45-63 51-75 55-80 75-110
RFN200 150 90-150 160 250 500 1 2.150 25-45 51-80 55-80 55-92 63-100 92-140
RFN200 200 120-200 200 315 500 1 2.150 37-59 75-100 75-100 75-110 92-140 129-184
Independent screw fixing or direct mounting on contactors:
B145-B180 using G375 links
B250-B310-B400 using G376 links
RFN420 250 150-250 250 400 800 1 2.460 45-75 92-132 92-147 100-150 110-162 140-220
RFN420 300 180-300 315 500 800 1 2.460 55-92 100-162 110-162 129-184 129-198 180-280
RFN420 420 250-420 500 630 800 1 2.460 75-110 129-198 147-220 150-220 180-280 250-368
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be NOTE: For 1000V powers, consult Customer Service for information;
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, see contact details on inside front cover.
RFN200... - RFN420... across the line starting is considered. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
range.
RFN200
RFN420
Front IP20 protection is warranted to contactor-thermal relay connections. cULus – UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601)
Independent mounting base for any RF95 relay. as Auxiliary Devices for thermal overload relays.
Remove the links fixed on RF...95 and use those supplied with the base. CSA – CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Kits for
Replace with voltage digit. industrial control equipment.
RFX38 04 Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 24V / 48V / 110-125V / 220-240V / 380-415V.
Replace with the required alphanumeric symbol. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1,
Each package contains 100 pieces of the same symbol. UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Combinations G372
G373
G375
11 G228 11 G244 G376
G262
(per RF...95 3)
G270
G361
G363
RF...200
RF...420
RFX38 01
G233
RF...95 3
RFX38 04
G228
RF...9 G244
3958...
RB6
RF...38
RFX38 01
BF26-BF38
BF09-BF25
RFX38 02
RFX38 03
RF...38
RF...38
Thermistor protection relay Order code Rated auxiliary Qty Wt. General characteristics
supply voltage per The DRPT is a thermal protection relay for motors
pkg equipped with thermistor PTC sensors immersed in the
[V] n° [kg] winding heads. The maximum number of thermistors to
be used is limited by the resistance of all the sensors
DC supply (version for 35 mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715). connected in series; total ohmic value is not to exceed
31 DRPTC 24 24VDC 1 0.269 1.5kΩ at 25°C.
AC supply (version for 35 mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715). The DRPT type has fail-safe operation: the protective
feature trips even in the case the PTC circuit is
31 DRPT 24 24VAC 1 0.269 disconnected or there is a lack of voltage.
31 DRPT 110 110VAC 1 0.269 Resetting is manual or automatic.
31 DRPT 220 220-240VAC 1 0.269
Operational characteristics
ACCESSORY – Supply circuit
Order code Description Qty Wt • Rated frequency: 50-60Hz for AC types only
per • Operational limits: 0.85-1.1 Us
31 DRPT... pkg • Maximum dissipation: 2.5W
n° [kg] • Connection: permanent.
– Measuring circuit
31 CE106 Adapter for screw 10 0.008 • Type of connectable PTC sensor: According to
fixing of DRPT relay DIN 44081
on mounting plate. • Total PTC resistance at 25°C: ≤1.5kΩ
Galvanic isolation between supply and measuring circuits does not exist. • Tripping resistance: 2.7-3.1kΩ
• Resetting resistance: 1.5-1.8kΩ
• Voltage at PTC terminals: ≤ 2.5VDC.
– Remote resetting
• Control: NC contact opening
• Contact voltage: 5VDC
• Current consumption: about 1mA.
– Relay output
• Arrangement: 1 relay with 2 changeover contacts
• Rated operational voltage Ue: 250VAC
• Conventional free air thermal current Ith: 5A
• Designation to IEC/EN 60947-5-1: B300
• Mechanical life: 50x106 cycles
• Electrical life (with rated load): 2x105 cycles.
– Indications
• Green LED indicator for power ON
• Red LED indicator for relay state TRIP
– Connections
• Conductor section 2x1.5mm2 with ferrule (max)
• Tightening torque: 0.8-1.2Nm.
– Ambient conditions
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C
• Storage temperature: -30...+80°C.
– Housing
• Snap on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
• For screw fixing, use CE106 adapter
• Degree of protection
– IP40 housing
– IP20 terminals.
RFX38 04 base c/w RF...38 thermal relay G270 base c/w RF...95 thermal relay
45 88.4 55
(1.77”) (3.48”) 102
(2.16”)
34 (4.01”)
7.9 14.6 .2 83 9.7 16.5 .2
(0.31”) (0.57”) (1.34”) Ø4 16”) (3.27”) (0.38”) (0.65”) 43 Ø4 16”) 95.4
(0. (1.69”) (0. (3.75”)
(2.89”)
(2.77”)
73.5
(3.35”)
70.3
(3.11”)
85
3
79
7.9 14.6
(0.31”) (0.57”)
11 16.5
(0.43”) (0.65”)
RF...200 thermal relay with links G372 and G373
127.5 166.1
(5.02”) (6.54”)
40 40
23.8 (1.57”) 122
(0.94”) (1.57”)
(4.80”)
G372
G373
(1.52”)
38.6
.4
Ø5 21”)
(0.
(6.77”)
172
(2.91”)
(4.46”)
113.4
74
M8
20 56.5
(0.79”) (2.22”)
40 40
(1.57”) (1.57”)
.4
Ø5 21”)
(0.
(7.46”)
189.6
(4.77”)
(2.91”)
121.2
74
M1
25 0 56.8
(0.98”) (2.24”)
47.5 47.5
(1.57”) (1.57”)
(1.41”)
26.7
35.8
35.8
(3.70”)
(3.30”)
79
94
84
Ø4.5
(0.18”)
3-10
Motor protection relays
Wiring diagrams
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5
96 98 2 4 6 96 98 2 4 6 3
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
RESET
STOP
TEST
TEST
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5
96 98 2 4 6 96 98 2 4 6 96 98 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
TEST
95 97
1 3 5
2 4 6
96 98
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
A2 2 4 6
R
RESET
TEST
E1 G228... 95 97 1 3 5
RF...
E2 96 98 2 4 6
L
L1
T1 T2 T3
F1
TEST
1 3 5 A1 T1 T2 S1 11 21
RESET
K1 K1 T2
S1
2 4 6 A2 DRPT 12 14 22 24
ON
S2
TRIP
12
S3 K1 11
M1
14
Rmax =1.5kΩ (25°C) 22
K1 21
24
3-11
Motor protection relays
Technical characteristics
Phase failure/single phase sensitive hand reset RF9 RF38 RF95 RF200 RF420
Phase failure sensitive automatic reset RFA9 RFN38 RFA95 RFN200 RFN420
Non phase failure/non single phase sensitive hand reset RFN9 RFN95
Non phase failure/non single phase sensitive automatic reset RFNA9 RFNA95
POWER CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 1000 1000
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8 6 8 6 6
3 Frequency limit Hz 0-400 0-400 0-400 50-60 50-60
Operational range from A 0.09 0.1 14 60 150
to A 15 38 110 200 420
Tripping class 10A
Particular characteristics Test button - Trip indicator
Connection Direct With current
transformers
Yoke
Terminals Type Screw and washer clamp Screw and flat washer
Screw M4 M4 M5 M8 M10
Terminal width mm 9.8 12.6 9 20 25
Phillips n° 2 2 2 13mm 18mm
Tightening torque Nm 2.3 2...2.5 3.9 18 35
for power terminals lbft 1.7 1.5...1.8 2.88 13.3 25.9
Maximum conductor section connectable
AWG N° 10 8 2 -- --
Flexible w/o lug mm2 6 10 35 -- --
Flexible c/w lug mm2 10 6 -- 150 2 x 150
Bar mm -- -- -- 25 x 3 30 x 5
Dissipation per phase W 0.7-2.4 0.7-2.4 2.0-4.2 0.7-2.4 0.7-2.4
AUXILIARY CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
Available NO n° 1
contacts NC n° 1
IEC rated insulation voltage V 690
IEC conventional free air A 10
thermal current Ith
Terminals with Screw M3.5
screw and washer Terminal width mm 8
Phillips n° 1 2 1 2 2
Maximum conductor section connectable
Flexible w/o lug mm2 2.5
Flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5
Tightening torque Nm 1 0.8...1 1 0.8...1 0.8...1
for auxiliary terminals lbft 0.74 0.59...0.74 0.74 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation B600 - P600 B600-R300 B600-P600 B600-R300 B600-R300
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperatureo °C -20...+55 -25...+60 -20...+55 -25...+60 -25...+60
Storage temperature °C -55...+70 -50...+70 -55...+70 -50...+70 -50...+70
Compensation temperature °C -15...+55 -20...+60 -15...+55 -20...+60 -20...+60
Maximum altitude m 3000
Operation position Normal On vertical plane
Allowable ±30°
Mounting On contactor or separately
With manual and automatic resetting.
For currents higher than 420A, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Standard supplied.
Metric wrench/spanner.
C600-R300 for automatic reset type.
3-12
Motor protection relays
Technical characteristics
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100 100
1min 1min
COLD COLD
HOT HOT
10 10
1
1 x Ie [A] 1.15 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A]
1.05 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10
1 10
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100
100 COLD
1min
1min
COLD
HOT
HOT 10
10
1
1 1.15 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A]
1.05 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A] 1 10
10
1
Tripping times can have a ±20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve values above.
3-13
Page 4-2 Page 4-5
Direct-on-line starters in
non-metallic enclosure complete
with or without thermal relay
Versions with RESET or
START/STOP pushbuttons
Non-metallic enclosures for
customer-assembled starters
Reversing and changeover
contactor assemblies
Star-delta starters, open frame and
in non-metallic enclosure versions.
SEC. - PAGE
Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line - Non reversing
Enclosed with thermal relay ............................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Enclosed without thermal relay .......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Combinations .................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 10
Reversing contactor assemblies
With BG series mini-contactors ....................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
With BF series contactors ................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 5
Changeover contactor assemblies
With BG series mini-contactors ....................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Star-delta starters
Open frame ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Enclosed ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Non-metallic enclosure for starters .................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Empty non-metallic enclosures
Enclosures ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 8
Accessories and spare parts .............................................................................................................................................. 4 - 8
Combinations .................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4 - 16
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 4 - 20 P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Electromechanical starters
Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line.
Non reversing three phase
Enclosed with thermal Order code Relay IEC technical Qty Wt Components
overload relay adj characteristics per Starter enclosure Contactor Thermal Auxiliary
range (≤440V) pkg relay contact
Ie kW block
[A] [A] [kW] n° [kg]
Starters with Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons .
M0 P009 121 0.6-1 1 0.18-0.25 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 1 ––
M0 P009 121V5 0.9-1.5 1.5 0.37 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 1V5 ––
M0 P009 122V3 1.4-2.3 2.3 0.55-0.75 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 2V3 ––
4 M0 P009 1233 2-3.3 3.3 1.1 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 33 ––
M0 P...12 M0 R...12 M0 P009 125 3-5 5 1.5-2.2 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 5 ––
M0 P009 1275 4.5-7.5 7.5 2.2-3 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 75 ––
M0 P009 1210 6-10 10 3-4 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 10 ––
M0 P012 1215 9-15 12 5.5 1 0.760 M0 PA BG12 10A RF9 15 ––
M1 P009 12A4 0.63-1 1 0.25 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0100 ––
M1 P009 12A5 1-1.6 1.6 0.37-0.55 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0160 ––
M1 P009 12A6 1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0250 ––
M1 P009 12A7 2.5-4 4 1.1-1.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0400 ––
M1 P...12 M1 R...12
M1 P009 12A8 4-6.5 6.5 2.2-3 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0650 ––
M1 P009 12A9 6.3-10 10 3-4 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 1000 ––
M1 P009 12B0 9-14 13 5.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 1400 ––
M1 P018 12B1 13-18 18 7.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF18 10A RF38 1800 ––
M2 P025 12B2 17-23 23 11 1 1.220 M2 PA BF25 10A RF38 2300 ––
M2 P025 12B3 20-25 25 11 1 1.220 M2 PA BF25 10A RF38 2500 ––
M2 P032 12B4 24-32 32 15 1 1.300 M2 PA BF32 00A RF38 3200 G418 10
M25 P038 12B5 32-38 38 18.5 1 2.880 M25 PA BF38 00A RF38 3800 G418 10
M2 P...12 M2 R...12 M3 P050 12B6 35-50 50 18.5-22 1 3.760 M3 PA BF50 00 RF95 3 50 G418 10
M3 P065 12B7 45-65 65 30 1 3.760 M3 PA BF65 00 RF95 3 65 G418 10
M3 P080 12B8 60-82 80 37-45 1 3.760 M3 PA BF80 00 RF95 3 82 G418 10
M3 P095 12B9 70-95 95 45 1 3.760 M3 PA BF95 00 RF95 3 95 G418 10
Starters with Reset pushbuttons .
M0 R009 121 0.6-1 1 0.18-0.25 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 1 ––
M0 R009 121V5 0.9-1.5 1.5 0.37 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 1V5 ––
M0 R009 122V3 1.4-2.3 2.3 0.55-0.75 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 2V3 ––
M0 R009 1233 2-3.3 3.3 1.1 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 33 ––
M25 P038 12 M0 R009 125 3-5 5 1.5-2.2 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 5 ––
M0 R009 1275 4.5-7.5 7.5 2.2-3 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 75 ––
M0 R009 1210 6-10 10 3-4 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 10 ––
M0 R012 1215 9-15 12 5.5 1 0.720 M0 RA BG12 10A RF9 15 ––
M1 R009 12A4 0.63-1 1 0.25 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0100 ––
M1 R009 12A5 1-1.6 1.6 0.37-0.55 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0160 ––
M1 R009 12A6 1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0250 ––
M1 R009 12A7 2.5-4 4 1.1-1.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0400 ––
M1 R009 12A8 4-6.5 6.5 2.2-3 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0650 ––
M25 R038 12 M1 R009 12A9 6.3-10 10 3-4 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 1000 ––
M1 R009 12B0 9-14 13 5.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 1400 ––
M1 R018 12B1 13-18 18 7.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF18 10A RF38 1800 ––
M2 R025 12B2 17-23 23 11 1 1.165 M2 RA BF25 10A RF38 2300 ––
M2 R025 12B3 20-25 25 11 1 1.165 M2 RA BF25 10A RF38 2500 ––
M2 R032 12B4 24-32 32 15 1 1.260 M2 RA BF32 00A RF38 3200 G418 10
M25 R038 12B5 32-38 38 18.5 1 2.600 M25 RA BF38 00A RF38 3800 G418 10
M3 R050 12B6 35-50 50 18.5-22 1 3.410 M3 RA BF50 00 RF95 3 50 G418 10
M3 R065 12B7 46-65 65 30 1 3.410 M3 RA BF65 00 RF95 3 65 G418 10
M3 R080 12B8 60-82 80 37-45 1 3.410 M3 RA BF80 00 RF95 3 82 G418 10
M3 R095 12B9 70-95 95 45 1 3.410 M3 RA BF95 00 RF95 3 95 G418 10
M3 P...12
Complete order code with coil voltage digit
(if 50/60Hz) or with voltage digit followed by 60 Operational characteristics
(if 60Hz).
Standard voltages are as follows:
Certifications and compliance
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V Refer to page 4-3 for details.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V). Special M3... versions
Example: M0 R009 12 024 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type Refer to page 4-3 for details.
enclosure with Reset button, 9A/AC3 contactor with 24VAC
50/60Hz coil and 0.6-1A thermal overload relay.
M0 P009 12 024 60 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type UL/CSA HP ratings
enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset buttons , 9A /AC3 See page 4-4
contactor with 24VAC 60Hz coil and
0.6-1A thermal overload relay.
Protection fuses are to be mounted externally by the user.
M3 R...12
Certifications obtained:
– CSA certified for Canada and USA (cCSAus -
File 94157) as Magnetic Motor Controllers at
max 600VAC, max 15HP per single phase,
max 60HP three phase, max 125A with
general purpose enclosure.
– UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File
E93602) as Magnetic Motor Controllers –
Enclosed.
Markings:
Line (voltage and frequency value)
Amps (overload adjustment range)
Max HP (horsepower value)
Control (coil and frequency value)
Caution: Bonding between conduits must be
provided.
Reversing contactor Order code IEC Max. IEC Built-in Qty Wt General characteristics
assemblies Ie (AC3) power auxiliary per REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
≤440V AC3 contacts pkg Supplied complete, ready for quick mounting.
≤55°C 400V at The various versions are composed as follows:
≤55°C BGR... Screw termination, external mechanical
[A] [kW] NO NC n° [kg] interlock BGX50 00, power and auxiliary wiring.
BGT... Screw termination, built-in mechanical interlock
AC COIL. and power wiring only.
Terminals: clamp screw. BGTP... Rear PCB solder pin termination, built-in
External interlock with power and auxiliary wiring. mechanical interlock only.
11 BGR09 01 A 9 4 0 1 1 0.394 No thermal overload relay can be directly mounted to
BG... reversing contactor assemblies.
4
11 BGR... 11 BGR12 01 A 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.394
BFA... Screw termination, mechanical interlock
BFA009 42 9 4.2 0 1 1 0.760 BFX50 02 and power wiring.
BFA012 42 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.760 The thermal overload relay RF38... can be directly
BFA018 42 18 7.5 0 1 1 0.760 mounted to BFA... reversing contactor assemblies; for
selection, refer to section 3.
BFA025 42 25 12.5 0 1 1 0.760
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
Built-in interlock with power wiring only. Supplied complete, ready for quick mounting as follows:
11 BGT09 10 A 9 4 1 0 1 0.380 BGC09 T4Four-pole contactors with built-in mechanical
11 BGT12 10 A 12 5.7 1 0 1 0.380 interlock. No power or auxiliary wiring included.
Rear terminals: PCB solder pins. Operational characteristics
Built-in interlock only. Type Maximum IEC operational power
11 BGTP09 01 A 9 4 0 1 1 0.400 at ≤55°C (AC3)
230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
DC COIL. [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
BFA... Terminals: clamp screw.
External interlock with power and auxiliary wiring. BGR09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5
BGT09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5
11 BGR09 01 D 9 4 0 1 1 0.460
BGTP09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 –
11 BGR12 01 D 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.460
BGR12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5
Built-in interlock with power wiring only. BGT12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5
11 BGT09 10 D 9 4 1 0 1 0.445 BFA009 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.2
11 BGT12 10 D 12 5.7 1 0 1 0.445 BFA012 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10
Rear terminals: PCB solder pins. BFA018 4 7.5 9 9 10 10
11 BGT... Built-in interlock only. BFA025 7 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 11
11 BGTP09 01 D 9 4 0 1 1 0.460 at ≤40°C (AC1)
BGC09 T4 8 14 14 15 16 22
Maximum UL/CSA horsepower rating
Single phase Three phase
120V 240V 208V 240V 480V 600V
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
BGR09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 5
BGT09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 5
BGTP09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 -
11 BGTP... BGR12 ½ 1½ 3 3 7½ 10
BGT12 ½ 1½ 3 3 7½ 10
Changeover contactor Order code IEC Operating UL/CSA Qty Wt BFA009 ¾ 2 3 3 5 7½
current (AC1) General per BFA012 1 2 5 5 7½ 10
assemblies Use pkg BFA018 1 3 5 5 10 15
≤40°C ≤55°C ≤60°C BFA025 2 3 7½ 7½ 15 15
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] NOTE: BGR09, BGT09, BGR12, BGT12… types are UL Listed for USA
AC COIL. and Canada as “Magnetic Motor Controller – Reversing Contactors”. All
these are rated 20A general (purpose) use and suitable for use on a
Terminals: clamp screw. circuit capable of delivering more than 5kA symmetrical. Amps at 600V
Built-in interlock only. max when protected by fuses class K5 rated no more than 30A.
BGTP09 type is UL Recognized for USA and Canada as “Magnetic
11 BGC09 T4 A 20 18 15 20 1 0.365 Motor Controller – Component – reversing contactors”. Max HP
rating up to 300VAC only; rated 20A general (purpose) use.
DC COIL. BGC… types are UL Listed for USA and Canada as “Magnetic Motor
Terminals: clamp screw. Controller – Changeover contactor”.
11 BGC09 ... Built-in interlock only. No coil change or replacement is possible for any BG… types.
Reference stardards
Compliant with stardards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-9.
125.5 73.5
66.5
Components
Type Enclosure Contactors T/o Time Auxiliary contacts fitted Rigid Switch
relay relay on contactor: connec- disconnector
Line Delta Star Line Delta Star tions
M3P009 70 M3 PA70 BF09 10A BF09 01A BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31 GA016 A
M3P012 70 M3 PA70 BF12 10A BF12 01A BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31 GA025 A
M3P018 70 M3 PA70 BF18 10A BF18 01A BF12 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31 GA032 A
M3P025 70 M3 PA70 BF25 10A BF25 01A BF18 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31 GA040 A
M3P026 70 M3 PA70 BF26 00A BF26 00A BF18 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32 GA063 SA
M3P032 70 M3 PA70 BF32 00A BF32 00A BF25 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32 GA063 SA
M3P038 70 M3 PA70 BF38 00A BF38 00A BF25 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32 GA063 SA
Empty enclosures Order code Contactor type Thermal Degree Qty Wt Enclosure Maximum operating current
relay of per type (≤440V)
protect. pkg A
n° [kg] M0... 12
Enclosures with Start-Stop/Reset pushbuttons. M1... 18
M0PA BG06, BG09, RF9 IP65 1 0.490 M2... 32
BG12
M24N 38
M1PA BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.545
BF18A M25... 38
4 M2PA BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.715 M3... 110
BF32A General characteristics
M25PA BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.990 Enclosures are supplied with the following accessories:
M...PA M3PA BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP65 1 1.900 Accessory Type of enclosure
BF80, BF95,
M25 RA
M25 PA
M0 RA
M1 RA
M2 RA
BF110
M0 PA
M1 PA
M2 PA
Enclosures with Reset pushbutton. Description Type
M0RA BG06, BG09, RF9 IP65 1 0.445 Contact MX 20P 1
BG12 holder MX 21P 1 1 1
M1RA BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.500
BF18A Buttons: LPC B1176 1 1 1 1
- Start/Reset LPC B2104 1 1 1 1
M2RA BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.670 - Start
BF32A LPC B1113 1 1 1 1
M25RA BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.970 Contact for LPX C10 1 1 1 1
M3RA BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP65 1 1.850 Start button
BF80, BF95, Stop/Reset MX 10P 1 1
M...RA BF110 button MX 11P 1 1
Enclosures without external pushbuttons. extension
MX 12P 1 1 1 1
M0N BG06, BG09, RFA9 IP65 1 0.405 Unused hole MX 01 1 1 1 1
BG12 threaded plug
M1N BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.460 – M3 PA enclosure: 2 Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons,
BF18A 2 G285 auxiliary terminals and 1 MX30 mounting plate
M2N BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.640 – M3 RA enclosure: 1 Reset pushbutton,
BF32A 2 G285 auxiliary terminals and 1 MX30 mounting plate
M24N BG.../ IP65 1 0.625 – M3N enclosure: Supplied without accessories to be
BF09A...BF25A purchased separately including MX 30 mounting plate.
M25N BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.940 Enclosures can house the following devices:
M...N M0 = BG… with/without RF9
M3N BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP65 1 1.800 M1 = BF09A-BF12A-BF18A with/without RF38
BF80, BF95, M2 = BF25A-BF26A-BF32A, assemblies BFA…42
BF110 with/without RF38
To be purchased separately; refer to page 2-4 for contactor choice. M24N = BF25A-BF26A-BF32A, assemblies BGR/BGT/BGC
To be purchased separately. and BFA…42 without overload
Refer to pages 3-2 to -6 for thermal overload relay choice.
For use of the overload relay in the M24N, consult Customer Service; see M25 = BF26…BF38A, assemblies BGR/BGT/BGC and
contact details on inside front cover. BFA…42 with/without overload
Reversing contactor assemblies BGR…, BGT…, BFA…42 and changeover M3 = BF50…BF110 and all assemblies with/without
types BGC… can also be fitted in M24N and M25… types. See pages 4-4, overload.
4-13 and 4-15.
MX 31 metal mounting plate included. Operational characteristics:
MX 30 metal mounting plate included. – Cable entry:
To install eventual pushbuttons, selectors and/or other control
accessories, use the series and mount the relay contact • M0/M1//M2… - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 on
elements on the cover using the LPX AU120 mounting adapter. See enclosure top and bottom
section 7.
• M24N/M25… - 2 knockouts PG16/M25-PG29/M32
on enclosure top and bottom
Accessories and Order code Description Qty Wt • M3… - Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by customer
spare parts per – Ambient conditions:
pkg • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
n° [kg] • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
– Degree of protection: IEC IP65 for all; UL Type 1, 12,
MX 01 Threaded plug for unused holes, 10 0.007 4/4X for M0/M1/M2/M24N/M25… types and M3…UL
grey RAL7035 versions.
MX 10P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010 Special M3… versions
rod for M0 enclosure In addition to standard-indicated versions, cULus
MX 11P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010 certified starters and enclosures are available up to 52A -
rod for M1 enclosure motor control and 65A general use rating max (MX30
MX 12P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010 plate, earth/ground and neutral terminal plates are always
MX 20P
MX 21P rod for M2 enclosure included in this case).
Add suffix UL to the order code of enclosures
MX 20P Mounting base for LPX C... 5 0.014 e.g. M3N UL.
contact on M0 enclosure
Certifications and compliance
MX 21P Mounting base for LPX C... 5 0.014 Certifications obtained: EAC for all; for M3NUL type, UL
contact on M1, M2, M25 Listed for USA and Canada (cULus – File E300050) as
enclosure Industrial control panels; for M0/M1/M2PA/RA/N and
MX 30 Metal mounting plate for M3N 1 0.500 other M3…UL types, UL Listed for USA and Canada
MX 31 Metal mounting plate for M24N 1 0.400 (cULus – File E93602) under magnetic motor controllers
and M25 enclosures as Polymeric enclosures - and CSA certified for Canada
and USA (cCSAus – File 94157) as Non-metallic
enclosures. UL/CSA pending for M24N and M25… types.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN
60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA CS22.2 n°14; UL 508A and CSA
C22.1 for M3NUL type.
M3PA
M3RA
Maximum combinations for M0... and M1... starters in 2) Middle position 2 3) Lower position 3
enclosure Based on the enclosure type, in this position, the The STOP/RESET button is mounted in this position,
For the fitting of add-on blocks and electronic relays in user finds either the Start button or threaded plug. except for the enclosure without buttons.
the starters, consult our Customer Service; see contact Various actuators can be fitted in this This button activates the thermal overload relay via a
details on inside front cover. position, such as flush or extended buttons, mechanical actuator.
The enclosure cover can be equipped with various types selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated below. In eventual applications without thermal overload
of actuators and pilot lights, per following details: To fit the actuators (not required for 8 LP2T IL…P relay, this button can be removed and the hole
1) Upper position 1 pilot lights), the mounting base, type MX 20 for M0 closed up by the threaded plug MX 01.
The cover must be drilled in this position, with a enclosure, or type MX 21P for M1 enclosure, must
22.5mm hole, by the user and LPL... or 8 LP2T IL…P also be purchased. The contact or LED elements are
pilot light can be fitted. snapped onto this mounting base. 4
To fit the LPL... (not type 8 LP2T IL…P) pilot light No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and
head, the mounting base, type MX 20P for M0 8 LP2T Z...
enclosure or type MX 21P for M1 enclosure, must
also be purchased. The LED element is snapped onto
this mounting base.
No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P
and 8 LP2T Z...
m
.5m
17 1 x
LPX LP...
LPX LE...
Time relay TM... LPX LPS...
Protection relay PMV10 A440
LPL...
Level control relay LVM25 240 LPX C0... LPX C0...
Priority change relay LVMP 05 LPX C1... LPX C1...
(one only relay on the left LPX CS... LPX CS...
of the contactor)
MX 20P (M0) 8 LP2T IL...P
MX 21P (M1) 8 LP2T Z...
MX 01
1 LPC BL...
LPC QL...
2
LPC B...
LPC Q...
3
LPC S3...
MO... M1...
LPC S...
LPC SL1...
BF09A
BF12A
BF18A LPC B7...
LPC BL7...
BG...
LPC B73...
RF9 RF38
Maximum combinations for M2... starters in enclosure 2) Middle position 2 This button activates the thermal overload relay via a
For the fitting of add-on blocks and electronic relays in Based on the enclosure type, in this position, mechanical actuator. In eventual applications without
the starters, consult our Customer Service; see contact the user finds either the Start button or threaded thermal overload relay, this button can be removed
details on inside front cover. plug. and the hole closed up by the threaded plug MX 01.
The enclosure covers can be equipped with various Various actuators can be fitted in this Various actuators can be fitted in this
types of actuators and pilot lights, per following details: position, such as flush or extended buttons, position, such as flush or extended buttons,
1) Upper position 1 selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the side selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the drawing
The cover must be drilled in this position with a figure. below. To fit the actuators (not required for
22.5mm hole by the user; LPL... or 8 LP2T IL…P To fit the actuators (not required for 8 LP2T IL…P 8 LP2T IL…P pilot light), the mounting base type
pilot light can be fitted. pilot light), the mounting base type MX 21P must MX 21P must also be purchased. The contact or LED
4 To fit the LPL... pilot light, the mounting base type also be purchased. elements are snapped onto this mounting base.
MX 21P must also be purchased. The LED element is The contact or LED elements are snapped onto this No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and
snapped onto this mounting base. mounting base. 8 LP2T Z...
No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and 4) Upper position 4
8 LP2T Z... 8 LP2T Z... The cover must be drilled in this position
3) Lower position 3 with a 22.5mm hole by the user whenever an
The STOP/RESET button is mounted in this position, external handle is needed for a switch
except for the enclosure without buttons. disconnector fitted in the enclosure.
mm x1
35 PMV20/30/40/50/55/60/70... protection relay
PMF20 A... protection relay
or PMA20/30... protection relay
m LMV20... level control relay GAX63
.5m (one relay only on right side of the contactor)
17 GAX63 B
2 xx
ma
LPX LP...
LPX LE...
LPX LPS...
Time relay TM... LPL...
Protection relay PMV10 A440
Level control relay LVM25 240 LPX C0... LPX C0...
Priority change relay LVMP 05 LPX C1... LPX C1...
(two relays or one only on left LPX CS... LPX CS...
8 LP2T IL...P
and one on right side 8 LP2T Z...
of the contactor)
MX 21P
4 MX 01
1 LPC BL...
LPC QL...
2
LPC B...
LPC Q...
3
MX 21P
LPC B7...
LPC BL7...
ON
I
GAX7 090
OFF
GA016 A
GA025 A
RF38 RF38 RF38 GA032 A LPC B6...
103
156
82,6
BFX50 02
ON
I
OFF
BFX50 01
103
156
156
148
37,5
BFX50 02
ON
I
OFF
RF38... RF38...
RF38...
BF09A...BF38A with
BFX50 01
92.7
92.7
80.5
244
244
146
185 185
89
125.5 73.5
89
89
66.5
20.2
CN
RF95
RF38
4
(6.89”)
(7.24”)
175
184
(7.95”)
(7.60”)
202
193
49
(1.93”)
(0.76”)
49
19.4
(1.93”)
(0.76”)
19.4
PG13.5 / M20 knockouts
on top and bottom
PG13.5 / M20 knockouts
on top and bottom
M2 M24N
162.3 (6.39”)
110 (4.33”)
169.4 (6.70”)
55 (2.16”)
Ø4.5 (0.18”) 148.5 (5.85”)
175 (6.89”) 98.5 (3.88”)
210 (8.27”)
234 (9.21”)
225 (8.86”)
28
PG16 / M25
PG13.5 / M20 PG29 / M32
PG16/M25 knockouts on top
knockouts on top and bottom and bottom
184 (7.24”)
4-16
Electromechanical starters
Dimensions [mm (in)]
184 (7.24”)
210 8.27”)
52 (2.05”)
(1.10”)
28
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
148,5 (5.85”)
knockouts on top
and bottom
238 (9.37”)
280 (11.02”)
4.4 4.4 6
”)
(0 Ø4
.16
4.4 4.4
.16
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
50
58
58
50
BGTP... with rear PCB solder pins and internal interlock BFA...42 with external interlock
88 4.4 4.4
(0 4.2
”)
(3.54”) (3.54”)
(0.05”)
Ø1.4❶
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
(2.09”)
58
50
53
(3.27”)
(2.79”)
83
71
9.7 8.5 56
(0.38”) (0.33”) (2.20”)
8.5 5.6
(0.33”) (0.22”)
8.5 35
(1.38”)
(0.33”) Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm (0.07-0.08”).
4-17
Electromechanical starters
Dimensions [mm (in)]
”)
(0 Ø 4
4.4 4.4
.16
(0.17”) (0.17”)
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
58
50
8.5 34.9 56
9.7
4 (0.38”)
8.5
(0.33”)
(0.33”) (1.37”) (2.20”)
8.5
(0.33”)
15 (0.59”) 15 (0.59”)
16.1
(5.55”)
(6.22”)
141
158
(1.94”)
49.4
STARTER TYPE A B C
NYF115 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF145 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF180 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF250 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
NYF310 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
NYF400 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
4-18
Electromechanical starters
Dimensions [mm (in)]
4
(8.66”)
220
(0.51”)
13
205
(8.07”)
(5.75”)
(7.28”)
146
185
244
(9.61”)
4-19
Electromechanical starters
Wiring diagrams
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
Diagram 1 - Incorporated button control Diagram 2 - External button control Diagram 3 - Power connection
for 1-phase motors
A1 A1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 21 1 3 5 13 13 1 3 5
BFA...42 BGTP09...
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 21 A1 21 1 3 5 1 3 5 21 A1
A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 22 2 4 6 2 4 6 22 A2
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
KM1 KM2
A2 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 A2
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
4-20
Electromechanical starters
Wiring diagrams
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
4
KM2 KM3 KM1
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
21 21
S1 S1
22 22
13 53 13 53
S2 KM2 S2 KM2
14 54 14 54
1 1
63 13 63 13
KM2 KM1 KM2 KM1
64 14 64 14
17 17 17 17
KT1 KT1
(TM ST) (TM ST)
18 28 18 28
4 6 7 4 6 7
96 22 62 96 62 62
KM3 KM1 KM3 KM1
96 21 61
96 61 61
3 5 3 5
FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1 FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2 (TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
95 A2 A2 A2 A2 95 2 A2 A2 A2 A2
2
95 95
4-21
Electromechanical starters
Wiring diagrams
4 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
95
95
FR1
96
96
21
S1
22
13 53
S2 KM2
14 54
63 53
KM2 KM1
64 54
17 17
KT1
(TM ST)
18 28
62 62
KM3 KM1
61 61
KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
A2 A2 A2 A2
4-22
Electromechanical starters
Wiring diagrams
1 3 5
KM1
2 4 6
4
1 3 5
KM3
2 4 6
1 3 5
KM2
2 4 6
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 LINE
...V - ...Hz
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
95
95
FR1
96
96
21
S1
22
13 33
S2 KM2
14 34
13 53
KM2 KM1
14 54
17 17
KT1
(TM ST)
18 28
62 62
KM3 KM1
61 61
KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
A2 A2 A2 A2
4-23
Page 5-2 Page 5-3 Page 5-3
Wide input
voltage range: No jumpers or dip
208-500VAC switches
50/60Hz
Page 5-3
ADX
• Three phase control
• For severe duty, IEC starting current 5•Ie
• IEC rated starter current Ie 310A to1200A
ratings
• IEC rated motor power 160kW to 630kW at
380/415VAC
• Reduced voltage soft starter with torque
control, predisposed for external bypass
contactor
• Maximum starting current limitation Alarm and
• PC remote control supervision Torque event log
control
• Modbus-RTU and property ASCII
communication protocols
LCD screen and
• LCD backlit screen.
user-friendly
keypad for control
parameters and
programming in
Standard multilanguage
supplied RS232
and RS485
serial ports
SEC. - PAG.
Soft starters
ADXC type with integrated bypass relay ............................................................................................................................. 5 - 2
ADX...BP type for standard duty with integrated bypass contactor ...................................................................................... 5 - 3
ADX...B type for severe duty with integrated bypass contactor ............................................................................................ 5 - 3
ADX... type for severe duty predisposed for external bypass contactor ............................................................................... 5 - 3
Remote keypad and accessories ........................................................................................................................................ 5 - 4
Remote control software ................................................................................................................................................... 5 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 5 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 5 - 7
Technnical characteristics ............................................................................................... 5 - 8
P ROTECTION
CONTROL AND
M OTOR
Soft starters
Two phase control
ADXC type Order code IEC rated Rated motor Qty Wt General characteristics
starter power per ADXC… is a compact type of soft starter, 45mm wide
current 40°C pkg and easy to use, for three phase squirrel-cage induction
Ie IEC UL/CSA motors; soft starts and soft stops rated motor load
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] currents up to 45A.
It is based on a current limiting starting methodology to
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 400VAC motor control. limit the maximum starting current. ADXC… reduces the
Auxiliary supply: starter 110…400VAC (L1-L2-L3 inputs); start mechanical load on motor shafts, gearboxes and drive
command 110-400VAC (A1-A2 terminals). belts.
ADXC 012 400 12 5.5 3 1 0.500 Ramp up, ramp down and initial voltage time settings can
ADXC 016 400 16 7.5 7.5 1 0.500 be independently adjusted by built-in potentiometers.
Main features are:
ADXC 025 400 25 11 10 1 0.500 – For three phase induction motors up to 22kW / 25HP
5 ADXC 032 400
ADXC 037 400
32
37
15
18.5 20
15 1
1
0.500
0.700
at 400VAC and 37kW / 40HP at 600VAC
– Maximum input voltage: 400VAC 50/60Hz for ADX…
400…; 600VAC 50/60Hz for ADXC…600…
ADXC 045 400 45 22 25 1 0.700 – Built-in bypass relay
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 400VAC motor control. – Wrong phase sequence and over temperature
ADXC 012... Auxiliary supply: starter 110…400VAC (L1-L2-L3 inputs); start protection
ADXC 032... command 24VAC/DC (A1-A2 terminals). – Alarm for wrong phase sequence; line voltage and/or
ADXC 012 400 24 12 5.5 3 1 0.500 frequency out of limits (over and undervoltage);
overcurrent, over temperature, irregular ramp up and
ADXC 016 400 24 16 7.5 7.5 1 0.500 current flow during bypass; motor voltage unbalance
ADXC 025 400 24 25 11 10 1 0.500 – Simple setting and installation
ADXC 032 400 24 32 15 15 1 0.500 – 2 relay outputs for alarms (NC) and bypass closing
(NO) for ADXC…600 R2
ADXC 037 400 24 37 18.5 20 1 0.700 – 35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715)
ADXC 045 400 24 45 22 25 1 0.700 – Ideal for hydraulic lifts, conveyor belts, compressors,
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 600VAC motor control. pumps, hoisting devices, blowers, fans, mixers.
Auxiliary supply: starter 100…240VAC (A1-A2 separate
1-phase); start command 100-240VAC (ST terminals). Operational characteristics
With 2 relay outputs. – Number of controlled phases: 2
– Input voltage L1-L2-L3:
ADXC 012 600 R2 12 9 10 1 0.500 • 220-400VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC…400 and
ADXC 016 600 R2 16 11 15 1 0.500 ADXC…400 24
ADXC 025 600 R2 25 20 20 1 0.500 • 220-600VAC -15%…+10% for ADXC…600 R2
– Frequency range: 50/60Hz ±10% self-configurable
ADXC 037... ADXC 032 600 R2 32 22 30 1 0.500 – Self powered for ADXC…400… types
ADXC 045... ADXC 037 600 R2 37 30 30 1 0.700 – Separate single phase auxiliary power supply A1-A2:
ADXC 045 600 R2 45 37 40 1 0.700 100-240VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC…600 R2
– Start command:
For operating temperature higher than 40°C, derate starter power; see • A1-A2 24VAC/DC ±10% (ADXC…400 24)
values given in the technical characteristics on page 5-8, in Rated current
In per IEC/FLA current per UL. • A1-A2 110…400VAC -15%...+10% (ADXC…400)
• ST 100…240VAC -15%...+10% (ADXC…600 R2)
Current control – Ramp up time: 1-20 seconds
ADXC… gradually increases the current – Ramp down time: 0-20 seconds
Starting
current
A
A Initial voltage: 0-85% of the motor control power.
B B Ramp up time: 1-20 seconds. Initial to maximum load voltage time.
C C Ramp down time: 0-20 seconds. Maximum to no load voltage time.
ADX type Order code IEC rated IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
starter motor power per ADX is a reduced voltage soft starter with torque control
current Ie (380/415V) pkg and maximum starting current limit. It is used for the
[A] [kW] n° [kg] progressive starting and stopping of asynchronous three-
phase squirrel-cage motors.
For standard duty (starting current 3.5•Ie). The integrated bypass contactor ADX...BP or ADX...B
With integrated bypass contactor. types, drastically limits dissipation, as a result,
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208-240VAC; equipment for electric panel cooling ventilation can be
start command 24VDC. eliminated and the enclosure size can be reduced as well.
51 ADX 0022BP 22 9.2 1 7.900 CONTROL
51 ADX 0034BP 34 15 1 8.000 During starting: Torque control acceleration, current limit
51 ADX 0048BP 48 22 1 8.300 control and booster.
During stopping: Torque control deceleration, dynamic
51 ADX 0058BP 58
51 ADX 0068BP 68
26
30
1
1
14.900
14.900
braking and free-wheel.
In emergency conditions: Starting without protection
5
51 ADX 0082BP 82 37 1 14.900 direct-on-line starting using integrated bypass contactor.
Remote control: PC supervision by connection with
51 ADX 0092BP 92 45 1 15.700 RS232/RS485 converter, modem or GSM modem.
51 ADX 0022BP - 51 ADX 0048BP 51 ADX 0114BP 114 55 1 15.700 Automatic call function (Autocall) in case of alarm
51 ADX 0017B - 51 ADX 0045B 51 ADX 0126BP 126 63 1 28.000 conditions by sending a message to a cellular phone
(SMS-Short Message Service) and/or to a mailbox.
51 ADX 0150BP 150 75 1 36.000 Property ASCII and Modbus®-RTU communication
51 ADX 0196BP 196 92 1 36.000 protocols.
51 ADX 0231BP 231 110 1 36.000 KEYPAD OPERATIONS
For severe duty (starting current 5•Ie). – Liquid-crystal backlit 2-line 16-character display
With integrated bypass contactor. – Multilanguage capability (Italian, English, French,
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208-240VAC; Spanish)
start command 24VDC. – Basic, advanced and function programming menus
– Keypad stop and start
51 ADX 0017B 17 7.5 1 7.900 – Motor and mains parameter readings:
51 ADX 0030B 30 15 1 8.000 • line voltage values (L-L)
51 ADX 0045B 45 22 1 8.300 • phase current
• active and apparent power values per phase
51 ADX 0060B 60 30 1 14.900 • power factor per phase
51 ADX 0075B 75 37 1 14.900 • kWh
51 ADX 0085B 85 45 1 14.900 – Time sequential events log
– Clock calendar with backup battery.
51 ADX 0110B 110 55 1 15.700
PARTICULAR FUNCTIONS
51 ADX 0125B 125 59 1 15.700 Digital inputs and programmable relay outputs. Analog
51 ADX 0142B 142 75 1 34.000 input (0...10V, 0...20mA or 4...20mA) for ramp
acceleration and/or deceleration, motor start and stop
51 ADX 0190B 190 90 1 37.000
control thresholds, programmable relay enable and
51 ADX 0245B 245 132 1 37.000 disable control thresholds. Analog output
51 ADX 0058BP - 51 ADX 0092BP For severe duty (starting current 5•Ie). (0...10V, 0...20mA or 4...20mA) for current, torque,
51 ADX 0060B - 51 ADX 0085B Predisposed for external bypass contactor. motor thermal status and power factor readings.
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208-240VAC; Input programming for second motor.
start command 24VDC. PROTECTION
51 ADX 0310 310 160 1 50.000 – Motor: Dual thermal protection class (one during
starting phase and the other during running) or by
51 ADX 0365 365 200 1 50.000 PTC sensor, locked rotor, current asymmetry,
51 ADX 0470 470 250 1 90.000 minimum torque and starting time too long
51 ADX 0568 568 315 1 90.000 – Auxiliary voltage: Voltage value too low
– Power voltage: Phase failure, phase sequence and
51 ADX 0640 640 355 1 110.000 frequency out of limits
51 ADX 0820 820 440 1 170.000 – Control inputs and analog output: Static 24VDC
51 ADX 1200 1200 630 1 185.000 short-circuit protection with automatic resetting.
– Starter: Overcurrent, high temperature, SCR and
by-pass contactor malfunction.
Operational characteristics
– Number of phases controlled: 3
– Input voltage:
• 208-500VAC ±10% for ADX...BP and ADX...B
• 208-415VAC ±10% for ADX...
– Mains frequency: 50-60Hz ±5%
– Auxiliary supply voltage: 208-240VAC ±10%
– Auxiliary consumption: 20VA
– Rated starter current Ie:
• 22-231A for ADX...BP
• 17-245A for ADX...B
• 310-1200A for ADX...
– Motor current: 0.5-1 Ie
– Overload current:
51 ADX 0114BP - 51 ADX 0126BP • 105% Ie continuous for ADX...BP and ADX...B
51 ADX 0110B - 51 ADX 0125B • 115% Ie continuous for ADX...
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; CCC for ADX 0110B
and ADX 0125B types only.
Compliant with standard: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
Dimensions
5-4 page 5-7
Soft starters
Remote control software
5-5
Soft starters
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Soft Starters
ADXC012...ADXC032... ADXC037...ADXC045...
153.8 (6.05”) 36
109.8 (4.32”) Ø5.2 (0.20”) 45 (1.77”) (1.42”)
45 (1.77”)
❶
❶
5.2 (0.20”)
4.8 (0.19”)
® ®
ADXC ADXC
121 (4.76”)
30 60 30 60
35mm
125 (4.92”)
35mm
U U
132 (5.20”)
125 (4.92”)
105 (4.13”)
115 (4.53”)
105 (4.13”)
123 (4.84”)
DIN rail
0 85% 0 85%
5 10
t
5 10
t DIN rail
1 20s IEC/EN 1 20s
IEC/EN
60715
5 10 5 10
ALARM
0 20s
t ALARM
0 20s
t
60715
RAMP / BYPASS RAMP / BYPASS
SUPPLY SUPPLY
6.46 (0.25”)
F1 F2 12 11/21 24 F1 F2 ST
5 ❶
❶
ADX 0114BP 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
ADX 0126BP 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
ADX 0017B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0030B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0045B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0060B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0075B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0085B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
D
ADX 0110B 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
ADX 0125B 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
TYPE A B C D E
ADX 0150BP 273 (10.75”) 600 (23.62”) 285 (11.22”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0196BP 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0231BP 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0142B 273 (10.75”) 600 (23.62”) 285 (11.22”) 230 (9.05”) 560 (25.20”)
ADX 0190B 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0245B 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
B
E
5-6
Soft starters
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Soft Starters
ADX 0310 - ADX 1200
A C
B
E
F
TYPE A B C D E F
ADX 0310 640 (25.20”) 600 (23.62”) 380 (14.96”) 620 (24.41”) 400 (15.75”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0365 640 (25.20”) 600 (23.62”) 380 (14.96”) 620 (24.41”) 400 (15.75”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0470 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0568 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0640 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0820 910 (35.83”) 950 (37.40”) 442 (17.40”) 830 (32.68”) 920 (36.22”)
ADX 1200 910 (35.83”) 950 (37.40”) 442 (17.40”) 830 (32.68”) 920 (36.22”)
❶ Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Remote keypad
ADX TAST Cutout
31
(1.22”)
92
9 (3.62”)
96 10 (0.35”)
(0.39”) 63
(3.78”) (2.48”)
PA96X96
(3.54”)
(3.62”)
(3.78”)
90
92
96
Wiring diagrams
5-7
Soft starters
Technical characteristics
5-8
Soft starters
Technical characteristics
5-9
Page 6-2 Page 6-4 Page 6-5
SEC. - PAGE
Motor drives
VE1 single-phase type ....................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
VFNC3 single-phase type ................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
VFS15 three-phase type ..................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 4
VFPS1 three-phase type .................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 5
Accessories
Three-phase inductances ................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
Braking resistors ............................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
Other accessories .............................................................................................................................................................. 6 - 7
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 6 - 8
P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
AC motor drives
Single phase
VE1 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per VE1 is a very compact motor drive with high
at 230V pkg performance, V/f and boost torque control along with
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] advanced features such as PID and sequential control. It
is versatile, easy to install and program and can be used
Single-phase supply 200-240VAC 50/60Hz. in numerous applications. It has a digital display to
Three-phase motor output 240VAC max. simplify parameterising which can also be done remotely
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 1° environment cat. C2). using the RS485 port. Motor speed can be adjusted with
VE1 02 A240 1.8 0.2 0.25 1 1.200 the front potentiometer or by using one of the preset V/f
VE1 04 A240 2.6 0.4 0.5 1 1.200 curves, each provided with dedicated acceleration and
deceleration ramps.
VE1 07 A240 4.3 0.75 1 1 1.200 It can be used in general applications such as automatic
VE1 15 A240 7.5 1.5 2 1 1.800 door controls, on conveyor belts, assembly, packaging
VE1 22 A240 10.5 2.2 3 1 1.800 and packing machinery, or for pump and fan control.
V3 (Vmid2)
V2 (Vmid1)
t
V1 (Vmin)
Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 650.00
Accessories Dimensions
6-2 page 6-6 and 7 page 6-8
AC motor drives
Single phase
VFNC3 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per VFNC3 is an ultra-compact motor drive with high
at 230V pkg performance and extremely reliable (printed circuit
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] surface protection per IEC/EN 60721-3-3).
Easily installed, VFNC3 is equipped with a front display
Single-phase supply 200-240VAC 50/60Hz. and innovative jog dial control, which simplifies the
Three-phase motor output 240VAC max. programming and control pocesses of the drive and
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 1° environment cat. C1). motor. The on-board RS485 interface permits an overall
VFNC3S 2002 PLW 1.4 0.2 0.25 1 0.900 remote control (supervision and communication
VFNC3S 2004 PLW 2.4 0.4 0.54 1 1.000 protocols). VFNC3 can be used in simple applications
such as extractor fans, ventilators, conveyor belts,
VFNC3S 2007 PLW 4.2 0.75 1 1 1.300 machine tools, car washes, fitness equipment, but also in
VFNC3S 2015 PLW 7.5 1.5 2 1 2.000 applications of intermediate complexity, such as pumps,
VFNC3S 2022 PLW 10 2.2 3 1 2.000 waterworks.
The vector control and the possibility to enable the motor
Operation up to 50°C without derating. auto-tuning warrants efficiency and high torques even
with very low operating frequencies.
6
M SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
VFNC3... VFNC3... Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
– Front jog dial control (potentiometer)
– External potentiometer: 1-10kΩ
– Voltage signal: 0-10V
– Current signal: 4-20mA
– Remote keypad option
– 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
– RS485 serial signals.
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
– Selectable PNP or NPN I/O logic
– 4 digital multifunction inputs
– 1 digital configurable as analog input.
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
“Side by Side”
Traditional models need – 1 relay with changeover contact
installation
side space between – 1 static configurable as analog 0-10V/4-20mA.
Multiple units can be
units for sufficient
installed without side
cooling air circulation. PROTECTION
clearance for space saving. – Overcurrent and overvoltage
– Input phase loss
– Output phase loss
– Motor drive overload
– Motor overload
– Output short circuit
– Motor stall.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
– PID function for pump and fan application
– Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
different motor controls
– Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
– 15 viewable frequency values
– Start-up DC injection
– DC injection braking
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, sensorless vector,
variable torque.
Operational characteristics
– Input voltage: 200-240VAC single-phase
– Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 1.4-10A
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
– Output frequency: 0.1-400Hz
– Frequency modulation: 2-16kHz
– Current overload: 150% for 60s; 200% for 0.5s
– IEC degree of protection: IP20
– Ambient conditions
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C
• Maximum altitude: 3000m (with derating)
• Relative humidity: 5-95% (with no condensing).
Accessories Dimensions
page 6-6 and 7 page 6-8 6-3
AC motor drives
Three phase
VFS15 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per The numerous functions available together with the
at 400V pkg constructive features consent the VFS15 speed control to
Heavy load be used in a host of industrial and civil sectors, such as:
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] waterworks and methane piping ducts, cement, paper,
chemical and petrochemical industries.
Three-phase supply 380-500VAC 50/60Hz . The EASY function key allows direct switching to a
Three-phase motor output 500VAC max. customised menu with typical programming parameters
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 2° environment cat. C3). for a dedicated application in order to quickly reach them
VFS15 4004 PLW 1.5 0.4 0.5 1 1.800 for eventual consultation or changes.
VFS15 4007 PLW 2.3 0.75 1 1 1.800 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
VFS15 4015 PLW 4.1 1.5 2 1 1.800 Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
– Front potentiometer
VFS15 4022 PLW 5.5 2.2 3 1 3.200 – External potentiometer: 1-10kΩ
VFS15 4037 PLW 9.5 4 5 1 3.200 – Voltage signal: 0-10V
VFS15 4055 PLW 14.3 5.5 7.5 1 5.500 – Current signal: 4-20mA
6 VFS15 4075 PLW 17 7.5 10 1 5.500
– Keypad on front
– Remote keypad option
VFS15 4110 PLW 27.7 11 15 1 8.400 – 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
VFS15... – RS485 serial signals.
VFS15 4150 PLW 33 15 20 1 8.400
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
Operational chacteristics for normal load conditions – Selectable PNP or NPN I/O logic
Type Current 3-phase motor power – 6 digital multifunction inputs
at 400VAC – 2 digital configurable as analog input.
VFS15 4004 PLW 2.1A 0.75kW 1HP PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
– 1 relay with changeover contact and 1 relay with NO
VFS15 4007 PLW 3A 1.1kW 1.5HP contact; 1 transistor and 1 analog configurable as
VFS15 4015 PLW 5.4A 2.2kW 3HP 0-10VDC or 4-20mA.
VFS15 4022 PLW 6.9A 3kW 4HP PROTECTION
VFS15 4037 PLW 11.1A 5.5kW 7.5HP – Overcurrent and overvoltage
– Input and output phase loss
VFS15 4055 PLW 17A 7.5kW 10HP – Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
VFS15 4075 PLW 23A 11kW 15HP – Drive overtemperature and excessive torque
VFS15 4110 PLW 31A 15kW 20HP – Earth/ground fault.
VFS15 4150 PLW 38A 18.5kW 25HP SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
– PID function for pump and fan application
Operation up to 50°C without derating.
150% overload for 60 seconds. – Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
200-240VAC three-phase version available on request; consult Customer different motor controls
Service for details; see contact details on inside front cover. – Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
120% overload for 60 seconds. – 15 viewable frequency values
– DC-Bus access for DC power supply
– Capacitor pre-charge circuit
– Integrated dynamic braking circuit; optional external
VFS15... M braking resistor
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, variable torque,
sensorless vector
– Automatic motor torque boost control
– Logic “Myfunction” mode permits to combine among
each other inputs, outputs and drive states including
ON/OFF delay timing, to elaborate more complex
functions and comparators
– DC injection braking
– Auto-tuning
– Frequency potentiometer (speed adjustment via 2
external pushbuttons)
– Quick parameter search and programming
– Sequential starting control for sets of motors
– SLEEP function: automatic motor stopping after
continuous running at minimum frequency
“Side by Side”
Traditional models need – Start-up DC injection
installation
side space between – OVERRIDE function for summing analog VIA-VIB inputs.
Multiple units can be
units for sufficient
Operational characteristics
installed without side
cooling air circulation.
– Input voltage: 380-500VAC three-phase
clearance for space saving. – Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 1.5-38A three-phase
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
– Output frequency: 0-500Hz
– Frequency modulation: 2-16kHz
– Current overload for 60s: 120% for normal load;
150% for heavy load
– Low speed torque: 200% 0.3Hz
– IEC degree of protection: IP20; IP54 on request
– Ambient conditions
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C
• Maximum altitude: 1000m
• Relative humidity: 20-93% (with no condensing).
Certifications and complience
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
(File E204788) as Power Conversion Equipment;
CSA certified for Canada (File 231252) as Motor
Controllers - Miscellaneous; AS C-tick.
Compliant with standards: EN 50178, IEC/EN 61800-3 -
first environment cat. C2 or second environment cat. C3,
UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Accessories Dimensions
6-4 pages 6-6 and 7 pages 6-8 and 9
AC motor drives
Three phase
VFPS1 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per VFPS1 is a motor drive combining the most advanced and
at 400V pkg optimised mode for energy saving with a compact and
complete line as well as a function software dedicated to
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] pump and fan applications.
Three-phase supply 380-480VAC 50/60Hz. The on-board EMC surge suppressor and standard-
Three-phase motor output 480VAC max. supplied (up to 315kW type) DC inductance consent to
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 2° environment cat. C3). radically reduce harmonic distortions and noise
disturbances generated by the motor drive and to limit the
VFPS1 4185 PLWP 41 18.5 25 1 22.200 input current to a maximum value of 1.1 times output
VFPS1 4220 PLWP 48 22 30 1 23.700 current.
VFPS1 4300 PLWP 66 30 40 1 32.500 QUICK mode provides for a customised menu of 32
specific parameters for a single application, inhibiting
VFPS1 4370 PLWP 79 37 50 1 32.800 access to all the other parameters.
VFPS1 4450 PLWP 94 45 60 1 54.000 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
VFPS1 4550 PLWP 116 55 75 1 54.000 Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
VFPS1 4750 PLWP 160 75 100 1 54.000 – External potentiometer: 1-10kΩ
VFPS1 4900 PCWP 179 90 125 1 100.000
– Voltage signal: 0 to 10V or -10 to +10V 6
– Current signal: 4-20mA or 0-20mA
VFPS1 4110 KPCWP 215 110 150 1 100.000 – Keypad on front
– Remote keypad option
Three-phase supply 380-440VAC 50Hz/380-480VAC 60Hz. – 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
Three-phase motor output 440/480VAC max. – RS485 serial signals.
VFPS1...
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 2° environment cat. C3).
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
VFPS1 4132 KPCWP 259 132 200 1 108.000 – Selectable PNP or NPN I/O logic
VFPS1 4160 KPCWP 314 160 250 1 118.000 – 6 digital multifunction inputs
VFPS1 4220 KPCWP 427 220 350 1 161.000 – 1 digital configurable as analog input.
VFPS1 4250 KPCWP 481 250 400 1 194.000 PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
– 1 relay with changeover contact
VFPS1 4280 KPCWP 550 280 450 1 204.000 – 2 static usable as pulse train
VFPS1 4315 KPCWP 616 315 500 1 204.000 – 2 analog configurable as 0-10VDC, 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
VFPS1 4400 KPCWP 759 400 600 1 302.000 PROTECTION
VFPS1 4500 KPCWP 941 500 700 1 320.000 – Overcurrent and overvoltage
– Output short circuit and earth/ground leakage
VFPS1 4630 KPCWP 1181 630 1000 1 462.000 – Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
Operation up to 50°C without derating. – Drive overtemperature
Consult Customer Service for details regarding the following; see contact – Motor stall
details on inside front cover: – Too low torque.
240VAC three-phase available on request except for VPS1 4110 KPCWP
type. SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
600VAC three-phase available on request. – PID function for pump and fan application
Indicated ratings are for normal load; available on request for heavy load – Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
conditions.
different motor controls
– Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
– 15 viewable frequency values
– DC-Bus access for DC power supply
VFPS1... M – Built-in DC reactor for reduced harmonic content at
input
– DC braking board standard-supplied up to
220kW/350HP rating; optional external braking
resistors
– DC injection at starting
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, variable torque,
torque boost with automatic starting, sensorless
vector, vector control in closed-loop conditions
– Auto-tuning
– Frequency potentiometer; speed adjustment via
2 external push buttons
– SLEEP function: automatic motor stopping after
continuous running at minimum frequency
– FIRE control function: specified speed maintained even
in alarm conditions
– Built-in PTC thermistor input.
Operational characteristics
– Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 41-1181A
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz ±5%
– Output frequency: 0.5-500Hz
– Frequency modulation: 1-16kHz
– Current overload: 120% for 60s, 135% for 2s
– IEC degree of protection: IP00 for all except
VFPS1 4185 PLWP with IP20; IP55 on request
– Ambient conditions:
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C
• Maximum altitude: 1000m without derating; up to
3000m with derating
• Relative humidity: 20-93% (with no condensing).
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
(File E204788) as Power Conversion Equipment;
CSA certified for Canada (File 231252) as Motor
Controllers - Miscellaneous; AS C-tick.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61800-5-1,
IEC/EN 61800-3 - first environment cat. C2 or second
environment cat. C3, UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Accessories Dimensions
pages 6-6 and 7 pages 6-9 and 10 6-5
AC motor drives
Accessories
Three-phase inductances Order code Ie mH For motor Qty Weight General characteristics
drive rating per The three-phase inductances, IND type, can be connected
pkg to the drives type VFNC3..., VFS11... and VFPS1... in the
[A] [kW] n° [kg] following ways:
– On the motor drive input to reduce the harmonic
IND2020 12 1 0.75...4 1 1.850 content upstream, with the subsequent reduction of
IND2030 25 0.6 5.5...11 1 2.670 input current consumption of the drive itself.
IND3040 50 0.2 15...22 1 7.220 – On the motor drive output to limit peak voltages
generated by drives on the motor or in case there are
IND4040 100 0.15 30...45 1 14.410 more motors connected in parallel, controlled
IND4075 150 0.08 55...75 1 21.680 simultaneously by the drive itself.
IND4090 300 0.04 90...110 1 27.000 The inductances can be used at the motor drive input
having single-phase power supply.
IND5060 400 0.03 132...160 1 37.600 For the correct choice, select the inductance with Ie
IND5080 600 0.02 220...250 1 45.000 current rating equal to or greater than the rated current of
IND7070 800 0.016 280...315 1 62.000 the drive they will be used with.
6 IND... For other drive ratings, consult Customer Service; see contact details on Operational characteristics
inside front cover.
– Class: H
– Current: 12-800A
– Ambient conditions:
• Operating temperature: -25...+100°C.
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61558-1.
Braking resistors Order code Power Capacity Qty Weight General characteristics
per The braking resistors can be connected to motor drives
pkg VFS15… and VFPS1…; see the table below the order
codes.
[W] [Ω] n° [kg]
ROF20100 200 100 1 0.210 Operational characteristics for ROF... and ROPPE...
ROF20150 200 150 1 0.220 – Maximum applicable voltage: 1000V
– Connection: With 250mm cable for ROF; directly on
ROF35060 350 60 1 0.610 the resistor terminal for ROPPE
ROF50035 500 35 1 0.773 – Degree of protection: IP54 for R0F; IP20 for ROPPE.
ROF80030 800 30 1 1.570
Reference standards
ROPPE11430 1300 30 1 3.856 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60204-1,
ROPPE12515 2200 15 1 5.200 IEC/EN 60664-1.
ROF... ROPPE14008 4000 8 1 6.780
ROPPE... ROPPE24003 8000 3 1 11.000
Dimensions
6-6 page 6-11
AC motor drives
Accessories
Dimensions
page 6-11 6-7
AC motor drives
Dimensions [mm (in)]
131 (5.16”)
122 (4.80”)
131 (5.16”)
121 (4.76”)
141 (5.55”)
141 (5.55”)
6 61 (2.40”) 136 (3.35”) 108 (4.25”)
144.2 (5.68”)
72 (2.83”)❶ 118 (4.64”)❶
In a control panel when more than one VE1 is installed side by side, provide sufficient air circulation space, of at least 5cm / 2” between each, in order to ensure proper cooling effect.
VFNC3S 2002 PLW...VFNC3S 2007 PLW VFNC3S 2015 PLW - VFNC3S 2022 PLW
Ø5
(0.20”) Ø5
(0.20”)
118 (4.64”)
143 (5.63”)
142 (5.59”)
B
5 5
(0.20”) (0.20”)
TYPE A B
VFNC3S 2002PL W 102 (4.01”) 131 (5.16”)
VFNC3S 2004PL W 121 (4.76”) 118 (4.64”)
VFNC3S 2007PL W 131 (5.16”) 118 (4.64”)
RUN
%
PRG
MON
Hz
RUN STOP
EASY MODE
121.5 (4.78”)
130 (5.12”)
.5
R2
13 (0.51”)
93 (3.66”)
(0.20”) 7.5
(0.29”)
170 (6.69”)
157 (6.18”)
(0.55”)
14
2-R2.5
7 126 (4.96”)
(0.27”)
6-8
AC motor drives
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(0.31”)
8
150 (5.90”) 170 (6.69”) 7.5
(0.20”)
(0.29”)
Ø5
STATUS
RUN
%
PRG
MON Hz
RUN STOP
210 (8.27”)
220 (8.66”)
EASY MODE
6
(0.47”)
12
2-R2.5
10 130 (5.12”)
(0.39”)
”)
9
(0.29”)
7
310 (12.20”)
295 (11.61”)
STATUS
RUN
%
PRG
MON Hz
RUN STOP
EASY MODE
(0.79”)
20
2-R3
10 160 (6.30”)
(0.39”)
Ø9 Ø11.5
(0.35”) (0.45”)
E
B
E
Fig. 1
D
D
Fig. 2
TYPE Fig. A B C D E F
VFPS1 4185 PLWP 1 230 (9.05”) 409 (16.10”) 191 (7.52”) 210 (8.27”) 386 (15.20”) 16 (0.63”)
VFPS1 4220 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 420 (16.53”) 212 (8.35”) 206 (8.11”) 403 (15.87”) —
VFPS1 4300 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 550 (21.65”) 242 (9.53”) 206 (8.11”) 529 (20.83”) —
VFPS1 4370 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 550 (21.65”) 242 (9.53”) 206 (8.11”) 529 (20.83”) —
6-9
AC motor drives
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Ø9
(0.35”)
Fig. 3
Ø11.5
(0.45”)
B
E
Fig. 4
TYPE Fig. A B C D E
VFPS1 4450 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4550 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4750 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4900 PCWP 4 310 (12.20”) 680 (26.77”) 375 (14.76”) 250 (9.84”) 650 (25.59”)
VFPS1 4110 KPCWP 4 310 (12.20”) 680 (26.77”) 375 (14.76”) 250 (9.84”) 650 (25.59”)
VFPS1 4132 KPCWP 4 350 (13.78”) 782 (30.79”) 375 (14.76”) 298 (11.73”) 758 (29.84”)
VFPS1 4160 KPCWP 4 330 (12.99”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 285 (11.22”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4220 KPCWP 4 430 (16.93”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 350 (13.78”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4250 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4280 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4315 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4400 KPCWP 4 880 (34.64”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 831 (32.71”) 1120 (44.09”)
VFPS1 4500 KPCWP 4 880 (34.64”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 831 (32.71”) 1120 (44.09”)
VFPS1 4630 KPCWP 4 1108 (43.62”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 1065 (41.93”) 1120 (44.09”)
6-10
AC motor drives
Dimensions [mm (in)]
ACCESSORIES
Three-phase inductances
IND...
Type A B C D E ØF
IND2020 115 (4.53”) 80 (3.15”) 125 (4.92”) 78 (3.07”) 55 (2.16”) 5.5 (0.22”)
IND2030 115 (4.53”) 90 (3.54”) 125 (4.92”) 78 (3.07”) 65(2.56”) 5.5 (0.22”)
IND3040 170 (6.69”) 115 (4.53”) 190 (7.48”) 115 (4.53”) 85 (3.35”) 6.5 (0.25”)
C
IND4040 240 (9.45”) 135 (5.31”) 230 (9.05”) 146 (5.75”) 80 (3.15”) 8.5 (0.33”)
IND4075 240 (9.45”) 170 (6.69”) 220 (8.66”) 146 (5.75”) 105 (4.13”) 8.5 (0.33”)
IND4090 240 (9.45”) 195 (7.68”) 220 (8.66”) 146 (5.75”) 120 (4.72”) 8.5 (0.33”)
ØF ØF
IND5060 350 (13.78”) 170 (6.69”) 325 (12.79”) 240 (9.45”) 105 (4.13”) 12.5 (0.49”)
D E IND5080 350 (13.78”) 190 (7.48”) 325 (12.79”) 240 (9.45”) 125 (4.92”) 12.5 (0.49”)
A B IND7070 440 (17.32”) 200 (7.87”) 420 (16.53”) 245 (9.64”) 120 (4.72”) 12.5 (0.49”)
6
Braking resistors Remote control panel
ROF... MITOS...
B B
D E D
55 (2.16”)
65 (2.56”)
D B
Ø
120 (4.72”) 31
(1.22”)
36
(1.42”)
Cutout
C
C
A
L
107 (4.21”)
C
56 (2.20”)
Ø
Ø Ø
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
115 (4.53”)
(0.64”)
16.2
(0.36”
9.2
Ø6.5
(0.25”)
E D
A B Cutout
35.9 4.6
(1.41”) (0.18”)
98 (3.86”)
6-11
Page 7-4 to 7 and 10 Page 7-8 and 11 Page 7-9 and 11
7-26 to 28 and 31 7-29 and 32 7-30 and 33
BUTTON ACTUATORS Ø22mm DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH SELECTOR SWITCH
• Spring return flush, extended and shrouded ACTUATORS Ø22mm ACTUATORS Ø22mm
• Push-push flush and extended • Double touch with or without indicator • Knob
• Mushroom-head • Triple touch. • Lever
• Mechanical reset • Key
• Illuminated. • Illuminated.
SEC. - PAGE
Ø22mm series
Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 4
Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 4
Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................ 7 - 5
Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ........................................................................................................... 7 - 5
Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 7
Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return ................................................................................................. 7 - 8
Selector switch actuators ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 9
Illuminated button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Illuminated push-push button actuators ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Illuminated mushroom-head actuators .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ........................................................................................ 7 - 11
Illuminated selector actuators .......................................................................................................................................... 7 - 11
Pilot light heads .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 12
Monoblock LED pilot lights, steady light ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 12
Monoblock buzzers ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 13
USB-RJ45 communication interfaces .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 13
Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 14
series control stations ..................................................................................... 7 - 23
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series
Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 26
Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 26
Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................ 7 - 27
Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ........................................................................................................... 7 - 27
Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 28
Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return ................................................................................................. 7 - 29
Selector switch actuators ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 30
S IGNALLING
Joysticks ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 35
Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................. 7 - 36
C ONTROL
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 7 - 44
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 7 - 49
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
QUALITY TOUCH!
10mm
7
CUSTOMISING CAPABILITY
To simplify stock management, the series includes
HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION actuators without cap or lens and separate caps and
The actuators have been tested to guarantee a degree of lenses for quick installation or replacement on spring
protetection per IEC/EN IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X, return and push-push types; all these are sold as
appropriate for use even in extreme ambient conditions. accessories.
- Miniaturised size
40 (1.57”)
7-2
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH EMERGENCY STOP ACTUATORS SELECTOR SWITCH ACTUATORS EXTENSIVE CHOICE OF ACCESSORIES
ACTUATORS
7-3
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
Contact activation of 2-position selector switch Contact activiation of 3-position selector switch Special versions
3 Versions with coloured keys are available upon request.
3
2 2 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
1 1 front cover.
Contacts Contacts
1 2 3 1 2 3 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
A — — — A —
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC.
Pending at time of catalogue printing: RINA for all;
B B — — —
cULus, EAC, CCC for LPC S2... types.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
C —
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
A — — A —
B B — —
C —
LED integrated Order code Rated auxi- LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
liary supply colour per pkg – Rated auxiliary supply voltage: 12VAC/DC, 24VAC/DC,
monoblock pilot lights voltage 110VAC, 230VAC (-15% to +10%)
steady light – Consumption: ≤20mA
n° [kg] – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling with a
8 LP2T IL A3P 12VAC/DC Green 10 0.021 threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also on
8 LP2T IL A4P Red 10 0.021 cover of LPZ control stations
– Electrical life: >30,000 hours
8 LP2T IL A5P Yellow 10 0.021 – Screw termination
8 LP2T IL A6P Blue 10 0.021 – Maximum tightening torque: 0.8Nm / 0.59lbft
8 LP2T IL A8P White 10 0.021 – Side cable entry
– Ambient conditions:
8 LP2T IL...P 8 LP2T IL B3P 24VAC/DC Green 10 0.021 • Operating temperature: -5...+40°C
8 LP2T IL B4P Red 10 0.021 – Degree of protection per IEC/EN:
8 LP2T IL B5P Yellow 10 0.021 • IP65 on front
• IP20 at rear.
8 LP2T IL B6P Blue 10 0.021
8 LP2T IL B8P White 10 0.021 Materials
Polyamide and polycarbonate.
8 LP2T IL E3P 110VAC Green 10 0.024
8 LP2T IL E4P Red 10 0.024 Maximum conductor cross section
1 or 2 1.5mm2 or AWG16 cables.
8 LP2T IL E5P Yellow 10 0.024
8 LP2T IL E6P Blue 10 0.024 Wiring diagram
8 LP2T IL E8P White 10 0.024
8 LP2T IL M3P 230VAC Green 10 0.024 X2 X1
8 LP2T IL M4P Red 10 0.024
Certifications and compliance
8 LP2T IL M5P Yellow 10 0.024 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
8 LP2T IL M6P Blue 10 0.024 (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers - Accessory,
8 LP2T IL M8P White 10 0.024 indicator; EAC, CCC.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Wiring diagram
X1
X2
Materials
Polyamide and polycarbonate.
Dimensions
7-14 page 7-45
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
8 LM2T A185
Dimensions
page 7-38 7-15
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
Labels with text for Ordering code Text Qty Wt General characteristics
LPX AU100 legend holder per pkg The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on
n° [kg] metalised grey polycarbonate background (adhesive).
General use. Special versions
8 LM2T AU206 Blank for writing 50 0.001 Labels in different languages are available.
8 LM2T AU207 Sheet with 108 labels 1 0.005 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
for laser printing front cover.
8 LM2T AU208 Sheet with 108 1 0.005
laser-printed labels
8 LM2T AGB230
8 LM2T AGB216 CLOSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB220 EMERGENCY 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB231 FAST 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB263 FAULT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB215 FORWARD 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB228 LEFT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB218 LOWER 50 0.001
7 8 LM2T AGB221 OFF 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB223 ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB211 OPEN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB229 POWER ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB227 RAISE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB226 RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB222 REVERSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB217 RIGHT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB241 RUNNING 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB224 SLOW 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB225 START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB230 STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB214 STOP RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB240 THERMAL FAULT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB237 TRIP 50 0.001
For selector switches.
8 LM2T AI233 AUTO-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI234 AUTO-O-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI241 MAN-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI242 MAN-O-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB235 FWD-O-REV 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB236 OFF-ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB232 STOP-START 50 0.001
International labels for push-buttons.
8 LM2T AU200 O 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU201 I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU202 II 50 0.001
International labels for selector switches.
8 LM2T AU203 O-I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU204 I-II 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU205 I-O-II 50 0.001
Recommended use with LPX AU109 blank label.
Sheet with 108 adhesive labels.
Complete code with required label text.
Dimensions
7-16 page 7-45
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
Plastic disk for mushroom Order code Text Qty Wt General characteristics
head pushbuttons per pkg The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic except
n° [kg] LPX AU110.
Plastic disks cannot be used with LPX AU158
LPX AU113 EMERGENCY/STOP 10 0.005 padlockable protection.
Ø90mm / 3.5”
LPX AU115 EMERGENCY/STOP 10 0.003
Ø60mm / 2.4”
LPX AU118 ARRET D’URGENCE / 10 0.003
NOT-AUS/
PARO EMERGENCIA
Ø60mm / 2.4”
LPX AU110 EMERGENCY STOP 12 0.001
LPX AU113 adhesive label, size
34.5x65mm/1.36x2.56”
LPX AU115
LPX AU110
Dimensions
page 7-45 7-17
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
X5 X1 X5
X2
(AC) ~ (+ DC)
(AC) ~
TEST
LPXT101❸
LPXT102❹
LPXT101❸
X1 X5 LPXT102❹
X1 X5
X1 X5
X1 X1 X1 LPXT101❸
LPXT102❹
LPX LPE... LPX LPE... LPX LPE...
LPX LPM... LPX LPM... LPX LPM...
LPX LPSE... LPX LPSE... LPX LPSE...
LPX LPSM... LPX LPSM... LPX LPSM...
LPX LFE... LPX LFE... LPX LFE...
LPX LFM... LPX LFM... LPX LFM...
X2 X2 X2
(AC) ~
LED elements Order code Rated auxi- LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
steady light liary supply colour per – Auxiliary supply voltage:
voltage pkg • LPX LP… with steady light
[V] n° [kg] 12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 180-265VAC
• LPX LE… with steady light
Steady light, screw termination. 12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC/DC; 180-265VAC/DC
Supplied without mounting adapter. • LPX LF… flashing light
LPX LP B3 12-30V Green 10 0.016 18-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 180-265VAC
LPX LP B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016 – Maximum consumption for:
• LPX LP… steady light and LPX LF… flashing light:
LPX LP B5 Yellow 10 0.016 17mA (12/18-30VAC/DC); 20mA (85-140VAC);
LPX LP B6 Blue 10 0.016 17mA (185-265VAC)
LPX LP B8 White 10 0.016 • LPX LE… steady light:
LPX LP... 11mA (12-30VAC/DC); 5mA (85-140VAC/DC);
LPX LP E3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016 3mA (185-265VAC/DC)
LPX LP E4 Red 10 0.016 – Total protection for LPX LP… and LPX LF… types:
LPX LP E5 Yellow 10 0.016 • Against overvoltages
• Against stray currents in wiring
LPX LP E6 Blue 10 0.016 • To reduce flickering phenomenon
LPX LP E8 White 10 0.016 • To withstand vibrations
7 LPX LP M3 185-265VAC Green 10 0.016 – Simple protection for LPX LE… types:
Total protection against overvoltages • Against overvoltages
LPX LP M4 Red 10 0.016 • To withstand vibrations
and stray currents in wiring, to
LPX LP M5 Yellow 10 0.016 – Electrical life: 100,000 hours
reduce of flickering phenomenon
LPX LP M6 Blue 10 0.016 – Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter in the middle
and withstand vibrations. position for each illuminated actuator, also internally on
LPX LP M8 White 10 0.016 the LPZ control station cover
– No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
– Any mounting position allowed
Order code Rated auxi- LED Qty Wt – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 0.74lbft
liary supply colour per – Ambient conditions:
voltage pkg • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
[V] n° [kg] (-25...+60°C for LPX LE...)
• Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
Steady light, screw termination. – Degree of protection per IEC/EN: IP20.
Supplied without mounting adapter.
LPX LE B3 12-30V Green 10 0.016 Mounting adapter
LPX LE B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016 See page 7.18.
Type: LPX AU120.
LPX LE B5 Yellow 10 0.016 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
LPX LE B6 Blue 10 0.016 fixed to the mounting surface.
LPX LE B8 White 10 0.016
Maximum conductor cross section
LPX LE E3 85-140V Green 10 0.016 1 o 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
LPX LE E4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016
LPX LE E5 Yellow 10 0.016 Wiring diagram
LPX LE... LPX LE E6 Blue 10 0.016
X2 X1
LPX LE E8 White 10 0.016
LPX LE M3 185-265V Green 10 0.016
Simple protection AC/DC Certifications and compliance
LPX LE M4 Red 10 0.016 Certifications obtained: UL listed for USA and Canada
against overvoltages
LPX LE M5 Yellow 10 0.016 (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC.
and to withstand
LPX LE M6 Blue 10 0.016 Pending at time of catalogue printing: RINA.
vibrations. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
LPX LE M8 White 10 0.016 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
elements
55 (2.16”)
LED ELEMENTS
– Supply voltage:
Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)
Ø0.88” (+0.01, -0) 12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 185-265VAC
– Maximum consumption: 17mA (12-30VAC/DC); 20mA
(85-140VAC); 17mA (185-265VAC)
Push-in wiring technology for rigid cables or with ferrules only - no screwdriver needed – Total protection:
Cable retaining force guaranteed over time even in presence of vibrations and/or impacts • Against overvoltages
Push-in • Against stray currents in wiring
• To withstand vibrations
technology • To reduce flickering phenomenon
– Electrical life: 100,000 hours.
X2 X1
LED elements, steady light Order code Rated auxi- LED Q.ty Wt General characteristics
base mount on LPZ control liary supply colour per CONTACT ELEMENTS
voltage pkg Wiping action and dual scaping-oscillating effect
stations [V] n° [kg] IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
7 Screw termination.
IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
Conductivity: 1mA 5V
Steady light. UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600
Direct snap-on mounting on LPZ… control station base.
IEC/EN operational characteristics in AC15 category:
LPX LPB B3 12-30VAC/DC Green 10 0.016
[V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
LPX LPB B4 Red 10 0.016
[A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
LPX LPB B5 Yellow 10 0.016
IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
LPX LPB...
LPX LPB B6 Blue 10 0.016
[V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
LPX LPB B8 White 10 0.016
[A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
LPX LPB E3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016
Short circuit protection fuse: max calibre 10A gG/SC
LPX LPB E4 Red 10 0.016 Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ
LPX LPB E5 Yellow 10 0.016 Terminals: Clamp screw and washer.
LPX LPB E6 Blue 10 0.016
LPX LPB E8 White 10 0.016 Stroke of contact elements
LPX LPB M3 185-265VAC Green 10 0.016 NO
Total protection against NC
overvoltages and stray currents in LPX LPB M4 Red 10 0.016
1 1.8 3 4 4.8mm
wiring, to reduce flickering LPX LPB M5 Yellow 10 0.016 (0.03”) (0.07”) (0.11”) (0.16”) (0.19”)
phenomenon and withstand LPX LPB M6 Blue 10 0.016
vibrations. LPX LPB M8 White 10 0.016 Closed contact Open contact
LED ELEMENTS
– Supply voltage:
12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 185-265VAC
– Maximum consumption: 17mA (12-30VAC/DC);
20mA (85-140VAC); 17mA (185-265VAC)
Mounting position on the LPZ control station base – Total protection:
• Against overvoltages
LPX LPB... • Against stray currents in wiring
Fixing structures always mounted in
LPX CB... • To reduce flickering phenomenon
3 pieces middle pos.3
max/actuator • To withstand vibrations
– Electrical life: 100,000 hours.
X2 X1
Wiring diagrams
7-22 page 7-49
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
Materials
Polycarbonate.
Anti-loosening action
Anti-rotation indents to extend Certifications and compliance
fixing ring gripping over time
Certifications obtained: EAC,CCC; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus – File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices;
pending at time of catalogue printing: cULus for
LPZP6A8 and RINA for all types.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508A for types without actuators /
UL508 for types complete with actuator, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
7-23
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU120
LPX CS... LPX AU120 LPX C...
LPX C... LPX CF...
LPC B10... LPC B20... LPC B30... LPX CF... LPX CS...
LPC B11... LPC B21... LPX CS... LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX C... LPX AU... LPX CF...
LPX CF... LPX CS...
LPX CS... LPX E...
LPX E...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LPX AU120
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPC Q10... LPC Q20... LPX AU...
7 LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU...
LPC B614... LPC B616... LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPC B71... LPC B72... LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX C...
LPC B73...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
SELECTOR SWITCHES
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120 LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU... LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX CF... LPX CF...
LPC S1... - LPC S2... LPC S3... LPX CS... LPX CS...
LPX E... LPX E...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX CF...
LPC R1... LPC R2... LPX CS...
LPX E...
7-24
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPC BL10... LPX CF...
LPC BL20...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LPX L...
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPX T...
LPX AU120
LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPC BL664... LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPC SL12... LPC SL13...
LPX E...
LPX T...
CONTROL STATIONS Example of 2 way control station equipped with selector switch, label holder and label along with pilot light
LPX LPB...
LPX CB... always fitted in middle pos. n°3
1 0 2
1 A 3 2 1B 3 2
7-25
Pushbuttons and selector switches
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series
STOP
Contact activation for 2-position selector switch Contact activation of 3-position selector switch
2 2
1 1
Contacts Contacts
1 2 1 2
A — — A —
B B — —
C —
Lamp-holder elements
See page 7-40 and 41.
Lamps
Maximum recommended power: 1.2W.
See page 7-36.
Lamp-holder elements
See page 7-40 and 41.
Lamps
Maximum recommended power: 1.2W.
See page 7-36.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, EAC, CCC,
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Mechanical endurance
Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Standard supply with actuator.
8 LM2T P110 The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
The potentiometer drives latch onto the mounting adapter
by simple rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling; not
suitable for LPZ control stations.
3
65 (2.56”) 2
for LM2T J4... 1
50 (1.97”) 1 2
for LM2T J2... A
A
2
42.4 (1.67”)
D N
30 1 N
(3.74”)
95
(1.18”)
C
B B
Dimensions
7-36 page 7-48
Push buttons and selectors
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series
Dimensions
page 7-48 7-37
Push buttons and selectors
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series
Labels with text for Order code Text Qty per Wt General characteristics
LM2T AU100 legend holder pkg The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on
n° [kg] metalised grey polycarbonate background (adhesive).
General use. Special versions
8 LM2T AU206 Blank for writing 50 0.001 Labels in different languages are available.
8 LM2T AU207 Sheet with 108 labels 1 0.005 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
for laser printing front cover.
8 LM2T AU208 Sheet with 108 1 0.005
laser-printed labels
8 LM2T AGB230
8 LM2T AGB216 CLOSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB220 EMERGENCY 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB231 FAST 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB263 FAULT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB215 FORWARD 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB228 LEFT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB218 LOWER 50 0.001
7 8 LM2T AGB221 OFF 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB223 ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB211 OPEN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB229 POWER ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB227 RAISE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB226 RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB222 REVERSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB217 RIGHT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB241 RUNNING 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB224 SLOW 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB225 START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB230 STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB214 STOP RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB240 THERMAL FAULT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB237 TRIP 50 0.001
For selector switches.
8 LM2T AI233 AUTO-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI234 AUTO-O-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI241 MAN-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI242 MAN-O-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB235 FWD-O-REV 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB236 OFF-ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB232 STOP-START 50 0.001
International labels for pushbuttons.
8 LM2T AU200 O 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU201 I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU202 II 50 0.001
International labels for selector switches.
8 LM2T AU203 O-I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU204 I-II 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU205 I-O-II 50 0.001
Recommended use with LM2T AU206 blank label.
Sheet with 108 adhesive labels.
Complete code with label text required.
Plastic disk for mushroom Ordering code Text Qty per Wt General characteristics
pkg The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic.
head pushbuttons There is a 2x2mm / 0.08x0.08in index.
n° [kg]
8 LM2T AU113 EMERGENCY STOP 10 0.005 Special versions
Ø90mm / 3.5in The disk text in different languages is available.
8 LM2T AU115 EMERGENCY STOP 10 0.005 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
ERGENCY Ø60mm / 2.4in front cover.
EM
8 LM2T AU118 NOT AUS / 10 0.005
ARRET D’URGENCE /
PARO EMERGENCIA
Ø60mm / 2.4in
STOP
Dimensions
7-38 page 7-48
Push buttons and selectors
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series
(1.18”)
65
8 LM2T CF10
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Wiring diagrams
Lamp-holders elements Order code Rated Type of Qty Wt Direct supply With resistor and diode
with mounting adapter auxiliary bulb per LM2T EL400 X1 LM2T ZL230 X1
LED elements steady light Order code Supply voltage LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
colour per – Supply voltage:
pkg • 8 LM2T L… types:
[V] n° [kg] 12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 187-265VAC
• 8 LM2T M… types:
Screw termination. 18-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 187-265VAC
Supplied without mounting adapter. – Maximum consumption:
8 LM2T LB3 18-30VAC/DC Green 10 0.016 17mA (12-30 / 18-30VAC/DC); 20mA (85-140VAC);
8 LM2T LB4 Red 10 0.016 17mA (185-265VAC)
– Protection:
8 LM2T LB5 Yellow 10 0.016 • Against overvoltages
8 LM2T LB6 Blue 10 0.016 • Against stray currents in wiring
8 LM2T L... 8 LM2T LB8 White 10 0.016 • To reduce flickering phenomenon
• To withstand vibrations
8 LM2T LE3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016 – Electrical life: 100,000 hours
8 LM2T LE4 Red 10 0.016 – Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter in the middle
8 LM2T LE5 Yellow 10 0.016 position for each illuminated actuator, also internally
on the LPZ control station cover
8 LM2T LE6 Blue 10 0.016 – No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
8 LM2T LE8 White 10 0.016 – Any mounting position allowed
8 LM2T LM3 187-265VAC Green 10 0.016 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/1.57lbft 7
– Ambient conditions:
8 LM2T LM4 Red 10 0.016 • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
8 LM2T LM5 Yellow 10 0.016 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T LM6 Blue 10 0.016 – Degree of protection: IP20.
8 LM2T LM8 White 10 0.016 Mounting adapter
Only LM2T LB… type is suitable for use with LM2T T100 test element. See page 7-39.
Type: 8 LM2T AU120.
The adapter is fixed on the mounting surface by means of
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
LED elements flashing light Order code Supply voltage LED Qty Wt internally on LPZ control station covers.
colour per
pkg Maximum conductor cross section
[V] n° [kg] 1 o 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
Screw termination. Wiring diagram
Supplied without mounting adapter.
X2 X1
8 LM2T MB3 18-30VAC/DC Green 10 0.016
8 LM2T MB4 Red 10 0.016
8 LM2T MB5 Yellow 10 0.016 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, UL Listed for USA and
8 LM2T MB6 Blue 10 0.016 Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.
8 LM2T M... 8 LM2T MB8 White 10 0.016 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
8 LM2T ME3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14-95.
8 LM2T ME4 Red 10 0.016
8 LM2T ME5 Yellow 10 0.016
8 LM2T ME6 Blue 10 0.016
8 LM2T ME8 White 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM3 187-265VAC Green 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM4 Red 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM5 Yellow 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM6 Blue 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM8 White 10 0.016
Only LM2T MB… type is suitable for use with LM2T T100 test element.
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LM2T B614.. LM2T B616... LM2T B634... LM2T B654... LM2T AU170 LM2T AU170
LM2T AU140
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T B73...
SELECTOR SWITCHES
LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
7-42
Push buttons and selectors
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series
DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LM2T L... - LM2T M...
LM2T DL400 - LM2T EL400
LM2T C... LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230
LM2T CF...
LM2T AU120
LM2T C...
LM2T BL71... LM2T BL72... LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
7-43
Pushbuttons and selector switches
series dimensions [mm (in)]
(0.39”)
10
(0.39”)
10
(0.04-0.24” max)
10
(1.16”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.5
(1.16”)
(1.38”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.5
(1.38”)
40 (1.57”)
30
35
30
35
40 (1.57”)
ADD-ON
43 ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX AU120
(1.69”) n°1 LPX AU120 ADD-ON
(possible LPX T...) n°1 LPX CF...
ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX C...
n°1 LPX... in middle
pos. on LPX AU120 adapter
(1.79”) (1.61”)
(0.04-0.24”max) (1.61”) (0.04-0.24”max) (1.61”) (1.61”)
(1.46”)
(1.38”)
(1.46”)
(1.38”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.97”)
(1.97”)
37
35
37
35
Ø30
Ø30
Ø30
Ø30
30
30
50
50
43 43
(1.69”) LPX C01SM LPX AU120 (1.69”) LPX C02SM LPX AU120
Flush pushbutton with test element and spring-clamp terminal Drillings – Minimum recommended distances with
contact or LED elements LPX CS... - LPX LPS... spring-clamp terminal contact or LED elements
30
20.1 (1.18”)
(0.79”) 30
(0.39”)
(1.63”)
Ø29.5
41.5
(2.16”)
30
55
(2.16”)
55
43 ADD-ON
(1.69”) ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX AU120
(possible LPX T…)
n°1 LPX CS...
n°1 LPX LPS... in middle pos.
of LPX AU120 adapter
Pushbutton actuators
10 16.7 14.5
(0.39”) (0.66”) (0.57”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
Ø60
Ø40
(1.16”)
(0.90”)
Ø29.5
Ø22.8
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø30
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
7-44
Pushbuttons and selector switches
series dimensions [mm (in)]
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
Knob Key
LPC S1... LPC S3...
Illuminated knob
LPC SL1...
Double-touch actuators Double-touch actuators Triple-touch actuators with Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
with or without indicator with or without indicator middle extended button 30
2 flush buttons 1 flush and 1 extended buttons (1.18”)
16.5 30
29.5 29.5 (0.65”) (1.18”)
10.2 15.7 29.5
(1.16”) (0.40”) (1.16”) (1.16”) 10
(0.62”)
55
7
(2.16”)
55
LPC B71... - LPC B72... - LPC B73...
LPC BL71... LPC BL72...
3.2 (+0.2, -0) Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.12”(+0.01”, -0”) Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
(1.16”)
(1.14”)
Ø29.5
(1.16")
Ø29.5
Ø28.9
Ø29.5
(1.37")
34.7
(0.44")
11.2
1-6max
(0.04-0.24”max) Ø21.9
(0.86")
LPL... 8 LP2T IL...P LP2T ZG... LPX S...
Threaded plug for Knob selector Label holder Label Label holder Label Plastick disk for mushroom-head pushbuttons
unused drilled switch protection 30
(0.60”)
30
(0.49”)
(1.12”)
(0.48”)
Ø28.5
(1.18”)
holes
15.3
(1.18”)
12.4
12.1
27 26.5 1.5
21.3 27.5 28 27.5 (1.04”) (0.06”)
(1.10”) 1.5 (1.06”)
(0.59”)
Ø60 (2.36”)
(0.84”) (1.08”) (1.08”) (0.06”)
Ø90 (3.54”)
(1.12”)
15
Ø28.5
(1.14”)
45 (1.77”)
48 (1.89”)
(1.42”)
Ø29
Ø36
LPX A130 LM2T AU185 LPX AU100 LPX AU109 LPX AU105 LPX AU108
LM2T A...2... LPX AU112 LPX AU114
LPX AU113 LPX AU115
LPX AU118
Rubber boot for flush Rubber boot for Double/triple button boot Rubber boot for Padlockable protection for Cable gland
buttons extended buttons mushroom-head buttons mushroom-head latch buttons
except LPC B634...
30.7 16.8 41.5
(1.21”) (0.66”) 49 45
13.7 18.2 (1.63”) (1.93”) (1.77”)
(0.54”) (0.72”) CH24
(0.25”)
55.2 (2.17”)
6.4
(1.69”)
(0.35”) (1.11”)
28.1
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
Ø43
Ø31
Ø31
(0.33”)
8.4
M20
LPX AU13... LPX AU14... LPX AU157 LPX AU167 LPX AU158 LPX P01
Ø4 .17”
56 (2.20”) 72 (2.83”)
(0
(0
.3 )
(0 4.8
)
(0 4.8
9”
)
9”
.1
.1
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
105,4 (4.15”)
4.8
117 (4.61”)
90 (3.54”)
(0.19”)
(1.38”)
Ø22.3
35
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for
M16/PG11 M16/PG11 4.8 (0.19”)
(left side)
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Knockout for
Ø4 .17”
(0
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom) M16/PG11 M20/PG13.5
(one/side)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
7-45
Pushbuttons and selector switches
series dimensions [mm (in)]
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 58 (2.28”)
(0
58 (2.28”)
(0
(0 4.8
)
(0 4.8
.3 )
.3 )
)
9”
9”
.1
.1
Knockout for
139.4 /5.49”)
M20/PG13.5
151 (5.94”)
124 (4.88”)
174.4 (6.87”)
159 (6.26”)
151 (5.94”)
(two/side)
(1.38”)
35
4.8 (0.19”)
(1.38”)
35
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
4.8 (0.19”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for
.3 )
M16/PG11 Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
Ø4 .17”
Knockout for
(0
(on top and bottom)
.3 )
M16/PG11
7 Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
LPZ P5 A8 LPZ P6 A8
60.4 (2.38”) 56 (2.20”) 72 (2.83”) 60.4 (2.38”) 56 (2.20”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 58 (2.28”) 58 (2.28”)
(0
(0
(0 4.8
(0 4.8
)
)
.3 )
.3 )
9”
9”
.1
.1
Knockout for
M20/PG13.5
208.4 (8.20”)
220 (8.66”)
193 (7.60”)
(two/side)
Knockout for
240,4 (9.46”)
225 (8.86”)
252 (9.92”)
M20/PG13.5
(two/side)
(1.38”)
35
4.8 (0.19”)
(1.38”)
35
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
4.8 (0.19”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for
.3 )
M16/PG11 Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
.3 )
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 72 (2.83”)
(0.19”)
(0.19”)
(0
(0
.3 )
4.8
4.8
(1.63”) (1.46”)
60.4 (2.38”)
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
72 (2.83”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Ø4 .17”
(0
(0
.3 )
.3 )
LPZ P1 B5 02 LPZ P1 B5 03
60.4 (2.38”) 60.4 (2.38”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
(0.19”)
(0.19”)
72 (2.83”)
(0
(0
.3 )
4.8
4.8
(1.46”) (1.63”)
60.4 (2.38”)
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
72 (2.83”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Ø4 .17”
(0
(0
(left side)
.3 )
.3 )
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
7-46
Pushbuttons and selector switches
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series dimensions [mm (in)]
(0.39”)
22.7 43 (1.69”) 13.8
(0.39”)
10
(0.80”)
10
(1.67”)
(0.04-0.24” max)
42.4
66 (2.60”)
(1.17”)
(1.67”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.8
(1.67”)
(1.17”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.8
42.4
42.4
30
30
65 (2.56”)
ADD-ON n°1 LM2T AU120 n°1 LM2T AU120
ELEMENTS ADD-ON
n°1 LM2T C... - LM2T E... - LM2T T... ELEMENTS n°1 LM2T CF...
n°1 LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230
n°1 LM2T DL400... - LM2T EL400
n°1 LM2T L... - LM2T M...
Pushbutton actuators 7
13.8 20.9 20.5
(0.54”) (0.82”) (0.81”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
(1.67”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
42.4
42.4
Ø20 Ø20
(0.79”) (0.79”)
LM2T R1... LM2T R2004
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Double-touch actuators Double-touch actuators Triple-touch actuators with Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
with or without indicator with or without indicator middle extended button
2 flush buttons 1 flush and 1 extended buttons 50 (1.97”)
30
(1.18”)
28.5 28.5 28.5 17.4
(1.12”) 12 16
(1.12”) 12 (0.63”) (1.12”) 12 (0.68”)
(0.47”) ((0.47”) (0 (0.47”)
(1.67”)
42.4
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
STOP
80 (3.15”)
7-47
Pushbuttons and selector switches
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series dimensions [mm (in)]
56.8 (2.24”)
27.5 27.5 27.5 23.9 16.5 35
(1.08”) (1.08”) (1.08”) 27.5 (0.94”) (0.65”) (1.38”)
(1.08”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
(1 17”)
Ø29.8
(1.55”)
(1.17”)
Ø39.4
Ø29.8
Knob Illuminated knob Lever Key LM2T IL1... LM2T P100
LM2T S1... LM2T SL1... LM2T S2... LM2T S3... LM2T P110
Joystick with free actuation lever Joystick with mechanical latch lever
22.7 43 (1.69”) 22.7 43
(0.39”)
(0.39”)
1-6 max 70.5 (2.77”) (0.89”) 1.5 1-6 max 70.5 (2.77”) (0.89”) 1.5
(0.04-0.24” max) (0.06”) (0.04-0.24” max) (0.06”)
10
10
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
42.4
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
42.4
30
30
7 Only for
LM2T J40 LM2T J20
20.1
(0.79”)
Only for
LM2T J41 LM2T J21
20.1
(0.79”)
(1.12”)
27.8
Ø28.5
27.8 (1.08”) (1.08”) ERGENCY
(1.09”) EM
(0.59”)
(1.09”) ERGENCY
15.1
EM
Ø60 (2.36”)
Ø90 (3.54”)
48 (1.89”)
45-6 (1.79”)
(1.12”)
Ø28.5
(0.48”)
12.2
(0.61”)
15.4
(0.49”)
12.4
STOP
IP66 boot for flush and IP66 boot for extended and IP66 boot for double/triple IP66 boot for mushroom- Threaded plug for Knob selector switch
illumined flush buttons illuminated extended buttons touch buttons head buttons unused drilled holes protection
25 30 20.4
18.1 (1.18”) (0.80”) 35 21.3 27.5
(0.71”) (0.98”)
(1.38”) (0.84”) (1.08”)
(1.31”)
Ø33.4
(1.31”)
Ø33.4
(1.14”)
(1.42”)
55 (2.16”)
Ø29
Ø36
(1.73”)
Ø44
LM2T AU13... LM2T AU14... LM2T AU157 LM2T AU167 LM2T A130 LM2T AU185
10 (0.39”)
51.3 (2.02”)
1-6 max
1-6 max 1-6 max (0.04-0.24” max)
(0.04-0.24”max)
(0.99”)
(0.04-0.24”max)
25.2
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
30
30
43 (1.69”)
43 (1.69”) 20.3
20.3 (0.80”)
(0.80”) 1-6 max 20.3
(0.04-0.24”max) (0.80”)
(1.46”)
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
42.4
42.4
37
42.4
LM2T EL400 LM2T L... - LM2T M... LM2T YL... - LM2T GL...
LM2T DL400 LM2T XL... - LM2T FL...
LM2T ZL230
LM2T VL230
7-48
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Wiring diagrams
7 1 5 .3 .1 .3 .1 .1
3
8 2 6 .4 .2 .4 .2 .2
4
X1 X1 X1 X1
7
X5 X2 X5 X5
LM2T EL400 LM2T ZL230 LM2T YL... LM2T GL... LM2T T100 LM2T L...
LM2T DL400 LM2T VL230 LM2T XL... LM2T FL... LM2T M...
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X2 X2 X2 X2 X5 X5
TEST
7-49
Page 8-2 Page 8-3
SEC. - PAGE
Signal towers and beacons
Signal towers Ø70mm / Ø2.75” ....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
Signal beacons Ø62mm / Ø2.44” ..................................................................................................................................... 8 - 3
Accessorios ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8 - 4
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 8 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 8 - 7
S IGNALLING
AND
C ONTROL
Signal towers and beacons
LT7 CP 01 module)
8 LT7 FL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092
U
LT7ALB…
LT7 GL … 8 LT7 FL E5 Yellow, 110-120VAC 1 0.092 (incandescent
LT7 L…
LT7 FL … LT7 L …
bulb)
E N
LT7 ALB…
(incandescent bulb) LT7 TP0100
LB6 EL …
LB6 GL …
LB6 S2...
Visual code Red Yellow Orange Blue Green White Interpretation of light and sound signals for signal
Meaning Danger. Warning and Mandatory Normal No specific towers and beacons
Emergency. Caution. command. situation. meaning. Light and sound signals are a fundamental element for
Abnormal Regular the safety of a system.
situation. operation. To avoid incorrect interpretations, a European standard
Sound Fast modulated Continuous Alternating Constant and Other sounds. has been introduced defining an equivocal meaning to
repetition or short sound. sound at. prolonged visual or audible signalling devices.
high-pitch constant tone sound Each colour or sound alarm corresponds to a specific
pulsing. after an alarm. state of operation of the connected system and various
levels of warning, as given in the following table,
Correlated Immediate Control Intervention No specific Depending on according to EN 981-IEC/EN 60073 standards.
actions intervention intervention needed for action. the situation. The white coloured module does not have a specific
to deal with required. mandatory meaning so it can be used as one may need.
dangerous action.
situation.
Accessories and spare Order code Description Qty per Wt General characteristics
parts for signal towers and pkg The assembly operation of the signal towers is simple
n° [kg] and fast and does not require the use of any tools.
beacons The fixing of each element on top of the other is obtained
Fixing bases. by the bayonet insert joint, with slight pressure and
8 LT7 BP 01 Horizontal surface mount, 1 0.045 simple rotating movement. There are specific white
black plastic inscriptions to indicate the correct alignment.
with 100mm/3.94”
extension
8 LT7 BP 02 Vertical wall mount, 1 0.078
black plastic
Extension tube for plastic base, stackable sections.
8 LT7 TP 0100 100mm/3.94”, 1 0.029
black plastic
LT7 BP 01 Incandescent bulb, 5W, BA15d fitting.
8 LT7 ALB A 12VAC/DC 10 0.006
8 LT7 ALB B 24VAC/DC 10 0.006 1 1
8 LT7 ALB E 130VAC/DC 10 0.006 2
8 LT7 ALB M 260VAC/DC 10 0.006
LED bulb, BA15d fitting.
8 8 LT7 ALL A4 Red, 12VAC/DC 1 0,010
2
LT7 BM 02
LT7 TM
Dimensions
8-4 page 8-7
Signal towers and beacons
Accessories and spare Order code Description Qty per Wt General characteristics
parts for signal beacons pkg The assembly operation of the signal beacons is simple
n° [kg] and fast and does not require the use of any tools.
Ø62mm / Ø2.44” There are specific white marks to indicate the correct
Fixing bases for light modules. alignment.
8 LB6 BP 03 Horizontal surface mount, 1 0.040
plastic, black colour
8 LB6 BP 05 For Ø22mm / Ø0.87” 1 0.040
hole type, black plastic
8 LB6 BP 07 For extension 1 0.020
connection, plastic,
LB6 BP03 black colour. Use with
fixing bases 8 LT7 BP 01
and 8 LT7 BP 02 2
1
Fixing bases for sound modules.
8 LB6 BP 04 Horizontal surface mount, 1 0.040
plastic, black colour
8 LB6 BP 06 For Ø22mm / Ø0.87” 1 0.040
LB6 BP05 hole type, black plastic
8 LB6 BP 08 For extension 1 0.020
connection, plastic,
black colour. Use with 8
fixing bases 8 LT7 BP 01
and 8 LT7 BP 02
LB6 BP07
LB6 BP04
LB6 BP06
LB6 BP08
Dimensions
page 8-7 8-5
Signal towers and beacons
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(0.63”)
LT7 GL...
16
LT7 FL...
LT7 S1... Ø 60 (2.36”)
(0.51)
13
LT7 S0 B LT7 S2...
(0.51”)
13
92 (3.62”)
Ø 60 (2.36”)
72 (2.83”)
56 (2.20”)
45.5 (1.79”)
Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”)
473.5 (18.64”)
453.9 (17.87”)
8
381.5 (15.02”)
325.5 (12.81”)
269.5 (10.61”)
213.5 (8.40”)
157.5 (6.20”)
101.5 (4.00”)
LT7 CM 01 - LT7 CP 01
Ø5 (0.20”)
7 (0.2
7”)
.65”)
42 (1
48
(1
.89
”)
62.5 (2.46”)
62.5 (2.46”)
17 (0.67”)
(1.22”)
(1.46”)
31
37
(0.92”)
23.5
Ø22
Ø85 (3.35”) (0.87”)
Ø62 (2.44”) Ø62 (2.44”) Ø62 (2.44”)
Ø5 (0.20”)
65 (2.56”)
(1.28”)
32.5
8-6
Signal towers and beacons
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(0.43”)
Ø25 Ø25 Ø20
22 (0.87”)
11
(0.98”) (0.98”) Ø30 (0.79”) 71 (2.79”)
(0.71”)
(1.18”)
Ø20 Ø20
18
(0.79”) (0.79”) 105 (4.13”)
(0.35”)
20
9
(0.79”)
51 (2.01”)
(0.31”)
109 (4.29”)
Ø5
64.5 (2.54”)
8
Ø5 70 (2.75”) (0.20”)
122 (4.80”)
(0.20”)
54 (2.12”)
Ø5
(0.20”)
54 (2.12”)
(0.83”)
21
54 (2.12”)
38 (1.50”) 70 (2.75”)
(0.57”)
14.5
Ø70 (2.75”)
54 (2.12”)
Ø5
(0.20”) 8
54 (2.12”)
(0.79”)
22
Wiring diagrams
LT7 CM 01 - LT7 CP 01 X1
BULB BULB
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X2
L
N
8-7
Page 9-2 Page 9-2 Page 9-18
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES METAL LIMIT SWITCHES PREWIRED METAL LIMIT SWITCHES
KB-KC TYPES KM-KN TYPES KP TYPE
• Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KB type • Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KM • Dimensions to EN 50047 stadards
• Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KC type type • 2 metre long cable
• Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing • Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KN • IEC degree of protection IP67.
• Removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact type
blocks • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
• Bi-directional versions • Removable and interchangeable auxiliary
• Unique fixing mechanism of operating head contact blocks
• IEC degree of protection IP65 • Bi-directional versions
• M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry • Unique fixing mechanism of operating head
available. • IEC degree of protection IP65
• M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry
available.
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES METAL LIMIT SWITCHES ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES
T SERIES PL SERIES FOR NORMAL STOPPING
• Dimensions to EN 50041 standards • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic
• Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic • Maximum of 2 auxiliary contacts housing
housing • IEC degree of protection IP40 and IP65 • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
• Heads rotatable in 4 different 90° angle • PG11 cable entry. • IEC degree of protection IP40, IP65 and
positions IP66
• IEC degree of protection IP66 • PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry.
• PG13.5 cable entry.
SEC. - PAGE
Metal and plastic limit switches, K series
(dimensions to/compatible to EN 50047)
Top push rod plunger ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 2
Top roller push plunger ...................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 3
Roller centre push lever ..................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 4
Roller side push lever ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 5
Roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 6
Adjustable roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 8
Ceramic rod lever .............................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 10
Adjustable rod lever ........................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
Wobble stick, omnidirectional ............................................................................................................................................ 9 - 12
Hinge operating ................................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 13
Slotted lever ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 14
Key operated ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 15
Accessories and spare parts .............................................................................................................................................. 9 - 16
Prewired metal limit switches, K series .................................................................................................................... 9 - 18
Plastic limit switches T series (dimensions to EN 50041)
Top push rod plunger and roller lever.................................................................................................................................. 9 - 19
Wobble stick, omnidirectional and key operated ................................................................................................................. 9 - 20
Metal limit switches, PL series
Top push rod plunger, top roller push plunger, roller centre push lever ................................................................................ 9 - 21
Latch and manual release ................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 22
Manual reload and magnetic release .................................................................................................................................. 9 - 22
Bi-directional .................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 22
Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping ................................................................................................ 9 - 23
S IGNALLING
Rope-pull lever limit switches for emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant ................................................. 9 - 25
Plastic micro switches, K series .................................................................................................................................. 9 - 26
Foot switches, K series .................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 27
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 9 - 28
AND
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Plunger Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB A1 S11 KM A1 S11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
Snap action remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB A1 S02 KM A1 S02 2NC Metal 5 configuration with no tools.
Snap action The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB A1 A11 KM A1 A11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
Slow action make
before break Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB A1 L11 KM A1 L11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB A... - KM A... Slow action – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB A1 L02 KM A1 L02 2NC Metal 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Slow action – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB A1 L20 KM A1 L20 2NO Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
Slow action • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB A1 L12 KM A1 L12 1NO+2NC Metal 5 • 690VAC for KB-KC types
Slow action • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB A1 L21 KM A1 L21 2NO+1NC Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
Slow action • 6kV for KB-KC types
• 4kV for KM-KN types
9 KB A1 L03 KM A1 L03 3NC
Slow action
Metal 5
– Class II insulation for KB-KC only
– Contact resistance: <10mΩ
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC A1 S11 KN A1 S11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Snap action – Housing:
KC A1 S02 KN A1 S02 2NC Metal 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
Snap action polymer thermoplastic
• KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC A1 A11 KN A1 A11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
Slow action make 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
before break – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KC A... - KN A... KC A1 L11 KN A1 L11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Operating force: 5N / 1.1lb
Slow action – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC A1 L02 KN A1 L02 2NC Metal 5 – Tightening torque:
Slow action • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
• Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC A1 L20 KN A1 L20 2NO Metal 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Slow action – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Ambient conditions:
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
front cover. • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Top roller push plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
Ø11x4 n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB B1 S11 KM B1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB B2 S11 KM B2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB B1 S02 KM B1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB B2 S02 KM B2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB B1 A11 KM B1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB B2 A11 KM B2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
before break Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB B1 L11 KM B1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB B... - KM B... KB B2 L11 KM B2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB B1 L02 KM B1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB B2 L02 KM B2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB B1 L20 KM B1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB B2 L20 KM B2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
• 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB B1 L12 KM B1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB B2 L12 KM B2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KB-KC types
KB B1 L21 KM B1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
• 4kV for KM-KN types 9
KB B2 L21 KM B2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB B1 L03 KM B1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB B2 L03 KM B2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Housing:
KC B1 S11 KN B1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC B2 S11 KN B2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
• KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC B1 S02 KN B1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC B2 S02 KN B2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KC B1 A11 KN B1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action make – Operating force: 5N / 1.1lb
KC B2 A11 KN B2 A11 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
– Tightening torque:
KC B... - KN B... KC B1 L11 KN B1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC B2 L11 KN B2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
• Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC B1 L02 KN B1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC B2 L02 KN B2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC B1 L20 KN B1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Slow action • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KC B2 L20 KN B2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
front cover. Certifications and compliance
Ø11x4mm = Ø0.43x0.16”. Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Limit switches.
Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
M20 CABLE ENTRY IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
add the letter P at the end of the order
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N.
E.g. KBB1S11P - KBB1S11N
Roller centre push lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
Ø14x5 n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB C1 S11 KM C1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB C2 S11 KM C2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB C1 S02 KM C1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB C2 S02 KM C2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB C1 A11 KM C1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB C2 A11 KM C2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
before break Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB C1 L11 KM C1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB C2 L11 KM C2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB C1 L02 KM C1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB C... - KM C...
– UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB C2 L02 KM C2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB C1 L20 KM C1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB C2 L20 KM C2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
• 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB C1 L12 KM C1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB C2 L12 KM C2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KB-KC types
9 KB C1 L21 KM C1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
• 4kV for KM-KN types
KB C2 L21 KM C2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB C1 L03 KM C1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB C2 L03 KM C2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Housing:
KC C1 S11 KN C1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC C2 S11 KN C2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
• KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC C1 S02 KN C1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC C2 S02 KN C2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KC C1 A11 KN C1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action make – Operating force: 6N / 1.34lb
KC C2 A11 KN C2 A11 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
– Tightening torque:
KC C1 L11 KN C1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC C2 L11 KN C2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC C... - KN C... • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC C1 L02 KN C1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC C2 L02 KN C2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC C1 L20 KN C1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Slow action • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KC C2 L20 KN C2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
front cover. Certifications and compliance
Ø14x5mm = Ø0.55x0.2”. Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Limit switches.
Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
M20 CABLE ENTRY IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
add the letter P at the end of the order
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N.
E.g. KBC1S11P - KBC1S11N
Roller side push lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
Ø14x5 n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB D1 S11 KM D1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB D2 S11 KM D2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB D1 S02 KM D1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB D2 S02 KM D2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB D1 A11 KM D1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB D2 A11 KM D2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
before break Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB D1 L11 KM D1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB D2 L11 KM D2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB D1 L02 KM D1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB D... - KM D... KB D2 L02 KM D2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB D1 L20 KM D1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB D2 L20 KM D2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
• 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB D1 L12 KM D1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB D2 L12 KM D2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KB-KC types
KB D1 L21 KM D1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
• 4kV for KM-KN types 9
KB D2 L21 KM D2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB D1 L03 KM D1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB D2 L03 KM D2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Housing:
KC D1 S11 KN D1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC D2 S11 KN D2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
• KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC D1 S02 KN D1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC D2 S02 KN D2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KC D1 A11 KN D1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
– Operating force: 6N / 1.34lb
KC D2 A11 KN D2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
– Tightening torque:
KC D1 L11 KN D1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC D2 L11 KN D2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC D... - KN D... • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC D1 L02 KN D1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC D2 L02 KN D2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC D1 L20 KN D1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Slow action • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KC D2 L20 KN D2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
front cover.
Certifications and compliance
Ø14x5mm = Ø0.55x0.2”. Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Limit switches.
Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
M20 CABLE ENTRY IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
add the letter P at the end of the order
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N.
E.g. KBD1S11P - KBD1S11N
Roller lever plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB E1 S11 KM E1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB E2 S11 KM E2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB E3 S11 KM E3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB E1 S02 KM E1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB E2 S02 KM E2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB E3 S02 KM E3 S02 Rubber 5
Operational characteristics
KB E1 A11 KM E1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB E2 A11 KM E2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
before break – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB E3 A11 KM E3 A11 Rubber 5
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB E1 L11 KM E1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KM E2 L11 Slow action Metal 5
KB E1... - KB E2...
KB E2 L11 • A600 Q300 for KB types
KM E1... - KM E2...
KB E3 L11 KM E3 L11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KM types
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB E1 L02 KM E1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 • 690V for KB types
KB E2 L02 KM E2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • 440V for KM types
KB E3 L02 KM E3 L02 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kVAC for KB types
9 KB E1 L20 KM E1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • 4kVAC for KM types
KB E2 L20 KM E2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB only
KB E3 L20 KM E3 L20 Rubber 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB E1 L12 KM E1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KB E2 L12 KM E2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – Housing:
KB E3 L12 KM E3 L12 Rubber 5 • KB types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
polymer thermoplastic
KB E1 L21 KM E1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KM types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KB E2 L21 KM E2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
KB E3 L21 KM E3 L21 Rubber 5 /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
– Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KB E1 L03 KM E1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Operating torque: 3Ncm / 4.25ozin
KB E3... - KM E3... KB E2 L03 KM E2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB E3 L03 KM E3 L03 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
• Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
BI-DIRECTIONAL. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KB E1 D02 KM E1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
independent – Ambient conditions:
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0,2”. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97”x0.39”. • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
front cover.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
M20 CABLE ENTRY Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, Limit switches.
add the letter P at the end of the order Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
E.g. KBE1S11P - KBE1S11N
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Roller lever plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KC E1 S11 KN E1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KC E2 S11 KN E2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KC E3 S11 KN E3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 90° angles.
KC E1 S02 KN E1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KC E2 S02 KN E2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KC E3 S02 KN E3 S02 Rubber 5
Operational characteristics
KC E1 A11 KN E1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KC E2 A11 KN E2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
before break – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KC E3 A11 KN E3 A11 Rubber 5
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KC E1... - KC E2... KC E1 L11 KN E1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KN E1... - KN E2... Slow action Metal 5
KC E2 L11 KN E2 L11 • A600 Q300 for KC types
KC E3 L11 KN E3 L11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KN types
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KC E1 L02 KN E1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 • 690VAC for KC types
KC E2 L02 KN E2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • 440VAC for KN types
KC E3 L02 KN E3 L02 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KC types
KC E1 L20 KN E1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • 4kV for KN types 9
KC E2 L20 KN E2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KC only
KC E3 L20 KN E3 L20 Rubber 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
BI-DIRECTIONAL. – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Housing:
KC E1 D02 KN E1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 • KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
independent polymer thermoplastic
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0,2”. • KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97”x0.39”. – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – Operating torque: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC E3... - KN E3... front cover. – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
– Tightening torque:
• Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
• Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
• Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
– Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
– Ambient conditions:
• Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
• Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
• Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Adjustable roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB F1 S11 KM F1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB F2 S11 KM F2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB F3 S11 KM F3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 180° angles.
KB F4 S11 KM F4 S11 Rubber 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB F1 S02 KM F1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB F2 S02 KM F2 S02 Snap action Metal 5
Operational characteristics
KB F3 S02 KM F3 S02 Rubber 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB F4 S02 KM F4 S02 Rubber 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB F1 A11 KM F1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB F2 A11 KM F2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
before break
KB F3 A11 KM F3 A11 Rubber 5 • A600 Q300 for KB types
KB F4 A11 KM F4 A11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KM types
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB F1 L11 KM F1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • 690V for KB types
KB F2 L11 KM F2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • 440V for KM types
KB F3 L11 KM F3 L11 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kVAC for KB types
9 KB F... - KM F...
KB F4 L11 KM F4 L11 Rubber 5 • 4kVAC for KM types
KB F1 L02 KM F1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Class II insulation for KB only
KB F2 L02 KM F2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB F3 L02 KM F3 L02 Rubber 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KB F4 L02 KM F4 L02 Rubber 5 – Housing:
KB F1 L20 KM F1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • KB types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
polymer thermoplastic
KB F2 L20 KM F2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 • KM types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KB F3 L20 KM F3 L20 Rubber 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
KB F4 L20 KM F4 L20 Rubber 5 /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
– Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KB F1 L12 KM F1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KB F2 L12 KM F2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB F3 L12 KM F3 L12 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
• Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KB F4 L12 KM F4 L12 Rubber 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KB F1 L21 KM F1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
M20 CABLE ENTRY
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, KB F2 L21 KM F2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
add the letter P at the end of the order – Ambient conditions:
KB F3 L21 KM F3 L21 Rubber 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N.
E.g. KBF1S11P - KBF1S11N KB F4 L21 KM F4 L21 Rubber 5 • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KB F1 L03 KM F1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
KB F2 L03 KM F2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
KB F3 L03 KM F3 L03 Rubber 5
KB F4 L03 KM F4 L03 Rubber 5 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
BI-DIRECTIONAL. Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. Limit switches.
KB F1 D02 KM F1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
independent IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0.2”. CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.34”.
Ø50x10mm (Ø1.97x0.35”) with offset alignment.
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
front cover.
Adjustable roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KC F1 S11 KN F1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KC F2 S11 KN F2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KC F3 S11 KN F3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 180° angles.
KC F4 S11 KN F4 S11 Rubber 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
off. align. remarkable wiring ease.
KC F1 S02 KN F1 S02 2NC Plastic 5
KC F2 S02 KN F2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KC F3 S02 KN F3 S02 Rubber 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KC F4 S02 KN F4 S02 Rubber 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
off. align. – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KC F1 A11 KN F1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Slow action make • A600 Q300 for KC types
KC F2 A11 KN F2 A11 Metal 5 • A300 Q300 for KN types
before break
KC F3 A11 KN F3 A11 Rubber 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KC F4 A11 KN F4 A11 Rubber 5 • 690VAC for KC types
off. align. • 440VAC for KN types
– IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KC F... - KN F... KC F1 L11 KN F1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • 6kV for KC types
KC F2 L11 KN F2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • 4kV for KN types 9
KC F3 L11 KN F3 L11 Rubber 5 – Class II insulation for KC only
– Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KC F4 L11 KN F4 L11 Rubber 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
off. align. – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KC F1 L02 KN F1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Housing:
KC F2 L02 KN F2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
polymer thermoplastic
KC F3 L02 KN F3 L02 Rubber 5 • KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC F4 L02 KN F4 L02 Rubber 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
off. align. 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KC F1 L20 KN F1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC F2 L20 KN F2 L20 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC F3 L20 KN F3 L20 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
KC F4 L20 KN F4 L20 Rubber 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
off. align. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
• Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0.2”. – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.34”.
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Ambient conditions:
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
front cover. • Pollution degree: 3
off. align. = offset alignment. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Ceramic rod lever Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB H1 S11 KM H1 S11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
Snap action remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB H1 S02 KM H1 S02 2NC Ceramic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
Snap action of 45° angles.
KB H1 A11 KM H1 A11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
Slow action make remarkable wiring ease.
before break
Operational characteristics
KB H1 L11 KM H1 L11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
Slow action – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB H1 L02 KM H1 L02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
Slow action – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB H1 L20 KM H1 L20 2NO Ceramic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Slow action • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
• A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB H1 L12 KM H1 L12 1NO+2NC Ceramic 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
Slow action • 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB H... - KM H... KB H1 L21 KM H1 L21 2NO+1NC Ceramic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
Slow action – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KB-KC types
9 KB H1 L03 KM H1 L03 3NC
Slow action
Ceramic 5
• 4kV for KM-KN types
– Class II insulation for KB-KC only
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KC H1 S11 KN H1 S11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
Snap action – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KC H1 S02 KN H1 S02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Housing:
Snap action • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
polymer thermoplastic
KC H1 A11 KN H1 A11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 • KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Slow action make – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
before break 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KC H1 L11 KN H1 L11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action – Operating torque: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC H1 L02 KN H1 L02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
Slow action – Tightening torque:
• Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC H1 L20 KN H1 L20 2NO Ceramic 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Slow action • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC H... - KN H... IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Ambient conditions:
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
front cover. • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
• Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Adjustable rod lever Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB L1 S11 KM L1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB L2 S11 KM L2 S11 Snap action Steel 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB L1 S02 KM L1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 90° angles (180° for KC and KN types).
KB L2 S02 KM L2 S02 Snap action Steel 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB L1 A11 KM L1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB L2 A11 KM L2 A11 Slow action make Steel 5
before break Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB L1 L11 KM L1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB L2 L11 KM L2 L11 Slow action Steel 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB L1 L02 KM L1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB L... - KM L... – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB L2 L02 KM L2 L02 Slow action Steel 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB L1 L20 KM L1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB L2 L20 KM L2 L20 Slow action Steel 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
• 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB L1 L12 KM L1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB L2 L12 KM L2 L12 Slow action Steel 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KB-KC types
KB L1 L21 KM L1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
• 4kV for KM-KN types 9
KB L2 L21 KM L2 L21 Slow action Steel 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB L1 L03 KM L1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB L2 L03 KM L2 L03 Slow action Steel 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Housing:
KC L1 S11 KN L1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC L2 S11 KN L2 S11 Snap action Steel 5 polymer thermoplastic
• KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC L1 S02 KN L1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC L2 S02 KN L2 S02 Snap action Steel 5 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KC L1 A11 KN L1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action make – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC L2 A11 KN L2 A11 Steel 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
– Tightening torque:
KC L... - KN L... KC L1 L11 KN L1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC L2 L11 KN L2 L11 Slow action Steel 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
• Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC L1 L02 KN L1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC L2 L02 KN L2 L02 Slow action Steel 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC L1 L20 KN L1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Slow action • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KC L2 L20 KN L2 L20 Steel 5 • Pollution degree: 3
BI-DIRECTIONAL. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
KB L1 D02 KM L1 D02 2NC Plastic 5
independent Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
KB L2 D02 KM L2 D02 2NC Steel 5 Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
M20 CABLE ENTRY independent Limit switches.
For types with PG13.5 cable entry,
add the letter P at the end of the order Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N. IEC/EN 60947-5-1. IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
E.g. KBL1S11P - KBL1S11N
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside CSA C22.2 n° 14.
front cover.
open
closed
K... L11 13-14 K... L21 31-32
21-22 23-24
0 7° 10° 13-14
0 7° 10°
K... L02 21-22
11-12 K... L03 11-12
0 7° 21-22
31-32
K... L12 21-22 0 7°
31-32
13-14
0 7° 10°
open
closed
K... L11 13-14 K... L21 31-32
21-22 23-24
0 7° 10° 90° 13-14
0 7° 10° 90°
K... L02 21-22
11-12 K... L03 11-12
0 7° 90° 21-22
31-32
K... L12 21-22 0 7° 90°
31-32
13-14
0 7° 10° 90°
KX N1 KX N2
KX N3 KX N4 KX N5
KX A F1 KX A F2
KX A F3 KX A F4 KX A H1
KX A L1 KX A L2 KX A M1 KX A M2
Cable glands and cable Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
per The cable glands are in plastic with either M20 or PG13.5
conduit pkg thread and provide to keep the cable in place and
maintain the proper IP protection of the limit switch after
n° [kg] installation.
KX P01 M20 cable gland 50 0.009 Operational characteristics for cable gland
KX P02 PG13.5 cable gland 50 0.009 – Material: Self-extinguishing polyamide
KX P03 M20 rubber cable conduit 50 0.004 – IEC degree of protection: IP68
– Gland seal with cable diameter: 6-12mm/0.24-0.47”.
KX P... KX P03
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC.
Compliant with standards: EN 50262, UL508.
Dimensions
pages 9-28 and 29 9-17
Limit, micro and foot switches
Prewired metal limit switches, K series
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Plunger Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg] TS1 01... 21-22
TS2 01... 13-14
Without reset button. 21-22
13-14
TS1 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.120 [mm (in)]
0 6 (0.24”)
Snap action
TL1 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.120 TL1 01... 21-22
TL2 01... 13-14
Slow action [mm (in)]
0 6 (0.24”)
With reset button on front.
TS1 05... 21-22
TS2 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.130 TS2 05... 13-14
Snap action 21-22
13-14
TL2 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.130
0 60°
TS1... - TL1... Slow action
TL1 05... 21-22
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to TL2 05... 13-14
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 0 60°
General characteristics
The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards
EN 50041 for dimensions.
The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of
self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent
mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for 9
assembly on machinery or installations in the
general-purpose industrial field as well as saline
environments (for example close by the sea).
The housing sturdiness allows mounting of limit
switches in heavy duty applications.
The double-insulated housing of the limit switch warrants
TS2... - TL2... and protects internal circuits against shocks or impacts
and in industrial environments, against accidental ingress
of tools and accidental contact.
Roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
material per the silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL
pkg series have direct (positive) opening action to prevent
n° [kg] sticking or welding.
Without reset button. Operational characteristics
TS1 05 20 A 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.120 – Maximum operating rate: 1200 cycles/h
TS1 05 21 A Snap action Metal Ø20x5 1 0.125 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
– Mechanical life: >10 million cycles (100,000 cycles
TS1 05 24 A Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.135 only for reset button versions)
TL1 05 20 A 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.120 – IEC utilisation category:
TL1 05 21 A Slow action Metal Ø20x5 1 0.125 • DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
• AC15 duty: 6A 250V
TL1 05 24 A Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.135 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 6A
With reset button. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
TS2 05 20 AS 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.130 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
Snap action Metal Ø20x5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
TS2 05 21 AS 1 0.135 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
TS2 05 24 AS Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.145 – Operating force: 6N/1.35lb (TS...01 and TL...01)
TS1... - TL1... TL2 05 20 AS 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.130 – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin (TS...05 and TL...05)
Slow action Metal Ø20x5 – TS...05 and TL...05 have axial rotation in any of 4
TL2 05 21 AS 1 0.135 positions (90°)
TL2 05 24 AS Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.145 – TS...05 and TL...05 have lever inclination, 360°
adjustment
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to IEC/EN – Housing cable entry: PG13.5
60947-5-1.
Roller lever plunger limit switches with 30x5mm plastic roller are – Tightening torque:
available and can be ordered substituting the number 20 with 23 in the • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
above-given order codes. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Roller lever plunger limit switches with 35x15mm rubber roller are • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
available and can be ordered substituting the number 24 with 22 in the – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
above-given order codes.
Ø20x5mm = Ø0.79x0.2”. – Ambient conditions:
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.39”. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Ø30x5mm = Ø1.81x0.2”. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Ø35x15mm = Ø1.38x0.59”. • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP66
Wobble stick, Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
omnidirectional material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg] TS1 09... 21-22
13-14
Without reset button. 21-22
13-14
TS1 09 92 1NO+1NC Flexible 1 0.115
0 36°
Snap action
TL1 09 92 1NO+1NC Flexible 1 0.115 TL1 09... 21-22
13-14
Slow action
0 36°
General characteristics
The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards
EN 50041 for dimensions.
The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of
self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent
mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for
assembly on machinery or installations in the
general-purpose industrial field as well as saline
TS1... - TL1... environments (for example close by the sea).
The housing sturdiness allows mounting of limit
9 Key operated Order code Contacts Key Qty Wt switches in heavy duty applications.
shape per The double-insulated housing of the limit switch warrants
pkg and protects internal circuits against shocks or impacts
and in industrial environments, against accidental ingress
n° [kg] of tools and accidental contact.
Without reset button. The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
Front key withdrawal . the silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL
TL2 10 10 1NO+1NC Straight 1 0.120 series have direct (positive) opening action to prevent
Slow action Angled sticking or welding.
TL2 10 11 1 0.120
TL2 10 12 Angled “T” 1 0.120 Operational characteristics
TL2 10 13 Straight “T” 1 0.120 – Maximum operating rate: 1200 cycles/h
– Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – IEC utilisation category:
Version with key withdrawal on the left or on the right is available; replace • DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
the last letter (A) of the order code respectively with S or D
(e.g. TL2 10 10S - left or TL2 10 10D - right). For further assistance, • AC15 duty: 6A 250V
consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 6A
front cover. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
The key is standard supplied. – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Operating torque: 1Ncm/1.42ozin (TS1 09... and
TL2... TL1 09...)
– Operating force: 8N/1.8lb (TL2 10...)
Order code Description Qty Wt – TL2 10... has axial rotation in any of 4 positions (90°)
per – TL2 10... has vertical or sideways key withdrawal
pkg – Housing cable entry: PG13.5
n° [kg] – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
– Tightening torque:
Extra keys. • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
A 20746 Straight key 10 0.013 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
A 20747 Angled key 10 0.013 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
– Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
P 32753 Angled “T” key 10 0.008 – Ambient conditions:
P 32752 Straight “T” key 10 0.008 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
A 20748 Toggle key 2 0.085 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
A 20746 A 20747 • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP66.
A 20748
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
protection per
closed
pkg
PLN A1 A... 1.5 11.5
IEC n° [kg] 0.06” 0.45”
PLN A1 R... 11-12
PLN A1 A 1NC IP40 1 0.240
[mm (in)]
PLN A1 A W IP65 1 0.240 2.4 20
PLN A1 H... 0.09” 0.79”
PLN A2 A 2NC IP40 1 0.240 PLN A1 HSB... 11-12
PLN A2 A W IP65 1 0.240 [mm (in)]
PLN C1 A 1NO IP40 1 0.240 PLN A2 A... 1.5 6.5
0.06” 0.25”
PLN C1 A W IP65 1 0.240 PLN A2 R... 11-12
PLN...A... PLN C2 A 2NO IP40 1 0.240 21-22
PLN C2 A W IP65 1 0.240 [mm (in)]
PLN A2 H... 2.4 11.5
PLN U1 A 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.240 0.09” 0.45”
PLN A2 HSB... 11-12
PLN U1 A W IP65 1 0.240
21-22
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to [mm (in)]
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 2.2 11.5
PLN C1 A... 0.09” 0.45”
PLN C1 R... 13-14
Top roller push plunger Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt [mm (in)]
protection per PLN C2 A... 4.2 6.4
pkg 0.16” 0.25”
PLN C2 R... 13-14
IEC n° [kg]
PLN A1 R 1NC IP40 1 0.230
23-24
[mm (in)]
9
PLN A1 R W IP65 1 0.230 PLN U1 A... 1.5 11.5
0.45”
PLN A2 R 2NC IP40 1 0.230 PLN U1 R... 21-22
PLN A2 R W IP65 1 0.230 13-14
5.9 (0.23”) [mm (in)]
PLN C1 R 1NO IP40 1 0.230 2.4 20
PLN U1 H... 0.09” 0.79”
PLN C1 R W IP65 1 0.230 PLN U1 HSB... 21-22
PLN C2 R 2NO IP40 1 0.230 13-14
PLN C2 R W IP65 1 0.230 10.4 (0.41”) [mm (in)]
PLN...R... PLN U1 R 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.230
General characteristics
PLN U1 R W IP65 1 0.230 The PLN types are for general purpose use. The extensive
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to range of models with numerous of actuators and multiple
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. contact configurations is the optimal solution to the
diverse installation requirements.
Overall simple design, oversize contacts and choice
Roller centre push lever Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt materials ensure durable and safe operation. The metal
protection per alloy housing and resistant thermoplastic actuators
pkg warrant reliable heavy-duty features for any sort of
IEC n° [kg] operating conditions.
The PLN series limit switches are available with IEC IP40
PLN A1 H 1NC IP40 1 0.270 or IP65 degree of protection; this characteristic is
PLN A1 H W IP65 1 0.270 ensured by the use of appropriate sealing gasket.
PLN A2 H 2NC IP40 1 0.270 The IEC IP65 version is easily identified by the “W” suffix
of its order code and can be used in adverse ambient
PLN A2 H W IP65 1 0.270 conditions.
PLN U1 H 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.270
PLN U1 H W IP65 1 0.270 Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
With offset roller. – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
PLN A1 HSB 1NC IP40 1 0.290 – IEC utilisation category:
PLN A1 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 • DC13 duty: 10A 24V
PLN...H • AC15 duty: 5A 250V, 3A 400V
PLN A2 HSB 2NC IP40 1 0.290 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
PLN A2 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400VAC
PLN U1 HSB 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.290 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
PLN U1 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 – Housing cable entry: PG11 (PLN...W types only
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to complete with cable gland)
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Cable connection: screw terminal with clamp suitable
for cables up to 2.5mm2 / AWG 14
– Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
– Ambient conditions:
• Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
• Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
• Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see table
indications).
Latch and manual release Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
protection per (The arrows indicate the closed
pkg direction of operation)
IEC n° [kg] PLN A1 RAG 1 7
0.04” 0.27”
Top roller push plunger. PLN A1 RAG W 21-22
PLN A1 RAG 1NC IP40 1 0.220 [mm (in)]
PLN A1 RAG W 1NC IP65 1 0.230
PL A1 AM 0,5 8
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to
PL A1 AM W
0.02” 0.31”
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 21-22
PL A1 RM [mm (in)]
PL A1 RM W
PLN 978
8 0.5 0.5 8
0.31” 0.02” 0.02” 0.31”
11-12
PLN A1 RAG 21-22
[mm (in)]
Manual reload and Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt General characteristics
magnetic release protection per The PLN limit switches were initially made specifically for
pkg hoisting or lifting duty and then used in other diverse
IEC n° [kg] applications. The type with latch and manual release as
Top push rod plunger. well as the one with manual reload and magnetic release
are designed so the switch remains opened after the
9 PL A1 AM 1NC IP40 1 0.245 switching of the NC contact. In the first instance, the
PL A1 AM W 1NC IP65 1 0.250 contact closing is made by pushing the release button. In
Top roller push plunger. the second case, the reloading is obtained by pushing the
shaft end or else pulling it from the top for the IP65
PL A1 RM 1NC IP40 1 0.250 types.
PL A1 RM W 1NC IP65 1 0.260 The limit switches with dual operation can be replaced by
two standard switches, for the stop control of moving
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to mechanisms with two directions of running (e.g.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
automatic doors). It is equipped with two opposed
PL A1 AM operating mechanisms and one NC contact for each
mechanism (i.e. 2NC).
The simple constructive design, oversize contacts and
careful material combinations warrant safe and constant
operation. The metal-alloy housing and the thermoplastic
mechanism material of first-rate mechanical features
assure reliability and durability with any type of operating
condition.
Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
– Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
– IEC utilisation category:
• DC13 duty: 10A 24V
• AC15 duty: 5A 250V, 3A 400V
PL A1 RM W – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– IEC rated insulation voltage: 400VAC
– Contact resistance: <10mΩ
Bi-directional Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
protection per – Housing cable entry: PG11 (PL...W and PLN 978 types
pkg only complete with cable gland)
IEC n° [kg] – Cable connection: screw terminal with clamp suitable
for cables up to 2.5mm2/AWG 14
Rod plunger. – Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/22.1lbin
PLN 978 2NC IP65 1 0.265 – Ambient conditions:
independent • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
• Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see table
indications).
Dimensions to EN 50047 Order code Contacts Ring Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg]
Without reset button. RS1 13... 21-22
13-14
RS1 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.090 21-22
13-14
Snap action
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
RS2 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.090
Slow action RS2 13... 21-22
13-14
RS3 13 10 2NO Steel 1 0.090 0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
Slow action
RS3 13... 21-22
11-12
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h for RS...13 10;
1200 cycles/h for T...13 10
– Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
– Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
– IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
• AC15 duty: 6A 250V
TS1 13 - TL1 10 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
– Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Operating force: 25N/5.6lb
– Cable entry: PG11 for RS...13 10;
PG13.5 for T...13 10
– Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
– Tightening torque:
• Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
• Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
• Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
– Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
– Ambient conditions:
• Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
• Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
• Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for RS...13 10;
IP66 for T...13 10.
Order code Contacts Degree Operating Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
of force per closed
protection pkg 1,5 11
PLN U1 AT... 0.06” 0.43”
IEC [N] / [lb] n° [kg]
13-14
Without reset button 21-22
PLN U1 AT 1NO+1NC IP40 10 / 2.2 1 0.240 6 [mm (in)]
PLN U1 AT W IP65 10 / 2.2 1 0.240
0.24”
P2L 8...
PLN U1 AT25 1NO+1NC IP40 25 / 5.6 1 0.240 11-12
General characteristics
Order code Contacts Degree Operating Qty Wt The PLN and P2L types are limit switches for general
of force per use.
protection pkg The simple constructive design, oversize contacts and
IEC [N] / [lb] n° [kg] careful material combinations warrant safe and constant
Without reset button. operation. The metal-alloy housing and the thermoplastic
mechanism material of first-rate mechanical features
9 P2L8 13 11 1NO+1NC IP65 40 / 9 1 0.459 assure reliability and durability with any type of operating
P2L8 13 12 IP65 120 / 27 1 0.459 condition.
P2L10 13 11 2NO+2NC IP65 40 / 9 1 0.459
Operational characteristics
P2L10 13 12 IP65 120 / 27 1 0.459 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 10A 24V
• AC15 duty: 5A 250V; 3A 400V
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A for PLN
types; 6A for P2L types
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400VAC
– Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
P2L... – Cable entry: PG11 (PLN...W and P2L types only
complete with cable gland)
– Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
suitable for cables up to 2.5mm2/AWG 14
– Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/2.21 lbin
– Ambient conditions:
• Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
• Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
• Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see order code
table indications).
Order code Contacts Force Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
per closed
pkg
[N]/[lb] n° [kg] RS... 11-12
T... 21-22
With reset button.
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
RS13 13 10 1NO + 1NC 25/5.6 1 0.092
TL13 13 10 1NO + 1NC 25/5.6 1 0.125 PLN... 11-12
21-22
PLN13 13 11 1NO + 1NC 60/13.5 1 0.248
0 [mm (in)] 8 (0.31”)
P2L13 13 11 1NO + 1NC 40/9 1 0.459
P2L13 13 12 1NO + 1NC 120/27 1 0.459 P2L13... 11-12
21-22
P2L15 13 11 2NO + 2NC 40/9 1 0.459
0 [mm (in)] 10 (0.39”)
P2L15 13 12 2NO + 2NC 120/27 1 0.459
P2L15... 31-32
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to IEC/EN
41-42
60947-5-1.
13-14
23-24
Example of wiring diagram
0 [mm (in)] 10 (0.39”)
TL13 13 10 MOTOR ROPE
RS13 13 10
M N General characteristics
3
The rope-operated switches for emergency stop are
mainly suitable for emergency stop or alarm systems for
CONTACT machinery which occupies a large space. This emergency
ELEMENT stop can be achieved from any point when the rope is
manually pulled each time.
9
START
The choice of the body, between plastic and metal, can
STOP
ROPE LEVER satisfy the most diversified requirements for sturdiness
SWITCH
and size.
R
S
T
Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 1800 cycles/h
– Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
– IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V (10A 24V only for PLN-P2L)
PLN 13 13 11 • AC15 duty: 6A 250V (3A 400V only for PLN-P2L)
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith:
10A for RS, TL and PLN; 6A for P2L
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
250VAC (400V for PLN-P2L)
– Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Cable entry: PG11 for RS, PLN and P2L types (PLN
and P2L complete with cable gland); PG13.5 for TL13
only
– Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
– Tightening torque:
• Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
• Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
• Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
– Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
– Ambient conditions:
• Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
• Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
P2L... • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 (T series: IP66).
Accessories and Order code Description Qty Wt
per Operation
spare parts pkg
n° [kg]
Accessories.
Normal operation Rope Rope
P33032 P33033 P33032 Rope terminal clamp, Ø5mm 10 0.023 position traction breaking
P33033 Rope eye, Ø5mm 10 0.007
P33034 Turnbuckle M6x60 10 0.061 Certification and compliance
P33035 Eye bolt M8 10 0.030 Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
P33036 Steel rope, Ø5mm 100[m] 4.900 Limit swtches for RS13 and TL13 types only.
P33034
The P33036 rope is sold in 100m/109.4yd roll; Ø5mm = Ø0.2”. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, ISO 13850; also
UL508, CSA-C22.2 n° 14 for RS and TL types.
P33035
P33036
Dimensions
page 9-34 9-27
Limit, micro and foot switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(1.20")
Ø8
30.5
(0.78")
(0.31") Ø8 (0.43")
(1.20")
20
30.5
(0.78")
(0.31")
20
Ø4.3
Ø4.3 22 (0.16") 22
(0.16") (0.86") (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
Ø4.3 22 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
20 (20) 20
(0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
(0.78")
42 42 (1.65")
(40) 40(1.57")
M20 M20
30 30 50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
(1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18")
60 (2.36")
41 (1.61")
(0.55")
(1.61")
(0.55”) Ø14
39
(1.30")
41
(0.55")
33
Ø4.3
(0.16")
Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
22 22
54.5 (2.14")
Ø4.3 22(0.86") Ø4.3 22(0.86")
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
44 (1.73")
(0.86") (0.86")
(0.16") 20 (0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
20 42 (1.65") 20
(0.78") (0.78") 42 (1.65")
9 30 30
40(1.57")
50 (1.97")
M20
30
30 30
40(1.57")
50 (1.97")
M20
30
60 (2.36") (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18")
(1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18")
69.5 (2.73")
54 (2.12")
54 (2.12")
Ø19
(0.74") Ø19
(0.74") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
Ø4.3 22 Ø4.3 22
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
44 (1.73")
(0.16") Ø4.3
44 (1.73")
(0.86")
20 (0.16") 20 (0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
(0.78") 20
42 (1.65") (0.78") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 30 30
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 60 (2.36") (1.18")
(1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
22(0.86") 22(0.86")
20 (0.78") 20 (0.78")
Ø4.3 22
Ø4.3 (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
44 (1.73")
22 (0.16") 20 (0.16")
(0.86") (0.78")
42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
20
(0.78") 40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
30 30 50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
(1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18")
60 (2.36")
51.5-66.5 (2.02"-2.61")
Ø10
26
50 (1.97")
(0.39")
(1.02")
50 (1.96")
81-125 (3.19"-4.92")
84 - 127 (3.30"- 5")
Ø10
26
94 (3.7")
(0.39")
94 (3.70")
Ø50x10 (1.02")
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
Ø4.3
22 (0.16") 22
Ø4.3 (0.86") (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
20
44 (1.73")
(0.16") 20 (0.16")
(0.78") (0.78") 20 (0.78")
42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 (1.18")
(1.18") (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18")
9-28
Limit, micro and foot switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
LIMIT SWITCHES
KB L1... - KB L2... KC L1... - KC L2... KB M1... - KB M2... KC M1... - KC M2...
KM L1... - KM L2... KN L1... - KN L2... KM M1... - KM M2... KN M1... - KN M2...
33.6
(1.32") 33.6
(1.32")
32-208 (1.26"-8.19")
Ø3
(0.12") Ø3
140 (5.51")
(0.12")
32-208 (1.26"-8.19")
140 (5.51")
Ø6
(0.24")
200 (7.87”)
Ø6
200 (7.87”)
(0.23")
22
Ø4.3 22 Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
22(0.86") (0.86") Ø4.3
(0.16") (0.86") Ø4.3 (0.16") 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
44 (1.73")
(0.16") 20 (0.78") 20 (0.16") 20 (0.78")
20 (0.78")
(0.78") 42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 (1.18") (1.18")
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36")
(1.18")
Ø6.9 (0.27")
Ø8 (0.31")
Ø8 (0.31")
20 (0.79")
(0.27")
(0.31")
Ø6.9
Ø8
Ø3.3 (0.13")
(0.78")
Ø3.3 (0.13")
20
21 (0.83")
23.1 21 (0.83")
22 (0.91") 121 (4.76") 69 (2.71") 23.1
Ø4.3 121 (4.76")
54.5 (2.14")
44 (1.73")
20 (0.16") (20)
(0.78") 42
(40)
M20 M20 M20
30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30 30 30
30 (1.18")
(1.18") M20 (1.18") M20 (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") (1.18")
50.1 (1.97”)
77 (3.03")
72.6 (2.86”)
72.6 (2.86”)
77 (3,03")
34 (1.34")
(1.52")
38,5
(0.79")
20
(0.78")
20
22 22
Ø4.3 Ø4.3 (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
20 (0.16")
(0.78") 20 (0.78") (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
M20
50 (1.97") 30 30
30 30 (1.18") 30
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18")
(1.18")
Keys
KC N1... - KC N2... KX N1 KX N2 KX N3 KX N4 KX N5
KN N1... - KN N2...
15 (0.59")
30 (1.18") 30 (1.18")
14 (0.55") 14 (0.55") 22 5x4.2 22 30 (1.18")
5x4.2 )
38.5 (1.51")
(0.87")
(0.37")
(0.87")
(0.37")
(0.2x0.18") (0.2x0.18")
9.5
(1.22")
9.5
43 (1.69")
(1.33")
30.9
34
9x4.6 9x4.6
13 (0.51")
7 (0.28")
17 (0.67")
(0.35x0.18") (0.35x0.18")
11 (0.43")
Ø4.3 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
(0.16")
12.9 (0.51")
7.1 (0.28")
20 (0.78") Ø4.2
15 (0.59")
42 (1.65") (0.18")
12.9 (0.51")
40(1.57")
M20
50 (1.97") 30 5
60 (2.36") (1.18") (0.2")
CH24 CH24
(0.22")
(0.35") (1.11")
5.6
(0.35") (1.11")
28.1
28.1
CH24
9
M20
(0.31")
PG13.5 M20
7.9
9-29
Limit, micro and foot switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
12
(0.47") (0.47")
M12x1
44.8 (1.76")
")
")
")
")
")
34 (1.34")
.17
.17
.17
.17
.17
(1.18")
(1.18")
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
30
30
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
20 20 20 20
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
20
40 (1.58")
(0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79")
3 (0.12") 29
(1.14")
34,4
24 18 (0.71") (1.35") 4.5 (0.18")
122 (4.8")
max. 170 (6.69")
(0.94") 7.9 (0.31")
12
48-118 (1.89"-4.65")
M12x1 (0.47") 14 (0.55") 4.5 (0.18")
5.5 (0.22")
52 (2.05")
44.8 (1.76")
")
")
")
")
")
.17
.17
.17
.17
.17
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
13.5 (0.49") 17.3 (0.68") 15.8
20 20 20 20
40 (1.58")
20
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
(0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79")
9
30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63")
(1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
16
(0.63") Ø50x10
Ø20x5 (1.97x0.39")
77 (3.03")
62 (2.44")
(0.78x0.19")
(1.36")
Rubber
34.5
Plastic
or metal
143 (5.63")
128 (5.03")
100.5 (3.95")
Ø5.3
31
60 (2.36")
(0.63") 13.5
(0.53") (0.47") 72
(0.78")
15
(2.83")
(0.78")
28.5
20
28.5 (1.12")
(1.10") 20
(1.10")
(1.12")
28
Ø6 (0.23") 28.5
6
Steel
28
(0.24") 15 (1.12")
5 5.5 (0.22") (0.59")
Ø4.5
5 (0.20") Ø4.5 (0.17")
195 (7.67")
(1.18")
(0.17")
30
(0.20") Ø4.5
(1.06")
27
(0.17")
107 (4.21")
A20747 A20748
Ø5.3
Ø5.3 (0.20")
(0.59")
60 (2.36")
31 30 31
60 (2.36")
30 (0.20")
15
28.5
55 (2.16")
15 Ø4.5
(1.37")
31.4 50
Ø4.2 (1.24") (1.97")
(0.16")
58.5 (2.3")
Ø20x5 Ø50x10
16 (0.78x0.19") (1.97x0.39")
77 (3.03")
62 (2.44")
or metal
34.5
143 (5.63")
128 (5.03")
100.5 (3.95")
30 31 30 30 (0.20")
60 (2.36")
60 (2.36")
40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") PG13.5 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") PG13.5 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 PG13.5
43 (1.69")
(0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28")
9-30
Limit, micro and foot switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(1.77”)
Ø20
45
(1.10”)
(1.10”) (0.79”)
28
28
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 PG11
PG11 Ø5.2
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
13.5
13.5
13.5
Ø20
(2.05”)
(2.05”)
(1.77”)
52
Ø20 (0.79”)
52
45
(0.79”) Ø20
(0.79”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 9
PG11 Ø5.2 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”) (1.59”)
13.5
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”)
84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”) 103.6 (4.08”)
PLN...HSB PLN...HSBW 35 - 50
PLN A1 RAG
35 - 50
(1.38” - 1-97”) (1.38” - 1-97”)
20.5 20.5
(0.81”) 20.5
(0.81”) (0.81”)
(2.34”)
(2.34”)
Ø35
59.5
59.5
(1.81”)
(1.38”) Ø20
46
(0.79”)
Ø35
(1.38”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 PG11
Ø5.2 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
13.5
(1.59”)
13.5
13.5
Ø20
30
46
(1.18”)
(0.79”)
30
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
46
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
46
46
PG11
PG11
Ø5.2
PG11 Ø5.2 (0.20”)
Ø5.2 40.5
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(0.20”) (0.20”)
13.5
(1.59”)
13.5
13.5
Ø20 Ø20
(1.30”)
46
46
(0.79”) (0.79”)
33
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11
PG11 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(1.30”)
Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”)
33
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(1.59”)
13.5
(1.59”)
13.5
84 (3.31”) 84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”) 72 (2.83”) 40.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”)
103.6 (4.08”)
9-31
Limit, micro and foot switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
ROPE LEVER
Limit switches for normal stopping
RS1 13... - RS3 13... TS1 13... - TL1 13... PLN...AT
16
15 (0.63")
(0.59") 20.5
(0.81”)
46.5 (1.83")
Ø20
49 (1.93")
Ø20 (0.78")
(1.30”)
(0.78")
33
Ø20
(0.78")
5.3x7,3
Ø4.3 (0.20x0.28")
31
60 (2.36")
30
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(0.16") 22 30
35.5
55 (2.16")
(1.22")
46
(0.86") (1.18") (1.18")
20 PG11
(0.78")
Ø5.2
Ø5.3 (0.20”) 40.5
30.5 40 72 (2.83”)
0.53”)
35 (0.20") 43 (1.59”)
13.5
(1.20") PG11 (1.37") (1.57") PG13.5 84 (3.31”)
(1.69")
PLN...ATW P2L...
20.4
(0.80”)
Ø27
(1.06”)
(2.39”)
60.8
Ø14.5
20.5 (0.57”)
(0.81”)
Ø20
(1.30”)
(0.78")
33
(1.42”)
36
9
(3.19”)
Ø5.2 81
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
(0.20”)
46
PG11
Ø5.2
(0.77”)
19.5
(0.20”) PG11
72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”)
72 (2.83”) 48.5
103.6 (4.08”) (1.91”)
84.5 (3.33”)
100.1 (3.94”)
Ø20 (1.06”)
49 (1.93")
Ø20 (0.78")
(1.75”)
Ø14.5
(0.79") (0.57”) 44.5
5.3x7,3
Ø4.3 (0.20x0.28")
30 31
60 (2.36")
30
(1.40”)
(1.18")
55 (2.16")
46
(0.86") (1.18")
20
(0.78")
Ø5.2
(0.20”)
Ø5.3
30.5 35 40 43 72 (2.83”) PG11 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.20")
13.5
Ø14.5
(0.57”)
(1.42”)
36
(3.19”)
81
Ø5.2
(0.20”)
(0.77”)
19.5
PG11
72 (2.83”) 48.5
(1.91”)
84.5 (3.33”)
100.1 (3.94”)
9-32
Limit, micro and foot switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(0.92") Ø4 (0.16")
(0.92") (0.92")
(0.51”)
Ø7.15 (0.28")
(0.51”)
(0.65")
13
16.4
(1.83")
(0.87")
13
27.8
13
(1.83")
22
27.5
(1.83")
(1.83")
27.5
27.5
Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 Ø4.4 Ø4.4
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
KS A4... KS A9...
23.3 M12x1
(0.92") Ø8.3 (0.33")
(0.51”)
(1.52")
(0.51”)
38.6
13
13
(0.79")
(1.83")
20.2
27.5
(1.3")
33
Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 Ø4.4
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
KS B1... KS B2...
23.3 23.3
(0.92")
M12x1
Ø12.5x3.8
(0.92") M12x1
Ø12.5x3.8
9
(0.49"x0.15")
(0.51”)
(0.49"x0.15")
(1.98")
(0.51”)
(1.98")
50.2
50.2
13
13
(1.83")
(1.83")
27.5
27.5
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
(0.51”)
(R1.05")
(0.51”)
(1.73")
(0.51”)
(1.47")
(1.47")
37.3
37.3
44
(1.33")
(0.79")
13
(0.79")
13
33.7
20.2
20.2
13
(0.79")
13
(0.79")
(1.3")
20.2
20.2
(1.3")
(1.3")
33
(1.3")
33
33
33
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
Ø4.4 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") 17.5
17.5 49.2 (1.94") (0.69") (0.17")
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") (0.69")
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94")
.5") ")
.5 (R2 2 .13
4 (R 168.3 (6.63")
26.2 R63 26.2 R5 26.2
(1.03") (1.03") (1.03")
(0.51”)
(0.51”)
(0.51”)
(1.14")
(1.3")
33
29
13
29
(0.79")
(0.79")
(0.79")
13
13
20.2
20.2
20.2
(1.3")
(1.3")
33
33
(0.63")
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
16
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
ACCESSORIES
KSS C01 terminal shroud KSS CB2 terminal shroud with conduit
(0.20")
54 (2.12")
(1.06")
5
27
(1.54")
4.3 (0.17") 21
39.2
(0.83")
25
(0.98")
53 (2.09") 22
(0.79")
20
26 8 68 (2.68") (0.87")
(1.02") (0.31")
9-33
Limit, micro and foot switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
M20
(3.38")
86
(1.34")
34
KG2
286.6 (11.28") 150 (5.90")
164 (6.46")
M20
(3.38")
86
(1.34")
9
34
KR1
238.7 (9.40") 140 (5.51")
M20
(2.24")
57
(0.98")
25
KR2
250 (9.84") 140 (5.51")
120 (4.72")
M20
(2.95")
75
(0.98")
25
KGD
516.5 (20.33")
M20
(3.48")
88.5
(1.44")
36.5
9-34
Limit, micro and foot switches
Wiring diagrams
22 14 22 14 12 22 12 22 14 24 18 26 12 22 32 14 22 32 14 24 32
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 2NC 2NC 2NO 1NO + 1NC 3NC 1NO + 2NC 2NO + 1NC
make before break
LIMIT SWITCHES, KP TYPE LIMIT SWITCHES, T TYPE LIMIT SWITCHES, PL TYPE
KP...S11 KP...L11 TS... TL... PLN A1... PLN A2... PLN C1... PLN C2.... PLN U1...
Snap action Slow action Snap action Slow action PLN 978
21 13 21 13 13 21 21 13 11 11 21 13 13 23 21 13
yellow/green
yellow/green
black
black
brown
brown
black
black
blue
blue
14 22 22 14 12 12 22 14 14 24 22 14
22 14 22 14
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NC 2NC 1NO 2NO 1NO + 1NC
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC
14 22 14 22 14 24 22 14 22 14 14 24 32 42
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC
13 14 11 12 31 32 13 23 31 41
21 22 21 22 41 42 14 24 32 42
NC NO
2 3
1
COM
9-35
Page 10-2 Page 10-10
GX SERIES GN SERIES
• IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith • IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith
16A to 40A ratings 16A to 125A ratings
• Square-shaped contact body • Round-shaped contact body
• IEC IP20 degree of protection of contacts • IEC IP00 degree of protection of contacts
• IEC IP65 degree of protection on front, • IEC IP40 degree of protection on front,
standard supplied. standard supplied.
ROTARY CAM SWITCHES 10
Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 10 - 20 21
Wiring diagrams .................................................................................................... 10 - 22 22
Technical characteristics .......................................................................................... 10 - 24 24
S IGNALLING
AND
C ONTROL
Rotary cam switches
GX series
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings – 5 wafers – scheme 97.
GX16 97 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.186
L3 L1
L2
L2
O88 - 098 versions Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics
rear mount code current plate per – IEC 16 to 40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
AC1 size pkg ratings
door coupling with [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
red/yellow padlock system. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
– Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
– Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
ON/OFF switches Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
GX16 10 O88 16 n 48 1 0.178 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
0
GX20 10 O88 1
20 n 48 1 0.200 – IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
of protection of contacts
GX32 10 O88 32 n 65 1 0.320 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
GX40 10 O98 40 n 65 1 0.320 the order code table; any other on request.
Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92.
Selection
GX16 92 O88 16 n 48 1 0.182 See page 10-24.
0
1
GX20 92 O88 20 n 48 1 0.182
GX32 92 O88 32 n 65 1 0.320 Optional
Enlarged front plate for GX16-GX20 (65x65mm instead of
GX40 92 O98 40 n 65 1 0.330 standard 48x48):
Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
E.g. GX16H 10 O88.
Selection guide
Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 10. See page 10-24.
GX16 10 O48 0
1
16 45x54 1 0.118
Special versions
In addition to standard types, particular versions are
available with special operating circuit schemes.
Four-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 92. See page 10-18.
GX16 92 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.125
1 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITH 0. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
One-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 51. IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
GX16 51 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.098
10
Two-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 52.
GX16 52 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.122
VOLTMETER SWITCHES.
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – 3 wafers – scheme 68.
GX16 68 O48 0
L1N 16 45x54 1 0.130
L2N
L3N
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings – 5 wafers – scheme 97.
GX16 97 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.196
L3 L1
L2
L2
GX M5 - GX M6
10-9
Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version, front mount. Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics
Changeover switches with current plate per – IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
AC1 size pkg Ith ratings
or without 0 (OFF) [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
– Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
CHANGEOVER SWITCH WITH 0 (OFF). – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 51. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN12 51 U 16 n 48 1 0.078 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN20 51 U 20 n 48 1 0.081 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
1 0
2 Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
7 GN25 51 U 25 n 48 1 0.090 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN32 51 U 32 n 65 1 0.183 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN40 51 U 40 n 65 1 0.194
Selection guide
7 GN63 51 U 63 n 65 1 0.224 See page 10-24.
Two-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 52.
7 GN12 52 U 16 n 48 1 0.095 Optional
IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN20 52 U 20 n 48 1 0.098 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN25 52 U 1 0
2 25 n 48 1 0.121 E.g. 7 GN12 52 U 51.
7 GN32 52 U 32 n 65 1 0.232
Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
7 GN40 52 U 40 n 65 1 0.251 48x48)
7 GN63 52 U 63 n 65 1 0.302 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
7 GN125 52 U 125 n 90 1 0.788 E.g. 7 GN12H 51 U.
Three-pole - 3 wafers - scheme 53. Enlarged plate for GN32-40-63 (90x90mm instead of
7 GN12 53 U 16 n 48 1 0.107 65x65)
7 GN20 53 U 20 n 48 1 0.115 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN32H 51 U.
7 GN25 53 U 1 0
2 25 n 48 1 0.152
7 GN32 53 U 32 n 65 1 0.285 Special versions
In addition to standard types, particular versions are
10
7 GN40 53 U 40 n 65 1 0.308
available with special operating circuit schemes.
7 GN63 53 U 63 n 65 1 0.377 See page 10-18.
7 GN125 53 U 125 n 90 1 1.036
Four-pole - 4 wafers - scheme 75. Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
7 GN12 75 U 16 n 48 1 0.123 and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN20 75 U 20 n 48 1 0.134 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN25 75 U 0 25 n 48 1 0.180 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
1 2
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
7 GN32 75 U 32 n 65 1 0.334 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
7 GN40 75 U 40 n 65 1 0.358
7 GN63 75 U 63 n 65 1 0.468
7 GN125 75 U 125 n 90 1 1.270
CHANGEOVER SWITCH WITHOUT 0 (OFF).
One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 54.
7 GN12 54 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.079
7 GN20 54 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.082
7 GN25 54 U 25 n 48 1 0.096
Two-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 55.
7 GN12 55 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.093
7 GN20 55 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.100
7 GN25 55 U 25 n 48 1 0.122
Three-pole - 3 wafers - scheme 56.
7 GN12 56 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.108
7 GN20 56 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.115
7 GN25 56 U 25 n 48 1 0.145
Four-pole - 4 wafers - scheme 69.
7 GN12 69 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.124
7 GN20 69 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.134
7 GN25 69 U 25 n 48 1 0.174
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9” - 60x60mm = 2.6x2.6” - 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
U version, front mount. Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics
Voltmeter switches. current plate per – IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
AC1 size pkg Ith ratings
Ammeter switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
– Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
VOLTMETER SWITCHES. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
2 wafers - scheme 68. according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN12 68 U 0
L1N 16 n 48 1 0.094 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
7 GN20 68 U L2N 20 n 48 1 0.099 Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
L3N – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
the order code table; any other on request.
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1
2 wafers - scheme 67. Selection guide
7 GN12 67 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.094 See page 10-24.
L1-L2
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 reading - 5 wafers - scheme 97.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
10
7 GN12 97 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.132 and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
(File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN20 97 U L3 L1 20 n 48 1 0.148 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
L2 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
L1-L2-L3 reading via 3 current transformers CSA C22.2 n° 14.
4 wafers - scheme 98.
7 GN12 98 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.115
7 GN20 98 U L3 L1 20 n 48 1 0.115
L2
Optional
Four-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 92. IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN12 92 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.094 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN20 92 U11 20 –– 1 0.100 E.g. 7 GN12 92 U25 51.
10-17
Rotary cam switches
Special circuit scheme form.
Order code structure
X U
GG X H • •
• • • • • • •
N O
ENLARGED
TYPE RATING FRONT SCHEME VERSION OPTIONALS
PLATE
GX
IEC Protection: GX GN e.g. U = Front mount
Front = IP65 16A 16A 90 O = Rear mount
Contacts = IP20 20A 20A 91
32A 25A 10 P = In enclosure
GN
IEC Protection : 40A 32A 92
Front = IP40 40A 99
Contacts = IP00 63A 100
125A
Consult technical instructions I230 on our website for additional information (contact configurations, schemes, plate indications,etc).
Custom-built schemes are available on request; fill out the form on page 10-19.
10-18
Rotary cam switches
Special circuit scheme form
12
11 1
1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25 28 29 32 33 36 37 40 41 44 45 48
10 2
D A
9 3
C B
8 4
7 5
6
2 3 6 7 10 11 14 15 18 19 22 23 26 27 30 31 34 35 38 39 42 43 46 47
Plate
Pos.
indication
7
C
8
10
10
D
11
12
1
A
2
4
B
5
6
Front plate 1 X X X
X
2 X X X
Overlapping Closed contact Open/ Closed Spring
contacts in 2 or more passing contact return
positions contact
BODY SHAPE: n Square - GX ∂ n Round - GN Amp rating ..........................
VERSION: n Front mount n Rear mount n Enclosed n Other ....................................
FINISH: n Standard ∑ n Red/yellow padlockable n Special ...............................
FIXING: n 2 screw n 4 screw
10-19
Rotary cam switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GX SERIES
MONTAGGIO
Front mountMONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
MONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
MONTAGGIO
GX...
FRONTALE
GX...
FRONTALE
GX... GX...
1...5 1...5 1...5 1...5
E E E E
A (0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
28 (1.1”) 28 (1.1”) 28 (1.1”) 28 (1.1”)
D
A
A
C
C
T T T T
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
I
I
L fixing
Drilling for 2-screw GL GL GL G Rear view
F F F F
Type Dimensions L [mm (in)]
A C D E F G I T 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GX16 U 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 6 12 42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5 85
(1.89”) 1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.67”) (2.00”) (2.34”) (2.67”) (3.01”) (3.35”)
GX16 U25 48 31∂ 45 48 34 23.5 26 12 39.5 48 56.5 65 73.5 82
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.55”) (1.89”) (2.22”) (2.55”) (2.89”) (3.22”)
GX20 U 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 6 12 42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5 85
(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.67”) (2.00”) (2.34”) (2.67”) (3.01”) (3.35”)
GX20 U25 48 31∂ 45 48 34 23.5 6 12 39.5 48 56.5 65 73.5 82
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.55”) (1.89”) (2.22”) (2.55”) (2.89”) (3.22”)
GX32 U 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 7 14 47.5 59.5 71.5 83.5 95.5 107.5
(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.87”) (2.34”) (2.81”) (3.29”) (3.75”) (4.23”)
GX32 U25 65 45∂ 58 66 38 26 7 14 48 60 72 84 96 108
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.50”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.89”) (2.36”) (2.83”) (3.30”) (3.77”) (4.25”)
GX40 U 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 7 14 47.5 59.5 71.5 83.5 95.5 107.5
(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.87”) (2.34”) (2.81”) (3.29”) (3.75”) (4.23”)
GX40 U25 65 45∂ 58 66 38 26 7 14 48 60 72 84 96 108
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.50”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.89”) (2.36”) (2.83”) (3.30”) (3.77”) (4.25”)
∂ Padlockable handle.
DoorMONTAGGIO MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
coupling O version BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
Coupling GX...MONTAGGIO
and front MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
GX... BLOCCO-PORTA
plate BLOCCO-PORTA
Drilling for GX...
4-screwGX... GX...
(4V) front plate
fixing on the door fixing
E E E E E
K K S K KS
1...5 K 1...5 S S 1...5 S 1...5 1...5
(0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”)(0.04...0.20”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
Ø5 P (0.2”)
M M M M M
IEC/EN 60715
IEC/EN 60715
60715
IEC/EN 60715
IEC/EN 60715
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
10
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
IEC/ENØ5
DIN35
DIN35
DIN35
DIN35
DIN35
D
CD
OD
D
A
CA
PA
O
P
P
C
T TT T T T T T T T
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
N
G G G G G
F F Ø5.5 Ø5.5
F F F Ø5.5 Ø5.5 Ø5.5
L L L L (0.22”) L (0.22”) (0.22”) Rear(0.22”)
view (0.22”)
∂ Padlockable handle.
Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Modular mount
45 (1.77”)
(1.10”)
(2.62”)
(2.62”)
(2.05”)
(2.05”)
52 (1.73”)
44 (1.73”)
66.5 (2.62”)
(2.05”)
52 (2.05”)
52 (2.05”)
(1.73”)
(1.38”)
(1.38”)
52 (2.05”)
35 (1.38”)
60715
IEC/EN 60715
28
60715
28
DIN35
DIN35
DIN35
IEC/EN
IEC/EN
66.5
35
44
66.5
35
52
44
52
C1
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
IN
MONTAGGIO
CASSETTA
MONTAGGIO
IN CASSETTA
IN
GX...
CASSETTA
INGX...
CASSETTA
GX... GX... D
Mounting in enclosure Drilling for enclosure fixing
N
A A A AC C C L C L F L F L F L1 F L1 F L1 L1
F F F
M
R
A1
A1
A1
A1
C1
C1
C1
C1
D D D D
N N N N
Type Enclosure N° of wafers Protection Cable glands
size L L1 A A1 C C1 D F M N L L1 degree R
GX16 90x90 1-2 3-5 90 90 79 63 4.5 25∂ 19 30 71.3 98.3
IP65 4 PG 16
GX20 (3.54”x3.54”) 1-2 3-5 (3.54”) (3.54”) (3.11”) (2.48”) (0.17”) (0.98”) (0.74”) (1.18”) (2.80”) (3.87”)
M
GX32 110x110 1-2 3-4 110 110 98.4 83 4.5 32∑ 21 39.5 85.5 119.5 ∂ 28 (1.1”) for ...P25 type.
R R IP65 4 PG 21
GX40 (4.33”x4.33”) 1-2 3-4 (4.33”) (4.33”) R (3.87”) R(3.26”) (0.17”) (1.25”) (0.82”) (1.55”) (3.36”) (4.70”) ∑ 38.5 (1.52”) for ...P25 type.
10-20
Rotary cam switches
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GN SERIES
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
FRONTALE
FRONTALE
GN...
GN...
GN... Type Dimensions L
Front mount A C D1 D3 E F G J M N 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GN12 48 39.5 12 1...5 1...5
4.3 1...5 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 36.1 45.8 55.5 65.2 74.9 84.6
Wafer and front plate fixing on the door (1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”)
(0.04...0.20”)
(0.04...0.20”) (1.04”)
(0.04...0.20”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.42”) (1.80”) (2.18”) (2.57”) (2.95”) (3.33”)
J J J J J
GN12 J
ª 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58 48 65 7 36.6 46.3 56 65.7 75.4 85.1
(2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.28”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.44”) (1.82”) (2.20”) (2.59”) (2.97”) (3.35”)
Ø6 Ø6 (0.24”)
Ø6 (0.24”)(0.24”) GN20 48 39.5 12 4.3 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 36.1 45.8 55.5 65.2 74.9 84.6
G
A
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
M
M
(1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.42”) (1.80”) (2.18”) (2.57”) (2.95”) (3.33”)
C
N
Ø5 Ø5 (0.2”)
Ø5 (0.2”) (0.2”) (2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.28”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.44”) (1.82”) (2.20”) (2.59”) (2.97”) (3.35”)
2-screw drilling D3GN125
4-screw drilling for D3 D3 GN25 48 L 39.5L L12F F 4.3F 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 40.5 54.1 67.7 81.3 94.9 108.5
E E E
LE
NTALE
GN...GN... for types up to GN63 and “4V” suffix types only (1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.59”) (2.13”) (2.66”) (3.20”) (3.74”) (4.27”)
GN25ª 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 48 65 7 41 54.6 68.2 81.8 95.4 109
(2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.61”) (2.15”) (2.68”) (3.22”) (3.75”) (4.29”)
1...5 1...5
(0.04...0.20”)
(0.04...0.20”) GN32 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 48 65 7 46.5 61.6 76.7 91.8 106.9 122
J J J J (2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.83”) (2,442”) (3.02”) (3.61”) (4.21”) (4.80”)
GN40 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 48 65 7 46.5 61.6 76.7 91.8 106.9 122
Ø6 Ø6(0.24”) (0.24”) (2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.83”) (2,442”) (3.02”) (3.61”) (4.21”) (4.80”)
M
G
D1
D1
M
(0.2”) GN125 90 70.5 16 5.3 41.5 28 84 68 90 9 67.3 96.4 125.5 154.6 183.7 212.8
D3 D3 L L F F (3.54”) (2.77”) (0.63”) (0.21”) (1.63”) (1.10”) (3.31”) (2.68”) (3.54”) (0.35”) (2.65”) (3.79”) (4.94”) (6.09”) (7.23”) (8.38”)
Front wafer E E
ª Dimensions for U06 and U25 versions
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN...
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN...
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN... GN... GN...
Door coupling Drillings for wafer and handle fixing
S S 1...5 S 1...5 S 1...5 S 1...5 1...5
¤K ¤K ¤K ¤K¤K ¤K ¤K ¤K ¤K ¤K
D2 D2 D2 D2D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
CD1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
¤A
¤A
¤A
¤A
¤A
K
C
D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
4-screw drilling for wafer 2-screw drilling for handle 4-screw drilling for GN125 E E E E E
fixing on rear plate of types up to GN63 L handleLand “4V” types L only L L
Type Dimensions L
A C D1 D2 E K S 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers
GN12-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”)∫ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 37.58 (1.48”) 47.1 (1.85”) 56.7 (2.23”) 66.3 (2.61”) 10
GN20-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”)∫ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 38.1 (1.50”) 47.8 (1.88”) 57.5 (2.26”) 67.2 (2.64”)
GN25-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”)∫ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 42.5 (1.67”) 56.1 (2.21”) 65.7 (2.59”) 83.2 (3.27”)
GN12-O68 48 (1.89”) 39.5 (1.56”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 37.5 (1.48”) 47.1 (1.85”) 56.7 (2.23”) 66.3 (2.61”)
GN20-O68 48 (1.89”) 39.5 (1.56”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 38.1 (1.50”) 47.8 (1.88”) 57.5 (2.26”) 67.2 (2.64”)
GN25-O68 48 (1.89”) 39.5 (1.56”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 42.5 (1.67”) 56.1 (2.21”) 65.7 (2.59”) 83.2 (3.27”)
GN32 O... 65 (2.56”) 53∂ (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”)∏ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 49.2 (1.94”) 62.8 (2.47”) 76.4 (3.00”) 90 (3.54”) ∂ 45 (1.77”) for O88 and O98 types ∫.
GN40 O... 65 (2.56”) 53∂ (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”)∏ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 45.9 (1.81”) 59.5 (2.34”) 73.1 (2.88”) 86.7 (3.41”) ∑ 65 (2.56”) for O99 types ∫.
∏ 38.5 (1.52”) for O88 and O98 types ∫.
GN63 O... 65 (2.56”) 53∂ (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”)∏ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 54.3 (2.14”) 72.4 (2.85”) 90.5 (3.56”) 108.6 (4.27”)
π 49 (1.93”) for O99 types ∫.
GN125 O... 90 (3.54”) 70.5∑ (2.78”) 16 (0.63”) 6 (0.24”) 41.5 (1.63”)π 68 (2.68”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 74.8 (2.94”) 103.9 (4.09”) 133 (5.23”) 162.1 (6.38”) ∫ Padlockable handle.
Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing
”)
”)
(0 1.6
(0 1.6
.06
.06
R
1...5 1...5
(0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”)
38 (1.50”)
38 (1.50”)
MONTAGGIO IN CASSETTA GX
28 L 30
(1.10”) 22.5 (1.18”) 28 22.5 L 23
(0.88”) (1.10”) (0.88”) (0.90”) A C
Type L [mm] Type L [mm]
1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers
GN12 41.5 (1.63”) 51.1 (2.01”) 60.7 (2.39”) 70.3 (2.77”) GN12 41.5 (1.63”) 51.1 (2.01”) 60.7 (2.39”) 70.3 (2.77”)
A1
C1
GN20 42.1 (1.66”) 51.8 (2.04”) 61.5 (2.42”) 71.2 (2.80”) GN20 42.1 (1.66”) 51.8 (2.04”) 61.5 (2.42”) 71.2 (2.80”)
GN25 46.5 (1.83”) 60.1 (2.37”) 73.7 (2.90”) 87.3 (3.44”) GN25 46.5 (1.83”) 60.1 (2.37”) 73.7 (2.90”) 87.3 (3.44”)
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
IN
MONTAGGIO
CASSETTA
MONTAGGIO
IN CASSETTA
IN
GX...
CASSETTA
INGX...
CASSETTA
GX... GX... D
R
A1
A1
A1
A1
C1
C1
C1
C1
D D D D
N N N N
10-21
Rotary cam switches
Wiring diagrams
90 - One-pole ON/OFF switch 91 - Two-pole ON/OFF switch 10 - Three-pole ON/OFF switch 92 - Four-pole ON/OFF switch
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
1 0 1 0
2 2
0 Y 1 0 2
D
10-22
Rotary cam switches
Wiring diagrams
0
1 1
2 2
Number of wafers: 6
Switching angle: 60°
68 - Phase-neutral voltmeter switch 67 - Phase-phase voltmeter switch 66 - Phase-phase phase-neutral 60 - Changeover / double throw switch
voltmeter changeover / double throw 1 phase phase-neutral, 3 phase-phase voltages
0 0
L1N L1-L2
0 0
L2N L2-L3 L1-L2 L1-N L1N L1-L2
L3N L3-L1 L2-L3 L2-N L2-L3
L3-L1 L3-N L3-L1
97 - Ammeter switch direct reading or via current transformer 98 - L1-L2-L3 current changeover / double throw switch
0
0
L3 L1
L3 L1
L2
L2
Number of wafers: 5
Switching angle: 90° Number of wafers: 4 10
Switching angle: 90°
10-23
Rotary cam switches
Technical characteristics
TYPE GX16 GX20 GX32 GX40 GN12 GN20 GN25 GN32 GN40 GN63 GN125
Rated insulation voltage∂
10 Ui IEC/EN V 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
UL/CSA V 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage ∂
Uimp IEC/EN 60947-3 kV 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8
Conventional free air thermal
current Ith IEC/EN A 16 20 32 40 16 20 25 32 40 63 125
UL/CSA (general purpose use)
A 12 15 32 40 15 20 30 40 50 60 130
Rated operating
voltage (switch disconnect) ∂ V 440 440 440 440 480 480 480 480 480 480 690
Operatioanl impulse
voltage (switch disconnect) kV 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6
Maximum fuse size for 10kA A 20 20 40 40 16 20 25 32 40 63 125
short-circuit protection 25kA A 16 16 35 35 10 16 25 32 40 63 100
In (gG)
50kA A – – 32 35 – – – 32 40 63 100
63kA A – – – 35 – – – – 40 63 100
Short-time
withstand current
Icw 1sec A 250 250 800 800 200 250 400 800 1000 1600 2100
Rated operational current
Ie AC1/AC21A (IEC/EN) A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125
110V A 10 10 25 25 10 10 16 25 25 32 40
AC15 (IEC/EN) 220-230V A 8 8 20 22 8 8 12 20 22 25 28
380-400V A 4 6 10 12 4 6 8 10 12 15 15
660-690V A 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 4 5
Motor power for switches
in AC utilisation categories
AC3 (IEC/EN) 220-230V kW 3.5 3.7 7.5 7.5 2.5 3 5.5 7.5 8 11 18.5
3 phases 380-440V kW 4.5 5.5 11 15 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 37
500-690V kW 5.5 5.5 11 15 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 33
1 phase (2 poles) 110V kW 0.55 0.75 1.8 2.2 0.8 0.8 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5
220-230V kW 1.5 1.8 3.5 4.4 1.5 2.2 3 4 6.5 6.5 11
380-440V kW 2.2 3 5.5 7 2.2 3 5.5 6.5 8 11.5 15
AC23A (IEC/EN) 220-230V kW 3.7 4 8 9 3 5 6.5 8 8 12.5 30
3 phases 380-440V kW 6.5 7.5 15 18.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45
500-690V kW 7.5 7.5 15 15 7.5 7.5 11 18.5 22 30 37
1 phase (2 poles) 110V kW 0.75 0.75 2.2 3 0.8 0.8 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5
220-230V kW 1.8 2.2 3.5 5.2 1.7 2.5 3.7 4 6 7.5 11
380-440V kW 3 3.5 6 7.5 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 12.5 15
∂ Valid for systems with earthed neutral, overvoltage category III, pollution degree 3.
10-24
Rotary cam switches
Technical characteristics
TYPE GX16 GX20 GX32 GX40 GN12 GN20 GN25 GN32 GN40 GN63 GN125
Motor power for
direct-on-line control 120V HP 1.5 1.5 3 5 1.5 1.5 3 5 5 7.5 15
(UL/CSA-DOL) 230V HP 3 3 7.5 10 3 3 5 10 10 15 25
3 phases
480V HP 5 5 15 15 – – 10 15 20 25 50
600V HP 5 5 15 15 – – 15 15 20 25 40
1 phase (2 poles) 120V HP 0.75 0.75 1.5 2 0.75 0.75 1.5 2 2 5 7.5
230V HP 1 1.5 3 5 1 2 3 5 5 10 15
Motor power for switches in DC
utilisation categories
1 contact 48V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125
DC21A 60V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 50 80
Ie 110V A 4 4 5 6 4 4 4 6 6 8 10
220V A 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.9 1 1.2
440V A 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 - - - - -
DC23A 24V A 16(1) 20(1) 32(1) 40(1) 10(1) 20(1) 25(1) 32(1) 40(1) 50(1) 125(1)
48V A 16(2) 20(2) 32(2) 40(1) 10(2) 20(2) 25(2) 32(2) 40(2) 50(2) 125(2)
Ie 60V A 16(3) 20(3) 32(3) 40(3) 10(3) 20(3) 25(3) 32(3) 40(3) 50(3) 125(3)
No. of contacts connected in 110V A 10(3) 10(3) 15(3) 20(3) 5(3) 10(3) 12(3) 15(3) 20(3) 25(3) 50(3)
series are indicated in brackets 220V A 7(4) 8(4) 12(4) 12(4) 5(4) 8(4) 10(4) 12(4) 12(4) 15(4) 20(4)
24V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125
DC13 48V A 14 16 25 32 10 16 20 25 32 40 100
60V A 12 12 16 16 8 12 16 16 16 28 50
Ie 110V A 0.8 1 3 3 1 1 1.5 3 3 3.3 4
220V A 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - 10
440V A 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 - - - - -
Mechanical life cycles 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 3x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 1x106
Terminal screw M 3 3 4 4 3 3 3.5 4 4 5 2x5
Tightening torque max Nm 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2 0.5 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2 2 2
Conductor cross section max. r/f 2 mm2 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/6 10/6 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 4/4 6/4 10/6 16/10 50/50
2 AWG 14/14 14/14 8/10 8/10 14/16 12/14 10/12 8/10 8/10 6/8 1/0 / 1/0
r: rigid/solid min. r/f 2 mm2 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 1.5/1.5 1.5/1.5 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 1.5/1.5 1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5
f: flexible/stranded
2 AWG 20/20 20/20 16/16 16/16 20/20 20/20 20/20 16/16 16/16 14/14 14/14
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -25...+55
Storage temperature °C -40...+70
10-25
Page 11-4 Page 11-16 Page 11-24
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 16A TO 125A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 50A TO 1600A FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
(AC21A) (AC21A) UP TO 850A 1000VDC (DC21B)
• Switch disconnectors with direct operating • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors
handle and door coupling version • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors • Direct operating and door coupling
• Switch disconnectors with front door mount with NFC, NH and BS type fuse holders versions
• Switch disconnectors in non-metallic • Three and four-pole changeover switches; • Serial connection of 2, 3, 4, 6 and 8 poles.
enclosure add-on motorised control unit available.
• Changeover switches in non-metallic
enclosure.
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 11
SEC. - PAGE
GA series 16A to 125A
Three-pole switch disconnectors ............................................................................................................................................ 11 - 4
Fourth pole add on..................................................................................................................................................................... 11 - 5
Add-on blocks and accessories ............................................................................................................................................... 11 - 7
Empty non-metallic enclosures .............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 11
Enclosed switch disconnectors .............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 12
Enclosed changeover switches ............................................................................................................................................... 11 - 14
GA series
16A to 125A
11
ENCLOSED VERSION - IEC/EN TYPE IP65 ENCLOSED VERSION - UL/CSA TYPE 4/4X
WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE
IEC AC21A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 63A 80A 100A 125A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 63A 80A 100A 125A
UL/CSA general use 600VAC 16A 25A 32A 40A 60A 60A 100A 100A 100A
Enclosure width Enclosure width
100mm / 3.94” 175mm / 6.89” 220mm 100mm / 3.94” 175mm / 220mm / 8.66”
8.66” 6.89”
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
Three pole
Four pole
Enclosure width
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES 175mm / 6.89” 220mm / 8.66”
Three pole
Four pole
11-2
Switch disconnectors
Overview
VERSATILITY!
VERSION FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC
APPLICATIONS
The GA...D type switch disconnectors are
COMPACT SIZE suitable for both small domestic installations
The three-pole 16A to 63A switch as well as those with a large number of solar
disconnectors, are made up of a single cells. Use up to 1000V in DC21B category.
unit body, merely 36mm/1.4” wide, while
the 63A to 125A ratings, of another body
size of only 70mm/2.8” wide.
CERTIFICATIONS
ACCESSORY FLEXIBILITY All GA series switch disconnectors are
Mounting and removal of the fourth pole certified by EAC, cCSAus and UL Listed
and add-on blocks are simple and quick for Canada and USA. The 16A to 63A
operations with no need of tools. types are certified according to
UL508/CSA 22.2 n° 14 while the 63A to
125A types to UL98/CSA 22.2 n° 4
standards.
11
SIDE MOUNT ADD-ON 6 AND 8 POLE VERSION IP65 PADLOCKABLE HANDLES SWITCH STATUS INDICATION
FOURTH POLE A mechanical coupling system is Wide range of selector or pistol grip The switch open or closed state is
Simultaneous or early-make contact available for the 16A to 125A switch handles, with screw or ring fixing. clearly and unequivocally seen at a
operation of the fourth pole with disconnectors with direct operating All handles are equipped with built- distance thanks to the simple and
respect to the switch disconnector handle to provide 6/8 pole in padlockable mechanism. modern design of the handle.
poles. disconnectors along with a The selector handle GAX63... snaps
mechanical interlock mechanism for onto the door-mount switch
the line changeover function disconnectors in16A to 40A ratings, DIN RAIL FIXING
(I - 0 - II). with no need of tools. Switch disconnector mounting on
Enclosed changeover switches are and removal from the 35mm
available in a variety of ratings and (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail are done by
cCSAus certified. simply pressing it downwards with
no need of tools.
23mm/0.9”
11-3
Switch disconnectors
GA series 16A to 125A
Three-pole switch Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
disconnectors tional free air operational per – IEC 16A to 125A ratings
thermal current Ie pkg – Available versions:
current Ith • Direct operating
AC21A AC22A (690V) • Door mount
(690V) AC23A (415V) • Door coupling version. Use switch disconnector
[A] [A] n° [kg] with direct operating handle and separately purchase
the handle and shaft extension for this version.
Direct operating version, complete with black handle. See pages 11-9 and 11-10
For door-coupling version, separately purchase the handle – Compact and modular size
and shaft extension; refer to pages 11-9 and 11-10. – Screw or 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail fixing
GA016 A 16 16 1 0.146 – Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
GA025 A 25 25 1 0.146
Operational characteristics
GA032 A 32 32 1 0.146 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
GA016 A... GA063 A... GA040 A 40 40 1 0.146 – IEC rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
GA040 A GA125 A GA063 SA 63 45 1 0.148 – Electrical life in IEC AC21A:
GA063 SA • 100,000 cycles for GA016-GA040
GA063 A 63 63 1 0.388 • 15,000 cycles for GA063 SA
GA080 A 80 80 1 0.388 • 30,000 cycles for GA063-GA125
GA100 A 100 100 1 0.388 – Mechanical life:
• 100,000 cycles for GA016-GA040-GA063 SA
GA125 A 125 125 1 0.388 • 30,000 cycles for GA063-GA125.
Door-mount version, complete with shaft;
separately purchase the handle, refer to pages 11-9. Certifications and compliance
GA016 C 16 16 1 0.170 Certifications obtained:
GA025 C 25 25 1 0.170
KEMA
EAC
GA016 C... GA063 C... GA063 C 63 63 1 0.404
11 GA040 C GA125 C GA080 C 80 80 1 0.404
GA100 C 100 100 1 0.404
GA125 C 125 125 1 0.404 Type
GA016 A...GA040 A ––
Strokes of GA switch poles GA063 SA –– ––
Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90° GA016 C...GA040 C ––
60°
GA016 A...GA040 A - GA063SA GA063 A...GA125 A –– ––
60° GA063 C...GA125 C –– ––
GA016 C...GA040 C
GA063 A...GA125 A
55° Certification obtained.
55° Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
GA063 C...GA125 C
OFF ON UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
UL/CSA ratings
Fourth pole Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
add on tional free air operational per – IEC 16A to 125A ratings
thermal current Ie pkg – Available version for:
current Ith • Direct operating
AC21A AC22A (690V) • Door mount
(690V) AC23A (415V) • Simultaneous closing with switch poles
[A] [A] n° [kg] • Early-make closing respect with switch poles
– Compact and modular size.
Simultaneous closing operation as switch poles.
For GA...A version. Operational characteristics
GAX42 040A 40 40 1 0.045 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
GAX42 063SA 63 45 1 0.045 – IEC rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
– Electrical life in IEC AC21A:
GAX42 063A 63 63 1 0.126 • 100,000 cycles for GAX42 040A/C and
GAX42...A
GAX41...A GAX42 080A 80 80 1 0.126 GAX41 040A/C
GAX42 063SA GAX42 100A 100 100 1 0.126 • 15,000 cycles for GAX42 063SA and GAX41 063SA
GAX41 063SA • 30,000 cycles for GAX42 063A/C and GAX41 125A/C
GAX42 125A 125 125 1 0.126 – Mechanical life:
For GA...C version. • 100,000 cycles for GAX42 040A/C and
GAX42 040C 40 40 1 0.045 GAX41 040A/C, GAX42 063SA and GAX41 063SA
• 30,000 cycles for GAX42 063A/C - GAX42 125A/C
GAX42 063C 63 63 1 0.128 and GAX41 125A/C.
GAX42 080C 80 80 1 0.128
GAX42 100C 100 100 1 0.128 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained:
GAX42 125C 125 125 1 0.128
Early-make closing operation with respect to switch poles.
EAC
GAX42 040C GAX41 063SA 63 45 1 0.046
GAX41 040C GAX41 125A 125 125 1 0.116
For GA...C version. 11
GAX41 040C 40 40 1 0.046 Type
GAX41 125C 125 125 1 0.128 GAX41 040A-GAX42 040A ––
For GA016 A-GA040 A only. GAX41 063SA-GAX42 063SA ––
For GA063 SA only.
For GA016 C-GA040 C only. GAX41 040C-GAX42 040C ––
For GA063 A-GA125 A only.
For GA063 C-GA125 C only. GAX41 125A-GAX42 125C ––
See page 11-4 for UL/CSA ratings which are the same as the GAX42 063A...GAX42 125A ––
corresponding switch types.
GAX42 063C...GAX42 125C ––
Strokes of GA poles (switch and add-on pole) Certification obtained.
Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90°
GA016A/C…GA040A/C - GA063SA 60° Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
Main poles UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
GAX42040A/C - GAX42063SA 60°
Simultaneous fourth-pole add on
GAX41040A/C-GAX41063SA 55°
Early-make fourth-pole add on
GA063A/C…GA125A/C 55°
Main poles
GAX42063A/C…GAX42125A/C 55°
Simultaneous fourth-pole add on
GAX41125A/C 48°
Early-make fourth-pole add on
OFF ON
Maximum combination GA016 A...GA040 A Sequence and maximum combination of add-on blocks on direct operating switch disconnectors
GA040 D
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 040A GAX41 040A GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 040A GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D GAX42 040D
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 GA016 A –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA025 A 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 A –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– GA040 D 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GAX42 040D can be used with GA040 D switch only.
GA063 SA
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA GAX41 063SA GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 063SA GAX42 063SA
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063 SA –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– –– 2 1 1
11 1 1 –– –– –– 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D, GA125 D
GAX32 A GAX34 A GAX10 11A GAX12 10EA GAX41 125A GAX41 125A GAX12 10EA GAX10 11A GAX34 A GAX32 A
GAX42...A GAX42...A
GA042 080D GA042 080D
GA042 125D GA042 125D
–– –– 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– GA063 A 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA080 A –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA100 A 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA125 A –– –– 2 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– GA080 D –– –– 2 –– ––
1 1 –– –– –– GA125 D 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GAX42 080D can be used with GA080 D switch only.
GAX42 125D can be used with GA125 D switch only.
GA016 C...GA040 C Sequence and maximum combination of add-on blocks on door mount switch disconnectors
GAX31 C GAX33 C GAX10 11C GAX41 040C GAX41 040C GAX10 11C GAX33 C GAX31 C
GAX42 040C GAX42 040C
1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA016 C 1 1 1 1
1 1 –– 1 GA025 C –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA032 C 1 –– 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA040 C –– 1 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 C...GA125 C
GAX32 C GAX34 C GAX10 11C GAX41 125C GAX41 125C GAX10 11C GAX34 C GAX32 C
GAX42 125C GAX42 125C
–– –– 1 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– GA063 C 1 1 –– ––
1 1 –– 1 GA080 C –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– GA100 C 1 –– 1 1
–– –– 1 –– GA125 C –– 1 –– ––
1 1 –– –– –– –– 1 1
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 040A GAX41 040A GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 040A GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D GAX42 040D
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
1 1 1 –– 1 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 GA016 A + –– –– 2 1 1
GA016 A +
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
GA025 A +
1 1 1 –– 1 GA025 A + –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A + 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A + –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 A + –– 1 1 1 1
GA040 A +
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 D + –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 GA040 D 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GAX42 040D can be used with GA040 D switch only.
GA063 SA
+ GAX50 00 -
GAX60 00
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA GAX41 063SA GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 063SA GAX42 063SA
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
1 1 1 –– 1 1 –– 1 1 1 11
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063SA + 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063SA –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D, GA125 D
+ GAX50 01 -
GAX60 01
GAX32 A GAX34 A GAX10 11A GAX12 10EA GAX41 125A GAX41 125A GAX12 10EA GAX10 11A GAX34 A GAX32 A
GAX42...A GAX42...A
GA042 080D GA042 080D
GA042 125D GA042 125D
GAX50 01 - GAX60 01
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA063 A + 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA063 A + –– –– 2 –– ––
GA080 A +
–– –– 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 –– ––
GA080 A +
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA100 A + –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA100 A + 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA125 A + –– –– 2 –– ––
GA125 A +
–– –– 2 –– –– –– 1 1 –– ––
GA080 D +
–– –– 2 –– –– GA080 D –– –– 2 –– ––
1 1 –– –– 1 GA125 D + 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– GA125 D –– –– –– 1 1
GAX42 080D can be used with GA080 D switch only.
GAX42 125D can be used with GA125 D switch only.
Add-on blocks Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts
per – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A
pkg – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
n° [kg] A600-Q600
– Tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
Auxiliary contacts, simultaneous operation as switch poles.
GAX10 11A 1NO+1NC for GA...A, 1 0.030 Operational characteristics for other devices
GA063 SA and GA...D – Tightening torque:
GAX10 11C 1NO+1NC for GA...C 1 0.030 • GAX31A/C-GAX33A/C terminals: 1.8-2Nm/16-18lbin
• GAX32A/C-GAX34A/C terminals: 5-6Nm/45-54lbin
Auxiliary contacts, early-break operation with respect to • GAX5000/5001-GAX6000/6001 fixing:
switch poles. 0.5Nm/4.4lbin; extension with handle:
GAX10 11A GAX10 11C GAX11 10EA 1EB (NO) for GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.035 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
GA063 SA and GA040 D
GAX12 10EA 1EB (NO) for GA063 A-GA125 A, 1 0.035 Transformation of direct operating version into door
GA080 D and GA125 D coupling type
GA063 A-GA125 A + GA016 A-GA040 A +
Neutral terminal. GA063 A-GA124 A / GA016 A-GA040A /
GA080 D + GA080 D / GA063 SA + GA063 SA /
GA125 D + GA125 D GA040 D + GA040 D
GAX31 A For GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.040 with GAX50 01 with GAX50 00
0
GA080 D - GA125 D
GAX33 C For GA016 C-GA040 C 1 0.040
11 GAX34 C For GA063 C-GA125 C 1 0.110
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained:
Mechanical interlock for line changeover (I-0-II).
EAC
GAX50 01 For GA063 A-GA125 A, GA080 D 1 0.075
GA125 D and GAX67 B;
5mm/0.2”
Mechanical coupling system for 6-8 pole switch disconnectors. Type
GAX50... GAX60 00 For GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.050 GAX10 11A - GAX10 11C ––
GAX60... GA063 SA and GA...D;
GAX11 10EA ––
5mm/0.2”
GAX12 10EA ––
GAX60 01 For GA063 A-GA125 A, GA080 D, 1 0.075
GA125 D; 7mm/0.3” GAX31 A – GAX31 C ––
Use GAX7… shaft extensions. GAX32 A – GAX32 C ––
Use GAX66.. handles and GAX7…A extensions for a door-coupling
GAX33 A – GAX33 C ––
version.
GAX34 A – GAX34 C ––
GAX50 00 – GAX60 00 ––
GAX50 01 – GAX60 01 ––
GAX61-GAX61 B
GAX62-GAX62 B
GAX63-GAX63 B
GAX63 1B –– ––
GAX63 2-GAX63 2B
GAX64-GAX64 B
Strokes of GA poles (switch with auxiliary contact blocks) Strokes of GA…D types (switch and add-on blocks)
GAX66-GAX66 B ––
Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90° Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90°
GA016A/C…GA040A/C - GA063SA 60° GA040 D 60° GAX67 B
Main poles Main poles
GAX60 B ––
GAX10 11A – GAX10 11C 60° GA042 040D 60°
Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO Simultaneous fourth-pole add on Certification obtained.
NC GAX10 11A 60° UL Listed - cULus File E93601.
40° Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO
GAX11 10EA Travel 0→1 60° NC
Auxiliary contact 40° NOTE: GAX61/61B and GAX66/66B are UL/CSA Type 1, 4, 4X
(1EB – NO early break) Travel 1→0 70° GAX11 10EA Travel 0→1 60° outdoor use with all GA switch types.
Auxiliary contact GAX62/62B, GAX63/63B, GAX632/2B, GAX64/64B and
(1EB – NO early break) Travel 1→0 70°
GA063A/C…GA125A/C 55° GAX67B are UL/CSA Type 1, 4, 4X outdoor use with
Main poles GA016A/C-GA040A/C and GA063SA types, otherwise Type 1
GAX10 11A – GAX10 11C 45° GA080 D - GA125 D 55° only.
Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO Main poles
NC GAX42 080D - GAX42 125D 55°
25° Simultaneous fourth-pole add on Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
GAX12 10EA Travel 0→1 55° GAX10 11A – GAX10 11C 45° IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
Auxiliary contact Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO
(1EB – NO early break) Travel 1→0 65° NC
25°
OFF ON GAX12 10EA Travel 0→1 55°
Auxiliary contact
(1EB – NO early break) Travel 1→0 65°
OFF ON
UL508A; 7mm/0.3” .
IEC IP66/UL Type 4X
GAX67 B For GAX50... mechanical 1 0.078
interlock mechanism (I-O-II).
5mm/0.2” .
GAX62/62B
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
For GA...A and GA...D switch disconnectors,
separately purchase GAX7... shaft extensions. ACCESSORIES FOR DOOR COUPLING CONTROL.
Snap-on fixing of GA016-GA040C switch For GAX66 and GAX66 B handles.
disconnectors with the handle.
Separately purchase GAX7…A shaft extension GAX60 B Adapter 7mm/0.3” for 1 0.010
and GAX60 B handle having a 7mm/0.3” GA063 A-GA125 A, Certifications and compliance
square section, nor required for GAX60 01. GA080 D and GA125 D See the table on page 11-8 for details.
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28 11-9
Switch disconnectors
GA series 16A to 125A
Accessories
Shaft extensions Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics of fuse holder
Terminal covers per – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
pkg – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 8kV
Fuse holders/blocks n° [kg] – The fuse holder/block connects directly to the switch
disconnectors.
Shaft extension for door-coupling handles GAX61-GAX64, – Access to fuses only when the switch disconnectors
GAX61 B-GAX64 B, GAX67 B and mechanical interlock type are in OFF position.
GAX50 00, GAX50 01 and coupling system GAX60 00.
GAX7 055 55mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0,012 Terminal covers
GAX7 070 70mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.014 For switch disconnectors
GAX7 090 90mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.018
GAX7 150 150mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.032
GA...A
GAX7 200 200mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.040 GA063 SA
GAX7...
GAX7 300 300mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.068 GA...D
GAX83
GAX7 400 400mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.072 GAX84
GAX7 500 500mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.090 GAX83
Shaft extension for door-coupling handles GAX66, GAX66 B GAX84
and mechanical coupling system GAX60 01.
GAX7 150A 150mm long; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.090 GA...C
EAC
Suitable for 10.3x38 fuse size
GAX39 1UL For GA016 A-GA025 A 1 0.135
Suitable for Class CC fuses
GAX39 1 Type
GAX7 055…GAX7 500
GAX7 150A … GAX7 300A ––
GAX81-GAX83 ––
GAX82-GAX84 ––
GAX39 1 –– ––
GAX39 1UL –– ––
Certification obtained.
GAZ3
GAZ3 UL
IEC/EN type IP65 Order code IEC conventional free air thermal Qty Wt Components
non-metallic enclosure current Ith per Enclosure Switch Handle
AC21A (690V) pkg disconnector
[A] n° [kg]
THREE POLE.
With rotating red/yellow handle.
GAZ016 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA016 A GAX61
GAZ025 25 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA025 A GAX61
GAZ032 32 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA032 A GAX61
GAZ040 40 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA040 A GAX61
GAZ016...GAZ040... GAZ063 SA 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 GA063 SA GAX61
GAZ063 C 63 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA063 A GAX61
GAZ080 C 80 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA080 A GAX61
GAZ100 C 100 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA100 A GAX61
GAZ125 125 1 2.220 GAZ3 GA125 A GAX61
With rotating black handle.
GAZ016 B 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 B GA016 A GAX61 B
GAZ025 B 25 1 0.450 GAZ1 B GA025 A GAX61 B
GAZ032 B 32 1 0.450 GAZ1 B GA032 A GAX61 B
GAZ040 B 40 1 0.450 GAZ1 B GA040 A GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAB 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 B GA063 SA GAX61 B
GAZ063 CB 63 1 1.220 GAZ2 B GA063 A GAX61 B
GAZ080 CB 80 1 1.220 GAZ2 B GA080 A GAX61 B
GAZ100 CB 100 1 1.220 GAZ2 B GA100 A GAX61 B
GAZ063...100 C
GAZ125 B 125 1 2.220 GAZ3 B GA125 A GAX61 B
11 FOUR POLE. Enclosure Switch Fourth Handle
With rotating red/yellow handle. disconnector pole
GAZ016 T4 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61
GAZ032 T4 32 1 0.550 GAZ1 GA032 A GAX42040A GAX61
GAZ063 CT4 63 1 1.250 GAZ2 GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61
GAZ100 CT4 100 1 1.250 GAZ2 GA100 A GAX42100A GAX61
GAZ125 T4 125 1 2.500 GAZ3 GA125 A GAX42125A GAX61
With rotating black handle.
GAZ016 T4B 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 B GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61 B
GAZ032 T4B 32 1 0.550 GAZ1 B GA032 A GAX42040A GAX61 B
GAZ063 CT4B 63 1 1.250 GAZ2 B GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61 B
GAZ100 CT4B 100 1 1.250 GAZ2 B GA100 A GAX42100A GAX61 B
GAZ125... GAZ125 T4B 125 1 2.500 GAZ3 B GA125 A GAX42125A GAX61 B
General characteristics
– Enclosure material: ABS
– For four-pole types not indicated, separately purchase
corresponding fourth pole GAX42…A and install on
enclosed 3-pole version
– Possible accessories to mount afterwards, if any
required:
• GAZ016-GAZ040 types: 1 contact block both on the
right and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
installed
• All other types: 2 contact blocks both on the right
and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
installed
• For GAZ125 types: if any earth/ground and/or
neutral terminal required, separately purchase types
GAX3… given on page 11-8
– Padlockable handle
– Sealable cover
– Tightening torque for cover screws:
• GAZ016-GAZ040 types: 1.3Nm/16lbin
• All other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin
– IEC/EN degree of protection: IP65
– Cable entry:
• GAZ016-GAZ040 types: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20
knockouts
• GAZ063SA-GAZ100 types: PG29/M32 and
PG16/M25 knockouts
• GAZ125 types: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by
customer.
UL/CSA Type 4/4X Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Components
non-metallic enclosure tional free air operational per Enclosure 3-pole switch Interlock Handle
thermal current Ie pkg disconnector
current Ith
AC21A AC22A AC23B
(690V) (400V) (500V)
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg]
Three-pole line changeover switches I-0-II.
GAZ025 ET6 25 25 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA025A GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ040 ET6 40 40 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA040A GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ063SA ET6 63 45 25 1 1.070 GAZ UL 2x GA063SA GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ080 ET6 80 80 63 1 2.950 GAZ3UL 2x GA080A GAX5001 GAX67 B
GAZ125 ET6 125 125 100 1 2.950 GAZ3UL 2x GA125A GAX5001 GAX67 B
Enclosure Switch Interlock Handle
disconnector +
GAZ 025 E...GAZ 063SA E... Four-pole line changeover switches I-0-II. 4th pole
GAZ025 ET8 25 25 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA025A + GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42040A
GAZ040 ET8 40 40 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA040A+ GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42040A
GAZ063SA ET8 63 45 25 1 1.070 GAZ UL 2x GA063SA+ GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42063SA
GAZ080 ET8 80 80 63 1 2.950 GAZ3UL 2x GA080A+ GAX5001 GAX67 B
2x GAX42080A
GAZ125 ET8 125 125 100 1 2.950 GAZ3UL 2x GA125A+ GAX5001 GAX67 B
2x GAX42125A
For major details, consult Customer Service; see contact details on
General characteristics
– Enclosure material: Polycarbonate
– Possible accessories to mount afterwards, if any
required:
• 2 contact blocks both on the right and left side for
UL/CSA ratings GAZ…ET6 types
• 1 contact block both on the right and left side for
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Fuse class - GAZ…ET8 types
[HP] [HP] use at circuit max rating – Complete with neutral and earth/ground plate
600VAC rating at at 600V terminals
600VAC – Sealable cover
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] Type - [A] – Padlockable handle, complete with shaft extension
208V – Tightening torque for enclosure screws:
GAZ025... 11/2 3 71/2 71/2 15 20 25 5 RK5 - 30A • 1.5Nm/13lbin for cover
• 1.2Nm/11lbin for plate terminals
GAZ040... 2 5 10 15 20 25 40 5 RK5 - 45A – Degree of protection: IEC/EN IP65; UL/CSA Type 1, 4
GAZ063S... 2 71/2 10 15 30 30 60 5 RK5 - 45A and 4X indoor use only
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ025-GAZ040ET... types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n°14. – Cable entry:
For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending. • GAZ025-063…ET6/8: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25
knockouts
• GAZ080-125 ET6/8: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Max fuse by customer.
[HP] [HP] use at circuit rating
600VAC rating at at 600V Certifications and compliance
600VAC Certifications pending: EAC, cCSAus.
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] [A] Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
208V IEC/EN 60947-3; CSA C22.2 n°14 and UL508 up to
GAZ063…ET6/8; CSA C22.2 n°4 and UL98 for
GA080... 3 10 25 25 40 40 100 10 100 GAZ100-125 ET6/8
GA125... 71/2 10 30 30 60 60 100 10 100
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ080-GAZ125ET... types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 N°4.
For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending.
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n°4 standards so not indicated in UL product marking.
Maximum combination
Enclosures
GAX83
GAZ016...GAZ040
GAZ016 B...GAZ040 B
GAZ1
GAZ1 B
GAZ063 SA One auxiliary contact block can be fitted on the right and left sides of the
GAZ063 SAB disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
GAZ2 The earth and neutral plate terminals are standard supplied on the
GAZ2 B enclosure base.
Two auxiliary contacts blocks can be fitted both on the right and left sides of Sealing eyelet
the disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
Earth/ground and neutral plate terminals are standard supplied on the
enclosure base. 11
GAX12 10EA
or
GAX12 10EA
or
GAX34A
GAX34A
GAX32A
GAX10 11A
GAX32A
GAX10 11A
GAX84
GAX84
GAZ063...GAZ100C
GAZ063...GAZ100CB
GAZ2
GAZ2 B
GAZ125
GAZ125 B
GAZ3
GAZ3 B
Two auxiliary contact blocks can be fitted both on the right and left sides of the disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
Earth/ground and neutral terminals, GAX... type, if any required, are to be purchased separately for the enclosure except for
GAZ...UL types which have plate terminals standard supplied.
Three-pole switch Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handle and accessories
disconnectors tional free air operational per Types of handle to use per type are given below. Also
thermal current Ie pkg refer to pages 11-19 and 11-22 for other accessories.
current Ith
AC21A AC23A AC23A
(500V) (400V) (500V) Direct operating Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black Red/yellow
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension .
GE0160 P 160 160 125 1 0.850 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66
GE0160 160 160 125 1 0.850
GE0200 200 160 125 1 0.900
GE0250 250 160 125 1 0.900
GE...
GE0251 250 250 200 1 1.700 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0315 315 315 250 1 1.700
GE0400 400 400 315 1 1.900
GE0500 500 500 400 1 4.200 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N
GE0630 630 630 500 1 4.200
GE0800 800 800 500 1 4.200
GE1000 1000 800 800 1 7.600 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N
GE1250 1250 800 800 1 7.600
GE1600 1600 1000 900 1 20.800
Three-pole switch With NFC fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension . Black Black Red/yellow
disconnectors with GE0050 F 50 50 50 1 1.250 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
fuse holder
11 GE0125 F 125 125 125 1 1.700
With NH fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension. Black Black Red/yellow
GE0160 N 160 160 125 1 1.700 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
GE0161 N 160 160 160 1 3.100 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0250 N 250 250 250 1 6.600 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N
GE0400 N 400 400 400 1 6.600
GE0630 N 630 630 630 1 13.000 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N
GE0800 N 800 630 630 1 13.000
With BS fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension. Black Black Red/yellow
GE... F - GE...N - GE...B GE0160 B 160 160 160 1 3.500 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0200 B 200 200 200 1 3.500
GE0250 B 250 250 250 1 6.600
GE0315 B 315 315 315 1 6.600 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N
GE0400 B 400 400 400 1 6.600
GE0630 B 630 630 630 1 13.000 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N
GE0800 B 800 630 630 1 13.000
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is General characteristics
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft – IEC 50A to 1600A ratings
extension is required in this case. – Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
See table on page 11-22 also for the types of fuses. – Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
The switch disconnector is standard-supplied with fuse protection shield. GE0160 P on p. 11-19
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection.
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V. – Padlockable at 0 position with no extra accessory.
Operational characteristics
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
• 1000V for GE0160 P, GE0160-GE1600,
GE0250 N/B-GE0800 N/B
• 800V for GE0050 F, GE0125 F, GE0160 N/B,
GE0161 N, and GE0200 B
– Mechanical life:
• 30,000 cycles for GE0160 P, GE0160-GE0250,
• 20,000 cycles for GE0251-GE0400
• 10,000 cycles for GE0500-GE1600, GE0050 F,
GE0125 F, GE0160 N/B-GE0400 N/B
• 5,000 cycles for GE0630 N/B-GE0800 N/B.
Four-pole Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
switch disconnectors tional free air operational per Types of handle to use per type are given below. Also
thermal current Ie pkg refer to pages 11-19 and 11-23 for other accessories.
current Ith
AC21A AC23A AC23A
(500V) (400V) (500V) Direct operating Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black Red/yellow
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension .
GE0160 T4P 160 160 125 1 1.000 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66
GE0160 T4 160 160 125 1 1.000
GE0200 T4 200 160 125 1 1.000
GE0250 T4 250 160 125 1 1.000
GE0251 T4 250 250 200 1 1.900 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE...T4... GE0315 T4 315 315 250 1 1.900
GE0400 T4 400 400 315 1 2.100
GE0500 T4 500 500 400 1 4.500 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N
GE0630 T4 630 630 500 1 4.500
GE0800 T4 800 800 500 1 4.500
GE1000 T4 1000 800 800 1 7.600 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N
GE1250 T4 1250 800 800 1 7.600
GE1600 T4 1600 1000 900 1 20.800
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is General characteristics
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft – IEC 50A to 1600A ratings
extension is required in this case. – 4-pole types (3P+N) with early-make late-break neutral
See table on page 11-23 also for the types of fuses.
pole
The switch disconnector is standard-supplied with fuse protection shield.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection. – Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V. – Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
GE0160 T4P on p. 11-19
– Padlockable at 0 position with no extra accessory.
Operational characteristics
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
• 1000V for GE1600 T4P, GE0160 T4-GE1600 T4,
GE0250 NT4/BT4-GE0800 NT4/BT4
• 800V for GE0050 FT4, GE0125 FT4,
GE0160 NT4/BT4, GE0161 NT, GE0200 BT4
– Mechanical life:
• 30,000 cycles for GE1600 T4P, GE0160 T4-
GE0250 T4
• 20,000 cycles for GE0251 T4-GE0400 T4
• 10,000 cycles for GE0500 T4-GE1600 T4,
GE0050 FT4, GE0125 FT4,
GE0160 NT4/BT4-GE0400 NT4/BT4
• 5,000 cycles for GE0630 NT4/BT4,
GE0800 NT4/BT4.
Three-pole changeover Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
switches tional free air operational per Types of handle to use per type are given below.
thermal current Ie pkg Also refer to pages 11-19 and 11-21 for other
current Ith accessories.
AC21A AC23B AC23B
(500V) (400V) (500V) Direct actuator Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension.
GE0160 E 160 160 125 1 1.800 GEX61E GEX61NC
GE0200 E 200 160 125 1 1.900
GE0201 E 200 160 125 1 4.800 GEX62NE GEX62NC
GE0250 E 250 180 150 1 4.800
GE0315 E 315 200 160 1 5.000
GE...E GE0400 E 400 250 200 1 5.000
GE0500 E 500 400 250 1 11.500 GEX63NE GEX63NC
GE0630 E 630 500 315 1 11.500
GE0800 E 800 630 400 1 11.900
GE1000 E 1000 1000 800 1 21.800 GEX64NE GEX64NC
GE1250 E 1250 1000 900 1 23.600
GE1600 E 1600 1000 900 1 50.000
Four-pole Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
changeover switches tional free air operational per Types of handle to use per type are given below.
thermal current Ie pkg Also refer to pages 11-19 and 11-21 for other
current Ith accessories.
AC21A AC23B AC23B
11 (500V) (400V) (500V) Direct actuator Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension.
GE0160 ET4 160 160 125 1 2.100 GEX61E GEX61NC
GE0200 ET4 200 160 125 1 2.200
GE0201 ET4 200 160 125 1 5.300 GEX62NE GEX62NC
GE0250 ET4 250 180 150 1 5.300
GE0315 ET4 315 200 160 1 5,500
GE0400 ET4 400 250 200 1 5.500
GE...ET4 GE0500 ET4 500 400 250 1 12.600 GEX63NE GEX63NC
GE0630 ET4 630 500 315 1 12.600
GE0800 ET4 800 630 400 1 13.200
GE1000 ET4 1000 1000 800 1 24.300 GEX64NE GEX64NC
GE1250 ET4 1250 1000 900 1 26.700
GE1600 ET4 1600 1000 900 1 55.000
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft General characteristics
extension is required in this case. – IEC 160A to 1600A ratings
– 4-pole types (3P+N) with early-make late-break neutral
pole
– Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
– Screw fixing
– Padlockable at 0 position with no extra accessory.
Operational characteristics
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
– Mechanical life: 30,000 cycles for GE0160 E/ET4 and
GE0200 E/ET4 only; 10,000 cycles for other types.
Auxiliary contacts Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Selection of add-on contacts and accessories
Terminal covers per Refer to the combinations given on pages 11-21 to 11-25
pkg for a correct choice based on the switch disconnector
Motorised unit n° [kg] type used.
Auxiliary contacts. General characteristics for auxiliary contacts
GEX10 11 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT 1 0.032 IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 16A.
Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0050 F,
GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N and GE0160 NT4. General characteristics for motorised control unit
– IEC rated auxiliary supply voltage: 230VAC/DC
GEX10 11N 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT 1 0.024 – 4 static outputs, 24VDC 120mA total
GEX10...
Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0160 E, – 4 inputs, contacts powered at 24VDC or 5VDC
GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and (500mA) for changeover control (pulsed or
GE1600 ET4. continuous)
GEX10 11M 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT 1 0.016 – RS485 Modbus serial port for control, monitoring,
programming
Adapter kit for 35mm DIN fixing. – Padlockable at 0 position
GEX89 00 For GE...P types only 1 0.040 – Programming by position inputs
Set of terminal covers consisting of pieces given below. – 4-digit display for status-error indications.
See tables on pages 11-21 to 11-25 for the selection based
GEX89 00 on the switch disconnector type. Screw fixing. Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC.
GEX81 01 1-piece set, transparent sheet 1 0.048 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
covering four poles IEC/EN 60947-3.
GEX81 11 2-piece set, each covers two poles 1 0.080
GEX81 21 2-piece set, each covers two poles 1 0.140
GEX81 31 2-piece set, each covers two poles 1 0.170
GEX81 41 2-piece set, each covers two poles 1 0.440
Snap-on fixing.
GEX82 01 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.090
GEX82 03 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.120 11
GEX8... GEX82 11 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.120
GEX82 12 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.120
GEX82 13 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.160
GEX82 21 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.240
GEX82 22 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.240
GEX82 23 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.320
GEX82 31 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.340
GEX82 32 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.340
GEX82 33 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.440
GEX83 11 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.120
GEX83 12 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.160
GEX83 21 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.260
GEX83 22 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.340
GEX83 31 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.360
GEX83 32 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.460
Motorised control unit for changeover switches.
Rated auxiliary supply voltage 230VAC/DC.
Complete with control handle, shaft extension and fixing
elements.
GEX69... GEX69 1 For GE0201 E-GE0400 E and 1 3.840
GE0201 ET4-GE0400 ET4
GEX69 2 For GE0500 E-GE0800 E and 1 5.340
GE0500 ET4-GE0800 ET4
GEX69 3 For GE1000 E-GE1600 E and 1 5.753
For the correct choice of
GE1000 ET4-GE1600 ET4
auxiliary contacts, terminals covers
Suitable for all types except switch disconnectors GE0050 F,
and motorised unit for the switch GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N, GE0160 NT4, GE0160 E,
disconnector, refer to tables on GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and GE1600 ET4.
Changeover contact/SPDT.
pages 11-21 to 11-25.
Dimensions
11-20 pages 11-30 to 49
Switch disconnectors
GE series 50A to 1600A
AC21A AC23B AC23B Black Black Red/Yellow Shaft Max panel Line 1 Line 2 Load
(500V) (400V) (500V) section depth
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order Order Order
code code code code code [mm/in] code code code code code
Changeover switches. Three poles.
GE0160 E 160 160 125 GEX61E GEX61NC –– GEX7162N 7mm/ 269/10.59” GEX1011M –– GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 E 200 160 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 342/13.36”
GEX7387N 479/18.86”
GE0201 E 200 160 125 GEX62NE GEX62NC –– GEX7227N 10mm/ 279/10.98” GEX1011 GEX691 GEX8212 GEX8211 GEX8311
GE0250 E 250 180 150 GEX7375N 0.4” 427/16.81”
GE0315 E 315 200 160 GEX7536N 588/23.15”
GE0400 E 400 250 200
GE0500 E 500 400 250 GEX63NE GEX63NC –– GEX7195N 14mm/ 257/10.12” GEX692 GEX8222 GEX8221 GEX8321
GE0630 E 630 500 315 GEX7345N 0.6” 407/16.02”
GE0800 E 800 630 400 GEX7535N 597/23.50”
GE1000 E 1000 1000 800 GEX64NE GEX64NC –– 280/11.02” GEX693 GEX8232 GEX8231 GEX8331
GE1250 E 1250 1000 900 430/16.93”
620/24.41”
GE1600 E 1600 1000 900 –– GEX7239N 14mm/ 579/22.79” GEX1011M GEX8141 –– GEX8141 11
GEX7485N 0.6” 825/32.48”
GEX81 01 terminal cover protects the input of both Line 1 and Line 2.
AC21A AC23A AC23A Black Black Red/Yellow Shaft Max panel Line Load
(500V) (400V) (500V) section depth
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order
code code code code code [mm/in] code code code
Switch disconnectors.
GE0160 P 160 160 125 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66 GAX7150A 7mm/ 214/8.42” GEX1011 ––
GE0160 160 160 125 GAX7200A 0.3” 264/10.39” GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 200 160 125 GAX7300A 364/14.33”
GE0250 250 160 125
GE0251 250 250 200 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0315 315 315 250 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0400 400 400 315 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0500 500 500 400 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/9.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0630 630 630 500 GEX7345N 0.6” 401/15.79”
GE0800 800 630 500 GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1000 1000 800 800 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
GE1250 1250 800 800 417/16.42”
607/23.90”
11 GE1600 1600 1000 900 GEX7239N 14mm/ 399/15.71” GEX8141 GEX8141
GEX7485N 0.6” 645/25.39”
Switch disconnectors with NFC fuse holder.
GE0050 F 50 50 50 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 14x51
GE0125 F 125 125 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43” 22x58
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
Switch disconnectors with NH fuse holder.
GE0160 N 160 160 125 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 00 GEX8201 GEX8201
GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43”
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
GE0161 N 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 0 GEX8211 GEX8212
GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72”
GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0250 N 250 250 250 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” 1 GEX8221 GEX8222
GE0400 N 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” 2
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 N 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” 3 GEX8231 GEX8232
GE0800 N 800 630 630 435/17.12”
625/24.61”
Switch disconnectors with BS fuse holder.
GE0160 B 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 A4 GEX8211 GEX8212
GE0200 B 200 200 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72” B1-B2
GE0250 B 250 250 250 GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0315 B 315 315 315 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” B1-B2-B3 GEX8221 GEX8222
GE0400 B 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” B1-B2-B3-B4
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 B 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” C1-C2 GEX8231 GEX8232
GE0800 B 800 630 630 435/17.12” C1-C2-C3
625/24.61”
The motorised control unit cannot be installed.
Standard supplied with IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapters kit is available on page 11-19.
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 35mm2 for GE0050 F and of 95mm2 for GE0125 F.
AC21A AC23A AC23A Black Black Red/Yellow Shaft Max panel Line Load
(500V) (400V) (500V) section depth
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order
code code code code code [mm/in] code code code
Switch disconnectors.
GE0160 T4P 160 160 125 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66 GAX7150A 7mm/ 214/8.42” GEX1011 ––
GE0160 T4 160 160 125 GAX7200A 0.3” 264/10.39” GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 T4 200 160 125 GAX7300A 364/14.33”
GE0250 T4 250 160 125
GE0251 T4 250 250 200 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0315 T4 315 315 250 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0400 T4 400 400 315 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0500 T4 500 500 400 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/9.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0630 T4 630 630 500 GEX7345N 0.6” 401/15.79”
GE0800 T4 800 630 500 GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1000 T4 1000 800 800 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
GE1250 T4 1250 800 800 417/16.42”
607/23.90”
GE1600 T4 1600 1000 900 GEX7239N 14mm/ 399/15.71” GEX8141 GEX8141 11
GEX7485N 0.6” 645/25.39”
Switch disconnectors with NFC fuse holder.
GE0050 FT4 50 50 50 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 14x51
GE0125 FT4 125 125 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43” 22x58
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
Switch disconnectors with NH fuse holder.
GE0160 NT4 160 160 125 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 00 GEX8203 GEX8203
GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43”
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
GE0161 NT4 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 0 GEX8213 GEX8213
GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72”
GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0250 NT4 250 250 250 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” 1 GEX8223 GEX8223
GE0400 NT4 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” 2
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 NT4 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” 3 GEX8233 GEX8233
GE0800 NT4 800 630 630 435/17.12”
625/24.61”
Switch disconnectors with BS fuse holder.
GE0160 BT4 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 A4 GEX8213 GEX8213
GE0200 BT4 200 200 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72” B1-B2
GE0250 BT4 250 250 250 GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0315 BT4 315 315 315 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” B1-B2-B3 GEX8223 GEX8223
GE0400 BT4 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” B1-B2-B3-B4
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 BT4 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” C1-C2 GEX8233 GEX8233
GE0800 BT4 800 630 630 435/17.12” C1-C2-C3
625/24.61”
The motorised control unit cannot be installed.
Standard supplied with IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapter kit is available on page 11-19.
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 35mm2 for GE0050 FT4 and of 95mm2 for GE0125 FT4.
Three-pole switch Order code IEC IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
disconnectors conventional operational per – IEC 40A to 125A ratings
free air current Ie pkg – Available versions:
thermal DC21B • Direct operating
current Ith • Door coupling version. Use switch disconnector
Poles in series with direct actuator and separately purchase the
800V 1000V handle and shaft extension for this version.
4p 6p 8p See pages 11-9 and 11-10.
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] – Screw or 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail fixing
– Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
Direct operating version, complete with black handle.
For door-coupling version, separately purchase the handle Operational characteristics
GA040 D GA080 D and shaft extension; refer to pages 11-9 and 11-10. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
GA125 D GA040 D 40 15 10 25 1 0.135 – IEC rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
GA080 D 80 18 20 32 1 0.355 – Mechanical life:
• 100,000 cycles for GA040 D and GAX42 040 D
GA125 D 125 20 25 40 1 0.355 • 30,000 cycles for GA080 D, GAX42 080 D, GA125D
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page and GAX42 125D.
11-52 or 11-58.
NOTE: See UL/CSA ratings on page 11-58 and/or on the bottom of page 11-4.
Transformation of direct operating version into door
coupling type
Fourth pole add-on Fourth pole add-on with simultaneous closing operation as GA040 D + GA040 D
corresponding GA...D switch poles. with GAX60 00
for 6 and 8 poles
GAX42 040D 40 –– –– –– 1 0.040
GA040 D
GAX42 080D 80 –– –– –– 1 0.110 GA080 D
GA125 D
GAX42 125D 125 –– –– –– 1 0.110 (GAX64/64B)
( 5mm/0.2”)
GAX42...D GAX7...
(GAX63... only)
UTILISATION IN DC21B CATEGORY
GAX60 01
Four-pole switch Order code IEC IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
disconnectors free air operational current Ie per Types of handle to use per type are given below.
thermal DC21B pkg Also refer to pages 11-19 or 20 and at page bottom for
other accessories.
220V 800V 1000V
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg]
Version for photovoltaic applications. Direct operating Door coupling
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension. Black Black Red/yellow
GE0160 DT4 160 160 70 30 1 1.000 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66
GE0160 DT4P 160 160 70 30 1 1.000
GE0125 DT4 125 125 125 100 1 1.900 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0250 DT4 250 250 250 200 1 2.000
GE0315 DT4 315 315 280 250 1 4.000
GE...DT4 - GE...DT4P GE0630 DT4 630 630 600 500 1 4.500 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N
GE0800 DT4 800 800 630 630 1 4.500
GE1250 DT4 1250 1250 1000 850 1 8.900 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft General characteristics
extension is required in this case. – IEC 160A to 1250A ratings
Connection of four poles in series. – Available versions:
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page • Direct operating
11-59.
• Door coupling. Use switch disconnector with direct
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection.
operation and separately purchase the handle and
shaft extension. See page 11-20 and at page bottom.
– Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
GE0160 DT4P on p. 11-19
– Padlockable at 0 position with no extra accessory.
Operational characteristics
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V 11
– Mechanical life:
• 30,000 cycles for GE0160 DT4, GE0160 DT4P
• 20,000 cycles for GE0125 DT4, GE0250 DT4,
GE0315 DT4
• 10,000 cycles for GE0630 DT4, GE0800 DT4,
GE1250 DT4.
GAX7300A 336/13.22”
GE0125 DT4 125 125 125 100 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0250 DT4 250 250 250 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0315 DT4 315 315 280 250 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0630 DT4 630 630 600 500 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/9.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0800 DT4 800 800 630 630 GEX7345N 0.8” 401/15.79”
GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1250 DT4 1250 1250 1000 850 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
417/16.42”
607/23.90”
The motorised control unit cannot be installed.
Connection of four poles in series.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapter kit is available on page 11-19.
45 (1.77”)
(1.28”)
32.5
100 (3.94”)
94 (3.70”)
(1.77”)
(1.65”)
45
41.9
22 14.2 (0.56”)
(0.87”)
100 (3.94”)
65 (2.56”)
78 (3.07”)
78 (3.07”)
(1.64”)
(1.28”)
41.6
72.6 (2.86”)
32.5
100 (3.94”)
78 (3.07”)
(1.64”)
41.6
(1.77”)
100 (3.94”)
45
(1.77”)
45
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
GAX50 01 - GAX60 01
78 (3.07”)
(1.64”)
72.6 (2.86”)
41.6
100 (3.94”)
100 (3.94”)
(1.64”)
41.6
GAX10 11C
GAX41 125C, GAX42 063C, GAX42 125C,
GAX32 C, GAX34 C
11-26
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Rotary handles
GAX61/61B GAX62/62B
36 (1.42”) 1...4 48 (1.89”)
1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
(0.04”...0.16”) 28...32 36 (1.42”)
(1.10”...1.26”) 22 35
22 23 65 (2.56”) (0.87”) (1.38”)
65 (2.56”) (0.87”) (0.90”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
65 (2.56”)
36 (1.42”)
48 (1.89”)
(1.10”...1.26”)
61.8 (2.43”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
65 (2.56”)
36 (1.42”)
28...32
Ø3 (0.12”)
Ø3 (0.12”)
GAX63/63B GAX63 1B
34.3 35 34.3 35
(1.35”) (1.38”) 3.3 (0.13”) (1.35”) (1.38”) 3.3 (0.13”)
1...4 1...4
65 (2.56”) (0.04”...0.16”) 65 (2.56”) (0.04”...0.16”)
65 (2.56”)
65 (2.56”)
(1.46”)
(1.46”)
(1.29”)
(0.96”)
(1.29”)
(0.96”)
2.5 ) 2.5 )
Ø32.9
Ø32.9
24.3
24.3
37
37
Ø2 .88” Ø2 .88”
(0 (0
(0.79”)
Ø20
65 (2.56”)
65 (2.56”)
(0.96”)
(0.96”)
2.5 ) 2.5 )
24.3
24.3
Ø2 .88” Ø2 .88”
(0 (0
(0.87”)
Ø22
GAX66/66B
1...4
GAX67 B
1...4 48 (1.89”)
11
(0.04”...0.16”) (0.04”...0.16”) 36 (1.42”)
22 35
46 36 (1.42”) 65 (2.56”) (0.87”) (1.38”)
98 (3.86”)
60 (2.36”) (1.81”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
36 (1.42”)
65 (2.56”)
48 (1.89”)
Ø66 (2.60”)
Ø48 (1.89”)
36 (1.42”)
75 (2.95”)
2
Ø3 26”)
(1.
Ø3 (0.12”)
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
65 (2.56”)
GAX7055 55 (2.16”) 116 (4.57”) 114 (4.49”) 119 (4.68”) 133 (5.24”) 114 (4.49”)
GAX7070 70 (2.75”) 131 (5.16”) 129 (5.08”) 134 (5.27”) 148 (5.83”) 129 (5.08”)
GAX7090 90 (3.54”) 151 (5.94”) 149 (5.87”) 154 (6.06”) 168 (6.61”) 149 (5.87”)
23 20
GAX7150 150 (5.90”) 211 (8.31”) 209 (8.23”) 214 (8.42”) 228 (8.98”) 209 (8.23”)
(0.90”) (0.90”) GAX7200 200 (7.87”) 261 (10.27”) 259 (10.20”) 264 (10.39”) 278 (10.94”) 259 (10.20”)
GA016 A...GA040 A GAX7... GAX6... GAX7... GAX67 B GAX7300 300 (11.81”) 361 (14.21”) 359 (14.13”) 364 (14.33) 378 (14.88”) 359 (14.13”)
GA063 SA - GA040 D
GA063 A...GA125 A GAX7400 400 (15.75”) 461 (18.15”) 459 (18.07”) 464 (18.27”) 468 (18.42”) 459 (18.07”)
GA080 D - GA125 D GAX7500 500 (19.68”) 561(22.09”) 559 (22.01”) 564 (22.20”) 578 (22.75”) 559 (22.01”)
GAX7...A used with GAX60 B and GAX66/66B GAX7...A used with GAX60 01 and GAX66/66B handle
88 (3.46”)
46 (1.81”) 46 (1.81”)
73 (2.87”)
98 (3.86”) 20 ±1 20 ±1
5 (0.20”) (0.79”
60 (2.36”) B (0.79” B1
±0.04”) ±0.04”)
GAX6001
min. 10 min. 10
(0.39”) (0.39”) B B1
Extension Length
(2.60”)
GAX60B
Ø66
11-27
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Terminal covers
GAX81 - GAX83 GAX82 - GAX84
GAX81 GAX83 3.6 46 (1.81”) GAX81 GAX83 GAX82 GAX84 GAX82 GAX84
(0.39”)
(0.39”)
(0.14”) 12.7 (0.50”) 8.6 (0.34”)
10
36 36 23
10
12 12 70 (2.75”) 20.7 23 70 (2.75”)
(1.42”) (1.42”) 46 (1.81”) (0.90”) (0.81”) 46 (1.81”) 46 (1.81”)
(0.47”) (0.47”) (0.90”)
(1.04”)
(1.04”)
37 (1.46”)
26.4
26.4
(1.47”)
37.3
9.9 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
Fuse holder
GAX39 1 - GAX39 1UL
80.1 (3.15”)
11
167.7 (6.60”)
159 (6.26”)
210 (8.27”)
54 (2.12”)
(0.92”)
23.3
PG16 / M25
120 (4.72”)
28
knockouts on top
and bottom
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
and bottom
184 (7.24”)
11-28
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Ø 4.5 (0.18”)
153.5 (6.04”)
210 (8.27”)
184 (7.24”)
52 (2.05”)
(1.10”)
28
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
148.5 5.85”)
and bottom
11
11-29
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(2.60”)
Ø66
84.4 (3.32”)
84.4 (3.32”)
110 (4.33”)
110 (4.33”)
128 (5.04”)
128 (5.04”)
75 (2.95”)
85 (3.35”)
N
(1.42”)
)
6”
1.2
36
2(
)
)
8”
8”
Ø3
0.1
0.1
(
(
.5
.5
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
GAX66...
M8 M8
1...4
34 34 34 34 34 20 (0.04...0.16”)
(1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (0.79”)
Not indicated on GE0160 DT4 type.
Direct operating version with handle With terminal cover and auxiliary contact
GEX6 5D
184 (7.24”) 2
68 (2.68”)
(0.08”)
GEX81 01
(line)
3
87 (3.42”)
(0.12”)
22.4
102 (4.01”)
(0.88”)
GEX6 5D
11
85 (3.35”)
254 (10”)
50 (1.97”) N
GEX10 11
GEX81 01
(load)
GE0160 P GE0160 T4P - GE0160 DT4P Door coupling version with handle GAX66 - GAX66 B
max. 364 (14.33”)
129 (5.08”) 140 (5.51”)
77 (3.03”) 29 (1.14”)
53 (2.09”) 76 (2.99”) 64 (2.52”) 76 (2.99”) 66 (2.60”) Drilling
18 (0.71”) 9.5 (0.37”) 18 (0.71”) 9.5 (0.37”) GAX7 150A
GAX7 200A 46 (1.81”)
GAX7 300A 36
7 (0.3”) (1.42”)
(2.60”)
Ø66
122 (4.80”)
122 (4.80”)
74 (2.91”)
74 (2.91”)
75 (2.95”)
N
85 (3.35”)
(1.42”)
)
6”
1.2
36
2(
Ø3
(0. 4.5
(0. 4.5
”)
”)
18
18
Ø
Ø
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
M8 M8 GAX66...
34 34 34 34 34 1...4
(1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) 19 (0.04...0.16”)
(0.75”)
Not indicated on GE0160 DTP4 type.
Direct operating version with handle
GEX6 5D With auxiliary contact
68 (2.68”)
102 (4.01”)
N
GEX6 5D
50 (1.97”)
GEX10 11
11-30
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(2.60”)
Ø66
84.4 (3.32”)
84.4 (3.32”)
154 (6.06”)
130 (5.12”)
154 (6.06”)
130 (5.12”)
75 (2.95”)
85 (3.35”)
N
(1.42”)
)
6”
1.2
36
) ) 2(
8” 8” Ø3
.1 .1
(0 (0
. 5 .5
Ø4 Ø4
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
GAX66...
M10 M10 1...4
19 (0.04”....0.16”)
42 (1.65”) 42 (1.65”) 42 (1.65”) 42 (1.65”) 42 (1.65”) (0.75”)
Direct operating version with handle GEX6 5D With terminal cover and auxiliary contact
184 (7.24”) 2
68 (2.68”) (0.08”)
GEX81 01
(line)
3
87 (3.42”)
22.4 (0.12”)
(0.88”)
102 (4.01”)
GEX6 5D
85 (3.35”)
254 (10”)
50 (1.97”) N 11
GEX10 11
GEX81 01
(load)
GE0251 - GE0315 - GE0400 GE0125 DT4 - GE0250 DT4 - GE0315 DT4 Door coupling version with handle
GE0251 T4 - GE0315 T4 - GE0400 T4 GEX66N - GEX66NB
217 (8.54”) 217 (8.54”)
100 (3.94”) 117 (4.61”) 100 (3.94”) 117 (4.61”) 90 (3.54”) max. 486 (19.13”)
100 (3.94”) 25 25 100 (3.94”) 4
(0.98”) 20.2
(0.98”) (0.79”) (0.16”)
GEX66N
GEX66NB
143 (5.63”)
143 (5.63”)
167 (6.57”)
167 (6.57”)
106 (4.17”)
106 (4.17”)
114 (4.49”)
0
N 0
”)
”)
22
22
(0.
(0.
.5
.5
Ø5
Ø5
1...4 27
GEX7277N (0.04”....0.16”) (1.06”)
GEX7375N
M1 M1 GEX7536N 45 (1.77”)
0 19 0
19 10 (0.4”)
(0.75”) 50 (1.97”) 50 (1.97”) (0.75”)
50 (1.97”) 50 (1.97”) 50 (1.97”)
Not indicated on GE... DT4 type.
20mm (0.79”) and M8 for GE0125 DT4 type.
Direct operating version with handle With terminal covers and auxiliary contact Drilling
GEX66ND
200 (7.87”)
GEX81 11
60 (2.36”)
(line)
Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
60 (2.36”)
GEX10 11
226 (8.90”)
106 (4.17”)
N
40 (1.57”)
115 (4.53”)
34 (1.34”)
GEX81 11
(load)
11-31
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
160 (6.30”)
N
B
B
A
A
(7.48”) (8.66”) (0.98”)
GE0630 DT4 205 235 30
)
)
5”
5”
.2
.2
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
(0
(0
.5
.5
Ø6
Ø6
GE0630 T4 205 235 30
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
GE0800 DT4 205 235 30
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
M1 M1
25 0 0
25 GE0800 T4 205 235 30
(0.98”) (0.98”)
65 (2.56”) 65 (2.56”)
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
65 (2.56”) 65 (2.56”) 65 (2.56”)
For GE0500 - GE0630 - GE0800 - GE0500 T4 - GE0630 DT4 - GE0630 T4 - GE0800 DT4 - GE0800 T4
Direct operating version with handle GEX67ND Door coupling version with handle GEX67N - GEX67NB
121 (4.76”) max 470 (18.50”)
30 5
(1.18”) (0.20”)
Drilling
Ø5.5
60 (2.36”) 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
11
40 (1.57”)
190 (7.48”)
42 (1.65”) 34 (1.34”)
143 (5.63”)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N 1...4
GEX7535N (0.04”....0.16”)
14 (0.6”)
(line)
0
GEX10 11
290 (11.42”)
GEX8121
(2 pcs/set)
(load)
11-32
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
0 0
290 (11.42”)
290 (11.42”)
250 (9.84”)
190 (7.48”)
250 (9.84”)
190 (7.48”)
)
5”
)
5”
.2
.2
(0
(0
.5
.5
Ø6
Ø6
M1 M1
4 30 4
30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
75 (2.95”) 75 (2.95”) 75 (2.95”) 75 (2.95”) 75 (2.95”)
11
396 (15.59”)
Drilling
Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
190 (7.48”)
40 (1.57”)
34 (1.34”)
60 (2.36”)
GEX7 195
GEX7 345
GEX7 535 1...4
14 (0.6”) (0.04”....0.16”)
(line)
0
GEX10 11
340 (13.38”)
GEX8131
(2 pcs/kit)
(load)
11-33
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GE1600 GE1600 T4
441 (17.36”) 441 (17.36”)
(0. 14.1
(0. 14.1
)
)
55”
55”
60 60 60
Ø
(2.36”) (2.36”) (2.36”)
(0. 16.2
)
64”
Ø
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
40
40
.43”)
.43”)
Ø11 (0
Ø11 (0
O O
255 (10.04”)
255 (10.04”)
330 (12.99”)
330 (12.99”)
441 (17.36”)
381 (15”)
N
36 36
(1.42”) (1.42”)
100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”)
Direct operating version with handle Door coupling version with handle
11 GEX68ND
200 (7.87”)
GEX68N - GEX68NB
162 (6.38”) max 483 (19.01”)
50 10
(1.97”) (0.39”)
Drilling
Ø5.5
42 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
(1.65”)
(2.36”)
60
240 (9.45”)
40 (1.57”)
396 (15.59”)
60
(2.36”)
34 (1.34”)
GEX7 239N
GEX7 485N
14 (0.6”)
O GEX10 11
255 (10.04”)
472 (18.58”)
GEX81 31
(2 pcs/kit)
(load)
11-34
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
76 (2.99”)
130 (5.12”)
124 (4.88”)
104 (4.09”)
124 (4.88”)
104 (4.09”)
N
28 6
31 (1.22”) 31 (1.22”) 52 (2.05”) 31 (1.22”) 31 (1.22”) 31 (1.22”) 52 (2.05”) (1.10”) (0.24”)
121 (4.76”)
114 (4.49”) 145 (5.71”)
76 (2.99”)
104 (4.09”)
145 (5.71”)
104 (4.09”)
150 (5.90”)
145 (5.71”)
N
11
37 37 37 37 37
(1.46”) (1.46”) (1.46”) 58 (2.28”) 28 6
(1.46”) (1.46”) 58 (2.28”) (1.10”) (0.24”)
131 (5.16”)
GEX6 1D
95 (3.74”)
34
(1.34”)
34 (1.34”)
max 281
27 (11.06”)
(1.06”) 34
84.5 (3.33”) 95 (3.74”) (1.34”)
GEX61N
GEX61NB
11-35
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
76 (2.99”)
170 (6.69”)
170 (6.69”)
147 (5.79”)
104 (4.09”)
170 (6.69”)
147 (5.79”)
104 (4.09”)
N
34
37 37 37 37 37 (1.34”)
(1.46”) (1.46”) 58 (2.28”) (1.46”) (1.46”) (1.46”) 58 (2.28”) 131 (5.16”)
GEX6 1D
170 (6.69”)
11
95 (3.74”)
34
(1.34”)
34 (1.34”)
max. 271
27 (10.67”)
(1.06”)
Terminal covers GEX82 01 for GE0160 N Terminal covers GEX82 03 for GE0160 NT4
35 35
(1.38”) 55 (1.38”)
(1.38”)
GEX82 01 GEX82 03
GEX82 01
(line) (line) GEX82 03
(line)
299 (11.77”)
GEX82 01
GEX82 01 GEX82 03 GEX82 03
(load) (load) (load)
11-36
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
C 25
C 25
(0.98”) (0.98”)
2”)
(0.2 .5
2”)
(0.2 .5
Ø5
Ø5
(0.87”)
(0.87”)
N
131 (5.16”)
150 (5.90”)
168 (6.61”)
192 (7.56”)
22
131 (5.16”)
150 (5.90”)
168 (6.61”)
192 (7.56”)
22
M8 18 M8 18
(0.71”)
D D (0.71”)
C
157 (6.18”)
Drilling
45 (1.77”) Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
40 (1.57”)
335 (13.19”)
142 (5.59”)
GEX66N
81 (3.19”)
GEX66NB
27 34 (1.34”)
(1.06”)
GEX7227N
GEX7375N
105 (4.13”) GEX7536N
10 (0.4”)
11-37
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GE0250 N - GE0400 N - GE0315 B - GE0400 B GE0250 NT4 - GE0400 NT4 - GE0315 BT4 - GE0400 BT4
with terminal covers and auxiliary contact with terminal covers and auxiliary contacts
274 (10.79”) 329 (12.95”)
111 (4.37”) 163 (6.42”) 166 (6.53”) 163 (6.42”)
C GEX10 11
C GEX10 11
30 30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
7”)
7”)
(0.2 7
(0.2 7
Ø
Ø
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
31
31
242 (9.53”)
161 (6.34”)
200 (7.87”)
212 (8.34”)
242 (9.53”)
161 (6.34”)
200 (7.87”)
212 (8.34”)
10 22 10 22
M M
(0.87”) (0.87”)
D D
11
For GE0250 N - GE0400 N - GE0250 NT4 - GE0400 NT4
Direct operating version with handle GEX63D Door coupling version with handle GEX67N - GEX67NB
and terminal covers
180 (7.09”) 51 (2.01”)
4 (0.16”)
Drilling
194 (7.64”)
Ø5.5
60 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
(2.36”)
42
(1.65”)
40 (1.57”)
410 (16.14”)
175 (6.89”)
81 (3.19”)
GEX67N
GEX67NB
34 (1.34”)
1...4
245 (9.64”) (0.04”... 0.16”)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6”)
11-38
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
”)
”)
35
35
C C
(0.
(0.
Ø9
Ø9
40 40
(1.57”) (1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
227 (10.90”)
317 (12.48”)
212 (8.34”)
222 (8.74”)
227 (10.90”)
317 (12.48”)
212 (8.34”)
222 (8.74”)
40
40
N
2
2
30 30
M1
M1
D (1.18”) D (1.18”)
10 (0.39”)
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
30 (1.18”)
30 (1.18”)
30 30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
C 10 10 50
(0.39”) (1.97”)
C 10 10 50
(0.39”) (1.97”)
(0.39”) (0.39”)
(0.35”)
(0.35”)
Ø9
Ø9
(1.57”)
342 (13.46”)
342 (13.46”)
322 (12.68”)
322 (12.68”)
212 (8.34”)
222 (8.74”)
212 (8.34”)
222 (8.74”)
277 (10.90”)
317(12.48”)
40
N
40 (1.57”)
(0.39”)
(0.39”)
10
10
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
D D
M8
M8
30
30
30 30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
C
Drilling
214 (8.42”)
Ø5.5
60 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
(2.36”)
42
(1.65”)
40 (1.57”)
(3.19”)
512 (20.16”)
232 (9.13”)
81
GEX68N
GEX68NB
360 (14.17”)
1...4 34 (1.34”)
(0.04”... 0.16”)
11-39
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
C C
”)
”)
25 25
(0.22
(0.98”) (0.22 (0.98”)
Ø5.5
Ø5.5
(0.87”)
(0.87”)
131 (5.16”)
150 (5.90”)
168 (6.61”)
22
192 (7.56”)
22
131 (5.16”)
150 (5.90”)
168 (6.61”)
192 (7.56”)
,5 18 M8
M8 (0.71”)
18
D D (0.71”)
42
(1.65”)
88 (3.46”) 45 45 88 (3.46”) 45
11 42
(1.65”)
(1.77”)
42 (1.77”) (1.77”)
For GE0160 B - GE0200 B - GE0250 B - GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4 - GE0350 BT4
Direct operating version with handle GEX62D Door coupling version with handle GEX66N - GEX66NB
and terminal covers
133 (5.24”) 39
(1.53”) 3 (0.12”)
C
157 (6.18”)
Drilling
Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
40 (1.57”)
335 (13.19”)
142 (5.59”)
81 (3.19”)
27 34 (1.34”)
(1.06”)
45 (1.77”)
GEX7277N
105 (4.13”) GEX7375N
GEX7536N
10 (0.4”)
11-40
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
C GEX10 11
C GEX10 11
)
30
)
30
.27”
.27”
(1.18”) (1.18”)
Ø7 (0
Ø7 (0
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
31
200 (7.87”)
161 (6.34”)
31
200 (7.87”)
161 (6.34”)
E
F
E
F
10 22 22
M
(0.87”) (0.87”)
D D
11
For GE0315 B - GE0400 B - GE0315 BT4 - GE0400 BT4
Direct operating version with handle GEX63D Door coupling version with handle GEX67N - GEX67NB
and terminal covers
180 (7.09”) 51
(2.01”) G
Drilling
194 (7.64”)
Ø5.5
60 (2.36”) 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
42
(1.65”)
40 (1.57”)
410 (16.14”)
175 (6.89”)
GEX67N
81 (3.19”)
GEX67NB
1...4
(0.04”...0.16”) 34 (1.34”)
245 (9.64”)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6”)
11-41
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
5 ”)
5 ”)
(0.3
(0.3
C C
Ø9
Ø9
40 40
(1.57”) (1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
317 (12.48”)
277 (10.90”)
222 (8.74”)
212 (8.35”)
317 (12.48”)
277 (10.90”)
222 (8.74”)
212 (8.35”)
40
40
2
2
30 30
M1
M1
D (1.18”) D (1.18”)
11 166 (6.53”)
GEX10 11
215 (8.64”) 211 (8.31”)
GEX10 11
215 (8.64”)
10 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
30 30
30 (1.18”)
30 (1.18”)
(1.18”) (1.18”)
C 10
(0.39”)
10 50
(0.39”) (1.97”)
C 10
(0.39”)
10 50
(0.39”) (1.97”)
5”)
5”)
(0.3 9
(0.3 9
Ø
Ø
342 (13.46”)
322 (12.68”)
342 (13.46”)
222 (8.74”)
322 (12.68”)
212 (8.35”)
222 (8.74”)
212 (8.35”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
40
40
30 (1.18”)
30 (1.18”)
10 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
D D
M8
M8
30 30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
C
Drilling
214 (8.42”)
42
(1.65”) GEX68N 28 Ø5.5
GEX68NB (1.10”) (0.22”)
(1.57”)
40
512 (20.16”)
232 (9.13”)
(3.19”)
81
60 34
(2.36”) (1.34”)
360 (14.17”)
1...4
(0.04”... 0.16”)
11-42
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
M8
M8
(0.71”)
84.4 (3.32”)
84.4 (3.32”)
128 (5.04”)
110 (4.33”)
128 (5.04”)
110 (4.33”)
N
Ø4 Ø4
.5 .5
(0 (0
.1 .1
34 34 8” 34 34 34 8”
) )
(1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”)
GEX10 11M
171 (6.73”)
11
40 (1.57”)
34 (1.34”)
GEX7162N GEX61NC
44.8 (1.76”) 3 GEX7250N
(0.12”) GEX7387N
7 (0.3”)
Terminal covers
184 (7.24”) 3
(0.12”)
GEX81 01
(line 1 and line 2)
249 (9.80”)
GEX81 01
(load)
11-43
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
84.4 (3.32”)
154 (1.65”)
130 (5.12”)
154 (1.65”)
130 (5.12”)
N
Ø4 Ø4
.5 .5
(0 (0
.1 .1
8” 8”)
)
M M
42 42 10 42 42 42 10
(1.65”) (1.65”) (1.65”) (1.65”) (1.65”)
GEX10 11M
171 (6.73”)
11
34 (1.34”)
GEX7162N GEX61NC
GEX7250N
GEX7387N
44.8 (1.76”) 3 7 (0.3”)
(0.12”)
Terminal covers
184 (7.24”) 3
(0.12”)
GEX81 01
(line 1 and line 2)
249 (9.80”)
GEX81 01
(load)
11-44
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GE0201 E - GE0250 E - GE0315 E - GE0400 E - GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 ET4 -
GE0500 E - GE0630 E - GE0800 E GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 ET4
with terminal covers and auxiliary contacts with terminal covers and auxiliary contacts
A A
B C B C
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
Y/Z Y/Z
D D
ØE
ØE
II
N II
G
H
G
H
F
F
I I
ØT
ØT
X GEX10 11 X GEX10 11
K J J K J
For GE0201 E - GE0250 E - GE0315 E - GE0400 E - GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 ET4
GE0500 E - GE0630 E - GE0800 E - GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 ET4
11
Direct operating version with handle Door coupling version with handle
U N P
O O
Y Z W
V
42 Drilling
(1.65”)
GEX62NC for GE0201 E...GE0400 E...
GEX63NC for GE0500 E...GE0800 E... 28 Ø5.5
(1.10”) (0.22”)
(2.36”)
40 (1.57”)
60
M
L
34 (1.34”)
60 (2.36”)
1...4
(0.04”...0.16”)
Q R
11-45
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
A A
B C B C
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
Y/Z Y/Z
D D
ØE
ØE
II
N II
G
H
G
H
F
F
I I
ØT
ØT
X GEX10 11 X GEX10 11
K J J K J
Y Z W
V
42
(1.65”) Drilling
28 Ø5.5
(1.10”) (0.22”)
(2.36”)
60
40 (1.57”)
M
L
396 (15,59”)
34 (1.34”)
60 (2.36”)
1...4
(0.04”...0.16”)
Q R
11-46
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(0. 14.1
(0. 14.1
”)
(2.36”)
”)
60
55
60
55
Ø
Ø
(2.36”) (2.36”)
(0. 16.2
”)
64
(2.75”)
(2.75”)
40
40
330 (12.99”)
441 (17.36”)
330 (12.99”)
441 (17.36”)
330 (12.99”)
255 (10.04”)
381 (15”)
N
(0. Ø13
”)
(0. Ø13
”)
51
51
36 36
(1.42”) (1.42”)
100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”)
Direct operating version with handle GEX64NE Door coupling version with handle GEX64NC
200 (7.87”)
100 (3.94”) 10
(0.39”)
max. 484
(19.05”)
Drilling
42
28 Ø5.5
11
(1.65”) (0.22”)
(1.10”)
40 (1.57”)
350 (13.78”)
310 (12.20”)
34 (1.34”)
60
(2.36”)
396 (15.59”) 1...4
(0.04”...0.16”)
GEX7239N
120 (4.72”) 10 (0.39”) GEX7485N
342 (13.46”) 14 (0.6”)
Auxiliary contacts
GEX10 11M
GEX81 41
(load - 2 pcs/set)
11-47
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(0.94”)
21.7 (0.85”)
24
(0.63”)
39.7 (1.56”)
16
10.3
(0.40”) 48.5 (1.91”) 25.2
16 (0.99”)
(0.63”)
21.7 (0.85”)
12.5
(0.49”)
11 B
(0.39”)
16 (0.63”)
10
)
2”
.2
(0
.5
Ø5
57.5 (2.26”)
A
®
A
G
F
C
E
D
Type A B C D E F G H
GEX69 1 52.5 (2.07”) 133 (5.24”) 117 (4.61”) 150 (5.90”) 150 (5.90”) 237 (9.33”) 380 (14.96”) 245 (9.64”)
GEX69 2 88.5 (3.48”) 167 (6.57”) 153 (6.02”) 184 (7.24”) 172 (6.77”) 312 (12.28”) 455 (17.91”) 360 (14.17”)
GEX69 3 88.5 (3.48”) 167 (6.57”) 153 (6.02”) 184 (7.24”) 172 (6.77”) 312 (12.28”) 455 (17.91”) 360 (14.17”)
11-48
Switch disconnectors
Dimensions [mm (in)]
GEX69 1 for GE0201 E - GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 E - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 E - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 E - GE0400 ET4
GEX69 2 for GE0500 E - GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 E - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 E - GE0800 ET4
GEX69 3 for GE1000 E - GE1000 ET4 - GE1250 E - GE1250 ET4
I
H
J L
Type H I J K L
GEX69 1 245 (9.64”) 310 (12.20”) 235 (9.25”) 383 (15.08”) 254 (10”)
GEX69 2 360 (14.17”) 339 (13.35”) 321 (12.64”) 468 (18.42”) 283 (11.14”)
GEX69 3 360 (14.17”) 367 (14.45”) 424 (16.69”) 522 (20.55”) 311 (12.24”)
11
532 (20.94”)
552 (21.73”)
503 (19.80”)
360 (14.17”)
11-49
Switch disconnectors
Wiring diagrams
T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
7 L4
LOAD 7 L4
LOAD
8 T4 8 T4
Load Load
57 L1 L2 L3
68 N PE
13 21
67
14 22 N PE
58 T1 T2 T3
11
ENCLOSED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Three-pole GAZ...ET6 Four-pole GAZ...ET8
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
11-50
Switch disconnectors
Wiring diagrams
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
LINE 2 LINE 2
11
ADD-ON BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES
Auxiliary contacts Motorised control unit
GEX10 11 - GEX10 11M - GEX10 11N GEX69 1 - GEX69 2 - GEX69 3
L
230VAC/DC
N
3 2
1 2
Closing pes. II
RS485
Signals
+24VDC
+5VDC
1
Error
B A
0
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IN OUT
11-51
Switch disconnectors
Wiring diagrams
The positive pole of the load is connected to the fourth pole of the
switch disconnector on the right.
If it is to be connected on the left, wiring needs to change accordingly.
T1 T2 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – – LOAD +
– LOAD +
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – + LOAD –
Two-line control
2+2 poles in series
LINE LINE
+ – – +
11 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – – LOAD +
The positive pole of the load is connected to the fourth pole of the
switch disconnector on the right.
If it is to be connected on the left, wiring needs to change accordingly.
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – + LOAD –
11-52
Switch disconnectors
Technical characteristics
GA series 16A to 125A
TYPE 3-pole GA016... GA025... GA032... GA040... GA063 SA GA063... GA080... GA100... GA125...
4th-pole GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 063SA GAX42 063... GAX42 080... GAX42 100... GAX42 125...
CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
IEC conventional free air thernal A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
current Ith (40°C)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 1000
IEC rated impulse withstand kV 8
voltage Uimp
IEC rated operational current Ie
AC21A 400V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
500V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
690V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
AC22A 400V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125
500V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125
690V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125
AC23A 400V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125
500V A 16 25 25 25 25 63 63 80 100
690V A 16 25 25 25 25 47 47 47 47
IEC rated operational power
AC23A 400V kW 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 45 55 55
690V kW 11 22 22 22 22 45 45 45 45
IEC reactive power for kvar 7.5 10 12.5 15 15 25 30 40 50
capacitor control 400V
IEC protection against short-circuit
Rated short-time A rms 800 2500
withstand current (1s) Icw 11
Rated conditional kA rms 50
short-circuit current
With fuse class gG A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
IEC making capacity (AC23A 400V) A 400 450 1250
IEC breaking capacity (AC23A 400V) A 320 360 1000
Mechanical life cycles 100,000 100,000 30,000
Electrical life (IEC AC21A) cycles 100,000 15,000 30,000
UL/CSA general use at 600V A 16 25 32 40 50 60 100 100 100
UL/CSA short-circuit rating kA 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10
at 600V
UL/CSA fuse class/max rating Type/A RK5/20 RK5/30 RK5/35 RK5/45 RK5/45 –/100 –/100 –/100 –/100
at 600V
UL/CSA HP ratings 120V HP 1 11/2 2 2 3 3 3 5 71/2
Single phase 240V HP 2 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 10
Three phase 200-208V HP 5 71/2 10 10 10 20 25 30 25
240V HP 5 71/2 10 15 15 20 30 30 30
480V HP 10 15 20 20 30 40 40 50 50
600V HP 10 20 20 25 30 40 40 60 40
Terminals Type Lug clamp
A mm 5.6 (0.22”) 12.4 (0.49”)
B
11-53
Switch disconnectors
Technical characteristics
GE series 160A to 1600A
MOUNTING POSITION
The performances, given in this catalogue, have been established with GE series switch disconnectors mounted on a vertical place with line terminals facing upwards and load
terminals facing downwards.
All GE series switch disconnectors can be mounted as illustrated in the following figures without any derating except for position A.
It is not recommended to mount switch disconnectors with the neutral pole facing downwards.
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
N
0 0
0
N N
N
Pos. A
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
11 II
II
I
N II
N II
I I
N
N
Pos. A
MOTORISED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Pos. A
Pos. A
Special assembly, consult Customer Service for details; contact details on inside front cover.
11-54
Switch disconnectors
Technical characteristics
GE series 160A to 1600A - Three and four-pole switch disconnectors
A mm 18 26 25 25 30 40 60
B mm 3 4 5 8 10
A
Screw M8 M10 M10 M14 M14
Tightening torque Nm 13 18 24 45 55
lbft 10 13 18 33 40
Maximum conductor section mm2 95 120 185 240 2x185 2x240 2x300 ––
Maximum bar size mm 5-25 5-30 7-25 6-40 2x 5-40 2x 10-50 2x 7-80
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -25…+55
Storage °C -40…+70
Maximum altitude m 3000
Mounting Normal Vertical
position Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
With protection fuse to limit current peak and let-through energy.
Not suitable with GE0160 P and GE0160 T4P.
GE...P types have IP20 lug clamp/pillar terminals.
4Nm/3lbft only GE...P types.
The four-pole type (3P+N) has early-make late-break neutral pole.
11-55
Switch disconnectors
Technical characteristics
GE series 50A to 800A - Three and four switch disconnectors with fuse holder
A mm – – 20 25 30 35 40 50
B mm – – 3 4 5 6
A
Screw M6 M6 M8 M10 M12 4x M8
Tightening torque Nm 3 4 13 24 45 13
lbft 2.2 3 10 18 33 10
Maximum conductor section mm2 35 95 95 120 240 2x185 2x240
Maximum bar size mm – 3-25 3-25 5-25 6-40 2x 7-50 2x 7-50
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -25…+55
Storage °C -40…+70
Maximum altitude m 3000
Mounting position
Normal Vertical
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
50kA rms for GE0160 N and GE0160 NT4.
GE...F types have IP20 lug clamp/pillar terminals.
The four-pole type (3P+N) has early-make late-break neutral pole.
11-56
Switch disconnectors
Technical characteristics
GE series 160A to 1600A - Three and four-pole changeover switches
TYPE 3-pole GE0160 E GE0200 E GE0201 E GE0250 E GE0315 E GE0400 E GE0500 E GE0630 E GE0800 E GE1000 E GE1250 E GE1600 E
4-pole GE0160 ET4 GE0200 ET4 GE0201 ET4 GE0250 ET4 GE0315 ET4 GE0400 ET4 GE0500 ET4 GE0630 ET4 GE0800 ET4 GE1000 ET4 GE1250 ET4 GE1600 ET4
CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
IEC conventional free A 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
air current Ith (40°C)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 1000 1000
IEC rated impulse withstand kV 8 12
voltage Uimp
IEC rated operational current Ie
AC21A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
690V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
AC22A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1250
690V A 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1000
AC23B 400V A 160 160 160 180 200 250 400 500 630 1000 1000 1000
500V A 125 125 125 150 160 200 250 315 400 800 800 900
690V A 80 80 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 630 630 630
IEC reactive power 400V kvar 72 72 83 104 131 166 208 262 333 415 415 450
for capacitor control
IEC rated operational power
AC23A 400V kW 89 89 100 100 125 125 200 200 315 500 525 550
690V kW 76 76 69 86 108 138 173 216 272 544 575 600
Protection against short-circuit
IEC rated short-time kA rms 7 7 8 13 25 35
withstand current (1s) Icw
11
IEC rated conditional kA rms 100 100 72
short-circuit current
With fuse class gG A 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 2x800
IEC making capacity (AC23A 400V) A 1600 1600 3150 4000 6300 8000 10000 10000 10000
IEC breaking capacity (AC23A 400V) A 1280 1280 2520 3200 5040 6400 8000 8000 8000
Mechanical life cycles 30,000 30,000 10,000 10,000
Electrical life (AC22A 400V) cycles 1,000 1,000 1,000 500
Terminals Type Terminal for lugs or bars
B
A mm 18 26 25 35 40 50 60
B mm 3 3 5 6 10
A
Screw M8 M10 M12 M14 M14
Tightening torque Nm 13 24 45 55
lbft 10 18 33 40
Maximum conductor section mm2 95 120 240 2x240 – – –
Maximum bar size mm 4-13 13-18 2x 5-30 2x 6-45 2x 10-60 2x 7-80
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -25…+55
Storage °C -40…+70
Maximum altitude m 3000
Mounting position Normal Vertical
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
With protection fuse to limit current peak and let-through energy.
The four-pole type (3P+N) has early-make late-break neutral pole.
Values in IEC DC22B duty.
11-57
Switch disconnectors
Technical characteristics
GA series for photovoltaic applications
11-58
Switch disconnectors
Technical characteristics
GE series for photovoltaic applications
A mm 18 20 25 30 40
B mm 3 4 4 5 8
A
Screw M8 M8 M10 M14 11
Tightening torque Nm 13 13 18 24 45
lbft 10 10 13 18 33
Maximum bar size mm 5-25 7-25 2x 5-40 2x 10-50
(thickness-width)
Maximum conductor section mm2 95 185 2x240 2x300
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -25…+55
Storage °C -40…+70
Maximum altitude m 3000
Mounting Normal Vertical
position Admissible Any
Fissaggio Screw
4Nm/3lbft only for GE0160 DT4P.
GE0160 DT4P type has lug clamp/pillar terminals, IP20.
Not suitable with GE0160 DT4P.
11-59
Page 12-2 Page 12-2
SEC. - PAGE
Fuse holders
AC fuse holders................................................................................................................................................................. 12 - 2
DC fuse holders for photovoltaic applications .................................................................................................................. 12 - 3
Fuses for photovoltaic applications .................................................................................... 12 - 3
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 12 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 12 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 12 - 4
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 12 - 5
I SOLATION
AND
C IRCUIT P ROTECTION
Fuse holders
AC fuse holders
UL Recognized for
USA and Canada
CSA certified
(File 252040
class 6255)
FB02 A 1N 1P+N — 2 6 0.237
FB02 A 2P 2P — 2 6 0.224
FB02 A 3P 3P — 3 4 0.335
FB02 A 3N 3P+N — 4 3 0.460
For 22x58mm fuses. Type
FB02 A 1PL IEC 125A rated current at 690VAC∂. FB01 F... l l
FB02 A...
FB03 A 1P 1P — 1 12 0.167 FB02 A... –– l
FB03 A 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.167 FB03 A... –– l
FB03 A 1N 1P+N — 2 6 0.354 l Certification obtained.
FB03 A 2P 2P — 2 6 0.334
“UL Recognized”: Products having this type of marking
FB03 A 3P 3P — 3 4 0.500
12 FB03 A 3N 3P+N — 4 3 0.720
are intended for use as components of complete
workshop-assembled equipment.
∂ Use with gG/aM class 125A fuses, not dissipating more than 12W power.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-1,
NOTE: IEC/EN 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
For FB01 F type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”. UL 4248-1, UL 4248-4, CSA C22.2 n°4248.1,
Current rating: 30A. Voltage rating: 750V max. CSA certified as
“Fuseholder Assemblies”. Current rating: 30A. Voltage rating: 600V max.
CSA C22.2 n°4248.4.
For FB02 A type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”.
Current rating: 50A. Voltage rating: 750V max.
FB03 A 1PL For FB03 A type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”.
FB03 A... Current rating: 100A. Voltage rating: 750V max.
Fuse holders for photovolatic Order Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics
applications code arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Ue: 1000VDC
ment pkg – IEC rated current Ie: 32A
UL Listed / CSA certified n° n° [kg] – IEC utilisation category: DC20B 1000VDC
– Suitable for IEC fuse class: gPV
For 10x38mm fuses. – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
IEC 32A rated current at 1000VDC.
FB01 D 1P 1P — 1 12 0.064 Certifications and compliance
FB01 D 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.065 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA (UL - File
E366062) and CSA certified for Canada (file ref. not
FB01 D 2P 2P — 2 6 0.127 available at time of catalogue printing).
FB01 D 2PL 2P YES 2 6 0.130 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-1,
NOTE: UL Listed and CSA certified as “Photovoltaic fuseholders” for use IEC/EN 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
FB01 D... FB01 D 1PL with Photovoltaic Fuses. Interrupting rating 30,000 DC Amps. Voltage UL 4248-1, UL4248-18, CSA C22.2 n° 4248-1,
rating 1000V. Current rating 30A. CSA C22.2 n° 4248-18.
Operational characteristics
Fuses for photovoltaic Order Rated current Qty Wt – IEC rated voltage Ue: 1000VDC
applications code In per – IEC rated current Ie: 2-20A
pkg – IEC fuse class: gPV.
[A] n° [kg]
For 10x38mm fuses. Reference standards
IEC 30kA breaking capacity at 1000VDC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-6.
FE01 D... FE01 D 00200 2 10 0.008
FE01 D 00400 4 10 0.008
FE01 D 00600 6 10 0.008
FE01 D 00800 8 10 0.008
FE01 D 01000 10 10 0.008
FE01 D 01200 12 10 0.008
FE01 D 01600 16 10 0.008
FE01 D 02000 20 10 0.008
FBX 02
FB03...
78 (3.07”)
88.8 (3.50”)
84 (3.31”)
(1.77”)
78 (3.07”)
45
45
45
(0.79”)
16.5 (0.65”)
6
(0.24”) 20 3.2 (0.12”) 16.5 (0.65”)
2.5 3.2 (0.12”)
40 (1.57”) (0.10”) 2.5
74.8 (2.94”) (0.10”)
FB02 A…
106 (4.17”)
79.5 (3.13”)
53 (2.09”)
26.5 100.7 (3.96”)
(1.04”) 76 (2.99”)
110 (4.33”)
45
35.3 (1.39”)
49.5 (1.95”)
FB03 A…
143 (5.63”)
12 107.5 (4.23”)
71.5 (2.81)
102.5 (4.03”)
35.5
(1.40”) 76.5 (3.01”)
126.5 (4.98”)
45
47 (1.85”)
49.5 (1.95”)
FUSES
FE01 D 0...
(0.40”)
10.3
38 (1.50”)
10
(0.39”)
Wiring diagrams
1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N
12-4
Fuse holders
Technical characteristics
TYPE FB01 A... FB01 B... FB02 A... FB03 A... FB01 C... FB01 D...
Range AC Class CC (AC) DC
IEC maximum rated current In 32A 50A 125A ∑ 30A 32A
IEC maximum rated voltage Un 690VAC; 690VAC 600VAC 1000VDC
400VAC ∂
IEC utilisation category AC22B 500V; AC21B 690V; AC21B 690V AC22B 500V; DC20B 1000VDC
AC22B 400V ∂ AC21B 690V
Maximum power dissipation 3W 5W 9.5W 3W 4W
Derating factor of current In 20°C 1
for different ambient temperatures 30°C 0.95
40°C 0.9
50°C 0.8
60°C 0.7
70°C 0.5
Derating factor of current In 1-4 1
for side-by-side fuse holders - 5-6 0.8
number of poles
7-9 0.7
≥10 0.6
Voltage for status indicator 120...690VAC 230...690VAC 120...600VAC 350...1000VDC
CONNECTIONS
Maximum tightening torque 2.5Nm; 2Nm ∂ / 22lbin 3Nm / 26lbin 4Nm / 35lbin 2.5Nm / 22lbin
Maximum conductor flexible/stranded 1x16mm2; 1-16mm2 ∂ / 8AWG 1x25mm2 / 6AWG 1x35mm2 / 2AWG 1x16mm2 / 8AWG 1x16mm2 / 6AWG
cross section rigid/solid 1x25mm ; 1-10mm ∂ / 8AWG
2 2 2
1x35mm / 8AWG 2
1x50mm / 1AWG 2
1x25mm / 10AWG 1x25mm2 / 4AWG
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+70°C
Storage temperature -40...+80°C
Maximum altitude 3,000m
Operation position Any 12
Fixing On 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
∂ Values valid only for FB01 A 1M type. ∑ Use with gG/aM class 125A fuses, not dissipating more than 12W power.
20A
10A
12A
2A
4A
6A
8A
10000
1000
100
PREARCING TIME [s]
10
0.1
0.01
0.001
1 10 100 1000
PROSPECTIVE CURRENT [A rms]
12-5
Page 13-2 Page 13-6
Page 13-7
SEC. - PAGE
Miniature circuit breakers 1-63A
1P – 10kA, 1 module, curve type B, C and D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ................................................... 13 - 2
1P+N – 6kA, 1 module, curve type C ............................................................................................................................... 13 - 2
1P+N – 6kA, 2 module, curve type C ............................................................................................................................... 13 - 3
2P – 10kA, 2 module, curve type B, C and D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ................................................... 13 - 3
3P – 10kA, 3 module, curve type B, C and D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ................................................... 13 - 4
4P – 10kA, 4 module, curve type B, C and D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ................................................... 13 - 5
Miniature circuit breakers 80-125A
1P, 2P, 3P and 4P – 10kA, curve type C / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 .......................................................... 13 - 6
3P and 4P – 10kA, curve type D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ..................................................................... 13 - 6
Add-on blocks and accessories ................................................................................................................................... 13 - 7
Residual current operated circuit breakers .............................................................................................................. 13 - 8
Residual current operated circuit breakers with overcurrent protection ............................................................ 13 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 13 - 10
Wiring diagrams ............................................................................................................ 13 - 10
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 13 - 11
I SOLATION
AND
C IRCUIT P ROTECTION
Miniature and residual circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers 1 to 63A
1P+N - 6kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
1 module In Icn DIN per – IEC rated current In: 2-40A
modules pkg – Pole width: 9mm / 0.35”
Type [A] [kA] n° [kg] – Contact status with flag indicator
– Trip characteristic: Curve type C
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type, – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
C-type characteristic. left side
P1 MB 1M C02 C 2 6 1 12 0.115 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 MB 1M C04 C 4 6 1 12 0.115
Operational characteristics
P1 MB 1M C06 C 6 6 1 12 0.115 – Dissipation per pole: 3-7.5W
P1 MB 1M C10 C 10 6 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440V
P1 MB 1M C16 C 16 6 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated impulse voltage: 4kV
– IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230VAC.
P1 MB 1M C20 C 20 6 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1M C25 C 25 6 1 12 0.115 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB 1M C32 C 32 6 1 12 0.115 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1,
P1 MB 1M C40 C 40 6 1 12 0.115 IEC/EN 60947-2.
P1 MB 1M...
1P+N - 6kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
2 module In Icn DIN per – IEC rated current In: 1-63A
modules pkg – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
Type [A] [kA] n° [kg] – Contact status with flag indicator
– Trip characteristic: Curve type C
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type, – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
C-type characteristic. left side
P1 MB 1N C01 C 1 6 2 6 0.190 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 MB 1N C02 C 2 6 2 6 0.190
Operational characteristics
P1 MB 1N C04 C 4 6 2 6 0.190 – Dissipation per pole: 3-13W
P1 MB 1N C06 C 6 6 2 6 0.190 – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440V
P1 MB 1N C10 C 10 6 2 6 0.190 – IEC rated impulse voltage: 4kV
– IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/440VAC.
P1 MB 1N C16 C 16 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C20 C 20 6 2 6 0.190 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB 1N C25 C 25 6 2 6 0.190 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1,
P1 MB 1N C32 C 32 6 2 6 0.190 IEC/EN 60947-2.
P1 MB 1N...
P1 MB 1N C40 C 40 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C50 C 50 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C63 C 63 6 2 6 0.190
P2 MB 4P...
Add-on blocks for P1MB Order code Characteristics Qty Qty Wt General characteristics
miniature circuit breakers per per – Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm / 0.35”
MCB pkg (0.5 module)
1-63A n° n° [kg] – Undervoltage and shunt trip release width:
17.5mm / 0.69”
Auxiliary contact. – Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB left
P1X 1011 One changeover 1 10 0.040 side only of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release
(SPDT), side directly on MCB side and then 2 contacts of which
mount 1 auxiliary and 1 indicator.
Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip.
Operational characteristics
P1X 1311 One changeover 1 10 0.040 – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kA
(SPDT), side – IEC rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V for
mount releases; 3A 400V for auxiliary contacts.
Undervoltage trip release.
P1X 14230 230V 50/60Hz, 1 8 0.070 Certifications and compliance
side mount Certifications obtained: UL Recognized for USA and
Canada (cURus – File E359585) as Accessories for
P1X 1011 P1X 16230 Shunt trip release. supplementary protectors.
P1X 16230 110-415V 1 8 0.070 Products having this type of marking are intended for use
50/60Hz, as components of complete workshop- assembled
side mount equipment.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Add-on blocks for P2MB Order code Characteristics Qty Qty Wt General characteristics
per per – Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm / 0.35”
miniature circuit breakers MCB pkg (0.5 module)
80-125A n° n° [kg]
– Undervoltage and shunt trip release width:
17.5mm / 0.69”
Auxiliary contact. – Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB
P2X 1011 One changeover 1 10 0.040 sides of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release on
(SPDT), side MCB right side and 2 contacts on the left of which
mount 1 auxiliary and 1 indicator.
Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip.
P2X 1311 One changeover 1 10 0.040
Operational characteristics
– IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kA
13
(SPDT), side – IEC rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V for
mount releases; 3A 400V for auxiliary contacts.
Undervoltage trip release.
Reference standards
P2X 14230 230V 50/60Hz, 1 8 0.070 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
side mount
P2X 1311 P2X 1311
Accessories for P1MB types Order code Description Qty Wt General and operational characteristics
per SINGLE-PHASE SUPPLY BUSBAR
pkg – Central point of power supply: 100A max
– Side point of power supply: 63A max
n° [kg] – Pitch: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P1X 90 33 P1X 90 31 1-phase connection 10 0.240 – Busbar section: 10mm²
busbar for 55 1P modules – Number of modules/poles: 55
(55 1P MCBs in total), – For paralleling connection
966mm/39.2” long – Standard-supplied length: 966mm/39.2” which can be
P1X 90 33 3-phase connection 10 0.474 cut in shorter sections.
busbar for 60 modules
P1X 91 33 (20 3P MCBs in total), THREE-PHASE SUPPLY BUSBAR
1060mm/41.7” long – Central point of power supply: 100A max
– Side point of power supply: 63A max
P1X 91 30 Kit of 5 isolating covers 10 0.030 – Pitch: 17.5mm / 0.69”
for unused busbar terminals – Busbar section: 10mm²
P1X 91 31 End cap for 1-phase 50 0.001 – Number of modules/poles: 60 (20pcs 3P MCBs)
P1X9031 busbar – For paralleling connection
P1X 92 01 P1X 92 02 – Standard-supplied length: 1060mm/41.7” which can
P1X 91 33 End cap for 3-phase 50 0.001
P1X9033 busbar be cut in shorter sections.
P1X 92 01 1-pole terminal for busbar 25 0.011
supply, 25mm² max conductor
P1X 92 02 1-pole terminal for busbar 25 0.022
supply, 50mm² max conductor
1P+N - 10kA Order code Trip IEC IEC IEC DIN Qty Wt General characteristics
2 module curve In Inc IΔn per These RCBOs perform both to protect in cases detect and
pkg trip the event of residual current and to protect circuits in
Type [A] [kA] [mA] n° n° [kg] case of short circuits and overcurrent. From a practical
point of view, RCBOs integrate both functions of MCB
Single pole + neutral RCBO type AC. and of RCCB.
P1 RB 1N C06 AC030 C 6 10 30 2 6 0.205 They have a C-type trip characteristic (instantaneous trip
P1 RB 1N C06 AC300 C 6 10 300 2 6 0.205 5-10 times In) and are used for inductive loads (mixed
loads, resistive and inductive with low inrush current).
P1 RB 1N C10 AC030 C 10 10 30 2 6 0.205 In addition, they have a rated residual current (IΔn) of
P1 RB 1N C10 AC300 C 10 10 300 2 6 0.205 either 30mA or 300mA and are available with two
P1 RB 1N C16 AC030 C 16 10 30 2 6 0.205 different versions of residual current tripping type AC or
A as described on page 13-8.
P1 RB 1N C16 AC300 C 16 10 300 2 6 0.205 Main features include:
P1 RB 1N C20 AC030 C 20 10 30 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated current In: 6-40A
P1 RB 1N C20 AC300 C 20 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Version: single pole + neutral
P1 RB 1N... – Contact status with flag indicator
P1 RB 1N C25 AC030 C 25 10 30 2 6 0.205 – Trip characteristic: Curve type C
P1 RB 1N C25 AC300 C 25 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 RB 1N C32 AC030 C 32 10 30 2 6 0.205
Operational characteristics
P1 RB 1N C32 AC300 C 32 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Dissipation per pole: 3-13W
P1 RB 1N C40 AC030 C 40 10 30 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400V
P1 RB 1N C40 AC300 C 40 10 300 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
– Normal operating voltage Uc: 230VAC
Single pole + neutral RCBO type A. – IEC rated residual operating voltage IΔn:
P1 RB 1N C06 A030 C 6 10 30 2 6 0.205 30mA or 300mA
P1 RB 1N C06 A300 C 6 10 300 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA.
P1 RB 1N C10 A030 C 10 10 30 2 6 0.205 Certifications and compliance
P1 RB 1N C10 A300 C 10 10 300 2 6 0.205 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland.
P1 RB 1N C16 A030 C 16 10 30 2 6 0.205 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61009-1.
P1 RB 1N C16 A300 C 16 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C20 A030 C 20 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C20 A300 C 20 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C25 A030 C 25 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C25 A300 C 25 10 300 2 6 0.205 13
P1 RB 1N C32 A030 C 32 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C32 A300 C 32 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C40 A030 C 40 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C40 A300 C 40 10 300 2 6 0.205
86 (3.38”)
45 (1.77”)
(1.77” max)
81 (3.19”)
83 (3.27”)
(3.40” max)
45 (1.77”)
81 (3.19”)
86.5 max
45 max
(1.38”)
35
5.5 (0.22”) 5.5 (0.22”)
5.52 (0.22”)
74 max
(2.91” max)
45 (1.77”)
80 (3.15”)
79 (3.11”)
45 (1.77”)
79 (3.11”)
44 (1.73”)
60 (2.36”)
74.5 (2.93”)
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
P1 RC... P1 RB...
13 36 max
(1.42” max)
72 max
(2.83” max)
5.5
(0.22”)
60 (2.36”)
36 max
(1.42” max)
5.4
(0.21”)
60 (2.36”)
82 max (3.23”)
80 (3.15”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
50 (1.97”) 44 (1.73”)
Wiring diagrams
13-10
Miniature and residual circuit breakers
Technical characteristics
TYPE P1 MB P2 MB P1 RC P1 RB
Standards IEC/EN 60898, IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC/EN 61008-1 IEC/EN 61009-1
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 440 400 400 400
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 4 4 4
IEC rated operational voltage Ue in AC V 230 (1P, 1P+N) / 230 (1P) / 230 (2P) / 230
230/400 (2P, 3P, 4P) 230/400 (2P, 3P, 4P) 230/400(4P)
in DC V 60 (1P) / 80 (2P) 60 –– ––
Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Maximum rated current A 63 125 63 40
Available rated current for types A 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 80, 100, 125 25, 40, 63 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Versions 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 2P, 4P 1P+N
IEC instantaneous tripping Curve B: 3-5In Curve C: 5-10In — Curve C: 5-10In
(tripping characteristic) Curve C: 5-10In Curve D: 10-14In
Curve D: 10-14In
IEC residual current operating — — AC, A AC, A
characteristic
IEC rated residual operating current IΔn mA — — 30, 300 30, 300
Short circuit capacity kA 10 (6kA 1P+N) 10 — 10
Mechanical life cycles 20,000 10,000 20,000 20,000
Maximum tightening torque of terminals Nm 2 3 2 2
lbin 15 26 15 15
Tool Pz2 Pz2 Pz2 Pz2
Conductor section min-max mm2 1-16 2.5-50 1-35 1-25
AWG 14-6 14-1/0 16-2 16-3
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -35...+70 -35...+75 -25...+55 -25...+40
Storage °C -40...+80 -40...+80 -35...+60 -35...+60
Maximum altitude m 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
Pollution degree 2 3 2 2
Mounting 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 13
10 10 10
1 1 1
13-11
Page 14-4 Page 14-4
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2
• Monoblock versions: • Versions with plug-in cartridge:
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
• IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs): 25kA • IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs): 12.5kA
• IEC maximum discharge current Imax • IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs):
(8/20μs): 100kA 60kA
• SPD status indicator • IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20μs):
• Version with output for remote status 10kV/5kA
indication. • Single module status indicator
• Version with output for remote status
indication.
Page 14-4
SEC. - PAGE
Surge protection devices (SPD)
Type 1 and 2 monoblock .................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 4
Type 1 and 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
Type 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
Type 2 for photovoltaic applications ................................................................................................................................ 14 - 5
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 14 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 14 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 14 - 7
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 14 - 8
I SOLATION
AND
C IRCUIT P ROTECTION
Surge protection devices
Type 1, 2, 3
LPZ
protection
zones OA OB 1 2 3
Installation IV III II I
category
S S
P a+b <
_ 0.5m/20” P b<
_ 0.5m/20”
D D
b b
EBB EBB
14-2
Surge protection devices
Type 2 DC
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
Industrial In photovoltaic applications of a
buildings domestic environment or industrial
facility or other similar circumstances,
equipped with lightning rod systems
Housing having a safety distance (S), SPD type 2,
suitable for DC duty, can be used to
DC protect the installation. It is advisable to
install these devices as close as possible
to the photovoltaic panels, consequently
AC in the so-called string boards. If the
AC/DC inverter is far away from the
string boards (indicatively more than
10m/33’ apart), another SPD type 2 DC
needs to be installed next to the inverter
on the DC side. Installation of SPD type
DC 2 suitable of AC duty is also required
downstream of the inverter on the AC
side. For more details, consult specific
AC national standards and/or application
guides issued by local authorities for
solar systems concerning protection
against lightning. The SA2DG… and
SA2DF… types with plug-in cartridges
are suitable for connection in the DC side
of a solar installation and offer protection
against induced overvoltage conditions.
The SA2 type is suitable for installation
downstream of the inverter on the AC
side and in intermediate panels.
10%
SA2 3N
10 350 t (μs)
50%
10%
1.2 50 t (μs)
14-3
Surge protection devices
Surge protection devices Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt Main characteristics
Type 1 and 2 arrange- output of DIN per The surge protection device type SA1 combines the
ment modules pkg performance of SPD type 1 and 2 into a single product.
monoblock (SPDT) n° [kg] It protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as
well as induced overvoltage conditions.
MONOBLOCK VERSION. It can be installed in areas with a high risk of direct
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs) 25kA per pole. lightning strikes, inside main distribution boards or
SA1 1P A320R 1P YES 2 1 0.275 nearby sub-distribution boards.
SA1 1N A320R 1P+N YES 3 1 0.390
Operational characterstics
SA1 2P A320R 2P YES 2 1 0.395 – IEC maximum continuous operating voltage Uc:
SA1 3P A320R 3P YES 3 1 0.595 320VAC/420VDC
SA1 3N A320R 3P+N YES 5 1 0.760 – IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs):
100kA per pole
SA1 1P A320R SA1 4P A320R 4P YES 4 1 0.780 – IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs):
25kA per pole
Characteristics – Version with relay output having changeover contact
Type IEC rated IEC voltage pro- Power for remote status indication
voltage Un tection level Up installation – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
[V] [kV] L-N system
Reference standards
SA1 1P A320R 230 <1.3 TN-C, TN-S, TT Comply with standards: IEC 61643-1, EN 61643-11.
SA1 1N A320R 230 <1.4 TT, TN-S
SA1 2P A320R 230 <1.4 TN-S
SA1 3P A320R 230/400 <1.4 TN-C
SA1 3N A320R 230/400 <1.4 TT, TN-S
SA1 3N A320R
SA1 4P A320R 230/400 <1.4 TN-S
For L-PE only.
Surge protection devices Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt Main characteristics
arrange- output of DIN per SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE SA0
Type 1 and 2 with ment modules pkg It has a plug-in cartridge and combines the performance
plug-in cartridge (SPDT) n° [kg]
of SPD type 1 and 2 into a single product. It is ideal in all
those systems of reduced extent to protect the load side
VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE. downstream of main circuit breaker to terminal
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs) 12.5kA per pole. equipment.
SA0 1P A320R 1P YES 1 1 0.195 It protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as
well as induced overvoltage conditions. It can be installed
SA0 1N A320R 1P+N YES 2 1 0.365 inside main distribution boards and nearby terminal
14 SA0 2P A320R 2P YES 2 1 0.370 equipment.
SA0 3P A320R 3P YES 3 1 0.540 The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
replaced for quick servicing.
SA0 3N A320R 3P+N YES 4 1 0.670
SA0 4P A320R 4P YES 4 1 0.670 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE SA2
SA0 1P A320R SA0 2P A320R
It is suitable for installation in sub-distribution boards
and nearby terminal equipment.
It protects against indirect overvoltages.
Surge protection devices Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
Type 2 with arrange- output of DIN per replaced for quick servicing.
ment modules pkg
plug-in cartridge (SPDT) n° [kg] Opwerational characteristics
VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE. – IEC maximum continuous operating voltage Uc:
IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs) 40kA per pole. 320VAC/420VDC
– IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs) per
SA2 1P A320 1P NO 1 1 0.140 pole: 60kA (SA0...); 40kA (SA2...)
SA2 1P A320R 1P YES 1 1 0.145 – IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs) per pole:
SA2 1N A320 1P+N NO 2 1 0.240 25kA (SA0...); 20kA (SA2...)
– Versions with or without relay output having
SA2 1N A320R 1P+N YES 2 1 0.245 changeover contact for remote status indication
SA2 2P A320 2P NO 2 1 0.260 – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
SA2 2P A320R 2P YES 2 1 0.265
SA2 2P A320R SA2 3N A320R Reference standards
SA2 3P A320 3P NO 3 1 0.370 Comply with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11.
SA2 3P A320R 3P YES 3 1 0.375
SA2 3N A320 3P+N NO 4 1 0.465 Characteristics
Type IEC rated IEC voltage Power
SA2 3N A320R 3P+N YES 4 1 0.470 voltage protection installation
SA2 4P A320 4P NO 4 1 0.480 Un level Up
SA2 4P A320R 4P YES 4 1 0.485 Un Up
[V] [kV] L-N
SA0/SA2 1P A... 230 <1.5 TN-C, TN-S, TT
SA0/SA2 1N A... 230 <1.5 TT, TN-S
SA0/SA2 2P A... 230 <1.5 TN-S
SA0/SA2 3P A... 230/400 <1.5 TN-C
SA0/SA2 3N A... 230/400 <1.5 TT, TN-S
SA0/SA2 4P A... 230/400 <1.5 TN-S
For L-PE only.
Surge protection devices Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt Main characteristics
Type 2 for photovoltaic arrange- output of DIN per The surge protection device type SA2 D with plug-in
ment modules pkg cartridge for photovoltaic applications is suitable for
applications with (SPDT) n° [kg] installation on the direct-current end of a photovoltaic
plug-in cartridge VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE.
installation and protects against induced overvoltage
conditions.
EN short-circuit current rating Iscpv 100A. The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
SA2 DG 600M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.320 replaced for quick servicing.
SA2 DG 600M2R +, -, PE YES 2 1 0.325
Operational characteristics
SA2 DG K00M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.420 – EN maximum continuous voltage Ucpv:
SA2 DG K00M3R +, -, PE YES 3 1 0.425 600VDC, 1000VDC, 1200VDC
EN short-circuit current rating Iscpv 1000A. – Versions with or without relay output having
changeover contact for remote status indication
SA2 DF 600M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.285 – EN degree of protection: IP20.
SA2 DF 600M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.305
SA2 DG... Certifications and compliance
SA2 DF K00M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.410
Certifications obtained: UL Recognized for USA and Canada
SA2 DF K00M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.500 (cURus – File E352471), as Surge-protective Devices –
SA2 DF K20M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.550 Component, Type 4 for use in SPD Type 2 photovoltaic
applications only; for SA2DF600M2, SA2DFK00M2 and
SA2DFK20M3 types.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use
as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
Compliant with standards: EN 50539-11 for all; also
UL 1449 and CSA C22.2 n°8 for cURus certified types
SA2 DF... mentioned above.
Characteristics
Type EN EN EN voltage
Protection circuit for each module type SA2 DF… rated continuous protection
Self-protected surge protection devices voltage voltage level
Un Ucpv Up
In case of short but intense overvoltage conditions, both the [VDC] [kV] L-N [kV]
spark gap element (GDT- Gas Discharge Tube) and the
varistor (MOV – Metal Oxide Varistor) simultaneously trigger. SA2 DG 600M2 600 600 <1.9
Current
Limiter GDT In case of weak but prolonged overvoltage conditions, the SA2 DG K00M3 1000 1000 <3.6
current limiter considerably reduces the current flowing SA2 DF 600M2 600 600 <2.0
through the varistor. This technological solution guarantees a
longer varistor life. SA2 DF 600M3 600 600 <3
T/o relay
Ultimately, another particular mechanism of the surge
arrester quickly extinguishes the electric arc during the
SA2 DF K00M2 1000 1000 <4.0 14
SA2 DF K00M3 1000 1000 <4.0
MOV thermal overload tripping phase.
SA2 DF K20M3 1200 1200 <4.0
Accessories and spare parts Order code Description Qty Wt Reference standards
Plug-in cartridges per Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11 for all;
pkg EN 50539-11 for types SAX02 DF... and SAX02 DG...;
n° [kg] UL 1449, CSA C22.2 n° 8 for SAX02 DF 600M2,
SAX02 DF K00M2, SAX02 DF K20M3.
SAX00 P A320 For SA0... types 1 0.100
SAX02 P A320 For SA2... types 1 0.100
SAX00 P A320 SAX02 DF 600M2 For SA2 DF 600M2 type 1 0.100
SAX02 DF 600M3 For SA2 DF 600M3 type 1 0.100
SAX02 DF K00M2 For SA2 DF K00M2 type 1 0.100
SAX02 DF K00M3 For SA2 DF K00M3 type 1 0.100
SAX02 DF K20M3 For SA2 DF K20M3 type 1 0.100
SAX02 P A320
SAX02 DG 600M2 For SA2 DG 600... types 1 0.100
SAX02 DG K00M3 For SA2 DG K00... types 1 0.100
SA1...A320R
72 (2.83")
101 (3.98")
90 (3.54")
36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 72 (2.83") 90 (3.54")
SA0...A320R
72 (2.83")
103 (4.05")
90 (3.54")
SA2...A320
72 (2.83")
94 (3.70")
90 (3.54")
SA2...A320R
72 (2.83")
14
103 (4.05")
90 (3.54")
103 (4.05")
94 (3.70")
90 (3.54")
SA2 DF...
72 (2.83")
93 (3.66")
90 (3.54")
36 (1.42") 54 (2.12")
14-6
Surge protection devices
Wiring diagrams
SA1 1P A320R SA1 1N A320R SA1 2P A320R SA1 3P A320R SA1 3N A320R SA1 4P A320R
L N L N L N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
14
14 14
14 14 14
11
11 11
11 11 11
12
12 12
12 12 12
RC
RC RC
RC RC RC
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA0 1P A320R SA0 1N A320R SA0 2P A320R SA0 3P A320R SA0 3N A320R SA0 4P A320R
L/N L N L N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
14 14
14 14 14 14
11 11
11 11 11 11
12 12
12 12 12 12
RC RC
RC RC RC RC
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA2 1P A320 SA2 1N A320 SA2 2P A320 SA2 3P A320 SA2 3N A320 SA2 4P A320
L/N L N L N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA2 1P A320R SA2 1N A320R SA2 2P A320R SA2 3P A320R SA2 3N A320R SA2 4P A320R 14
L/N L N L N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
14 14 14 14 14 14
11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12
RC RC RC RC RC
RC
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
14 14
11 11
12 12
RC RC
PE PE
PE
14-7
Surge protection devices
Technical characteristics
TYPE with relay output SA1 1P A320R SA1 1N A320R SA1 2P A320R SA1 3P A320R SA1 3N A320R SA1 4P A320R
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 1 and 2 (Test class I and II)
IEC rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltageUc VAC / VDC 320 / 420
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 50 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 100 25 per pole
IEC max impulse current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 100 100 / 100 100 per pole 100 per pole 100 / 100 100 per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 50 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 100 25 per pole
IEC voltage protection level Up (L-N/N-PE) kV < 1.3 < 1.4 / < 1.5 < 1.4 < 1.4 < 1.4 / < 1.75 < 1.4
Temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC residual voltage Ures (L-N/N-PE) at 3kA (8/20) kV 0.9 0.9 / 0.2 0.9 0.9 0.9 / 0.2 0.9
IEC follow current If (N-PE) Arms — >100 — — >100 —
Tripping time ta (L-N/N-PE) ns < 25 < 25 / 100 < 25 < 25 < 25 / 100 < 25
Thermal isolation protection Yes
IEC backup protection fuse A 250
(supply > 250A) (L-N/N-PE) (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circuit current kA 25 / 50 Hz
Status indicator - operating / failure Colour –– / Red
CONNECTIONS
IEC degree of protection IP20
Terminal tightening torque Nm 3
Maximum conductor section mm2 25 (flexible) / 35 (rigid)
RELAY OUTPUT FOR REMOTE STATUS INDICATION
Type of contact Changeover (NO/NC - SPDT)
Contact capacity A 0.5A 250VAC; 3A 125VAC; 0.1A 250VDC; 0.2A 125VDC
Contact terminal tightening torque Nm 0.25
Maximum contact conductor section mm2 1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40….+80
Fixing On 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Housing material Termoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0
14
TYPE with relay output SA0 1P A320R SA0 1N A320R SA0 2P A320R SA0 3P A320R SA0 3N A320R SA0 4P A320R
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 1, 2 and 3 (Test class I, II and II)
IEC Rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltage Uc VAC / VDC 320 / 420
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350) (L-N/N-PE) kA 12.5 12.5 / 50 12.5 per pole 12.5 per pole 12.5 / 50 12.5 per pole
IEC max discharge current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 60 60 / 50 60 per pole 60 per pole 60 / 50 60 per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 30 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 30 25 per pole
IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20) kV/kA 10 / 5
IEC voltage level protection Up (L-N/N-PE) kV < 1.5 < 1.5 / < 1.7 < 1.5 < 1.5 < 1.5 / < 1.7 < 1.5
IEC temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC residual voltage Ures (L-N/N-PE) at 5kA (8/20) kV 0.8 0.8 / 0.2 0.8 0.8 0.8 / 0.2 0.8
IEC follow current If (N-PE) Arms — >100 — — >100 —
Tripping time ta (L-N/N-PE) ns < 25 < 25 / 100 < 25 < 25 < 25 / 100 < 25
Thermal isolation protection Yes
IEC backup fuse (supply >160A) (L-N/N-PE) A 160 (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circuit current kA 25 / 50 Hz
Status indicator - operating / failure Colour –– / Red
CONNECTIONS
IEC degree of protection IP20
Terminal tightening torque Nm 3
Maximum conductor section mm2 25 (flexible) / 35 (rigid)
RELAY OUTPUT FOR REMOTE STATUS INDICATION
Type of contact Changeover (NO/NC - SPDT)
Contact capacity A 0.5A at 250VAC; 3A at 125VAC; 0.1A at 250VDC; 0.2A at 125VDC
Contact terminal tightening torque Nm 0.25
Maximum contact conductor section mm2 1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40….+80
Fixing On 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Housing material Thermoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0
14-8
Surge protection devices
Technical characteristics
TYPE without relay output SA2 1P A320 SA2 1N A320 SA2 2P A320 SA2 3P A320 SA2 3N A320 SA2 4P A320
with relay output SA2 1P A320R SA2 1N A320R SA2 2P A320R SA2 3P A320R SA2 3N A320R SA2 4P A320R
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 2 (Test Class II)
IEC rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltage Uc VAC / VDC 320 / 420
IEC max discharge current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 40 40 / 40 40 per pole 40 per pole 40 / 40 40 per pole
IEC rated impulse current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 20 20 / 20 20 per pole 20 per pole 20 / 20 20 per pole
IEC voltage protection level Up (L-N/N-PE) kV < 1.5 < 1.5 / < 2 < 1.5 < 1.5 < 1.5 / <2 < 1.5
IEC temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC residual voltage Ures (L-N/N-PE) at 3kA (8/20) kV 0.95 0.95 / 0.1 0.95 0.95 0.95 / 0.1 0.95
IEC follow current If (N-PE) Arms — >100 — — >100 —
Tripping time ta (L-N/N-PE) ns < 25 < 25 / 100 < 25 < 25 < 25 / 100 < 25
Thermal isolation protection Yes
IEC backup protection fuse A 125
(supply > 125A) (L-N/N-PE) (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circruit current 50Hz kA 25
Status indicator - operating / failure Green / Red
CONNECTIONS
IEC degree of protection IP20
Terminal tightening torque Nm 3
Maximum conductor section mm2 25 (flexible) / 35 (rigid)
RELAY OUTPUT FOR REMOTE STATUS INDICATION
Type of contact Changeover (NO/NC - SPDT)
Contact capacity A 0.5A at 250VAC; 3A at 125VAC; 0.1A at 250VDC; 0.2A at 125VDC
Contact terminal tightening torque Nm 0.25
Maximum contact conductor section mm2 1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40….+80
Fixing On 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Housing material Thermoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0
14
TYPE without relay output SA2 DF 600M2 SA2 DF 600M3 SA2 DF K00M2 SA2 DF K00M3 SA2 DF K20M3 SA2 DG 600M2 SA2 DG K00M3
with relay output –– –– –– –– –– SA2 DG 600M2R SA2 DG K00M3R
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
SPD per EN 50539-11 Type 2 (Test class II)
UL Recognized for USA and Canada Yes –– Yes –– Yes –– ––
Rated voltage Un (EN) / MCOV (UL) VDC 600 600 1000 1000 1200 600 1000
Maximum continuous voltage Ucpv (EN/UL) VDC 600 600 1000 1000 1200 600 1000
Maximum discharge current Imax (8/20) EN 40 30 30 40 40 30 30
kA/pole
UL 50 –– 20 –– 50 –– ––
Rated discharge current In (8/20) EN 20 20 20 20 20 15 15
kA/pole
UL 20 –– 10 –– 20 –– ––
Voltage protection level Up (EN) / VPR (UL) kV <2.0 <3.0 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <1.9 <3.6
EN residual voltage Ures at 5kA (8/20) kV 1
Tripping time ta ns < 25
Thermal isolation protection Yes
EN maximum short-circuit current Iscpv A 1000 100
EN backup protection fuse (Isc > 100A) A –– 100A gPV
Status indication – operating / failure Colour – / Red Green / Red
CONNECTIONS
EN degree of protection IP20
Terminal tightening torque Nm 3 (26lbin) 3
Maximum conductor section mm2 1.5-25 (flexible / stranded) / AWG 16-3 - 1.5-35 (rigid / solid) AWG 16-2
RELAY OUTPUT FOR REMOTE STATUS INDICATION
Type of contact, if any Changeover (1NO/1NC – SPDT)
Contact capacity A 0.5A 250VAC; 3A 125VAC; 0.1A 250VDC; 0.2A 125VDC
Contact terminal tightening torque Nm / lbin 0.25 / 2.2
Maximum contact conductor section mm² / AWG 1.5 / 16
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -40….+80°C
Fixing On 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Housing material Thermoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0
14-9
Page 15-2 Page 15-2
SEC. - PAGE
Modular contactors
Contactors ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15 - 2
Add-on blocks and accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 15 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 15 - 4
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 15 - 5
I SOLATION
PROTECTION AND
C IRCUIT
Modular contactors
Utilisation
– Lighting systems
– Electric home heating
– Heat pumps
– Conditioning
– Ventilation
– Civil installations.
Add-on blocks and Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics for auxiliary contacts
qty per per – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440VAC
accessories contactor pkg – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 6A
n° n° [kg] – Minimum switching capacity: 5mA 12V
– Conductor section: 1...2.5mm2
Auxiliary contacts∂. – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm.
CNH 11∂ 1NO + 1NC 1 1 0.044
CNH 20∂ 2NO 1 1 0.044 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC.
Set for terminal protection (also sealable). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
CNP 0 For CN20 2 1∑ 0.001 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.
CNP 1 For CN25 2 1∑ 0.002
CNP 2 For CN40 2 1∑ 0.003
and CN63
Spacer.
CNH...
CNX 80 1/2 module wide 1 10 0.013
∂ Not suitable for CN20 modular contactors.
∑ Set of 2 pieces.
Mounting
Fasten the CNH... auxiliary contact by slightly pressing it
in place.
CNP2
Removal
Release the catch using a screwdriver.
15
CONTACTORS
CN20... CN25... CN40...
CN63...
60 60 60
(2.26”) (2.26”) (2.26”)
17.5
(0.69”) 43 35 43 53.5 43
(0.69”) (1.38”) (0.69”) (2.11”) (0.69”)
(1 77”)
”)
(3.31”)
(3.31”)
(3.31”)
(1.77”)
45
45
84
84
84
45
(1
5.5 5.5 5.5
(0.22”) (0.22”) (0.22”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS
Contact blocks Spacer
CNH... CNX80
60
(2.26”)
10
(0.39”) 43
(0.69”) 9
(0.35”) 67
(2.64”)
(1.77”)
(1.77”)
(3.31”)
45
45
84
5.5
(0.22”)
2
(0.08”)
Wiring diagrams
15
A2 2 22 A2 2 4 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 14 (8)
∂ The NC contact has the same characteristics as the power pole contact. Therefore, it can be used
indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power pole contact.
∑ The fourth pole NO or NC has the same characteristics as the power poles. Therefore, it can be
used indifferently as auxiliary or as power pole contact.
63 63
51 53
52 54
64 64
15-4
Modular contactors
Technical characteristics
15
15-5
Modular contactors
Technical characteristics
15-6
Modular contactors
Technical characteristics
Lamp features Lamp Retd Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps each contactor pole
power current power 230V 50Hz
[W] [A] [µF] CN20 CN25 CN40 CN63
METAL HALIDE 35 0.53 - 18 22 43 60
not corrected 70 1 - 10 12 23 32
150 1.8 - 5 7 12 18
250 3 - 3 4 7 10
400 3.5 - 3 3 6 9
1000 9.5 - 1 1 2 3
2000 16.5 - - - 1 1
METAL HALIDE 35 0.25 6 5 6 36 50
corrected 70 0.45 12 2 3 18 25
150 0.75 20 1 1 11 15
250 1.5 33 - 1 6 9
400 2.5 35 - 1 6 8
1000 5.8 95 - - 2 3
2000 11.5 148 - - 1 2
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR 150 1.8 - 5 6 17 22
not corrected 250 3 - 3 4 10 13
400 4.7 - 2 2 6 8
1000 10.3 - - 1 3 3
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR 150 0.83 20 1 1 11 16
corrected 250 1.5 33 - 1 6 10
400 2.4 48 - - 4 6
1000 6.3 106 - - 2 3
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR 18 0.35 - 22 27 71 90
not corrected 35 1.5 - 7 9 23 30
55 1.5 - 7 9 23 30
90 2.4 - 4 5 14 19
135 3.5 - 3 4 10 13
180 3.3 - 3 4 10 13
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR 18 0.35 5 6 7 44 66
corrected 35 0.31 20 1 1 11 16
55 0.42 20 1 1 11 16 15
90 0.63 26 1 1 8 12
135 0.94 45 - - 4 7
180 1.16 40 - - 5 8
LED LIGHTING BALLAST∂ 10V, 12V, 24V,...; 350mA, 500mA, 750mA... N°=2400/In N°=3800/In N°=5600/In N°=11000/In
N° = Number of controlled ballasts
In = Ballast rated current in mA
15-7
Page 16-2 Page 16-3 Page 16-3
RM type
• 1 operation threshold
• External toroidal transformer
• Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time.
RTA type
• Split core
• 110mm and 210mm diameter.
EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS 16
SEC. - PAGE
Earth leakage relays
With 1 operation threshold ................................................................................................................................................ 16 - 2
With 2 operation thresholds ............................................................................................................................................... 16 - 3
Toroidal current transformers ............................................................................................................................................ 16 - 3
External multiplier ............................................................................................................................................................. 16 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 16 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 16 - 5
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 16 - 6
I SOLATION
AND
C IRCUIT P ROTECTION
Earth leakage relays
Relays with Order code Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics
1 operation threshold supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – Green power LED indicator (ON)
[V] SPDT n° [kg] – Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
– Front TEST and RESET buttons
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. – Configurable automatic or manual resetting
Flush mount. External CT. – Flush mount 96x96mm housing with transparent cover
R1D 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.280 – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals, IP40 on front
R1D 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.280 with cover.
∂ ADJUSTMENTS FOR R1D
∂ Supply voltage: – Configurable tripping 0.025-0.25A
110-125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC set-point (IDn): 0.25-2.5A
220-240VAC (50/60Hz) 2.5-25A
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
25-250A (with external
R1D... multiplier RX10)
– Configurable tripping 0.02-0.5s
delay time (t): 0.2-5s
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-2.
31 RMT...
31 RC110...
Toroidal current Order code Diameter Openable Qty Wt. Reference standards
transformers per Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-2. 16
pkg
[mm/in] n° [kg]
31 RT 35 35/1.38 No 1 0.200
31 RT 60 60/2.36 No 1 0.245
31 RT 80 80/3.15 No 1 0.410
31 RT 110 110/4.33 No 1 0.400
31 RT 210 210/8.27 No 1 1.200
31 RTA 110 110/4.33 Yes 1 0.540
31 RT... 31 RT...
31 RTA 210 210/8.27 Yes 1 1.820
RELAYS
R1D - R2D - R3D R4D Cutout 91
(3.58”)
96 96 16
56 (0.63”) 85 19
(3.78”) 19 (3.78”) (3.35”)
(2.20”) (0.75”) (0.75”)
R3
(0.12”)
(3.78”)
(3.54”)
(3.58”)
(2.60”)
(3.78”)
(3.54”)
96
90
91
66
96
90
RM1 - RM RMT 67 RC
(2.64”)
67 6
(2.64”) 105 43 A H
(4.13”) (1.69”)
52 43
(2.05”) (1.69”)
(3.50”)
(1.77”)
89
45
(3.50”)
(1.77”)
89
45
B
D
27 5
(1.06”) (0.20”)
5
(0.20”)
E
Ø
(1 28.
.12 5
”) G
5 (0.20”)
F C
TYPE A B C D E F G H
RC35 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 35 (1.38”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC60 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 60 (2.36”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC80 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 70 (2.75”) 80 (3.15”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC110 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
D
16
E
5 (0.20”) G
F C
A
G
B
RTA110
K H
E
5 (0.20”)
F C
D
B
∂ With screws, for RTA210 split-core type; fixed structure, without screws, for RT210 type.
E
5 (0.20”) G
F C
A
TYPE A B C D E F G H K
RT35 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) 35 (1.38”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT60 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) 60 (2.36”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT80 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 50 (1.97”) 80 (3.15”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT110 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 50 (1.97”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT210 310 (12.20”) 290 (11.41”) 54 (2.12”) 210 (8.27”) 145 (5.71”) 240 (9.45”) 280 (11.02”) 36 (1.42”) 258 (10.16”)
RTA110 180 (7.09”) 150 (5.90”) 45 (1.77”) 110 (4.33”) 75 (2.95”) 110 (4.33”) 38 (1.50”) 25 (0.98”) 145 (5.71”)
RTA210 310 (12.20”) 290 (11.41”) 54 (2.12”) 210 (8.27”) 145 (5.71”) 240 (9.45”) 280 (11.02”) 36 (1.42”) 258 (10.16”)
RX10 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) — — 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
16-4
Earth leakage relays
Wiring diagrams
RELAYS
R1D R2D
GRD Line GRD Line
N L1L2 L3 N L1L2 L3
Us Us
12 11 10 8 7 6 5 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R2D
R1D
Remote
Load Load control
∂ The coil connection can vary depending on the connected type of device (contactor, breaker with shunt trip release or breaker with undervoltage trip release).
R3D
GRD Line
N L1L2 L3
Us
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R3D
Trip Alarm/Trip
1 11 ** 1-2 - 24VAC/DC
2 12 1-3 - 48VAC/DC
3 13
4 14 1-2 - 110-125VAC
15 2-3 - 220-240VAC
16 1-3 - 380-415VAC
Flag indicator
Remote **
Load control
∂ The coil connection can vary depending on the connected type of device (contactor, breaker with shunt trip release or breaker with undervoltage trip release).
R4D RM - RM1
GRD Line GRD Line
N L1L2 L3 N L1L2 L3
16
Us Us
TCS control
19 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 12 10 7 5 3 1
18 RM
17 R4D
Type Us Us TCS
1-2 - 24VAC/DC 7-5 - 24VAC/DC
1-3 - 48VAC/DC
Wiring Wiring 1 16 7-3 - 48VAC/DC
2 17
Trip Alarm/Trip 24VAC/DC 1-2 17-18 18 Trip 7-1 - 380-415VAC
R4D 48
48VAC/DC 1-3 17-19 7-3 - 220-240VAC
7-5 - 110-125VAC/DC
1 11 ** 110-125VAC 1-2 17-18
2 12
3 13
R4D 415 220-240VAC 2-3 17-18 Load
22 2120
4 14 1-2 - 110-125VAC
TCS 380-415VAC 1-3 17-19
15 2-3 - 220-240VAC
16 1-3 - 380-415VAC
Flag indicator
Remote **
TCS: Shunt circuit test control
Load control
∂ The coil connection can vary depending on the connected type of device (contactor, breaker with shunt trip release or breaker with undervoltage trip release).
RMT RC
GRD Line GRD Line
5-4 - 24VAC/DC
N L1 L2 L3 5-3 - 48VAC/DC N L1L2 L3
5-1 - 380-415VAC
5-3 - 220-240VAC
5-4 - 110-125VAC/DC Us
Us
10 11 12 14 15 16 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RMT RC
0-1 - 24VAC/DC
0-2 - 48VAC/DC
0-1 - 110-125VAC/DC
0-2 - 220-240VAC
Trip Trip 0-3 - 380-415VAC
1 3 4 5
Load
Load
∂ The coil connection can vary depending on the connected type of device (contactor, breaker with shunt trip release or breaker with undervoltage trip release).
16-5
Earth leakage relays
Technical characteristics
Adjustments
Tripping set-point (IDn) 0.025-0.25A (x0.1) 0.03-0,3A (x0.1)
0.25-2.5A (x1) 0.3-3A (x1)
2.5-25A (x10) 3-30A (x10)
25-250A (external multiplier) 30-300A (external multiplier)
Prealarm set-point –– 70% IDn (fixed) 70% IDn (fixed) 70% IDn (fixed)
Tripping delay time (t) 0.02-0.5s (tx1) 0.03-0,5s (tx1)
0.2-5s (tx10) 0.3-5s (tx10)
Selection of multiplier for IDn and t By dip switches
Resetting Configurable automatic Automatic by remote contact closing or rear jumper connection
or manual by Manual by button on front or remote contact closing
button on front∑
Shunt circuit control –– –– –– Yes
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary voltage Us 24-48VAC/DC
(0.85 - 1.1 Us limit) 110-125VAC/DC 110-125/220-240/380-415VAC
220-240/380-415VAC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz
Power consumption (maximum) 5.5VA 4.5VA 4.5VA 5.5VA
RELAY OUTPUTS
State Normally de-energised Configurable normally Configurable normally Configurable normally
de-energised or de-energised or de-energised or
energised energised energised
Contact arrangement 1 changeover SPDT (trip) 2 changeover SPDT each (configurable: 2 trip or 1 trip and 1 alarm)
Rated contact capacity IEC Ith 5A - 250VAC
Electrical life 3 x 105 cycles
Mechanical life 50 x 106 cycles
INSULATION
Power frequency withstand 2.5kV
voltage
16 INDICATIONS
Auxiliaty voltage available (ON) Green LED
Relay tripping (TRIP) Red LED
Trip prealarm (ALARM) –– Red LED Red LED Red LED
Mechanical (TRIP MEMORY) –– –– Flag indicator Flag indicator
Shunt circuit tripping (TCS) –– –– –– Red LED
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed Removable, plug-in
Tightening torque maximum 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -10...+60°C
Storage temperature -20...+80°C
Relative humidity ≤90%
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing polycarbonate
∂ Type A, sensitive to residual sinusoidal AC and pulsating DC currents.
∑ Remote resetting by removing power for more than 1 second.
∏ Digital display of fault current measurement and tripping value memory.
16-6
Earth leakage relays
Technical characteristics
Modular with transparent cover, Modular with transparent cover, Modular with transparent cover, Compact,
1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold
––
24-48VAC/DC
110-125VAC/DC
220-240/380-415VAC
50/60Hz
3VA
2.5kV
16
Green LED
Red LED
––
––
––
Fixed
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
-10...+60°C
-20...+80°C
≤90%
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate
∂ Type A, sensitive to residual sinusoidal AC and pulsating DC currents.
16-7
Page 17-2 Page 17-5
SEC. - PAGE
Modular version
On delay. Mutiscale. Multivoltage ....................................................................................................................................... 17 - 2
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 changeover contact ........................................................................................... 17 - 2
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 changeover contact and 1 normally open contact ................................................ 17 - 2
Recycle, independent timings. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................... 17 - 3
Off delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... 17 - 3
For starting. Multiscale. Multivoltage ................................................................................................................................. 17 - 4
For staircase ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17 - 4
Plug-in and flush-mount version, 48x48mm/1.9x1.9”
On delay. Single scale. Single voltage ................................................................................................................................. 17 - 5
On delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
On delay. Multiscale. Single voltage ................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage .............................................................................................................................. 17 - 5
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 17 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 17 - 7
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 17 - 13
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Time relays
Modular version
On delay time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage.
Multiscale. Multivoltage range supply voltage pkg On delay, delay on make, with start at relay energising
– 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
[V] n° [kg] – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10-100%
TM P 0.1-1s 24-48VDC 1 0.048 – Green LED indicator for power on
1-10s 24-240VAC – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
6-60s and steady when relay energised
1-10min – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module
6min-1h – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
1-10h IP20 on terminals.
0.1-1 day
1-10 days Certifications and compliance
ON only Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
OFF only Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508, CSA
C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
TM P See page 17-7.
Multifunction time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
– Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage
Multiscale. Multivoltage. scale auxiliary per
– Enabling input
range supply voltage pkg – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
1 relay output [V] n° [kg] – Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with
TM M1 0.1-1s 12-240V 1 0.086 start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising
with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with OFF
1-10s AC/DC interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with
6-60s ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay
1-10min energising at external contact closing with start on
6min-1h break. (f) Pulse on relay energising with start on external
1-10h contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising with start
0.1-1 day on external contact opening. (h) On-off delay. Delay on
1-10 days make, with start at external contact closing, and delay at
ON only break, with start at external contact opening. (i) Internal
OFF only ON/OFF trigger with relay contact closing or operating at
each closing of an external contact. (j) Pulse generator,
unequal timing recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and
0.5s ON pulse.
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10-100%
– Green LED indicator for power on
TM M1 – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
and steady when relay energised
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for
fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
17 See page 17-7.
Multifunction time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
– Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage
Multiscale. Multivoltage. scale auxiliary per – Enabling input
range supply voltage pkg – 2 relay outputs, one with 1 delayed changeover
2 relay outputs. [V] n° [kg] (C/O-SPDT) contact and the other with 1 normally
open (N/O-SPST)) contact, programmable as
TM M2 0.1-1s 12-240V 1 0.094 instantaneous or delayed
1-10s AC/DC – Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with
6-60s start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising
1-10min with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with OFF
6min-1h interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with
ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay
1-10h energising at external contact closing with start on break.
0.1-1 day (f) Pulse on relay energising with start on external
1-10 days contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising with start
ON only on external contact opening. (h) On-off delay. Delay on
OFF only make, with start at external contact closing, and delay at
break, with start at external contact opening. (i) Internal
ON/OFF trigger with relay contact closing or operating at
each closing of an external contact. (j) Pulse generator,
unequal timing recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and
0.5s ON pulse.
TM M2 – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10-100%
– Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
and steady when relay energised
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for
fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-8.
Recycle time relay, Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Programmable asymmetrical recycle time relay,
independent timings. range supply voltage pkg multiscale, multivoltage. Flasher with independent
Multiscale. [V] n° [kg] timing for ON and OFF intervals
– Enabling input of ON or OFF interval
Multivoltage TM PL 0.1-1s 12-240V 1 0.082 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
1-10s AC/DC – Delay time for OFF (pause) interval, adjustable on
6-60s front by rotary switch: 10-100%
1-10min – Delay time for ON (work) interval, adjustable on front
6min-1h by rotary switch: 10-100%
1h-10h – Green LED indicator for power on
0.1-1 day – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
1-10 days – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
3-30 days fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
10-100 days – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
Off delay time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Multiscale. scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage. True off
range supply voltage pkg delay; delay on break with start at relay de-energising
Multivoltage [V] n° [kg] – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
TM D 0.06-0.6s 24-240V 1 0.080 10-100%
0.6-6s AC/DC – Green LED indicator for power on
6-60s – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
18-180s fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
17
Time relay for starting. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Multiscale. scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage for
range supply voltage pkg starting (star-delta, impedance, autotransformer, etc)
Multivoltage [V] n° [kg] of induction motors (squirrel cage), 2 separate
timings
TM ST 0.1-1s 24-48VDC 1 0.090 – 1 relay output with 2 normally open (N/O-SPST)
1-10s 24-240VAC contacts with common pole
6-60s – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
1-10min 10-100% for star connection
TM ST A440 0.1-1s 380-440VAC 1 0.090 – Starting and transition (20-300ms time scale - from
1-10s star to delta), time adjustable on front by rotary
6-60s switch
1-10min – Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing during
delay and steady at delay lapsing
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
TM ST IP20 on terminals.
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
Staircase time relay Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay single scale and voltage for
range supply voltage pkg staircase illumination
[V] n° [kg] – 1 relay output with 1 powered normally open
(N/O-SPST) contact
TM LS 0.5-20min 220-240VAC 1 0.080 – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch
– Suitable for 3 or 4-wire systems
– 1 slide switch for timed or constant lighting operation
– Function for one hour lighting and fast switch off
– Green LED indicator for power on
– Connection with up to 50 light-up switches maximum;
≤ 1mA each
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for
fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
TM LS mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
17 Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
TIME RELAYS
TM...
17.5 5 58
(0.69”) (0.20”) (2.28”)
43.7
(1.72”)
(4.12”)
(1.77”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
104.7
98.3
45
90
59.9
Ø4.2 (2.36”)
(0.16”)
L48... Cutout
45
(1.77”)
48 76
(1.89”) 14 (2.99”)
(0.55”)
(1.38”)
(1.77”)
(1.89”)
35
45
48
3.5
(0.14”)
(1.89”)
(1.77”)
35
65
48
45
3.5
38 (0.14”)
(1.50”)
(1.85”)
(1.30”)
43.5
33
47
33
(2.56”)
65
17
17-6
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
A2 16 18 18
15
16
t
C H C H
C
B I
C A1
B I
J A J
A
18 S
A1 S 15 15
16 18
t 15
16
t t
A2 16 18
A1 A1
Flasher, starting with OFF (pause) A2
On-Off delay. Delay on make, with A2
interval. Equal timing recycle. ON start at external contact closing, and ON
D
E F
G
delay at break, with start at external
C H contact opening.
C A1
B I
A J E F
18 D G S
15 C H
16 18
t t t t B I
15
(pause) (work) (pause) (work) A J
16
t t t t
17
Off delay. Relay energising at A1 Pulse generator. Unequal timing A1
A2 A2
external contact closing with start ON recycle, starting with OFF pulse time ON
on break and 0.5sec ON time.
E F E F
D G D G
C H C A1
S
C H
B I B I
A J A J
18 18
15 15
16 16
t t t
0,5s 0,5s
17-7
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM M2
With instantaneous With delayed
C C
operation programmed operation programmed
A1 S 15 23 A1 S 15 27
23 27 23 27
INST DEL INST DEL
24 28 24 28
A2 16 18 24 A2 16 18 28
D
E F
G
On delay. Delay on make, D
E F
G Pulse on relay energising D
E F
G
On delay. Delay on make, D
E F
G Pulse on relay energising
C H with start at relay energising C H with start on energising C H with start at relay C H with start on energising
B I B I B I B I
A J A J A J energising A J
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
t
D
E F
G Flasher, starting with OFF D
E F
G Flasher, starting with ON D
E F
G Flasher, starting with OFF D
E F
G Flasher, starting with ON
C H (pause) interval. C H (work) interval. C H (pause) interval. C H (work) interval.
B I B I B I B I
A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C
B
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t t t t t t
23 (pause) (work) (pause) (work) 23
(work) (pause) (work) (pause)
27 27
24 24 28 28
t t t t t t t t
(pause) (work) (pause) (work) (work) (pause) (work) (pause)
D
E F
G Off delay. Relay energising D
E F
G
Pulse on relay energising D
E F
G Off delay. Relay energising D
E F
G
Pulse on relay energising
C
B
H
I
at external contact closing C H with start on external C
B
H
I
at external contact closing C H with start on external
B I B I
A J with start on break A J contact closing A J with start on break A J contact closing
A1 A1
A2 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2
ON ON
ON ON
C A1 C A1
S C A1
S S C A1
S
18 18
15 18 18
15 15 15
16 16
t 16 t 16
17 23
24 23
24
t t
27
28
27
28
t t
D
E F
G
Pulse on relay energising D
E F
G On-off delay. Delay make, with D
E F
G
Pulse on relay energising D
E F
G On-off delay. Delay make, with
C H with start on external C H start at external contact closing C H with start on external C H start at external contact closing
B I B I B I B I
A J contact opening A J and delay at break, with start at A J contact opening A J and delay at break, with start at
external contact opening external contact opening
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C A1
S C A1 C A1 C A1
S S S
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t t t t t t t t t t
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
D
E F
G Internal trigger ON/OFF. D
E F
G Pulse generator. Unequal D
E F
G Internal trigger ON/OFF. D
E F
G Pulse generator. Unequal
C H Relay contact either closes C H
I
timing recycle, starting C H Relay contact either closes C H
I
timing recycle, starting
B I B B I B
A J or opens at each external A J with ON pulse time A J or opens at each external A J with ON pulse time
contact closing contact closing
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C A1
S
S C A1 S
S
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t 0,5s t 0,5s t 0,5s t 0,5s
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
17-8
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM PL
Flasher, starting with ON interval. Flasher, starting with OFF interval.
Equal timing recycle, ON first Equal timing recycle, OFF first
A1 S 15 A1 A1
A2 A2
ON ON
A2 16 18 A1 A1
S S
18 18
15 15
16 16
W P W P P W P W
TM D
True off delay. Delay on break, starting at
relay de-energising
A1 15
A1
A2
ON
A2 16 18
18
15
16
t
TM ST
For starting
A1
A1 17 A2
ON
A2 18 28
18
17
start
28
17
transition
LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1 L2 L3
21
S1
22
13 53
S2 KM2
14 54
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
96 A2 A2 A2 A2
U2 U1
96
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
TM LS
Staircase lighting
4-wire connection 3-wire connection Timed lighting Constant lighting
L L
N 3 N 3 N N
ON ON
L/N
17-9
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
L48T...
On delay
24VAC/DC
220240VAC
2
2 8 ON
7
RELAY 6
8
7 5 6 5
t
L48TP...
110VAC
220240VAC On delay
24VAC/DC
1 2 4 8
1.2.4
ON
7
RELAY 6
8
7 5 6 5
t
L48TPB...
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
110VAC
On delay with both instantaneous c/o contacts 110VAC
On delay with one instantaneous c/o contact and
220240VAC 240VAC one late-break c/o contact
2 2
2 1 8 ON 2 1 8 ON
7 7
3 3
1 B 1 B
7 4 3 5 6 4 A
DIP-SWITCH 7 4 3 5 6 4 DIP-SWITCH
A
RELAY RELAY
6 6
8 8
5 5
t
17
17-10
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
L48M...
ON 2 2
ON
10 10
5 5
M M
7 7
6
F
6 F
R 7 1 R
7
t t t 0 t t t 1
9 9 0
RELAY 11 DIP SWITCH RELAY 11
8 8 DIP SWITCH
t t t t t t t
3 3
1 1
4 4
17
17-11
Time relays
Technical characteristics
Modular version
TYPE TM P TM M1 TM M2 TM PL TM D TM ST TM LS
DESCRIPTION
On delay Programmable Programmable Asymmetrical True off For starting Staircase
multifunction multifunction timing recycle delay illumination
Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Single scale
Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Single voltage
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated auxiliary supply 24-48VDC 12-240VAC/DC 24-240VAC/DC 24-48VDC 220-240VAC
voltage Us 24-240VAC 24-240VAC
380-440VAC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz
Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Us
Power consumption (maximum) 1.2VA/0.8W max 0.6VA/0.3W max 1.1VA/0.8W max 0.6VA/0.3W max 0.1VA/0.1W 1.2VA/0.8W max De-energised
(24...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (24...48VAC/DC) (24...48VAC/DC) 5VA/0.5W max
16VA/0.9W max 1.6VA/1.2W max 1.8VA/1.2W max 1.6VA/1.2W max 1.1VA/0.8W 1.6VA/0.9W max Energised
(110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC) 12VA/0.8W max
TIMING CIRCUIT
Time setting range Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale
0.1-1s 0.1-1s 0.06-0.6s 0.1-1s 0.5-20min
1-10s 1-10s 0.6-6s 1-10s
6s-60s 6s-60s 6s-60s 6s-60s
1-10min 1-10min 18s-180s 1-10min
6min-1h 6min-1h
1-10h 1h-10h
0.1-1day 0.1-1day
1-10days 1-10days
ON only 3-30days
OFF only 10-100days
17-12
Time relays
Technical characteristics
Plug-in and flush mount version 48x48mm/1.9x1.9”
Average variation of
set delays in related at –20°C +2% +2%
to 20°C condition at +60°C –3% –3%
Minimum ON time ––
Resetting during operation ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1s
time elasped time ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms
Immunity time for microbreakings ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 1 2 2
Contact arrangement 1 delayed c/o 1 delayed c/o 2 del. or 1 inst. + 1 del. c/o 2 delayed c/o
Maximum switching voltage 250V 17
IEC conventional free air thermal current 5A
(Ith)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation B300
Electrical life (with rated load) 105 cycles
Mechanical life 30x106 cycles
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum ––
Conductor section (min-max) ––
INSULATION (input-output)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 250V
IEC power frequency withstand voltage ––
Uimp
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 2kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature –10...+60°C
Storage temperature –30...+80°C
Housing material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Other voltages on request.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
NOTE:
del. = delayed inst. = instantaneous c/o = changeover/SPDT
17-13
Pages 18-4 to 8 Pages 18-8 and 9
SEC. - PAGE
Modular voltage monitoring relays
For three-phase systems, without neutral ........................................................................................................................... 18 - 4
For three-phase systems, with or without neutral ............................................................................................................... 18 - 6
For single-phase systems .................................................................................................................................................. 18 - 8
Modular current monitoring relays
For single-phase systems .......................................................................................................................................................... 18 - 8
Modular pump protection relay .......................................................................................... 18 - 10
Modular phase shift monitoring relay .................................................................................. 18 - 11
Modular frequency monitoring relay .................................................................................... 18 - 11
Interface protection system units ....................................................................................... 18 - 12
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 18 - 16
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 18 - 17
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 18 - 28
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Protection relays
Overview
PMV55
Modular version (2U)
Minimum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Page 18-8
18-2
Protection relays
Overview
PMA50 PMA60
Modular version (3U) Modular version (3U)
Minimum cos for dry running Minimum cos
pump protection Maximum cos
Maximum AC current Page 18-11
Phase loss
Incorrect phase sequence
Page 18-10
18
PMF20 PMVF30
Modular version (2U) Version Flush mount (96x96mm/3.78x3.78”)
Minimum frequency only Dual threshold voltage/frequency
Maximum frequency only Voltage release
Page 18-11 Page 18-14
18-3
Protection relays
Voltage monitoring relays
For three-phase systems, Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristicz
without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for phase loss
(phase to phase) pkg and incorrect phase sequece
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
rated value
Three-phase system, without neutral. – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMV10 A440 208-480VAC 1 0.050 – Modular DIN 43880 housing: 1 module for PMV10;
2 module for PMV20
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when placed
PMV20 A240 100-240VAC 1 0.120 in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
PMV20 A575 208-575VAC 1 0.120 Certifications and compliance
PMV20 A600 380-600VAC 1 0.120 Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
PMV10 A440 See page 18-17.
For three-phase systems, Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase-to-phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] sequence
– Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV50 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. • PMV50 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – High tripping accuracy
PMV50 A240 208-240VAC 1 0.130 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
– Control of phase-to-phase voltages
PMV50 A575 380-575VAC 1 0.130
– Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
PMV50 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 rated value
– Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
– 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when placed
in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 on terninals.
ADJUSTMENTS
PMV50... “V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
“V min” Minimum voltage tripping threshold
80-95% Ue
“Delay” for each Tripping time 0.1-20s
“Reset delay” Resetting time 0.1-20s.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
For three-phase systems, Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, incorrect phase
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] sequence and asymmetry
– Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV70 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage and asymmetry. • PMV70 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV70 A240 208-240VAC 1 0.130 – Control of phase-to-phase voltages
– Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
PMV70 A575 380-575VAC 1 0.130
rated value
PMV70 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
– 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when placed
in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
PMV70... “V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
“V min” Minimum voltage tripping threshold
80-95% Ue
“Delay” for each Tripping delay 0.1-20s
“Asymmetry” High voltage asymmetry tripping
threshold 5-15% Ue.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
For three-phase systems Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
with or without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, neutral loss and
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] incorrect phase sequence
– 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, with or without neutral. • PMV50N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. 120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence. • PMV50N A440: 380-400-415-440VAC (phase-phase)
Instantaneous trip. 220-230-240-254VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV50N A240 208-240VAC 1 0.150 • PMV50N A600: 480-525-575-600VAC (phase-phase)
PMV50N A440 380-440VAC 1 0.150 277-303-332-347VAC (phase-neutral)
– Excellent tripping accuracy
PMV50N A600 480-600VAC 1 0.150 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
– Phase loss detection when one of the voltages is
<70% rated voltage
– Phase or neutral loss tripping time: 60ms
18 – 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
PMV50N... – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
“V min” Minimum voltage tripping threshold
80-95% Ue
“Delay” for each Tripping time 0.1-20s
“Reset Delay” Resetting time 0.1-20s.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
For three-phase systems, Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
with or without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, neutral loss,
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] incorrect phase sequence and asymmetry
– 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, with or without neutral. • PMV70N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
Minimum and maximum AC voltage and asymmetry. 120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Delayed trip. • PMV70N A440: 380-400-415-440VAC (phase-phase)
Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence. 220-230-240-254VAC (phase-neutral)
Instantaneous trip. • PMV70N A600: 480-525-575-600VAC (phase-phase)
PMV70N A240 208-240VAC 1 0.150 277-303-332-347VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV70N A440 380-440VAC 1 0.150 – Excellent tripping accuracy
– TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV70N A600 480-600VAC 1 0.150 – Phase loss detection when one of the voltages is
<70% rated value
– Phase or neutral loss tripping time: 60ms
– 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
PMV70N... – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
“V min” Minimum voltage tripping threshold
80-95% Ue
“Delay” for each Tripping time 0.1-20s
“Asymmetry” High voltage asymmetry tripping
threshold 5-15% Ue.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Voltage monitoring relay Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
for single-phase systems to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
pkg and maximum voltage
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
• PMV55 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Single-phase system. • PMV55 A440: 380-400-415-440VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
PMV55 A240 208-240VAC 1 0.125 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV55 A440 380-440VAC 1 0.125 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
“V min” Minimum voltage tripping threshold
80-95% Ue
PMV55... “Delay” for each Tripping time 0.1-20s
“Reset delay” Resetting time 0.1-20s.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Current monitoring relay Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
current supply per – Current monitoring relay for AC/DC maximum current
for single-phase systems Ie voltage pkg control, AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary power supply
– Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
[A] [V] n° [kg] transformer (CT)
Single-phase system. – Excellent tripping accuracy
AC/DC maximum current control. – TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply. – Resetting and inhibition input
Automatic or manual reset. – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
PMA20 240 5 or 16A 24-240V 1 0.121 – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
AC/DC placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Imax" Maximum current tripping threshold
5-100% Ie
"Hysteresis" Maximum hysteresis thresold
1-50%
"Trip delay" Tripping time 0.1-30s
PMA20 240 "Inhibition time" Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
“Aut. reset delay” Automatic resetting time 0.1-30s
“Mode” • Rated current 5A or 16A,
• Relay output normally energised or
18 de-energised
• Tripping memory (Latch) On or Off.
Operational diagram
See page 18-19.
For single-phase systems Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
current supply per – Current monitoring relay for AC/DC minimum or
Ie voltage pkg maximum current control; AC/DC multivoltage
auxiliary power supply
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
Single-phase system. transformer (CT)
AC/DC minimum or maximum current control. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply. – TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Automatic or manual reset. – Resetting and inhibition input
– 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA30 240 5 or 16A 24-240V 1 0.121 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
AC/DC – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Set point" Minimum or maximum current tripping
threshold 5-100% Ie
"Hysteresis" Minimum or maximum hysteresis
PMA30 240 threshold 1-50%
"Trip delay" Tripping time 0.1-30s
"Inhibition time" Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
“Ie” Current scale selection: 5A or 16A
“Mode” • Min or max function
• Relay output normally energised or
de-energised
• Tripping memory (Latch) On or Off.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Modular ampere monitoring relays.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See pages 18-20 and 21.
"Imin"
5-100% Ie
Minimum current tripping threshold
18
5-100% Ie
"Trip delay" Minimum and maximum current
tripping time 0.1-30s
"Inhibition time" Tripping time at power up 1-60s
“Ie” Current scale selection: 20mA, 50mA,
250mA, 1A, 5A or 16A
“Mode” • Separate or common relay outputs
• Relay output normally energised or
de-energised
• Tripping memory (Latch) On or Off.
Operational diagram
See page 18-21 and 22.
For single and Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
three-phase systems current supply per – Pump protection relay against dry running, auxiliary
Ie voltage pkg AC power supply
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Motor under-load and over-current control
– Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
Single and three-phase systems. transformer (CT)
Maximum AC current and minimum cos. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – Voltage control range 80-660VAC
Auxiliary AC power supply. – Current control range 0.1-16A
Automatic or manual reset. – Resetting and enabling consent input
PMA50 A240 5 or 16A 220-240VAC 1 0.251 – 1 relay output relay with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA50 A415 380-415VAC 1 0.251 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when placed
PMA50 A480 440-480VAC 1 0.251 in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Cos min” Minimum costhreshold 0.1-0.99
(under-load/dry running)
“Imax” Maximum (over) current threshold
PMA50... 10-100%Ie
"Trip delay" Tripping time for minimum cosand
maximum current 0.1-10s
“Inhibition time” Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
“Aut. reset delay” Automatic reset time OFF-100min
“Mode” • Rated current 5A or 16A
• Single or three phase
• External reset On or Off.
Operational diagram
See pages 18-22 and 23.
18
Phase shift monitoring Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
relay for single and current supply per – Minimum and maximum phase shift monitoring relay,
Ie voltage pkg AC auxiliary power supply
three-phase systems [A] [V] n° [kg] – Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
transformer (CT)
Single and three-phase systems. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Minimum and maximum cos control. Delayed trip. – Voltage control range 80-660VAC
AC auxiliary power supply. – Current control range 0.1-16A
Automatic or manual reset. – Automatic or manual resetting (manual resetting by
PMA60 A240 16A 220-240VAC 1 0.254 power removal)
PMA60 A415 380-415VAC 1 0.254 – 2 relay outputs (Min and Max), configurable, each with
1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA60 A480 440-480VAC 1 0.254 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
placed in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Cos min” Minimum costhreshold
0.1-0.99 inductive
PMA60...
"Trip delay" Tripping time for minimum cos
0.1-30s
"Cos max” Maximum inductive costhreshold
0.1-0.99
“Trip delay” Tripping time for maximum cos
0.1-30s
“Inhibition time” Tripping delay at power up 1-60s
“Mode” • Single or three phase
• Relay outputs normally energised or
de-energised
• Tripping memory (Latch) On or Off.
Operational diagram
See pages 18-23 and 24.
For low voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF20 interface protection system (SPI) unit has been
pkg developed according to the Italian CEI 0-21 standard
[V] [V] n° [kg] prescriptions of the June 2012 edition. It is used when a
local generating system is connected in parallel with the
Three-phase system, with or without neutral, in low voltage. low-voltage power grid of a power supplier. The controls
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and refer to limits of voltage and frequency monitoring.
frequency protection. In the case when either the voltage or the frequency
Flush mount type. are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
PMVF 20 100-400VAC/ 1 0.568 de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
230VAC 110-250VDC (DDI) trips.
400VAC PMVF20 is equipped with 4 inputs having the following
PMVF 20 D048 12-48VDC 1 0.580
functions:
PMVF 20... – DDI status feedback
– External signal for frequency selection
(communication network malfunction)
– Local control for frequency selection
– Remote tripping (forced DDI opening independent of
voltage and frequency values)
– DDI opening and closing
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping – Standby device opening (programmable: retentive
threshold time normally energised, retentive normally de-energised or
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.15Un 0.2s adjustable pulse).
The standby device control is compulsory in installations
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.10Un 3s with more than 20kW and consists of a signal, with a
(moving mean over 10min) 0.5s delay respect to the DDI opening command,
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s transmitted only if the DDI fails and does not complete
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s the disconnection.
By fitting the EXP10 03 expansion module on the
PMVF20, the following functions can be configured as:
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping – Programmable alarm
threshold time – Autonomous signalling in case of power limit
unbalance (LSP), only if three CTs are also installed.
High external signal and low local control conditions.
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 0.1s Operational characteristics
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 0.1s – Auxiliary voltage:
• PMVF 20: 100…400VAC/110…250VDC
Low external signal and high local control conditions. • PMVF 20 D048: 12…48VDC
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s – Voltage inputs:
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s • 400VAC (three-phase connection)
• 230VAC (sing-phase connection)
High conditions for both external signal and local control. – Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 50.5Hz 0.1s – 4 digital inputs
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 49.5Hz 0.1s – Current inputs (optional): Use via CTs with selectable
/5A or /1A secondary
NOTE: Low conditions for both external signal and local – Support of EXP series communications ports (USB,
control are not taken into consideration by the standard. RS232, RS485, Ethernet) see section 28
– Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”
– Degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals
Order code Description – Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
using expansion or external module.
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-21;
18 EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF20. IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
For independent signal in case of power limit unbalance (LSP). IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC Note for Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition:
Communication ports. According to standard prescriptions, once the installation
is completed, the interface protection must be tested by
EXP10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface the installer using a relay test box which controls the trip
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface thresholds and timing.
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface
Operational diagram
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface See page 18-25.
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface
EXP10 03
Adapter for pre-existing cutout. Programming software
software is available for future PMVF20
PMVF X00 Consisting of 2 RAL 7035 finish plates for parameter configuration change and saving.
154x102.5mm/6.06x4.04” cutout and Since PMVF20 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
fixing screws with specific default settings as per the Italian standard
IEC/EN 61850 protocol CEI 0-21, it can be put in service immediately without
The EXP10 18 module will be made available only when having to change any programming. Setup editing is
the competent authorities have established the exact password protected so that parameter settings cannot be
terms of the supervision and control of the specific tampered with by unauthorised personnel.
commands (currently under study as specified in the
Italian CEI 0-21 standard).
For low voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF50/PMVF51 interface protection system (SPI) unit
pkg has been developed according to the Italian CEI 0-21
[V] [V] n° [kg] standard prescriptions of the June 2012 edition. Each is
used when a local solar generating system is connected
Three-phase system, with or without neutral, in low voltage. in parallel with the low-voltage power grid of a power
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and supplier. The controls refer to limits of voltage and
frequency protection. frequency monitoring.
Modular type with 4 relay outputs. In the case when either the voltage or the frequency
PMVF 50 230VAC 100-240VAC/ 1 0.615 are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
400VAC 110-250VDC de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
Three-phase system with or without neutral in low voltage. (DDI) trips.
PMVF 50 PMVF50/51 is equipped with 4 inputs having the
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and
frequency protection. following functions:
Modular type with 2 relay outputs. – DDI status feedback
– External signal for frequency selection
PMVF 51 230VAC 100-240VAC/ 1 0.470 (communication network malfunction)
400VAC 110-250VDC – Local control for frequency selection
– Remote tripping (forced DDI opening, independent of
voltage and frequency values)
– DDI opening and closing
– Standby device opening (programmable: retentive
normally energised, retentive normally de-energised or
adjustable pulse).
The standby device control is compulsory in installations
PMVF 51 with more than 20kW and consists of a signal, with a
0.5s delay respect to the DDI opening command,
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping transmitted only if the DDI failed and did not complete
threshold time the disconnection.
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.15Un 0.2s PMVF50 also has two additional relay outputs (optional
for PMVF51) to configure as:
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.10Un 3s – Programmable alarm
(moving mean over 10min) – Autonomous signalling in case of power limit
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s unbalance (LSP), only if three CTs are also installed.
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s
Operational characteristics
– Auxiliary voltage: 100-240VAC/110-250VDC
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping – Voltage inputs:
threshold time • 400VAC (three-phase connection)
• 230VAC (single-phase connection)
High external signal and low local control conditions. – Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 0.1s – 4 digital inputs
Maximum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 0.1s – Current inputs (optional): Use via CTs with selectable
/5A or /1A secondary
Low external signal and high local control conditions. – Support of EXM series communications inputs (USB,
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s RS232, RS485, Ethernet) see section 28
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s – Modular housing:
• PMVF50: 8 module
High conditions for both external signal and local control. • PMVF51: 6 module
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 50.5Hz 0.1s – Degree of protection for both: IP40 on front; IP20 on
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 49.5Hz 0.1s terminals
– Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
NOTE: Low conditions for both external signal and local using expansion or external module.
control are not taken into consideration by the standard.
Reference standards 18
Order code Description Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-21;
IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF50 AND PMVF51. Note for Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition:
Communication ports. According to standard prescriptions, once the installation
EXM10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface is completed, the interface protection must be tested by
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface the installer using a relay test box which controls the trip
thresholds and timing.
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface Operational diagram
EXM10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface See pages 18-25 and 26.
Inputs and outputs for PMVF51 only. Programming software
EXM10 01 2 digital opto-isolated inputs and 2 relay software is available for future PMVF50/
outputs 5A 250VAC PMVF51 parameter configuration change and saving.
EXM10... Since PMVF50/PMVF51 is standard-supplied
IEC/EN 61850 protocol pre-programmed, with specific default factory settings as
The EXM10 18 module will be made available only when per the Italian standard CEI 0-21, it can be put in service
the competent authorities have established the exact immediately without having to change any programming.
terms of the supervision and control of the specific Setup editing is password protected so that parameter
commands (currently under study as specified in the settings cannot be tampered with by unauthorised
Italian CEI 0-21 standard). personnel.
For medium voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF30 interface protection system (SPI) unit has been
pkg developed according to the Italian CEI 0-16 standard
[V] [V] n° [kg] prescriptions of the December 2012 edition. It is used
when a local generating system is connected in parallel
Medium-voltage system. with the medium-voltage network of a power supplier.
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and The controls refer to limits of voltage and frequency
frequency protection. monitoring.
Flush mount type. In the case when either the voltage or the frequency
PMVF 30 Measure- 100-400VAC/ 1 0.566 are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
ments via 110-250VDC de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
PMVF 30 D048 VTs in MV or 12-48VDC 1 0.566 (DDI) trips.
direct in LV PMVF30 is equipped with inputs having the following
functions:
– DDI status feedback
– Interface protection system exclusion
PMVF 30... – Local control
– Remote tripping (forced DDI opening, independent of
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-16 Type of protection Tripping Tripping voltage and frequency values).
threshold time In addition, there are two relay outputs to configure as:
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.2Un 0.6s – DDI opening
– Programmable output (default factory programmed as
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.1Un 3s standby device opening or set up for automatic
(moving mean over 10min) reclosing if the DDI is an automatic circuit breaker).
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s Standby device opening
In installations with more than 400kW, the standard
Maximum residual 5% 3 Un 25s specifies there must be a command signal, that releases
voltage 59.V0 (59N) another standby device, given within 1 second whenever
the DDI opening fails or malfunctions.
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-16 Type of protection Tripping Tripping Automatic DDI reclosing
Frequency protection at voltage release threshold time Whenever an automatic circuit breaker is used as the
Configuration in standard conditions. DDI, the PMVF30 is capable of controlling both the
opening (according to the installation conditions
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s indicated in the Italian CEI 0-16 standard) and the
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s automatic reclosing. The supervision of the automatic
Limited configuration in case of local control or voltage reclosing includes defining the number of attempts and
release condition the time interval between an attempt and the subsequent
one and generating an alarm when the final closing
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 50.2Hz 0.15s malfunction so does not take place.
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 49.8Hz 0.15s This function can be carried out through a programmable
– Voltage release functions output of the PMVF30, either the built-in standard
supplied unless it is already used for the standby device
Maximum residual 5% 3 Un - operation or by installing an optional EXP10 03
voltage 59.V0 (59N) expansion module.
Minimum direct sequence 70% Un -
voltage 27.Vd Operational characteristics
Maximum inverse sequence 15% Un - – Auxiliary voltage:
voltage 59.Vi • PMVF30: 100-400VAC/110-250VDC
• PMVF30D048: 12-48VDC
– Voltage inputs (connection via VTs in MV or directly in
LV end):
Order code Description • Primary: 400-150,000V
18 • Secondary: 50-500V (for voltage/frequency);
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF30. 50-150V (for residual voltage measurement)
For automatic reclosing supervision of automatic circuit – Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
breaker (DDI). – 4 digital inputs
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC – 3 current inputs (for optional measuring): Use via CTs
with selectable /5A or /1A secondary
Communication ports. – Support of EXP series communications puts (USB,
EXP10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface RS232, RS485, Ethernet); see section 28
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”
– Degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface using expansion or external module.
EXP10...
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface
Reference standards
Adapter for pre-existing cutout. Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-16;
PMVF X00 Consisting of 2 RAL 7035 finish plates for IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
154x102.5mm/6.06x4.04” cutout and IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
fixing screws
IEC/EN 61850 protocol Operational diagram
The EXP10 18 module will be made available only when See page 18-27.
the competent authorities have established the exact
terms of the supervision and control of the specific Programming software
commands (currently under study as specified in the software is available for future PMVF30
Italian CEI 0-16 standard). parameter configuration change and saving.
Since PMVF30 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
with specific default factory settings as per the Italian
standard CEI 0-21, it can be put in service immediately
without having to change any programming. Setup
editing is password protected so that parameter settings
cannot be tampered with by unauthorised personnel.
MAX
2 EXP10 03 EXP10 18
Used as: Ethernet interface
1. Unbalance limit signal (LSP) for PMVF 20 according to IEC/EN 61850
or for automatic reclosing control of circuit
breaker for PMVF 30.
2. Programmable alarm.
MAX
1
18
EXM10 12 EXM10 13
RS485 Ethernet
interface TCP/IP
interface
EXM10 01
Used as:
1. Unbalance limit signal (LSP).
2. Programmable alarm.
MAX
2
18-15
Protection relays
Dimensions [mm (in)]
PROTECTION RELAYS
PMV10... PMV... - PMF20 PMV...N - PMA40... -
PMA20... - PMA30... PMA50... - PMA60... - PMVF10
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
98.3 (3.87")
)
98.3 (3.87")
98.3 (3.87")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
(
Ø4.2 Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36")
Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36") (0.16")
(0.16")
(0.16")
105.4 (4.15”)
63.5 (2.50”)
45 (1.77”)
99.5 (3.92”)
64.5 (2.54”)
90 (3.54”)
96 (3.78”)
92 (3.62”)
PMVF 51
63 (2.48”)
43.8 (1.72”)
5 42.7
108 (4.25”) 35.8 35.8 (0.20”)
(1.41”) (1.41”) (1.68”)
105.4 (4.15”)
63.5 (2.50”)
45 (1.77”)
90 (3.54”)
96 (3.78”)
92 (3.62”)
61.5 (2.42”)
EXP10...
Cutout adapter
PMVF X00
107 (4.21”)
(0. Ø4 1 1
16 (0.04”) (0.04”)
”)
92 (3.62”)
1 1
161 (6.34”)
177 (6.97”)
92 (3.62”)
70 (2.75”)
18-16
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Voltage monitoring relays for Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence (PMV10-PMV20-PMV30-PMV40-PMV50-PMV60- MV70)
3-phase systems without neutral Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay
PMV10 - PMV20 - PMV30 - PMV40 L1 L2
PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70
L2 L1
L1 L3
L2 L3
L3
ON ON
L1 L2 L3
TRMS MAX MAX
MIN MIN
14 12 11
ASYMMETRY ASYMMETRY
11 14 11
14
12 12
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
L1 - L2 - L3
ON
V MAX
V MIN
14
11
12
Set point
asymmetry
Hysteresis
L1 - L2 - L3
On
ASYMMETRY
14
11
12
18
18-17
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Voltage monitoring relays for Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence (PMV50N - PMV70N - PMV80N)
3-phase systems c/w or w/o neutral Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay
PMV50N - PMV60N - PMV70N
L1 L1
L2 L2
L1
L3 L3
L2
L3 N ❶ N
N
ON ON
TRMS
MAX MAX
14 14
V MIN relay 11 V MIN relay 11
12 12
24 24
V MAX relay 21 V MAX relay 21
22 22
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Ue
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
Ue
ON
V MAX
V MIN
14
V MIN relay 11
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
Max frequency
Set point asymmetry Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hz
Hysteresis
Min frequency
Ue
ON Ue
ASYMMETRY
Hz
18 V MIN relay 11
14
12 ON
V MAX relay 21 24
22 14
V MIN relay 11
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
A1 A2 Set up V MAX
TRMS Hysteresis
14 12 11 Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
V MAX
V MIN
ON
14
11
12
A1
A2
18-18
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Reset A1
16A
C Y
METER
Inhibition time
D E D E
B1
C F C F
14
B G OR B G Relay ON
H H
11
16A A A
12
METER
D E D E
C F C F 14
B G OR B G Relay OFF
11
A H A H
12
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
A2
16A
METER ON
Inhibition A1
C Y
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 D E D E
C F C F
Relay OFF 14
B G OR B G
11
C
Inhibition or A H A H
Reset 12
Operation
Mode Ie Relay Latch
output
A 5A OFF OFF
B ON
C ON OFF
D ON
E 16A OFF OFF
F ON
G ON OFF
H ON
18-19
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Current monitoring relay for Maximum current control operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
1-phase systems A1
A2
PMA30
Single-phase connection by CT ON
L
N O
L A Reset A1
D
C Y
C(-)
B1
Inhibition time
16A
METER
Trip Max current
t > trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
Threshold Max current
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 Hysteresis Max current
C
Inhibition or
Reset
C F 14
B1
B G Relay OFF
11
A H
16A 12
METER
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Maximum current control operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)
A1
Three-phase connection by CT A2
(1 phase control)
L1 L ON
L2 O
A
L3 D
Inhibition A1
C
C(-)
Y
B1
16A
Inhibition time
METER
11
B1
B G
A H 12
16A
METER
ON
Operation Reset A1
C Y
Mode Function Relay Latch
output
A Minimum OFF OFF Inhibition time
B current ON
C ON OFF Trip Min current
D ON t > trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
E Maximum OFF OFF
Hysteresis Min current
F current ON
Threshold Min current
G ON OFF
H ON
D E
C F 14
B G Relay ON
11
A H
12
D E
C F 14
B G Relay OFF
11
A H
12
18-20
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
ON
Inhibition A1
C Y
Inhibition time
D E
C F
14
B G Relay ON
H
11
A
12
D E
C F 14
Relay OFF
B G 11
A H 12
Single-phase connection by CT ON
L
N O
L A
D Inhibition time
C(-)
B1
B2
B3
G Separate
B1
B2
B3
B
A H
Relay 14
MIN ON 11
16A
1A
50mA
12
METER
MIN current MAX current
Relay 24
B
C
D E
F
G
MAX OFF
Separate
21
22 18
A H
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21 14
Relay 11
MIN OFF
12
D E
C F
Three-phase connection by CT B G Common 14-24
(1 phase control) A H relays ON 11-21
12-22
L1 L
L2 O
A C
D E
F
L3 D
B G Common 14-24
A H
relays OFF 11-21
C(-)
12-22
B1
B2
B3
16A
1A
50mA
METER
MIN current MAX current
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
18-21
Relay protection
Wiring diagrams
B2
B3
Inhibition time
16A
1A
50mA
MIN current MAX current t > trip delay t < trip delay
Trip Min current
t > trip delay t < trip delay
D E
C F
B G Common 14-24
A H relays ON 11-21
12-22
D E
C F
B G Common 14-24
A H
relays OFF 11-21
12-22
Reset A1
B1
L3
C
C
Y
16A 600V
METER Inhibition time
14
Relay
11
Three-phase direct connection 12
L1 L
O Threshold Max current
L2
A Hysteresis Max current
L3 D
L2/N
L1/L
L3
C
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C Enable
18-22
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
L2/N
L1/L ON
B1
L3
C
16A 600V
Reset A1
METER C Y
Inhibition time
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
Trip Max current
C Enable
t < trip delay t > trip delay
Trip Min cosϕ
L1 L
L2 O
A ON
L3 D
L2/N
L1/L
B1
Inhibition time
C
16A 600V
D E
B1
C F
C
B G
Relay 24
A H
MAX ON 21
16A 600V
22
METER OR
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
D E
C F
B G 24
A H Relay
MAX OFF 21
22
OR
C
D E
F Relay 14
B G MIN OFF 11
A H 12
18-23
Relay protection
Wiring diagrams
ON
B1
C
16A 600V
Inhibition time
METER
MIN cosϕ MAX cosϕ
Trip Max cosϕ
t > trip delay t < trip delay
Trip Min cosϕ
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
t > trip delay t < trip delay
Threshold Max cosϕ
Hysteresis Max cosϕ
D E
C F
B G 24
A H Relay
21
MAX OFF 22
OR
C
D E
F Relay 14
B G MIN OFF 11
A H 12
A1
A2 Reset delay MAX Delay Reset delay MIN Delay Reset delay
A1 A2
F. Detect
Set Hz MAX
Hysteresis
Rated
frequency
A1 - A2
18 Hz MAX A1 - A2
Hz MIN Hz MAX
ON ON
14 14
Relay 11 Relay 11
12 12
18-24
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition - For low voltage
PMVF 20...
Three-phase connection
L1 L2 L3 N (OPTION) DDI
TA1
TA2
TA3 GENERATION
Rear view
IN1 – DDI Feedback
IN2 – Frequency window choice ON
1 2
I1 I2 I3
OUTPUTS
OPTION
OPTION
INPUTS
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
12...48VDC❶ V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
100...400VAC DIGITAL INPUTS
110...250VDC I1 I2 I3
VOLTAGE
CURRENT INPUTS
--- + INPUTS
A1 A2 400VAC 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24
A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
LSP PROGRAMMABLE
STANDBY DEVICE PROTECTION ALARM
DDI ❷
AUXILIARY A1
SUPPLY A2
A1
For PMVF 20 D048 only.
RELAY SUPPLY
250VAC MAX A2 Local control choice.
PMVF 50
Three-phase connection
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 N (OPTION) DDI
TA1
TA2
TA3 GENERATION
LSP PROGRAMMABLE
STANDBY DEVICE PROTECTION ALARM
DDI ❷
18
Activation modes for standby device
P01.05 P01.05 P04.19 P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
22
18-25
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Sistema di protezione di interfaccia conforme norma CEI 0-21 edizione giugno 2012 - Per bassa tensione
PMVF 51
Three-phase connection
LOW VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 N
(OPTION) DDI
TA1
TA2
TA3 GENERATION
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
100 - 240VAC I1 I2 I3
110 - 250VDC VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUTS
--- + INPUTS A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2 A2
A1 A2 400VAC 14 11 12 24 21 22 COM IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 14 11 12 24 21 22 + IN1 IN2 -
STANDBY DEVICE
LSP GLOBAL
DDI PROTECTION ALARM
AUXILIARY A1
REMOTE TRIPPING
WINDOW CHOICE
SUPPLY
LOCAL CONTROL
A2
DDI FEEDBACK
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
18 22
18-26
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-16 standard, December 2012 edition - For medium voltage
PMVF 30...
Connection through VTs in Medium Voltage
Three-phase connection
MEDIUM VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 (OPTION)
Current input wiring not required
by Italian CEI 0-16
To use only with
CT connection (e.g. ARON) DDI
DG
TA1
GENERATION
Rear view
TA2
ON
1 2
I1 I2 I3
TV3 TV4 TV5 TV1 TV2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
OUTPUTS
OPTION
OPTION
INPUTS
IN1 – DDI Feedback
IN2 – Interface protection exclusion
IN3 – Local control A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
IN4 – Remote tripping
(OPTIONAL EXP10 03)
GENERATION
TA2
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
OPTION
OPTION
IN4 – Remote tripping
INPUTS
(OPTIONAL EXP10 03)
A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
18
--- + VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT
50 - 500V~ AC MEASUREMENTS
A1 A2 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
22
18-27
Protection relays
Technical characteristics
Voltage monitoring relays
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated voltage 208-240VAC 208-480VAC 100-240VAC 208-240VAC
to control (Ue) 380-440VAC 208-575VAC 380-575VAC
380-600VAC 600VAC
Maximum voltage set-point 105-115% Ue — — — —
Minimum voltage set-point 80-95% Ue — — 80-95% Ue —
Asymmetry set-point — — — — 5-15%Ue
Minimum and maximum –– –– –– –– ––
frequency set-point
Tripping time 0.1-20s 60ms 0.1-20s
Resetting time 0.1-20s 0.5s 0.1-20s
(0.5s at power up) (0.5s at power up)
Resetting hysteresis 3% 5% 3%
Instantaneous tripping for Ue <70% Ue configured Umin<70% Umax <70% Ue configured <70% minimum Ue
Repeat accuracy < ±0-1% < ±1% < ±0.1% < ±0.1%
POWER SUPPLY
Auxiliary voltage (Us) Self powered
Operating range 0.7-1.2Ue 0.85-1.1Ue 0.7-1.2Ue
Frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Power consumption (maximum) 10VA (208-240VAC) 20VA 28VA 11VA (208-240VAC)
17VA (380-440VAC) 30VA (380-575VAC)
19VA (600VAC)
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.5W 2.2W 2.5W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1
Relay state Normally enegised
De-energises at tripping
Contact arrangement 1 changeover SPDT
Rated operational voltage 250VAC
Maximum switching voltage 400VAC
Conventional free-air thermal 8A
current (Ith)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 B300
designation
Electrical life 105 cycles
18 (with rated load)
Mechanical life 30x106 cycles
Indications 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
and tripping and tripping and tripping
2 red LEDs for tripping 1 red LED for tripping
CONNECTIONS
Terminal tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA)
(maximum)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
INSULTION (input-output)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 440VAC 480VAC 600VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 4kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature –20...+60°C
Storage temperature –30...+80°C
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Power consumption (maximum) at 50Hz.
18-28
Protection relays
Technical characteristics
Voltage monitoring relays
— — — — — —
PMV50 PMV60 PMV70 — — —
— — — PMV50 N PMV70 N PMV80 N
Minimum and maximum Minimum AC voltage, Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum
AC voltage, phase loss and phase loss, AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage and frequency,
incorrect phase sequence incorrect phase sequence incorrect phase sequence neutral loss and incorrect neutral loss, incorrect phase phase loss, neutral loss and
and asymmetry and asymmetry phase sequence sequence and asymmetry incorrect phase sequence
Self powered
0.7-1.2Ue
50/60Hz ±5%
11VA (208-240VAC) 27VA max
30VA (380-575VAC)
19VA (600VAC)
2.5W 1.9W max
1 2
Normally energised
De-energises at tripping
1 changeover SPDT 2 changeover SPDT
250VAC
400VAC
8A
B300
105 cycles
18
30x106 cycles
1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
and tripping and tripping and tripping
2 red LEDs for tripping 3 red LEDs for tripping 2 red LEDs for tripping
600VAC
6kV
4kV
–20...+60°C
–30...+80°C
Self-extinguishing polyamide
18-29
Protection relays
Technical characteristics
Current monitoring relays
18-30
Protection relays
Technical characteristics
Pump protection and phase shift monitoring relays
18-31
Protection relays
Technical characteristics
Frequency monitoring relay
TYPE PMF20
DESCRIPTION Single-phase minimum and maximum frequency control
FREQUENCY CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated frequency 50 or 60Hz selectable
Operating frequency range 40-70Hz
Adjustment MAX tripping 101-110% operating frequency
MIN tripping90-99% operating frequency
Resetting hysteresys 0.5%
Inhibition time 0.1-20s
Reset delay 0.1-20s
Resetting Automatic
Repeat accuracy < ±0.1%
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary supply voltage Us 220-240VAC
380-415VAC
Operating range 0.85-1.1 Us
Rated frequency 50/60Hz
Power consumption (maximum) 10VA (220-240VAC); 17VA (380-415VAC)
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.5W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1
Relay state Normally energised, de-energises at tripping
Contact arrangement 1 changeover contact SPDT
Rated operational voltage 250VAC
Maximum switching voltage 400VAC
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith 8A
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation B300
Electrical life (with rated load) 105 cycles
Mechanical life 30x106 cycles
Indications 1 green LED for power on/tripping
2 red LEDs for min-max tripping
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
INSULATION (input - output)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 575V
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 4kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature –20...+60°C
Storage temperature –30...+80°C
18 HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping with MAX function configured.
18-32
Protection relays
Technical characteristics
Interface protection system units
18-33
Protection relays
Technical characteristics
Interface protection system units
18-34
Protection relays
Technical characteristics
Interface protection system units
TYPE PMVF 30
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
Rated control supply voltage Us 100–400VAC/110–250VDC
Operating limits 90–440VAC/93.5–300VDC
Frequency 45–55Hz
Power consumption alimentazione AC 7.5VA at 110VAC; 10VA at 230VAC; 14VA at 400VAC
alimentazione DC 35mA at 110VDC; 14mA at 250VDC
Power dissipation alimentazione AC 4W at 110VAC; 4.2W at 220V; 5W at 400VAC
alimentazione DC 3.8W at 110VAC; 4W at 250VDC
Micro-breaking immunity 30ms at 110VAC ; 140ms at 230VAC
Overload category III
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated operating voltage 50-500VAC (for voltages/frequency) / 50-150V (for residual voltage measurement)
Measuring range (Un) 400-150,000V (VT primary)
Frequency range 45 – 55Hz
Overload category IV
CURRENT INPUTS (OPTIONAL)
Rated operational current Ie 1A or 5A in AC programmable
Measuring range For 1A scale: 0.01–1.2A; for 5A scale: 0.01–6A
Type of input Shunts powered by external current transformer (low voltage) 5A max.
Type of measurement RMS
Overload capacity ±100% Ie
Overload peak 50A for 1 second
Burden (per phase) 0.3W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 2
Type of output 1 changeover contact/SPDT each
Rated operating voltage 250VAC
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation 5A 250VAC AC1 /B300; 5A 30VDC
Overload category III
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number and type of inputs 4 negative (NPN)
Input voltage 24VDC isolated
Input current 7mA
SUPPLY/VOLTAGE MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Screw - removable
Number of terminals 2 for power supply; 5 for voltage control
Conductor section (min - max) 0.2-2.5mm² (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
CURRENT MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal Screw - fixed
18
Number of terminals 6 for external CT connections
Conductor section (min - max) 0.2-4mm² (26-10 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin)
RELAY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Type and (number) of terminals Screw – removable (3)
Conductor section (min - max) 0.2-2.5 mm² (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5 lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS – Input terminals
Type and (number) of terminals Screw – removable (4)
Conductor section (min - max) 0.2-1.5 mm² (28-14 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.18Nm (1.7lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS – COM and auxiliary voltage terminals
Type and (number) of terminals Screw – removable (3)
Conductor section (min - max) 0.2-2.5 mm² (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
Version Flush mount 96x96mm / 3.78x3.78”
18-35
Page 19-2 Page 19-5 Page 19-6
SEC. - PAGE
Level monitoring relays
Modular version for conductive liquids .............................................................................................................................. 19 - 2
Modular starter kit ............................................................................................................................................................ 19 - 4
Plug-in level control relays for conductive liquids .............................................................................................................. 19 - 4
Electrodes and electrode holder. Rod probes ...................................................................................................................... 19 - 5
Start-up priority change relays
Modular version ................................................................................................................................................................. 19 - 6
Plug-in version .................................................................................................................................................................. 19 - 6
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 19 - 7
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 19 - 8
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 19 - 9
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 19 - 12
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Level control relays
Modular version
Single-voltage relay Order code Supply Type of Qty Weight Operational characteristics
voltage output per – Use with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
contacts pkg – 2.5-50kOhm adjustable sensitivity
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Double insulation between supply, electrodes and
output relay circuit
Automatic resetting. – Fixed probe signal delay: <1s
LVM20 A024 24VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 – Green LED indicator for power on
LVM20 A127 110-127VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 – Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
LVM20 A240 220-240VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
LVM20 A415 380-415VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
Multi-voltage relay Order code Supply Type of Qty Weight Operational characteristics
voltage output per – Use with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
contacts pkg – 2.5-100kOhm adjustable sensitivity
[V] n° [kg] – Insensivity to stray electrode-cable capacitance
– Programming selector for emptying or filling function
Emptying or filling function. with fail-safe operation
Automatic resetting. – Double insulation between supply, electrodes and
LVM25 240 24-240VAC/DC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.095 output relay circuit
– Fixed probe signal delay: <1s
– Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
LVM25 240
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Level
control relays.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Dual-voltage relay Order code Supply Type of Qty Weight Operational characteristics
voltage output per – Use with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
contacts pkg – 2.5-50kOhm adjustable sensitivity
19 [V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Programming selector for emptying or filling function
with fail-safe operation
Emptying or filling function. – Double insulation between each supply, electrode and
Automatic resetting. output relay circuit
LVM30 A240 24/220-240VAC 2 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.315 – Adjustable probe signal delay: 1-10s
LVM30 A415 110-127VAC 2 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.315 – Adjustable pump start delay: 0-300s
380-415VAC – Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
COM
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5.
31 LV1E...
Electrodes and electrode holders
Use electrodes or electrode holders type:
SN1/PS31/PS3S/SCM/CGL or similar. See page 19-5.
19
Plug-in Order code Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics
dual-voltage relay supply output per – Used with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
voltage contact pkg – 7-8kOhm fixed sensitivity
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Maximum relay-electrode cable length: 500m/547yd
Automatic reset. using single-core double insulated cables
31 LV2E 48 24-48VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266 – 11-pin plug-in housing
31 LV2E 220 110-120VAC/ 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266 – Mounting on 35mm (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail using
220-240VAC 31 S11 socket; see page 19-7
– Flush mounting using mount frame 31 G216 and
31 LV2E 400 220-240/ 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266 loose 31 L48 P11 socket; see page 19-7
380-415VAC – IEC degree of protection: IP30.
Reference standards
31 LV2E... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5.
PS31 ELECTRODE
A small electrode holder, complete with three AISI 304
31 CGL125... stainless steel probes.
Particularly suited to small containers whenever pressure is
maximum up to 2 bar.
Maximum operating temperature: +70°C.
1/2" GAS threaded coupling
Faston termination; relative lugs standard supplied
Application: Tanks and automatic dispensers.
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5.
31 PS3S
19
Rod probes Order code Rod probe length Qty Wt General characteristics
per Stainless steel AISI 304 probes with 4M or 6M threaded
pkg extremity suitable as extensions for SCM electrode or as rod
probe for PS3S a holder.
[mm/in] n° [kg] See page 19-7 for SCM electrode extension coupler unit.
For SCM electrodes.
31 ASTA 46O MM4 460/18.11 1 0.053
31 ASTA 96O MM4 960/37.8 1 0.103
For PS3S electrode holder.
31 ASTA 46O MM6 460/18.11 1 0.100
31 ASTA 96O MM6 960/37.8 1 0.210
Accessories Dimensions
page 19-7 page 19-8 19-5
Level control relays
Start-up priority change relays
19
Dimensions
page 19-8 19-7
Level control relays
Dimensions [mm (in)]
(2.99”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
(4.12”)
(4.12”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
(1.77)
(3.87”)
104.7
(1.77)
(4.12”)
(3.54”)
104.7
(3.87”)
98.3
76
(1.77)
104.7
98.3
98.3
90
98.3
45
90
45
90
45
14 (0.55”)
59.9 97
59.9 (2.36”) Ø4.2 Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36”) (3.82”)
Ø4.2 (0.16”) (2.36”)
(LVM25... only) (0.16”) (LVM30... and LVM40... only)
(0.16”)
(1.57”) (0.79”)
(1.85”)
(1.89”)
53
47
48
18 (0.71”)
21 (0.83”)
22 (0.87”) 25 (0.98”)
2" GAS
(0.90”)
(3.94”)
3/8" GAS
23
(1.38”)
35
L
TYPE L TYPE L
(11.81”)
SCM04 43 (1.69”) CGL125 3 327 (12.87”)
300
L
4 (0.16”)
6 (0.24”)
Ø4 Ø6
(0.79”)
(0.16”) (0.24”)
20
M4
7 (0.27”)
M4 M6
Accessories
S8 - S11 L48 P8 L48 P11 RE014
38 27 43.5 20.5 47 20.5 16
(1.50”) (1.06”) (1.71”) (0.81”) (1.85”) (0.81”) (0.63”)
(1.85”)
(1.30”)
(1.30”)
(1.71”)
43.5
47
33
33
(2.56”)
65
(3.07”)
78
(2.36”)
60
19
40.5
(1.59”)
G216 Cutout
48 21 72 39
(1.89”) (0.83”) (2.83”) (1.53”)
(3.38”)
(3.78”)
(2.99”)
86
96
76
Ø4
(0.16”)
19-8
Level control relays
Wiring diagrams
Emptying function
LVM20 Emptying function with 3 electrodes Emptying function with 2 electrodes
COM
MAX
COM
MAX
MIN
MIN
LVM20
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
LVM20 LVM20
A2 A2
0VAC -MAX ON ON A1
A1
-MIN
-COM
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
COM
MAX
DELAY ❶
MIN
PROBE SIGNAL
COM
MAX
MIN
DELAY ❶
24-240VAC/DC
0VAC -MAX
-MIN SUPPLY SUPPLY
-COM ON ON
RELAY RELAY
LVM30 24 24
❷ 21 21
22 22
LVM30
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
MAX
DELAY ❶
COM
MAX
MIN
19
SUPPLY SUPPLY
ON ON
RELAY RELAY
24 24
❷ 21 21
22 22
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
19-9
Level control relays
Wiring diagrams
MAX 1
MAX 2
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➋
LVM40
A2
A1 A2 COM MIN2 MIN1 MAX1 MAX2 13 14 22 24 21 ON A1
24VAC 14
110-127VAC 13
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
-MAX2 24
0VAC -MAX1 21
-MIN1 22
-MIN2
-COM
Filling function + alarms
MAX 1
MAX 2
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➋ ➋ ➋ ➋
A2
ON A1
14
13
24
21
22
➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊
A2
ON A1
14
13
5 sec
24
21
22
➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊
A2
ON A1
19 14
13
5 sec
24
21
22
➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➊
Tank
MAX 2
MIN 2
COM
Well
A2
ON A1
14
Probe signal and starting delay 13
19-10
Level control relays
Wiring diagrams
Emptying function
LV1E Emptying function with 3 electrodes Emptying function with 2 electrodes
LV1E
COM
MAX
COM
MAX
MIN
6 5 1 8 7 2 3 4
24VAC
110-120VAC LV1E LV1E
220-240VAC -MAX 5
5
380-415VAC -MIN 6
6
0VAC -COM
RELAY RELAY
LV2E
LV2E 3 3
4 4
2 2
LV2E LV2E
9-10 9-10
11 11
9 10 11 7 5 6 4 3 1
RELAY RELAY
48VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC 3 3
1 1
24VAC 4 4
110-120VAC -MAX
220-240VAC -MIN
0VAC -COM
A2 14 24
14
13
24
13
LVMP10
2-wire connection
A1 14 24 A2
ON
A1
Relay 1 Relay 2
C1 C
S1
A2 C S1 S2 C R1 R2 13 23
C2 C
C1 C2
S2
13
RELAY 1 14
C1 = Primary 23
C2 = Secondary / Standby RELAY 2 24
DELAY
3-wire connection
A1 14 24
ON
A2
A1 19
Relay 1 Relay 2
C1 C
S1
A2 C S1 S2 C R1 R2 13 23
C3 C
C1 C2 C3 C4 R1
C2 C
S2
C4 C
R2
C1 = Start Primary 13
C2 = Start Standby RELAY 1 14
C3 = Stop Primary
23
C4 = Stop Standby RELAY 2
24
DELAY
CSP2E
F1 24VAC 110VAC
220VAC 230-240VAC
2 1 11
CSP2E
Relay 1 Relay 2
10 4 6 8 5 7 3 9
C1 C2
FR1 FR2
C1 = PRIMARY
C2 = SECONDARY/STANDBY K1 K2
MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2
19-11
Level control relays
Technical characteristics
19 CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin er UL/CSA)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation 415VAC 240VAC 415VAC 415VAC
voltage Ui
IEC rated impulse wihstand 6kV 4kV 6kV 6kV
voltage Uimp
IEC power frequency withstand 4kV 2kV 4kV 4kV
voltage
Double insulation ≤250VAC ≤250VAC ≤250VAC ≤250VAC
Supply/relay/electrode
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature –20...+60°C
Storage temperature –30...+80°C
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Typical configuration LVM20 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes LVM25 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes
(examples) LVM30 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes LVM40 + n° 5 SN1 electrodes
Maximum cable length
Double insulaton between supply, electrodes and output relay circuit.
Voltage applied to input contacts, not insulated at power supply.
Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
19-12
Level control relays
Technical characteristics
0.8-1.1 Ue 50/60Hz
5.5VA 1.6VA 4.8VA 5VA
2.8W 0.9W 3W 3W
3 –– –– ––
Electrodes and electrode holders: SN1 / SCM / CGL / PS31 / PS3S / or similar –– –– ––
9VAC (voltage between probes) –– –– ––
7 - 8kohm adjustable –– –– ––
≤50ms –– –– ––
≤100ms –– –– ––
–– –– –– ––
–– –– –– ––
1 2 2 2
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping
1 changeover contact / SPDT 1 N/O - SPST 1 N/O - SPST 1 N/O - SPST
19
–– 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin er UL/CSA) ––
–– 0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA) ––
––
–20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
19-13
Page 20-4 Page 20-4
SEC. - PAGE
Micro PLCs
Base modules .................................................................................................................................................................. 20 - 4
Expansion and communication modules.......................................................................................................................... 20 - 4
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 20 - 5
Starter kits .................................................................................................................. 20 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 20 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 20 - 6
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 20 - 6
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Micro PLCs
REPETITIVENESS
- Less errors during panel building
- Considerable time saving.
FLEXIBILITY
- Quick correction of abnormal conditions at final testing
- Fast changes on control boards.
FUNCTIONS
20-2
Micro PLCs
HMI INTERFACE
LRX P01 is an HMI operator panel, used with many types of PLCs or
other intelligent controllers equipped with communication port.
By using the HMI, the values of both PLC inner registers and relay status
can be monitored and changed with the keys or LEDs.
In this way, machinery and equipment functioning results to be simple
and direct.
The LRX SW P01 editor software permits to make dedicated screens by
taking advantage of the graphic display to view bitmaps, bar graphs and
trend lines.
Images Display bar graphs and trend lines Write numerical values
COMMUNICATION MODES
RS232 20
RS485
20-3
Micro PLCs
Accessories Order Description Qty Wt Power supply unit and backup memory caracteristics
code per – The LRX 1V3 D024 power supply produces a
pkg direct-current voltage to power the base and
n° [kg] expansion modules in circumstances when 24VDC is
not available in the application. The power supply can
Accessories. also be used to power eventual 24VDC auxiliary
LRX M00 Program backup 1 0.011 circuits.
memory – The LRX M00 backup memory allows to save the
LRX C00 PC (RS232)-LRD 1 0.083 user’s program and to simply and quickly transfer it
connecting cable, to the base modules.
1.5m/5ft long
LRX P01 panel general characteristics
LRX C03 PC (USB)-LRD 1 0.080 – 24VDC power supply
LRX 1V3 D024 connecting cable, – RS232 communication port:
1.5/5ft long • Direct connection to using LRX C00
LRX SW Programming and 1 0.057 • Connection to other devices using a standard
supervision software D-SUB 9 serial cable
(CD-ROM) – RS485 communication port
LRX 1V3 D024 Power supply unit, 1 0.220 – LRX SW P01 editor software for specific pages and
LRX C00 easy use.
100-240VAC/24VDC, 1.3A
FUNCTIONS
LRX D00 User’s manual Italian 1 0.400 – Send commands
edition (paper) – Read status
LRX D01 User’s manual English 1 0.400 – Provide static and dynamic texts
edition (paper) – Write variables
LRX D02 User’s manual Spanish 1 0.400 – Read variables:
edition (paper) • Numerical value
• Bar graph
LRX D03 User’s manual French 1 0.400 • Trend line.
LRX P01 edition (paper)
LRX P01 HMI operator panel, 1 0.200 Programming
24VDC, RS232, RS485 At any time and with extreme simplicity, can be
(Modbus®-RTU Master) set up and reprogrammed to satisfy new requirements
LRX C02 PC-LRX P01 connecting 1 0.180 and improve the operation of a system.
cable Programming is simple and intuitive and can be done
directly on the base module keypad or by personal
LRX SW P01 LRX P01 editor software 1 0.057 computer, connected by LRX C00 (RS232) or LRX C03
(CD-ROM) (USB) interface and using the relative LRX SW software.
With a personal computer, two programming language
locs can be used: FBD (Function Block Diagrams) and
LADDER (contact scheme).
LRX C02
Both of the following can be accomplieshed:
– Simulate the program directly “off-line” on a personal
computer to test if it runs correctly.
Starter kits Starter kits. – Use the supervision mode to check the project
LRDKIT 12R D024 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424 “on-line”.
with LRD12R D024 base There are 8 function keys on front, dedicated to on-
module, LRX SW software board adjustment, control and supervision of digital
and LRX C03 cable input and output status, analog input values, time and
date entry and the operation status of the itself.
LRDKIT 12R A024 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424
with LRD12R A024 base
Certifications and compliance
module, LRX SW software
Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada
and LRX C03 cable
(cULus - File E300049), as Programmable Controllers for
LRDKIT 10R A240 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424 power supply and HMI units anbd base module of kits.
with LRD10R A240 base Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61131-2, UL508,
module, LRX SW software CSA C22.2 n°142.
and LRX C03 cable
Maximum combinations
20
+ - I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4
4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC
L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V
Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A
Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4
Base unit 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 PT100 2 outputs, 2 outputs, 4 inputs, RS485
12 inputs + + + temperature 0-10V or 0-10V or 0-10V or Modbus-RTU
+ 4 outputs 4 outputs 4 outputs sensor inputs 0-20mA 0-20mA 0-20mA
8 outputs
• 24 digital inputs (4 configurable as analog 0-10V input) • 4 analog outputs configurable as 0-10V or 0/4-20mA
• 20 digital outputs (relay, transistor or mixed) • 4 analog inputs configurable as 0-10V or 0/4-20mA
• 4 analog inputs for PT100 temperature sensors • 1 RS485 slave communication module.
N.B. The sequence of the products given above must be respected for correct operation.
BASE MODULES
LRD10... - LRD12... LRD20... LRE... expansion/communication module
5 54.6 (2.15”) 5 54.6 (2.15”) 38 5 54.3 (2.14”)
72 (2.83”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”) 126 (4.96”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”) 8 (1.50”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”)
(0.31”)
106 (4.17”)
106 (4.17”)
106 (4.17”)
98 (3.86”)
90 (3.54”)
45 (1.77”)
68 (2.68”)
45 (1.77”)
98 (3.86”)
68 (2.68”)
90 (3.54”)
98 (3.86”)
45 (1.77”)
90 (3.54”)
68 (2.68”)
Ø4.5 Ø4.5 Ø4.5
(0.18”) 80 (3.15”) (0.18”)
(0.18”)
LRX1V3 D024 power supply unit LRX P01 HMI operator panel Cutout
72 (2.83”) 5 52.3 (2.06”) 179.5 (7.07”) 165 (6.50”)
60 (2.36”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”)
85.5 (3.37”)
101.5(4.00”)
87 (3.42”)
97.9 (3.85”)
106 (4.17”)
45 (1.77”)
68 (2.68”)
90 (3.54”)
5.5
(0.22”)
163.5 (6.44”)
Ø4.5 33
(0.18”) (1.30”)
Wiring diagrams
BASE MODULES
LRD12R D024 LRD12T D024 LRD12R A024 LRD10R A240
24VDC DIGITAL 24VDC DIGITAL
24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 24VAC 24VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 + – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT
INPUT INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
+ – + – + – + –
24VDC
+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A1 A2 A3 A4 + – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A B
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG
INPUT INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT
20 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
+ – + – + – + – X1 X2 X3 X4
DIGITAL INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
Accessories
LRE08T D024 LRE08R A024 LRE08R A240 LRX 1V3 D024 LRE P00 - LRX P01
24VDC 24VDC 24VAC 24VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC 24VDC
+ – X1 X2 X3 X4 L N X1 X2 X3 X4 L N X1 X2 X3 X4 L N + –
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT
20-6
Micro PLCs
Technical characteristics
BASE MODULE TYPE LRD... D012 LRD... D024 LRD... A024 LRD... A240
POWER SUPPLY
IEC rated voltage Ue (frequency range) 12VDC 24VDC 24VAC (50-60Hz) 100-240VAC (50-60Hz)
Operating limits 10.4-14.4VDC 20.4-28.8VDC 20.4-28.8VAC (47-63Hz) 85-265VAC (47-63Hz)
Average current consumption 265mA 125mA (LRD12...) 290mA 100mA
185mA (LRD20...)
DIGITAL INPUTS
Rated voltage 12VDC 24VDC 24VAC (50-60Hz) 100-240VAC (50-60Hz)
Input voltage State 0 < 2.5VDC < 5VDC < 6VAC < 40VAC
State 1 > 7.5VDC > 15VDC > 14VAC > 79VAC
Delay time 0 to 1 4ms 4ms 90ms 50/45ms (Ue=120VAC) -
(0.5ms for high speed) (0.5ms for high speed) 22/18ms (Ue=240VAC)
1 to 0 4ms 4ms 90ms 50/45ms (Ue=120VAC) -
(0.3ms for high speed) (0.3ms for high speed) 90/85ms (Ue=240VAC)
ANALOG INPUTS FOR DC VERSIONS ONLY
Input signal range 0-10V –– ––
Display resolution 0.01V –– ––
Conversion 12bit –– ––
Current cunsumption at 10VDC < 0.17mA –– ––
Input impedance < 1kΩ –– ––
Admissible overload 14VDC 28VDC –– ––
Sampling time 5-20ms (LADDER); 2-10ms (FBD)
Maximum cable length ≤ 30m/98ft of screened type –– ––
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Type of output / IEC rated current Ith Relay / 8A (LDR...R... / LRE08R... only)
Transistor / 0.3A 24VDC (LRD...T... / LRE08T... only)
Applied voltage 12-240VAC / 12-30VDC (LDR...R... / LRE08R... only)
10-28.8VDC (LRD...T... / LRE08T... only)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+55°C
Storage temperature -40...+70°C
Relative humidity 20-90% without condensation
HOUSING
Version Modular for mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or M4x15mm screw fixing
Connections Type of terminal Screw
Conductor section 0.14-2.5mm2 / 26-14AWG
Tightening torque 0.6Nm / 0.4lbft
Maximum cable length ≤ 100m/328ft
IEC degree of protection IP20
20-7
Page 21-2 Page 21-3
SEC. - PAGE
Modular switching power supplies
Single phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 2
Switching power supplies
Single phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Two phase ......................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Three phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 21 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 21 - 5
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 21 - 6
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Switching power supplies
Modular power supplies
Operational characteristics
– Rated supply voltage: 100-240VAC
PSL1M 033 12 – Rated output voltage: 12VDC for PSL1M...12 types;
PSL1M 036 24 24VDC for PSL1M...24 types
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
– Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer
– High efficiency up to 89%
– 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting
– Screw connection terminals
– Modular DIN 43880 housing; number of modules:
• 1 for PSL1M 010...
• 2 for PSL1M 024...
• 3 for PSL1M 033 12 and PSL1M 036 24
• 4 for PSL1M 054 12 and PSL1M 060 24
• 5 for PSL1M 072 12 and PSL1M 100 24
– IEC degree of protection: IP20 on terminals.
21
PSL3 240 24
21
PSL3 480 24
PSL3 960 24
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
91
45
91
45
91
45
96
96
96
PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 060 24 PSL1M 72 12 - PSL1M 100 24
50.6 50.6
(1.99”) (1.99”)
72 44 90 44
(2.83”) 5.6 (1.73”) (3.54”) 5.6 (1.73”)
(0.22”) (0.22”)
(3.58”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(1.77”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
91
91
45
45
96
96
A C
TYPE A B C
PSL1 005 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 010 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 018 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 030 24 40.5 (1.59”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
B
21
21-4
Switching power supplies
Wiring diagrams
L N L N L N L N
Open collector
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
L N GND L1 L2 L3 GND Two-phase connection is admissible with a 25% output power derating.
OUTPUT OUTPUT
+ + – – RDY RDY + + – – RDY RDY
24VDC 24VDC
21
21-5
Switching power supplies
Technical characteristics
TYPE Single phase PSL1M 010 12 - PSL1M 024 12 - PSL1M 033 12 - PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 072 12 -
PSL1M 010 24 PSL1M 024 24 PSL1M 036 24 PSL1M 060 24 PSL1M 100 24
Two phase — — — — —
Three phase — — — — —
INPUT CHARACTERITICS
Rated supply voltage Multivoltage 100-240VAC
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal Screw
Conductor section Input
min-max 0.4-2.5mm2 0.2- 2.5mm2
Output (26-12AWG) (24-12AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -25...+71°C
Storage temperature -25...+85°C
Derating >60°C 2.5%/°C
21 HOUSING
Material Plastic
No replacement by user.
Two-phase connection is possible with 25% power derating, PSL2 100 24 excluded.
Minimum load of 150mA.
Maximum surrounding temperature of 50°C for use according to UL508.
21-6
Switching power supplies
Technical characteristics
PSL1 005 24 PSL1 010 24 PSL1 018 24 PSL1 030 24 PSL1 060 24 PSL1 100 24 PSL1 120 24 PSL1 240 24 PSL1 300 24 PSL1 480 24 — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — PSL2 100 24 — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — PSL3 120 24 PSL3 240 24 PSL3 480 24 PSL3 960 24
24VDC
21.6-28.8VDC 24-28VDC 22.5-28.5VDC
0.21A 0.42A 0.75A 1.25A 2.5A 4.2A 5A 10A 12.5A 20A 4.2A 5A 10A 20A 40A
0.03%/°C 0.03%/°C
±1% 0.5% ±1% ±0.5% ±1%
±2% 0.5% ±1%
72% 76% 77% 86% 89% 88% 86% 89% 89% 87% 89% 90% 90% 92%
110-135% 110-145% 110-140% 110-150% 110-140% 110-145% 120-145% 110-140% 115-135% 120-140% 110-135% 125-145%
Hiccup Fold forward Fold forward Hiccup Fold forward Hiccup
50mV 100mV 50mV 100mV 80mV
–– 3 2 –– 2 2 2
Yes
Yes –– –– Yes
–– Yes (transistor output) Yes (relay output) Yes Yes (relay output)
(19.1VDC) (17.6VDC) (transistor) (17.6VDC)
(60VDC)
Screw
0.2-4mm2
0.4-2.5mm2 0.2-4mm2 (24-10AWG)
(26-12AWG) (24-10AWG) 0.5-10mm2
(20-6AWG)
4-5mm/0.15-0.2in 8mm/0.3in 10mm/0.4in
1Nm/0.75lbft 1Nm/0.75lbft
0.5Nm/0.42lbft 0.6Nm/0.46lbft 0.6Nm/0.46lbft 1.7Nm/
1.3lbft
-20...+71°C -25...+71°C
-25...+85°C
2.5%/°C 3.5%/°C
21
Plastic Metal Plastic Metal
21-7
Page 22-2
Page 22-2
Page 22-3
SEC. - PAGE
Automatic battery chargers for lead-acid batteries
Switching BCF series, modular version .............................................................................................................................. 22 - 2
Switching BCG series ........................................................................................................................................................ 22 - 2
Linear BCE series .............................................................................................................................................................. 22 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 22 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 22 - 4
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 22 - 5
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Automatic battery chargers
Switching BCF and BCG series
For lead-acid batteries. Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Modular version output output per – Switching technology
current voltage pkg – Wide auxiliary supply range
in DC – Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
[A] [V] n° [kg] Protection:
– Mains input fuse
1 charging level. – Battery output fuse
BCF 0250 12 2.5 1 0.332 – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
12 terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload
BCF 0450 12 4.5 1 0.332
– Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
LED indications:
BCF 0125 24 1.25 1 0.332 – Correct output voltage
24 – Reverse battery polarity.
BCF... BCF 0250 24 2.5 1 0.332
Operational characteristics
U VDC ON BAT LOW – Auxiliary supply voltage
Alarms GREEN LED RED LED RELAY • 100-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±5%
b Correct output ON OFF Energised – Fixed charging current
Uc
a
voltage – Current limitation
Reverse ON ON Energised – Charging current according to DIN 41773 standards
0.5Uc
polarity – Fixed clamping screw terminal block with captive screws
– IEC degree of protection: IP20.
Short circuit/ OFF OFF De-energised
Ic
Overload Alarm output circuit
I
– Type of output: 3A 250VAC AC1 duty relay, normally
a - constant current charge energised.
b - constant voltage charge Type Maximum power Internal fuse
consumption dissipation mains side
Certifications and compliance
[VA] [W] [W] [A] Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
BCF 0250 12 80 40 6 2 Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies -
BCF 0450 12 150 70 9 2 Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use as
BCF 0125 24 80 39 6 2 components of complete workshop-assembled equipment.
BCF 0250 24 150 77 9 2 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1,
Not replaceable. IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 60950-1,
CSA C22.2 n°60950-1.
For non-sealed and sealed Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
output output per – Switching technology
lead-acid batteries current voltage pkg – Wide auxiliary supply range
in DC – High efficiency
– Two charging voltages selectable by DIP-switch
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Boost external control for full battery charging
1 charging level. – Hiccup function for battery recharging when its voltage
BCG 06 12 6 1 0.532 is lower than 50% rated value
12 – Charging current limiting trimmer resistor
BCG 12 12 12 1 0.710 – Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
Protection:
BCG 05 24 5 1 0.532 – Input fuse on AC side
24 – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
BCG 10 24 10 1 0.710 terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload
Accessories. – Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
BCG... BCG X00 Adapter for DIN rail 1 0.022 LED indications:
vertical mount of – Power on
BCG 06 12 and BCG05 24 – Charging operation (I>30% Ic)
– Overload or short circuit conditions
– Reverse battery polarity.
U
Alarms ON REV ALA CHG RELAY
b GRN RED RED YEL Operational characteristics
Uc – Auxiliary supply voltage:
LED LED LED RED
a 110-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±10%
Correct output ON OFF OFF OFF Energ. – Charging voltage selectable by DIP-switch
0.5Uc voltage • Non-sealed lead-acid batteries
Charging ON OFF OFF ON Energ. • Sealed lead-acid batteries
Low battery ON OFF ON ON Energ. – Maximum charging current setting by front
Ic I potentiometer: 20-100% rated value
22 a - constant current charge
voltage
Reverse OFF ON OFF OFF De-energ.
– Current limitation
b - constant voltage charge – Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards
polarity – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
Short circuit / ON OFF ON OFF De-energ.
Overload Alarm output circuit
Steady light if the charging current is more than approx. 30% of – Type of output: 5A 30VDC duty relay, normally
programmed current value. energised.
Flashing during Hiccup operating conditions.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
Type Maximum power Internal fuse Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies -
consumption dissipation Mains side (type T) Component.
[VA] [W] [W] [A] Products having this type of marking are intended for use
BCG 06 12 230 97 14 4 as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
BCG 12 12 284 290 29 6.3 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1,
BCG 05 24 364 158 20 6.3 IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 60950-1,
BCG 10 24 630 311 41 8 CSA C22.2 n°60950-1.
Not replaceable.
For lead-acid batteries Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
output output per – Linear technology
current voltage pkg – Housing for internal panel mounting by screws.
in DC Protection:
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Mains input fuse (except for BCE 2V5 and BCE 03)
– Battery output fuse
1 charging level. – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
31 BCE 0312 3 1 1.984 terminals, reverse battery polarity, output overload
31 BCE 0612 6 12 1 4.832 (<0.5 Ue) and disconnected battery.
LED Indications:
31 BCE 1212 12 1 8.690 – Power on
– Charge (I > 0.2 Ic)
31 BCE 2V524 2,5 1 1.992 – Alarm for protection tripping.
240 230 VA
VA VA C
C C
output. In alarm conditions with ALARM LED switched
90%
on or in absence of supply, the relay de-energises.
85%
Alarm output circuit
80% BCE 2V524 - BCE 0312
31 BCE 1212 – Type of output:
75%
31 BCE 1024 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C • Negative static; NPN transistor
Operating temperature • Maximum voltage applicable to load: +V battery
terminal
U • Maximum output current: 300mA
BCE 05 - BCE 06
• Maximum overload current for 1 second: 2A
b
Uc DERATING CURVE • Dynamic over-voltage protection with inductive load.
a 100%
230 220
240 VA VA
VA C C
C
90% • Relay: 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
• Rated voltage: 250VAC
Ic I 85% • IEC rated capacity in AC1 duty: 5A 250VAC Ith
• IEC rated capacity in DC13 or DC14 duty: 5A 30VDC
a - constant current charge 80%
• Electrical life: >105 cycles
b - constant voltage charge
75% • Mechanical life: >30x105 cycles.
50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C
Operating temperature The output is not overload or short-circuit protected. It is however
capable of switching on a 3W filament bulb.
BCE 10 - BCE 12
Certifications and compliance
DERATING CURVE Certifications obtained: EAC. 22
100%
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335-2-29.
Charging current
95%
230 220
VA V AC
C
90%
240
VA
C
85%
80%
75%
50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C
Operating temperature
45 (1.77”)
91 (3.58”)
96 (3.78”)
150.5 (5.92”)
145 (5.71”)
81.5 (3.21”)
80 (3.15”)
145 (5.71”)
151 (5.94”)
130 (5.12”)
63 (2.48”)
BCE 0312 - BCE 2V524
134 (5.27”) 100 (3.94”)
POWER ON
CHARGE
ALARM
65 (2.56”)
93 (3.66”)
100 (3.94”)
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
BATTERY
220-240V
BATTERY
FUSE
POWER
ALARM
OUT
- - +
120.5 (4.74”)
POWER ON
CHARGE
130 (5.12”)
ALARM
80 (3.15”)
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
BATTERY
220-240V
POWER
ALARM
OUT
230 (9.05”)
180 (7.09”)
FUSE
BATTERY
FUSE
COM NO NC
+
POWER
POWER ON
ALARM
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
220-240V
BATTERY
POWER
ALARM
FUSE
OUT
BATTERY
FUSE
COM NO NC
POWER
+
-
178 (7.01”)
22
Wiring diagrams
BCF... BCG... BCE 2V5... - BCE 03... BCE 05... - BCE 06... - BCE 10... - BCE 12...
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
CHARGING CONTROL CHARGING CONTROL
FUSE
FUSE
22-4
Automatic battery chargers
Technical characteristics
b
Uc a - constant current charge
a
0,5Uc
b - constant voltage charge
Ic I
End charging voltage Uc 12V battery with DIP2: 12V battery: 13.6VDC (2.27V/cell) 12V battery: 13.8VDC (2.3V/cell)
– in pos. V1: 13.8V 24V battery: 27.2VDC (2.27V/cell) 24V battery: 27.6VDC (2.3V/cell)
– in pos. V2: 13.5V (default).
24V battery with DIP2:
– in pos. V1: 27.6V
– in pos. V2: 27.0V (default)
Charging current Adjustable 20% to 100% Ic Fixed Adjustable 30% to 100% Ic
(using potentiometer/trimpot) (using potentiometer)
Current limit Yes
Boost +4.4% Uc — —
PROTECTION
– Mains supply fuse – Mains supply fuse – Mains supply fuse
– Charging inhibition due to: – Charging inhibition due to: (5, 6, 10, 12A types only)
• Short circuit at battery terminals • Short circuit at battery terminals – Battery output fuse
• Reverse battery polarity • Reverse battery polarity – Charging inhibition due to:
• Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc) • Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc) • Short circuit at battery terminals
• Output overload • Output overload • Reverse battery polarity
• Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc)
• Disconnected battery
ALARM OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Type of output 1 relay 1 relay Static (NPN transistor) ;
5A 30VDC 3A 250VAC AC1 relay with 1 c/o contact (SPDT),
5A 250VAC
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -30...+55°C -40...+51°C -10...+50°C
(+55...+70°C with 1-5%Ic/°C derating
by trimpot)
Storage temperature -30...+80°C -40...+85°C -30...+80°C
HOUSING
Version Internal panel mount Modular Internal panel mount
IEC degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP00
Cooling Natural
Connections Fixed terminals Fixed terminals Removable/plug-in terminals
Fixed terminals
For 2.5A and 3A types only.
For 5, 6, 10 and 12A types only.
22
22-5
Page 23-10 Page 23-15
SEC. - PAGE
Energy meters
Single phase .................................................................................................................................................................... 23 - 10
Single phase, MID certified .............................................................................................................................................. 23 - 11
Three phase with or without neutral ................................................................................................................................ 23 - 12
Three phase with neutral, MID certified ........................................................................................................................... 23 - 13
Three phase with or without neutral, UTF certified .......................................................................................................... 23 - 14
Data concentrator
General use ...................................................................................................................................................................... 23 - 15
For photovoltaic control and supervision ........................................................................................................................ 23 - 15
Digital metering instruments
Modular LCD multimeters ................................................................................................................................................ 23 - 16
Flush mount LCD multimeters ......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 18
Flush mount touch-screen LCD power analyzers ............................................................................................................ 23 - 19
Flush mount LED measuring instruments ....................................................................................................................... 23 - 20
Flush mount LED multimeters ......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 22
Modular LED measuring instruments .............................................................................................................................. 23 - 26
Modular LED multimeters ................................................................................................................................................ 23 - 28
Communication devices, protection covers, accessories .......................................................... 23 - 30
RS232/RS485 converter drive, cables, software, kits of current clamps ........................................ 23 - 31
Current transformers ...................................................................................................... 23 - 32
Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 23 - 34
Wiring diagrams............................................................................................................ 23 - 36
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 23 - 40
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital metering instruments
Installation supervision
DMG 900
+ EXP 1031
Energy Quality
MV/LV per EN 50160
transformer
room
DMG 800
+ EXP 1004
Temperature
control
M M M M
DME D310 T2 DME D300 T2 DME D100 T1 DME D110 T1 DME D120 T1
DME CD
23-2
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital metering instruments
Networks
with
software
Web browsing
of each instrument
Tablet,
connected in Ethernet
Wi-Fi Smartphone
SWITCH
Ethernet Internet VPN
EXP 1013
Ethernet
SMS,
e-mail
8+4 max with
EXM 10 …
EXP 1012 Server
Energy meters FTP
DME ... T1
DMG 300 DMG 800-900 DMG 800-900 DME CD with pulse outputs
+ + Data
EXM 1013 EXP 1013 concentrator Antenna GSM
+ CX03
EXM 1013
DMG 210
EXP 10 15
DMG 900
DMK… 8+6 max with
RS485 EXM 10 …
ETH-RS485
ETH-RS485
RS485
23
DMG 210
DMG 700
RS485
DMK…
DME CD
Data
concentrator
23-3
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital metering instruments
Quality analysis
per EN 50160
High versatility
Easy and intuitive consulting and
configuration.
Boolean logic
23
Diagnostics and control
Protection relays
23-4
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital metering instruments
Photovoltaic DC
installation AC
management
Option for distinct values
of import and export energy DMED energy meter:
ENERGY PRODUCED
ELECTRIC LINE
Contactors
APP: PV VIEW
23
PRIVILEGED
LOADS
Supervision option
remoted by
software (see Section 27)
If the distinct values of import and export energy need to be known, a third energy meter should be installed on the in-coming line; the exchanged energy is the difference between import and export energy with the power supplier.
The energy meters can be single or three phase based on the type of installation.
23-5
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital metering instruments
Main plant synoptic view Detailed pages of each user with status monitoring and
command sending
View trend lines Harmonic analysis in bar graph and table format
23
23-6
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital metering instruments
remote control
and supervision
software
Multiclient-server structure and
web-based application
with multi-language support
(including those of East Europe and Far East)
WI-FI
Only one software for many
LOVATO Electric devices ®
®
ON
DATA
Ethernet network
MENU
USB interface
Field
equipment
Multiclient structure
with three access levels
23
23-7
Metering instruments and current transformers
Flush mount version
Functions / Measurements DME M100 DME M100 T1 DME D100 T1 DME D110 T1 DME D115 T1 DME D120 T1 DME D121 DME D130
INSTALLATION
Connection Single phase
Direct 32A 32A 40A 40A 40A 63A 63A 63A
Through CT
MV usage
Built-in digital outputs 1 1 1 1 1
Pulse Pulse Programmable Programmable Programmable
Built-in digital inputs
Expandible
MID certified version
Version with UTF certificates
Current/Votlage accuracy ±0.5%
Active energy accuracy Class 1 /
(IEC/EN 62053-21/EN 50470-3) Class B
Degree of protection IP40
MEASUREMENTS
Active energy Total
Partial
Reactive energy Total
Partial
Separate energy count
Import - Export
Voltage
Current
Power Active power
Active power max demand max demand
Power factor only
Frequency
Cos
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)
Detailed hamonic analysis (orders)
Page 23-10/11 23-10/11 23-10 23-10/11 23-10/11
EXPANSION MODULES
Digital inputs/outputs
Analog inputs/outputs
Communication ports USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
GPRS-GSM modem
Type of memory
23
23-8
Metering instruments and current transformers
Modular version
DME D300 T2 DME D310 T2 DME D320 DMG 200 DMG 210 DMG 300 DMG 600 DMG 610 DMG 700 DMG 800 DMG 900 DMG 900T
2 to 31° 2 to 31° 2 to 63° 2 to 63°
23-12 to 14 23-12 23-16 23-17 23-18 23-18 23-19
USB USB USB USB USB USB USB
RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485
Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
Profibus Profibus
(SMS, email, Client FTP),
GPRS data connection
Data-logger Data-logger Data-logger Data-logger
+
Energy Quality
EN 50160
23
23-9
Metering instruments and current transformers
Energy meters
Multi-measurements:
- Total and partial active energy
- Active power
- Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
MAX - Maximum demand.
1
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
23-10 page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-36 pages 23-40 amd 41
Metering instruments and current transformers
Energy meters
MID
Multi-measurements:
- Total and partial active energy
- Total and partial reactive energy
- Voltage
- Current
- Active and reactive power
- Power factor
- Frequency
- Total and partial hour counter
- Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
23
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
neutral, non expandable per The energy meters are digital meters/analyzers of electric
pkg energy for systems with direct three-phase connection
n° [kg] or by CT.
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared
Digital meter for three phase with neutral. beam.
DME D300 T2 63A direct connection, 1 0.360
4U, 2 programmable Operational characteristics
static outputs, – Nominal supply voltage:
multi-measurements • 220-240VAC (L-N); 380-415VAC (L-L) for
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral. DME D300/310 T2
• 100-240VAC / 110-250VDC for DME D320
DME D320 Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332 – Voltage range:
secondary, 4U, • 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L) 50/60Hz for
RS485 interface, DME D300/310 T2
DME D300 T2 multi-measurements • 85-264VAC 50/60Hz; 93.5-300VDC for DME D320
– Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2
– Connection by CT /5A for DME D320 T2 and
DME D320
– Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 1
(IEC/EN 62053-21)
– Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
– Voltage measurement range: 20-830VAC L-L;
10-480VAC (L-N) for DME D320
– LCD multifunction meter
– Metrological LED with pulse emission for
consumption indication
– Clearable partial active energy measurements
DME D320 – 1 programmable digital input except DME D320
– 2 programmable static outputs except DME D320
– Built-in RS485 port for DME D320 and optional for
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt DME D310 T2; compatible with software
neutral, expandable per – Optic interface for EXM series expansion modules
pkg with DME D310 T2
n° [kg] – Modular housing, 4 module
– Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral. – IEC/UL/CSA degree of protection: IP51 on front;
DME D310 T2 Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332 IP20 at terminals.
secondary, 2 programmable
static outputs, 4U, supervision and energy management software
multi-measurements , See Section 27.
expandable
EXM series expansion modules
See Section 28, page 3.
Maximum combination
23
MAX
3
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
23-12 page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-36 page 23-42
Metering instruments and current transformers
Energy meters
MID
Three phase with neutral, Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
non expandable, per The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
pkg for billing purposes between electricity suppliers and
MID certified n° [kg] consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
directly or CT connected three-phase installations.
MID Digital meter for three phase with neutral.
DME D300 T2 MID 63A direct connection, 4U 1 0.360
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared
beam.
2 programmable static
outputs, non expandable, Operational characteristics
multi-measurements – Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC (L-N); 400VAC (L-L)
– Voltage range: 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L)
50Hz
– Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2
– Connection by CT /5A for DME D320 T2
– Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
(EN 50470-3)
– Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
– LCD multifunction meter
DME D300 T2 MID – Metrological LED with pulse emission for
consumption indication
– Clearable partial energy measurements
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt – 1 programmable digital input
neutral, expandable, per – 2 programmable static outputs
pkg – Optic interface for EXM series expansion modules
MID certified n° [kg] with DME D310 T2 MID compatible with
software
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral.
MID DME D310 T2 MID Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332
– Modular housing 4 module
– Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
secondary, 2 programmable – EN protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at
static outputs, 4U, terminals.
multi-measurements ,
expandable supervision and energy management software
See Section 27.
MAX
3
23
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-36 page 23-42 23-13
Metering instruments and current transformers
Energy meters
MID – With UTF certificates
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
neutral, MID certified per The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
pkg for billing purposes between electricity suppliers and
n° [kg] consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
directly or CT connected three-phase installations.
Digital meter for three phase with neutral, complete with Expandable with up to 3 EXM series expansion modules
UTF certificates for installations in Italy. interfaced by infrared beam.
DME D300 F MID certified type, 63A 1 0.360 MID is the Measuring Instruments Directive of the
direct connection, 4U, European Union; instruments must be certified
2 programmable static accordingly whenever used for monetary transactions in
outputs, non expandable, this territory.
multi-measurements, The UTF certificate is required for revenue tax
complete with UTF certificate purposes by Italian authorities when equipment is part
Starter kits with digital MID certified meter 4U, expandable of generating electricity installations (e.g. solar, wind)
for three phase with or without neutral and 3 current and there is electricity exchange with the power grid.
transformers, 0.5S class, all with UTF certificates for
installations in Italy. Operational characteristics
DME D300 F DME D300 F and DME D310 T2 MID of starter kits
DME D310 F060 Composed of one 1 2.100 – Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC (L-N); 400VAC (L-L)
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – Voltage range: 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L)
transformers DM5T0060 50Hz
DME D310 F080 Composed of one 1 2.200 – Direct connection 63A for DME D300 F
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – Connection by CT /5A, standard supplied, for
Starter kits transformers DM5T0080 DME D320 T2 MID
DME D310 F100 Composed of one 1 1.900 – Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
DMED310T2MID and n°3 (EN 50470-3)
transformers DM5T0100 – Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
DME D310 F150 Composed of one 1 1.900 – LCD multifunction meter
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – Metrological LED with pulse emission for
transformers DM5T0150 consumption indication
DME D310 F200 Composed of one 1 1.900 – Clearable partial energy measurements
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – 1 programmable digital input
transformers DM5T0200 – 2 programmable static outputs
DME D310 F250 Composed of one 1 1.900 – Optic interface for EXM series expansion modules
DMED310T2MID and n°3 with DME D310 T2 MID compatible with
transformers DM5T0250 software
– Modular housing 4 module
DME D310 F300 Composed of one 1 1.900 – Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – EN protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at terminals.
transformers DM5T0300
NOTE: Other starter kits are available with 3 CTs up to 1600A. Multi-measurements
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – Total and partial active energy
front cover. – Total and partial reactive energy
– Voltage
– Current
DME D310 F... – Active and reactive power
Order code Description – Power Factor
– Frequency
– Total and partial hour counter
DME D310 F EXPANSION MODULES. – Average active power (calculation on every last
Inputs and outputs. 15 minutes)
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated – Maximum demand.
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs DM5T CURRENT TRANSFORMERS of starter kits
rated 5A 250VAC – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
Communication ports. – Secondary output current: 5A
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – Class 0.5S burden
– Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface – Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40-60Ipn for
EXM10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface 1 second
– Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5Ith for 1 second
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 and 2 relay outputs rated – Insulation (dry type): class E
5A 250VAC – For Ø28mm/1.1” cable
– For 21.5x21.5mm/0.85x0.85”, 26x26mm/1.02x1.02”,
EXM 10 10 Maximum combination 31.5x31.5mm/1.24x1.24” busbars
– Screw fixing terminals
– Standard supplied sealable terminal covers and fixing
elements
23 – EN degree of protection: IP30.
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
23-14 page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 and 35 page 23-36 page 23-42
Metering instruments and current transformers
Data concentrators
Operational characteristics
– Nominal supply voltage: 110-240VAC / 110-250VDC
– Voltage range: 85-264VAC / 93.5-300VDC
– Backlight graphic LCD
– 8 inputs, expandable with EXM… modules up to 14
– Built-in RS485 communication port
– Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP communication protocol
– Multifunction display
– Clearable total and partial counters for each channel
DME KIT CD PV1100 – Programmable general counters
– Calculation of derivative average values
– Mathematical operations among counters
Order code Description – Modular housing, 4 module
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
DME CD AND DME CD PV1 EXPANSION MODULES.
Inputs and outputs. supervision and energy management software
See Section 27.
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs EXM series expansion modules
rated 5A 250VAC See Section 28, page 3.
EXM10 02 4 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay Certifications and compliance
outputs rated 5A 250VAC Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL listed for USA and
Communication ports. Canada (cULus – File E346886), as Electrical Process
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface Control Equipment – Data concentrator for DMECD; pending
for DMECDPV1 and DMEKITCDPV1100.
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface
EXM 10 10
EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay
outputs, rated 5A 250VAC
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup
reserve energy for data logging
Maximum combination
23
MAX
3
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-36 page 23-43 23-15
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital measuring instruments.
Starter kits
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
pages 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-37 page 23-44 23-17
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital measuring instruments
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
23-18 pages 23-30 and 31 page 28-2 page 23-34 page 23-37 page 23-45
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital measuring instruments
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
pages 23-30 and 31 page 28-2 page 23-34 page 23-37 page 23-45 23-19
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital measuring instruments
DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1
– Measurement input: 15-660VAC
– Frequency measurement range: 15-65Hz
– Accuracy: ±1 digit
DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1
– Cosphi measurement error: ±0.5° ±1 digit
– Cosphi measurement in 4 quadrants
– Accuracy: ±1° ±1 digit
DMK 01 R1
– Current loss: OFF/2-100%
– Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
– Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
– Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 03 R1
– Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
– Minimum frequency: OFF/90-99%
– Time delay for min-max frequency :
23 0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 04 R1
– Minimum-maximum cos thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Minimum-maximum PF thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Delay time for max or min threshold :
1-9,000 seconds.
23
Flush-mount LED multimeter Order code Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics
three phase measurements output per The DMK 16 R1 multimeter is available with flush-mount
pkg housing, 96x48mm/3.78x1.9” size.
non expandable n° n° n° [kg] Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
reliable operation even in presence of harmonics.
DMK 16 R1 3 phase voltage 1 1 0.353
values Operational characteristics
3 phase to phase – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC standard;
voltage values 24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415VAC type on request
3 phase current – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
values – True RMS measurements
4 active power values, – Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
phase and total Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
4 reactive power – Active energy accuracy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-21
values, phase and and IEC/EN 62053-23)
DMK 16 R1
total – HIGH and LOW measurement storage
4 apparent power – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
values, phase and – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
total – Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz
3 phase power factor – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.0
values – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
1 frequency value – 1 relay output with 1 changeover (SPDT) contact
1 active energy value – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.9”
in kWh – Terminals: 4mm2
1 reactive energy – IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP20 at terminals.
value in kvarh
1 hour counter PROGRAMMABLE RELAY OUTPUT
3 maximum phase – Voltage
voltage values • Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
3 maximum phase to • Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
phase voltage • Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
values • Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
3 maximum phase • Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
current values – Current
4 minimum and • Protection inhibition max current: OFF/2-100%
maximum active • Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
power values, • Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
phase and total OFF/110-600%
4 minimum and • Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
maximum reactive • Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
power values, – Power factor
phase and total • Maximum power factor: 0.10-1.00
4 minimum and • Minimum power factor: 0.10-1.00
maximum apparent – Time delay for max-min voltage, max-min current or
power values, current loss, phase loss, asymmetry and min-max
phase and total power factor : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
2 minimum and
maximum power Certifications and compliance
factor values Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-
Connection also to single phase.
Multimeters.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
23
Operational characteristics
– Auxiliary supply voltage range:
• 154-288VAC for DMK 20
• 177-264VAC for DMK 21-DMK 22
• 9-32VDC for DMK 25
– Voltage measurement range: 60-830VAC phase-phase
30-480VAC phase-neutral
– Current measurement range: 0.05-6A
– Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz
– Programmable CT ratio: 1.0-2,000
– Voltage accuracy: Class 0.5 ±0.35% f.s. (830V)
– Current accuracy: Class 0.5 ±0.5% f.s. (6A)
– Active energy accuracy: Class 2
– Non-volatile total and partial hour counter with
separate clearing; used as maintenance interval with
alarm display in DMK 20 - DMK 25 only
– HIGH and LOW value functions to read and log
instantaneous voltage, current and power values
– Delayed automatic resetting of default measurements
– Averaging function to slow down repetitive fluctuations
to obtain more stable readouts
– Current connection in ARON configuration by 2 current
transformers (CTs) only
– Single, two, three phase, with or without neutral, and
balanced three-phase connection
– RS485 serial port, compatible with software
– TRMS measurements up to 22° harmonic order
– Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”
– IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP 20 at rear.
DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1
– Measurement input: 15-660VAC
DMK 82 DMK 82 – Frequency measurement range: 50-60Hz ±10%
– Measurement accuracy: ±1 digit
– Accuracy: ±1 digit
DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
– Cosphi measurement error: ±0.5° ±1 digit
– Cosphi measurement in 4 quadrants
– Accuracy: ±1° ±1 digit
DMK 81 R1
– Current loss: OFF/2-100%
– Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
– Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
– Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 83 R1
DMK 84 DMK 84 R1
23 – Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
– Minimum frequency: OFF/90-99%
– Time delay for min-max frequency :
0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 84 R1
– Minimum-maximum cos thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Minimum-maximum PF thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Delay time for max or min threshold :
1-9,000 seconds.
Operational characteristics
– Auxiliary supply voltage range:
85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC
– Voltage measurement range: 20-830VAC phase-phase
10-480VAC phase-neutral
– VT ratio programming: 1.0-5,000
– Current measurement range: 0.02-6A
– Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz
– CT ratio programming: 1.0-2000
– Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. (830V)
Current ±0.35% f.s. (6A)
Frequency and harmonic distortion ±1 digit
– Active energy accuracy: Class 1
– HIGH and LOW value functions to detect and log
instantaneous voltage, current and power values
– Averaging function to slow down repetitive
fluctuations to obtain more stable readouts
– Current connection in ARON configuration via 2
current transformers only
– Single, two, three phase with or without neutral and
balanced three-phase connection via 1 current
transformer only
– Usage with voltage transformers for voltages >830VAC
– True RMS measurements up to 22° harmonic order,
class 1 accuracy
– Power factor and cos measurement
– Voltage and current harmonic analysis per phase up
to 22° harmonic order
– Active energy meters (import-export)
– Reactive energy meters (import-export)
– RS485 serial port, compatible with software
for DMK 62
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 6 module
– IEC degree of protection: IP41 on front; IP 20 on
terminals.
23
23-30
Metering instruments and current transformers
Converter drive, cables, clamp kits and software for measuring instruments
23-31
Metering instruments and current transformers
Current transformers
Operational characteristics
Order code Primary Burden Qty Weight – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
current Class Class per – Secondary output current: 5A
Ipn 0.5S 0.5 pkg – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
/5 [A] [VA] [VA] n° [kg] – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
– IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
For Ø28mm/1.1” cable. 40-60 Ipn for 1 second
For 20x10mm/0.8x0.4“ and 30x10mm/1.2x0.4” busbars. – IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second
DM5T 0060 60 1.5 1.5 1 0.560 – Insulation (dry type): Class E
DM5T 0080 80 2.5 2.5 1 0.580 – Terminals:
• Faston for DM2T and DM3T types
DM5T 0100 100 2.5 3.75 1 0.480 • Screw for DM0T, DM4T and DM5T types
DM5T 0150 150 2.5 3.75 1 0.480 – Sealable terminal covers for DM0T, DM4T and DM5T
23 DM5T 0200 200 2.5 3.75 1 0.460 types
– Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or by screws
DM5T... DM5T 0250 250 2.5 5 1 0.480 (fixing elements standard supplied with the product)
DM5T 0300 300 2.5 5 1 0.480 – IEC degree of protection: IP30
Versions with Italian UTF certificates Consult Customer Service to query about versions with Italian UTF – Ambient conditions
on request. certificates; see contact details on inside front cover. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C
• Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C.
• Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%.
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60044-1.
Dimensions
23-32 page 23-35
Metering instruments and current transformers
Current transformers
DM4TA...
23
Dimensions
page 23-35 23-33
Metering instruments and current transformers
Dimensions [mm (in)]
ENERGY METERS
Mechanical meter DME M100... Digital meter DME D115 T1 - DME D120 T1... Digital meter DME D300 T2... - DME D300 F -
Digital meter DME D100... - DME D110... DME D121 - DME D130 DME D310 F... - DME D310 T2... - DME D320
Data concentrator DME CD - DME CD PV1...
35.8 5 58 (2.28") 5 58 (2.28")
59.9 (2.35") (1.41") (0.20") 43.7 (1.72") 71.6 (2.82") (0.20") 43.7 (1.72")
17.5
(0.69") 43.8 (1.72")
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
98.3 (3.87")
98.3 (3.87")
45 (1.77")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
85 (3.35")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
5
(0.20") Ø4.2 Ø4.2
(0.16") (0.16")
MULTIMETERS
DMG 200 - DMG 210 - DMG 300 Expansion modules EXM...
63 (2.48")
43.8 (1.72") 11
5 42.7 (1.68") (0.43")
71.6 (2.82") (0.20") 35.8 63 (2.48")
(1.41") 43.8 (1.72")
63.5 (2.50")
105.4 (4.15")
63.5 (2.50")
93.4 (3.68")
45 (1.77")
95 (3.74")
90 (3.54")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
36.4
(1.43")
DMG 600 - DMG 610 DMG 700 - DMG 800... - DMG 900... with expansion modules EXP...
65 (2.56") 8.5 26.3 19
96 (3.78") 92 (3.62") 92 (3.62")
55 (2.16") (0.33") 96 (3.78") (1.03") 53.2 (2.09") (0.75")
99.5 (3.92")
64.5 (2.54")
96 (3.78")
92 (3.62")
92 (3.62")
EXP 10... 61.5 (2.42")
EXP 10...
Transducer DMG 900T with expansion modules EXP... DMG 900RD remote display Cutout
115 (4.53")
96 (3.78")
20 28.8 24
(0.79") 5 (1.13") 19 92 (3.62")
(0.20") (0.94")
37.3 96 (3.78") (0.75")
43.5 (1.71”)
(1.47”)
101.3 (3.99")
110 (4.33")
90.8 (3.57")
96 (3.78")
64.5 (2.54”)
96.3 (3.79”)
92 (3.62")
INSTRUMENTS
DMK 0... - DMK 1...
9 92 (3.62")
24 (0.35")
96 (3.78") (0.94") 81 (3.19")
45 (1.77")
48 (1.89")
44 (1.73")
23
MULTIMETERS
DMK 2... DMK 3... - DMK 40
14 6 92 (3.62") 12 6 92 (3.62")
(0.55") (0.24") (0.47") (0.24")
96 (3.78") 62 (2.44") 96 (3.78") 82 (3.23")
96 (3.78")
90 (3.54")
92 (3.62")
92 (3.62")
96 (3.78")
90 (3.54")
23-34
Metering instruments and current transformers
Dimensions [mm (in)]
INSTRUMENTS
DMK 7... - DMK 8... Multimetri DMK 5... - DMK 6...
5 58.1 (2.29")
53.5 (2.11") (0.20") 43.8 (1.72") 60 (2.36")
105 (4.13") 55 (2.16")
36
105.4 (4.15")
63.5 (2.50")
99 (3.90")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
45 (1.77")
95 (3.74")
90 (3.54")
1
Ø4.2
(0.16")
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Solid core DM0T... DM2T... DM3T...
(0.37")
(0.37")
9.5
9.5
32 52 (2.05") 46.5 (1.83") 62.5 (2.46")
(1.26”) 71 (2.79")
(0.49")
12.5
65.5 (2.58")
66 (2.60”)
56.5 (2.22")
81.5 (3.19")
3
72.5 (2.85")
Ø2 0")
40 (1.57")
2
Ø2 7”) (0.
9
(1.10")
(0.
8 Ø30 ")
(0.59")
28
8
(0.39")
15 (1.1
(1.44")
10
36.5
20 (0.79")
10 (0.39")
20 27.5
44 (1.73”) 30 (1.08")
(1.18”) 25 (0.79")
(0.79") 25 44.5 (1.75")
30 (0.98")
(1.18") 30
DM4T... (1.18")
104 (4.09") 53 (2.08") 40 (1.57")
DM5T...
60 (2.36”)
45 (1.77”)
Ø8 8")
(3.
(0.43”)
155 (6.10")
6
3
51 (2.01")
61 (2.40")
71 (2.79")
81 (3.19")
11
(1.22")
31
98.5 (3.88”)
(0.85”) Ø2
(1.24”)
(1.02”)
21.5
31.5
(1 8
26
.10
”)
74 (2.91")
(0.65”)
16.5
31.5 40
(1.24”) (1.18”)
51 (2.01") 74.5 (2.93”)
101 (3.98")
121 (4.76")
140 (5.51")
S2 P2 S2 P2 S2 P2
144 (5.67")
144 (5.67")
80 (3.15")
80 (3.15")
184 (7.24")
120 (4.72")
(1.26")
(1.26")
32
P2
32
P2
52 (2.05") 32 80 (3.15") 32
(1.26") (1.26")
(1.26")
P2
DM4TA... 32
184 (7.24") 68 (2.68") 80 (3.15")
(1.26")
109 (4.29")
(1.26")
47 (1.85")
P2
32
S2
23
175 (6.89")
245 (9.64")
160 (6.30")
(1.50")
(1.50")
38
38
32
80 (3.15") (1.26")
120 (4.72") 52 (2.05")
23-35
Metering instruments and current transformers
Wiring diagrams
ENERGY METERS
Mechanical DME M100 DME M100 T1
L L
230VAC 230VAC
N N
L N L N
5
640 pulses/kWh
METER METER Vce max: 35V
Imax: 20mA
6
L N L N
LOAD LOAD
Digital DME D100 T1... - DME D110 T1... DME D115 T1 - DME D120 T1... - DME D130 DME D121
N N N N
N O1+ O1- N N O1+ O1- N A B
Static Static RS485
DME D300 T2... - DME D300 F DME D310 T2... - DME D310 F...
LINE L1
380-415V (L-L) 380-415V (L-L) L2
220-240V (L-N) 220-240V (L-N) L3
Tariff input N
100...240VAC
V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
L1 L2 L3 N I3
I1
I2
T1 T2
METER
Static
Static
O1 O2
+ – + – T1 T2 O1+ O1- O2+ O2-
L1 L2 L3 Pulse output
Pulse output 30VDC 50mA
LOAD 30VDC 50mA
DME D320
Single phase Two phase Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
O CT2 O CT2 O
N A A A
CT3
D N D D
N
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT
T1
T2
A
B
Aux Tariff
Supply Input RS485
2 x 4 groups
Insulated inputs
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
I1.1
I1.2
I2.1
I2.2
I3.1
I3.2
I4.1
I4.2
23-36
Metering instruments and current transformers
Wiring diagrams
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT
Three phase with or without neutral Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 CT1
L L
CT2 O CT2 O
CT3 A CT3 A
D D
N N
12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❷
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...440VAC 100...440VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I4
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT
Three phase without neutral in ARON connection Three phase without neutral in ARON connection
CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
CT2 O CT2 O O
A A CT3 A
D D D
23
CT1
L
Two phase with neutral. Measurement of Three phase with neutral. Measurement of
O
A
neutral current and neutral-earth voltage neutral current and neutral-earth voltage
CT3
D
CT1 CT1
L L
12-24-48VDC ❶ CT2 O CT2 O
110...250VDC A A
CT4 CT3
100...440VAC N D D
CT4
12-24-48VDC ❷ N
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
12-24-48VDC ❷
110...250VDC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 100...440VAC
I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
For DMG 800 D048 only. CURRENT CURRENT
23-37
Metering instruments and current transformers
Wiring diagrams
INSTRUMENTS DMK 02
DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1 DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1 Voltmeter Ammeter
L L L L L L
L O O O
L O L/N A L/N A L/N A
A D D D
L/N
D
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 00 R1 only For DMK 01 R1 only
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 03 R1 only For DMK 04 R1 only For DMK 04 R1 only
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 10 R1 only For DMK 11 R1 only For DMK 15 R1 only For DMK 16 R1 only
A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 A1 A2
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 80 R1 only For DMK 81 R1 only
L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 COM L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 COM
A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 13
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 70 R1 only For DMK 71 R1 only For DMK 75 R1 only
23-38
Metering instruments and current transformers
Wiring diagrams
MULTIMETERS DMK2...
Single phase Two phase Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 L CT1 CT1
L O L1 L
CT2 L1
A O CT2 L
N L2
D A L2 O
N D CT3
L3 A
D
N
DMK 2... 208...240VAC DMK 2... 208...240VAC
DMK 25 12...24VDC DMK 25 12...24VDC DMK 2... 208...240VAC
DMK 25 12...24VDC
L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C
L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C
L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
24...48VDC ❶ 24...48VDC ❶
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
+ – GND L1 L2 L3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 + – GND L1 L2 L3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE For DMK 32 D048 only.
CURRENT CURRENT
DMK 3... - DMK 40 DMK 3... - DMK 40
DMK5...
Single phase Two phase Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 CT1 CT1
L1 L1 L1
L CT2 L CT2 L
O L2 O L2 O
CT3
A A L3 A
D D D
N N N
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
--
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 --
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 --
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
A1 A2 I1 I2 I3 A1 A2 I1 I2 I3 A1 A2 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
--
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 -
-- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
A1 A2 I1 I2 I3 A1 A2 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
23-39
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
Single-phase energy meters
TYPE DME M100... DME D100 T1 DME D100 T1 A120 DME D100 T1 MID DME D110 T1 DME D110 T1 A120
Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Monofase Monofase
mechanical digital digital MID certified digital digital
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Ue 230VAC 220...240VAC 110...120VAC 230VAC 220...240VAC 110...120VAC
Operating voltage range 184...264VAC 187...264VAC 93...132VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC 93...132VAC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 60Hz 50Hz 50/60Hz 60Hz
Maximum power consumption <7VA 7VA
Maximum power dissipation − 0.45W
CURRENT
IEC maximum current Imax 32A 40A
IEC minimum current Imin − 0.25A
IEC rated current Iref/Ib 5A 5A
IEC start current Ist 20mA 20mA
Transition current Itr − 0.5A
ACCURACY
Active energy (per IEC/EN 62053-21) Class 1 Class 1 Class B (per EN 50470-3) Class 1
OUTPUTS
LED rate 640 flashes/kWh 1000 flashes/kWh
Pulse rate 640 pulses/kWh 1000 pulses/kWh
(Vce=35VImax=20mA)
DME M...T1 only
Pulse duration − 30ms
STATIC OUTPUTS
Pulse rate − 10 pulses/kWh 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh
programmable
Pulse duration − 100ms
External voltage − 10...30VDC
Maximum current − 50mA
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui − 250VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp − 6kV
IEC power frequency withstand voltage − 4kV
SUPPLY/MEASUREMENT CONNECTION CIRCUIT
Type of terminals Fixed Fixed
Conductor section min - max 2.5-6mm2 1.5-10mm2 (16-6 AWG)
23-40
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
Single-phase energy meters
DME D110 T1 MID DME D115 T1 DME D120 T1 DME D120 T1 A120 DME D120 T1 MID DME D121 DME D130
Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase
MID certified digital digital RS485 MID certified RS485 expandable
23-41
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
Three-phase energy meters
TYPE DME D300 T2 DME D300 T2 MID / F DME D310 T2 DME D310 T2 MID / F DME D320
3 phase with neutral 3 phase with neutral 3 phase c/w and 3 phase c/w and 3 phase c/w and
MID certified w/o neutral w/o neutral MID certified w/o neutral
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Ue 220-240VAC phase-neutral 230VAC phase-neutral 220-240VAC phase-neutral 230VAC phase-neutral 100-240VAC
380-415VAC phase-phase 400VAC phase-phase 380-415VAC phase-phase 400VAC phase-phase 110-250VDC
Voltage range 187-264VAC phase-neutral 85-264VAC
323-456VAC phase-phase 93.5-300VDC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz 50Hz 50/60Hz 50Hz 45...66Hz
Maximum power consumption 20VA 2.1VA 4.5VA
Maximum power dissipation 1.35W 0.8W 1.7W
CURRENT
IEC maximum current Imax 63A 5A 5A
IEC minimum current Imin 0.5A 0.05A 0.01A
IEC rated current Iref/Ib 10A 5A ––
IEC start current Ist 40mA 0.01A ––
IEC transition current It 1A 0.25A ––
ACCURACY
Active energy (per IEC/EN 62053-21) Class 1 Class B (EN50470-3) Class 1 Class B (EN50470-3) Class 1
TARIFF CIRCUIT INPUT
Rated voltage Uc 100-240VAC 100-240VAC ––
Voltage range 85-264VAC 85-264VAC ––
Frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz ––
Maximum power consumption 0.25VA 0.25VA ––
Maximum power dissipation 0.18W 0.18W ––
OUTPUTS
LED rate 1000 flashes/kWh 10000 flashes/kWh ––
Pulse rate 1000 pulses/kWh 10000 pulses/kWh ––
Pulse duration 30ms 30ms ––
STATIC OUTPUTS
Pulse rate Programmable 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh Programmable 0.1-1-10-100 pulses/kWh ––
Pulse duration 100ms for 1-10-100 pulse rates; 100ms ––
60ms for 1000 pulse rate
External voltage 10-30VDC 10-30VDC ––
Maximum current 50mA ––
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 250VAC 250VAC 690VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV 6kV 9.5kV
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 4kV 4kV 5.2kV
SUPPLY/MEASURMENT CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed Fixed
Conductor section min-max 2.5-16mm2 (16-6 AWG) 0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG) for supply/voltage measurement;
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for current measurement
Maximum tightening torque 2Nm (14lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin)
TARIFF CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed Fixed
Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG) 0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
Maximum tightening torque 0.49Nm (4.4lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin)
PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed Fixed ––
Conductor section min-max 0.2-1.3mm2 (24-16AWG) 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG) ––
Maximum tightening torque 0.15Nm (1.7lbin) 0.44Nm (4lbin) ––
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
23 Operating temperature -25...+55°C -25...+55°C -20...+60°C
Storage temperature -25...+70°C -25...+70°C -30...+80°C
Relative humidity <80% non condensing <80% non condensing <90%
Maximum pollution degree 2 2 2
Overvoltage capacity III III III
Mechanical environment –– Class M1 –– Class M1 ––
Magnetic environment –– Class E1 –– Class E1 ––
HOUSING
Material Polyamide Polyamide
23-42
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
Data concentrator
23-43
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
LCD multimeters and power analyzers
23
23-44
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
LCD multimeters and power analyzers
DMG 600 DMG 610 DMG 700 DMG 800 DMG 900 DMG 900 T
100-400VAC 100-440VAC /
120-250VDC 110-250VDC - (12-48VDC)
100-400VAC 90-484VAC /
120-250VDC 93.5-300VDC - (9-70VDC)
45-65Hz 45-66Hz
9.5VA 3.9VA
3.5W 3.4W
50ms 50ms
5A 5A 1A/5A 1A/5A
0.01-6A 0.01-6A 0.01-1.2A / 0.01-6A 0.002-1.2A / 0,01-10A
True RMS True RMS
– +20% Ie by external CT with 5A secondary
– 50A for 1s
600VAC 690VAC
9.5kV 9.5kV
5.2kV 5.2kV
Removable / Plug-in
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
Fixed Fixed
0.2-1,5mm2 (24-12 AWG) 0.5-4mm2 (26-10 AWG); 0.2-1.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for RS485
0.8Nm (7lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin)
-20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
<90%
2
III
III
Polyamide
23
23-45
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
Measuring instruments
TYPE DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1 DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1 DMK 02 DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1 DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1
DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1 DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1 DMK 82 DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1 DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us 24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Us
Rated frequency 50-60Hz ±10%
Maximum power consumption 3.3VA (DMK...) 3.3VA 3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1) 3.6VA (DMK... R1)
Maximum power dissipation 1.5W (DMK...) 1.5W 1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1) 1.8W (DMK... R1)
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Rated voltage Ue 600VAC –– 600VAC –– 600VAC
Operating voltage range 15-660VAC –– 15-660VAC –– ––
Operating voltage range, phase-phase –– –– –– –– 15-660VAC (DMK...)
25-660VAC (DMK... R1)
Rated frequency 50-60Hz ±10% –– 50-60Hz ±10% –– 50-60Hz ±10%
Method of measuring TRMS –– TRMS –– TRMS
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie –– 5A –– 5A
Measuring range –– 0.05-5.75A –– 0.05-5.75A (DMK...)
0.1-5.75A (DMK... R1)
Rated frequency –– 50-60Hz ±10% –– 50-60Hz ±10%
Type of input –– Shunts connected by –– Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT 5A max external low voltage CT
5A max
Type of measuring –– TRMS –– TRMS
Overload capacity –– +20% Ie –– +20% Ie
FREQUENCY INPUTS
Measuring range and type –– –– –– 15-65Hz ±10% TRMS ––
Voltage range –– –– –– 15-660VAC ––
Input rated voltage –– –– –– 600VAC ––
MEASURING ACCURACY
Measurement conditions cos –– –– –– –– ± 1° ±1 digit
(Temperature +23°C ±1°C) voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit –– ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit –– ––
(Relative humidity
45 ±15% R.H.) current –– ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit –– ––
frequency –– –– –– ±1 digit ––
ADDITIONAL ERRORS
Relative humidity ±1 digit 60-90% R.H..
Temperature ±1 digit -20...+60°C
RELAY OUTPUT FOR DMK... R1 TYPES ONLY
Number and tyoe of contact 1 changeover (SPDT)
Rated voltage 250VAC
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 8A 250VAC in AC1 / B300
designation
Electrical life 105
Mechanical life 30x106
INSULATION
Rated insulation voltage Ui 600VAC 415VAC 600VAC
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed (DMK 8...);
Removable (DMK 0...)
Maximum tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin) for DMK 0... / 0.5Nm (4.5lbin for DMK 8...)
23 Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 0...
0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 8...
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+60°C
Storage temperature -30...+80°C
HOUSING
Material Thermoplastic (DMK 0...) / Polyamide (DMK 8...)
On specific request.
23-46
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
Measuring instruments
23-47
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
Multimeters
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 690V
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Removable
Maximum tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+60°C
Storage temperature -30...+80°C
Relative humidity <90%
MAximum pollution degree 2
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing black plastic
23 For DMK 32D 048 only.
23-48
Metering instruments and current transformers
Technical characteristics
Multimeters
DMK 30 - DMK 31 - DMK 32 DMK 40 DMK 50 - DMK 51 - DMK 52 DMK 60 - DMK 61 - DMK 62
0.25% f.s. (830V) Class 0.5 ±0.35% f.s. (830V) 0.25% f.s. (830V)
0.35% f.s. (6A) Class 0.5 ±0.5% f.s. (6A) 0.35% f.s. (6A)
Class 1 Class 2 Class 1
±1 digit –– ±1 digit
±1 digit –– ±1 digit
5A - 250VAC in AC1 for DMK 31 - DMK 32 — — 5A - 250VAC in AC1 for DMK 61 - DMK 62
55mA - 60VAC/DC in AC1 — — 55mA - 60VAC/DC in AC1
for DMK 31 - DMK 32 for DMK 61 - DMK 62
690V
Removable Fixed
0.5Nm (4.5lbin) 0.45Nm (4lbin)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG) 0.2-1.5mm2 (24-16 AWG)
-20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
<90%
2
23-49
Page 24-6 Page 24-7
Page 24-8
Page 24-11
THYRISTOR MODULES
• 30, 50, 100kvar step units
• Suitable for dynamic power factor
correction
• Current flow zero-crossing controlled
connection-disconnection
• Over-temperature protection
• Over-current protection at capacitor
switching.
AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CONTROLLERS
AND THYRISTOR MODULES 24
SEC. - PAGE
Reactive current controller
DCRM series ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 6
Automatic power factor controllers
DCRL series ...................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 7
DCRG series ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 8
Software and accessories ................................................................................................................................................ 24 - 8
Communication devices .................................................................................................................................................. 24 - 10
Thyristors modules......................................................................................................... 24 - 11
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 24 - 12
Wiring schemes ............................................................................................................ 24 - 13
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 24 - 16
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules
DCRL DCRG
Number of steps DCRL 3: 3 (5 with EXP10 06) 8
DCRL 5: 5 (7 with EXP10 06) (10, 12, 14, 16 with EXP...)
ON FRONT / HOUSING
Display Backlight icon LCD Backlight graphic 128x80 pixel LCD
Languages 6 10
Scrolling text only of alarm codes Italian, English, Spanish, French,
in Italian, English, Spanish, French, German, Czech, Polish, Russian,
German, Portuguese Portuguese and 1 customisable
Dimensions 96x96mm / 3.8x3.8” 144x44mm / 5.7x5.7”
IEC degree of protection IP54 IP54
Expandable with EXP… module
CONTROL/FUNCTIONS
Automatic recognition of current flow direction
4-quadrant operation
Master-slave architecture
Independent auxiliary supply input
Three-phase voltage control
Current input 1 (by CT, /5A or 1A) 3 (by CTs, 5A or 1A)
Dynamic (FAST) power factor correction usage (with EXP10 01 8 steps)
Medium-voltage usage
Independent power factor correction per phase
Phase-neutral connection in three-phase systems
Programmable input as function or (with EXP10 04 module)
external temperature sensor
USB communication interface (with EXP10 10 module) (with EXP10 10 module)
RS232 communication interface (with EXP10 11 module) (with EXP10 11 module)
Opto-isolated RS485 communication interface (with EXP10 12 module) (with EXP10 12 module)
Ethernet communication interface with web server function (with EXP10 13 module)
Optical USB communication port on front (with CX 01 dongle) (with CX 01 dongle)
Optical Wi-Fi communication port on front (with CX 02 dongle) (with CX 02 dongle)
Fast setting of current transformer
Setup software with automatic panel test available
Remote control software available
Calendar-clock (RTC) with backup reserve energy
Event logging: Alarms, setup changes, etc.
MEASUREMENTS
Rated measurement voltage 600VAC max 600VAC max
Measurement voltage range 50-720VAC 50-720VAC
Instantaneous cos (power factor displacement)
Instantaneous and average weekly power factor values
Voltage and current
Reactve power to reach set-point and total values
Capacitor overload
Electric panel temperature
Maximum voltage and current value
Maximum capacitor overload value
Maximum panel temperature value
Maximum capaitor temperature value (with EXP10 04 module)
Active and apparent power value
Current and voltage harmonic analysis up to 15° order up to 31° order
24 Var-measured value per step
Number of switching per step
24-2
Automatic power factor controllers and thryristor modules
DCRL DCRG
PROTECTION
Voltage too high and too low
Current too high and too low
Over compensation (all capacitors disconnected and cos
value higher than set-point)
Under compensation (all capacitors connected and cos
value lower than set-point)
Capacitor overload
Capacitor overload on all 3 phases
Over temperature
Mains micro-breakings
Capacitor bank failure
Over maximum harmonic distortion level limit
Programmable alarm property
(enable, trip delay, relay energising, etc.)
L1
L2
L3
Current transformers
Automatic
power factor
controllers
Fuse holders
Fuse
holders
Contactors
Switch
disconnectors
24
24-3
Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules
DCRG series
CUSTOMISING OPTION
There is a customising slot available on the panel front
to show controller brand name, logo, trademark, part
number, brief indication or wording, etc.
44mm
9mm
MAX
4
Basic controller functionality can be easily extended using the EXP series
Trim frame profile and reduced The fixing system with metal expansion modules:
total depth simplify installation of screws guarantees excellent - Relay outputs to increase the number of steps
the controller also in very compact adhesion over time. - Opto-isolated static outputs also for synamic correction
electric panels. - Capacitor protection
- Digital and analog inputs and outputs
- Opto-isolated RS232 interface
44 HIGH PROTECTION DEGREE - Opto-isolated RS485 interface
The controller front and the rear - Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with web server function
seal have been designed to warrant - Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface
an IP54 protection degree.
24 - GPRS/GSM modem.
137
144
64.5
73 9
EXP 10...
24-4
Automatic power factor controllers and thryristor modules
DCRG series
STREAMLINE DESIGN
The DCRG controller has an ergonomic design and, at the same time,
particular care has been given to details.
MASTER-SLAVE FUNCTION WEB SERVER FUNCTION GSM/GPRS MODEM SUITABLE FOR MEDIUM-VOLTAGE
The DCRG controller can control the By fitting the EXP10 15 expansion SYSTEMS
outputs of other analog controllers in module, the controller is The controllers can be installed in
addition to its own steps. In this way, automatically equipped and medium-voltage systems thanks to
it offers a master-slave architecture. configures a GSM/GPRS modem. its configuration for voltage
Up to 8 slaves can be controlled to This simplifies installation and transformer ratio, thereby obtaining
obtain a system with a total of 32 wiring. measurements with regards to the
steps. Once a data-enabled SIM card is transformer primary value both for
inserted, alarm or event SMS, the correction adjustment and the
By installing the Ethernet expansion email messages and latest logged display readouts.
module EXP10 13, the main data can be transmitted by the
measured values of the controller controller to FTP servers.
can be viewed by most common SUITABLE FOR DYNAMIC (FAST)
web-client compatibles, on the POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
market, using Java platform and With the EXP10 01 static output
with no need to install any 5A AND 1A BOTH ON THE SAME expansion module installed, the
additional PC software. CONTROLLER controller can be used in dynamic
By configuring an apposite power factor correction systems
Master parameter, the controller can be where the reactive load quickly
enabled for use with either a 5A or varies over time.
CAPACITOR PROTECTION 1A secondary current transformer. Also taking advantage of the built-in
By adding the apposite EXP10 16 controller relay outputs, a mixed
expansion module, the DCRG system of traditional relay and
controller can be equipped with dynamic type of correction steps
additional capacitor protection GRAPHS AND TEXT IN 10 can be obtained.
functions. The module can measure LANGUAGES
the harmonic current values and the
capacitor temperature on-site along
with detecting any phase
Slave 1 malfunction.
Slave 8
24-5
Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules
Reactive current controller
DCRM series Order code Steps Auxiliary supply Qty Wt General characteristics
voltage per DCRM2 permits to control the reactive current of a plant,
pkg eliminating it from the total current drawn from the
n° [V] n° [kg] mains and correcting the cos-phi of the load to the best
possible value.
Single and three-phase low-voltage systems. It can control the connection of two capacitor banks
DCRM 2 2 380-415VAC 1 0.166 maximum. Each one of the two banks can be individually
enabled and its power can be set through a dedicated
potentiometer.
It is also possible to adjust the time for connection and
disconnection of the capacitor banks, thereby modifying
the reaction speed of the system.
The controller can be used both in single-phase and
three-phase wiring.
ADJUSTMENTS
“C/K Step 1” C/K ratio threshold for step 1
OFF/0.15-2
“C/K Step 2” C/K ratio threshold for step 2
OFF/0.15-2
“Connection delay” Step connection delay 1-60s
“Disconnection delay” Step disconnection delay
1-60s
“System configuration” Wiring selection for single or
three-phase system 1PH-3PH.
INDICATIONS
– 1 green LED for power on and inhibition time
– 2 red LEDs for step connection.
24
Operational characteristics
– Voltage circuit:
• Auxiliary supply: 100-440VAC
• Frequency: 50/60Hz ±10%
– Voltage input:
• Rated voltage: 600VAC L-L (346VAC L-N)
• Frequency range: 45-65Hz
– Current input:
MAX • Single phase connection
• Rated current: 1A or 5A configurable
1
– Measurement and control
• Power factor adjustment: 0.5 ind to 0.5 cap
• Voltage measurement range: 50-720VAC L-L;
50-415VAC L-N
Backlight icon LDC screen • Current measurement range: 0.025-1.2A for 1A full
scale; 0.025-6A for 5A full scale
• Type of voltage and current measurement: TRMS
Inductive / Automatic Cooling fan – Relay outputs (steps)
Capacitive mode status • DCRL3: 3 outputs
• DCRL5: 5 outputs
• Output arrangement: Normally Open (NO / SPST)
Manual mode Output status contact; except the last being a changeover (SPDT)
• Rated capacity: 5A 250VAC (UL/CSA B300 general
use)
Step status – Flush-mount housing: 96x96mm/3.8x3.8”
Main display – IEC degree of protection: IP54 on front; IP20 at
Active alarm terminals.
Bar graph conditions
Certifications and compliance:
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listing for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Power factor controllers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n°14.
Secondary display Alphanumeric display Contactors for power factor correction
See Section 2, page 14.
supervision software
24
See Section 27.
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
pages 24-9 and 10 page 28-2 page 24-12 page 24-13 page 24-16 24-7
Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules
Automatic power factor controllers